Home

CP1E CPU Unit Software User`s Manual

Contents

1. Instruction Mnemonic Symbol Operand Function SHIFT REGIS SFT Data Operates a shift register TER input SFT 010 MeS Shift St tet St 2 i input y ARNARARARRIUUDUML ANIUUUUUGUDUUUDUA JUUUUUUUUUUUUGUUM Reset E dae E a input Los Status of data input for each St Starting word shift input E End word REVERSIBLE SFTR Creates a shift register that shifts data to either the right or the left SHIFT REGIS SFTR 084 orien TER E n E B 3s A e St d Data input gC we eee eret En E RE C st t mires C Control word pei Pay EN y Lf T St Starting word E End word C Control Word siae 12 Shift direction 1 ON Left 0 OFF Right Data input Shift input Reset WORD SHIFT WSFT Shifts data between St and E in word units WSFT 016 S Source word St Starting word E End word ARITHMETIC ASL Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the left SHIFT LEFT ASL 025 Ka ooch 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Wd Word 0 CY y 1 0 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 ARITHMETIC ASR Shifts the contents of Wd one bit to the right SHIFT RIGHT ASR 026 1 0 0 1 0 0 01 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Wd Word 0 M CY o 1 o o 1 o o o 1 o o o 1 o o o 1 ROTATE LEFT ROL Shifts all Wd bits one
2. A N CP1E N NA SQ type CPU Unit CP1E N NADIDDT D SmartStep A series Servo Drive R7D APLILI RU Si Power supply terminal R88A CPUO0HS DC24V power supply i o DC24V power supply i 2 7 i lt Output terminal block 1 6kQ Oo Pulse output CIO 100 00 LH lt x gt PULS Instruction pulse mode Q Pulse 1 6kQ T f PULS feed pulse and output 0 Direction output CIO 100 02 ANY x SIGN forward reverse signal SIGN S i v g 1 6k2 T SOK ECRST Lj Error counter reset output 0 CIO 100 04 ANN t 6 ECRST z V NEIDS 1 type only i V NODS 1 type only I4 z COM CIO 100 s 1 cU Move stocker CIO 100 01 E PCB storage enabled CIO 100 03 1 INP hi Input terminal block O ZCOM 2 Pulse 0 origin input signal CIO 0 06 i Z COM 1 24VIN BY 24 VDC Seno Drive 1 a T RUNinput X1 Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal CIO 0 10 O O O OO O RUN S 0 0 RESET EJ Servo Drive alarm reset input e Origin search start switch CIO 0 00 1 OGND Emergency stop switch CIO 0 01 r ALMCOM PCB storage completed CIO 0 03 ajke ALM Stocker movement completed CIO 0 04 24 VDC c i amp B4 BKIR Hood FG Only NLILIS 1 type CPU Units can wire V and V Do not wire them in NLILI type CPU Units Operatio
3. Input bits CIO m Clo m Cannot be used Outputbits SIO i CIO n 1 8 Two input words 24 bits and two output words 16 bits are allocated to a 40 point I O Unit g 5 is z o Allocation Example Expansion Input Units and Expansion Output Units If Expansion Input Units or Expansion Output Units are connected the input or output word not used g by an Expansion I O Unit is allocated to the next Unit that requires it F 9 1st Unit 2nd Unit 3rd Unit 2 M i 8 point Expansion 16 point Expansion 20 point Expansion e CPU Unit with 30 I O Points Input Unit Output Unit VO Unit i CIO 0 00 to CIO 0 11 Input bit nput bits 100 to CIO 1 05 CIO 2 00 to CIO 2 07 l CIO 3 00 to CIO 3 11 a 18 inputs Pp Inputs 12 inputs ri 8 inputs 16 outputs 12 outputs No outputs H m 8 outputs Output bits CIO 100 00 to CIO 100 07 CIO 102 00 to CIO 102 07 d CIO 101 00 to CIO 101 03 CIO 103 00 to CIO 103 07 CO 104 0010 CIO 104 07 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 ien CPU Unit with 30 I O Points put aiig CIO 2 Cannot pe used 8 point Expansion Input Unit CIO 3 20 point Expansion I O Unit f CIO 100 CPU Unit with CIO 101 30 I O Points outputtits cio 102 P 16 point Expansion Output Unit CIO 103 aS V ClO 104 20 point Expansion VO Unit suun O uoIsuedxy pue s
4. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function MOVE BIT MOVB Transfers the specified bit MOVB 082 a Se YIN D s LT S Source word or data C Control word D Destination word m p C Control Word 15 87 0 C m n Lsource bit 00 to OF 0 to 15 decimal Destination bit 00 to OF 0 to 15 decimal MOVE DIGIT MOVD Transfers the specified digit or digits Each digit is made up of 4 MOVD 083 bits 5 1211 87 43 0 p X3 S Source word or data S C Control word M D Destination word I D C Control Word 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 Cc i 0 lj n i m J Eu digit in S m 0 to 3 Number of digits n 0 to 3 0 1 digit First digit in D 2 0 to 3 obs 3 4 digits Always 0 MULTIPLE BIT XFRB Transfers the specified number of consecutive bits TRANSFER XFRB 062 Ram ouensc cum 15 4 H e mi A s cal C Control word S 1st source word D 1st destination word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 bE C Control Word L First bit in S 0 to F 0 to 15 First bit in D m 0 to F 0 to 15 Number of bits n 00 to FF 0 to 255 A 13 suono ungJ uon nusul T Y SUOI ONIISU jueulaAOJN eje 9 L Y Appendices
5. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function BLOCK XFER Transfers the specified number of consecutive words TRANSFER XFER 070 D S N 1 D N 1 N Number of words S 1st source word N Number of Words D 1st destination word The possible range for N is 0000 to FFFF 0 to 65 535 decimal 15 0 S to S N 1 15 0 D to D N 1 BLOCK SET BSET Copies the same word to a range of consecutive words BSET 071 Source word Destination words S Source word St Starting word E E End word e E DATA XCHG Exchanges the contents of the two specified words EXCHANGE XCHG 073 E1 1st exchange word E2 Second exchange word SINGLE DIST Transfers the source word to a destination word calculated by add WORD DIS DIST 080 ing an offset value to the base address I Fi S Of n 4 a a S Source word m Bs Destination base address Of Offset Ed Bsn ae DATA COL COLL Transfers the source word calculated by adding an offset value to LECT COLL 081 the base address to the destination word A 14 O EHE Bs Source base address Of Offset D Destination word Bs Bs n CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 1 7 Data Shift Instructions Appendices
6. Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function PULSE OUT PLS2 F First Word of Starting Frequenc BUT PLS2 887 9 2 i F P The starting frequency is given in F and F 1 M T F Lower word with starting frequency 0 to 100000 Hz S F 1 Upper word with starting frequency 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex Specify the starting frequency in Hz P Port specifier M Output mode S First word of settings table F First word of starting frequency ACCELERA ACG ACG Outputs pulses to the specified output port at the specified fre TION CON 888 quency using the specified acceleration and deceleration rate TROL O P Acceleration Target frequency sf ee eee ie M Output mode S First word of settings table Pulse output started Pulse output stopped P Port Specifier 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 M Output Mode 15 1211 87 43 0 M L Mode 0 hex Continuous mode 1 hex Independent mode t Direction 0 hex CW 1 hex CCW Pulse output method 1 hex Pulse direction Always 0 hex S First Word of Settings Table 15 0 S Acceleration deceleration rate 1 to 65535 Hz 0001 to FFFF Specify the increase or decrease in the requency per pulse control period 4 ms S41 Lower word with target frequency 0 to 100000 Hz S42 Upper word with target trequency 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex
7. ERePeHjT TELE ES Fy Ex 092 064 Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs Laco 2 064 4 o LJ I IT Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs Two Pt100 Sensor Inputs CP1W CIF1 1 CP1W CIF11 CP1W CIF11 RS 422A 485 RS 422A 485 RS 422A 485 Option Board Option Board Option Board CP1E NOL type CP1W CIF11 CP1W CIF11 CP1W CIF11 1 RDA RDA RDA 1 2 RDB RDB RDB 2 3 SDA Simple PLC link LSDA SDA 3 4 SDB SDB SDB 4 5 FG FG FG 5 CP1E NOOS 1 type Built in RS 485 Port Built in RS 485 Port Built in RS 485 Port 1 A A 1 A 1 gt B OX Br ZO lg 2 3 FG Simple PLC link FG 3 FG 3 e CP1W CIF11RS422 485 Option Board DIP Switch Settings Back E 1 f I CPU Unit connector DIP switch for operation settings 7 Polling Polled Polled EN No SERME Unit Unit No 0 Unit No 1 Description 1 Terminating resistance selection ON OFF ON PLCs at both ends must have ter minating resistance connected 2 2 wire or 4 wire selection ON ON ON 2 wire 3 2 wire or 4 wire selection ON ON ON 2 wire 4 OFF OFF OFF Always OFF 5 RS control selection for RD OFF OFF OFF Control disabled 6 RS control selection for SD ON ON ON Control enabled
8. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SIGNED i Multiplies 4 digit signed hexadecimal data and or constants BINARY MUL TIPLY Md Signed binary x Mr Signed binary Md Multiplicand word R 1 R Signed binary Mr Multiplier word R Result word DOUBLE L Multiplies 8 digit signed hexadecimal data and or constants SIGNED BINARY MUL Signed binary TIPLY Md 1st multiplicand word i i Mr 1st multiplier word R 3 Bae Rel por Sign d binary R 1st result word BCD MULTI B Multiplies 4 digit single word BCD data and or constants PLY Md BCD x Mr BCD Md Multiplicand word RH R BCD Mr Multiplier word R Result word DOUBLE BCD BL Multiplies 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants MULTIPLY Md 1st multiplicand word BCD Mr 1st multiplier word Reg Rag Lp R BCD R 1st result word SIGNED Divides 4 digit single word signed hexadecimal data and or con BINARY 430 stants DIVIDE Dd Dd Signed binary R E Dr Signed binary Dd Dividend word Dr Divisor word R 1 R Signed binary R Resul ee Remainder Quotient DOUBLE L Divides 8 digit double word signed hexadecimal data and or con SIGNED stants BINARY DIVIDE Dasi pd Signed binary Dd 1st dividend word H Dr 1st divisor word R 1st result word R 2 R 1 R Signed binary Remainder Quotient BCD DIVIDE B Divides 4 digit single word BCD data and
9. PLC Setup Origin search set Termi Interrupt input settings on Built in Input Tab High speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built tings on Pulse Page in Input Tab Page Output 0 1 Tab nal Terminal Page Ren number Normal Interrupt Quick Use Use Interrupt Quick Increment Differential p e direc ee Normal input s response 5 phase x4or H Origin search inputs 3 pulse input tion inputs up down CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 increment input phase A or up pulse input input 01 Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 Counter 1 increment input phase B or pulse input down input 02 Normal input 2 Interrupt Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 Counter 0 input 2 response increment input phase A or up direction input 2 input 03 Normal input 3 Interrupt Quick Counter 1 Counter 1 Pulse 0 Origin input 3 response phase B or direction proximity input signal input 3 down input 04 Normal input 4 Interrupt Quick Counter 3 Counter 0 Counter 0 input 4 response increment input Phase Z or reset input input 4 reset input 05 Normal input 5 Interrupt Quick Counter 4 Counter 1 Counter 1 Pulse 1 Origin input 5 response increment input Phase Z or reset input proximity input signal input 5 reset input 06 Normal input 6 Interrupt Quick Counter 5 Pulse 0 Origin input input 6 response increment input signal input 6 07 Normal input 7 Interrupt Quick Pulse 1 Origin input input
10. Words a Bits Setting Serial Option Port D1350 00 to 07 Response Slave address 01 to F7 hex 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1351 00 to 07 Function code 08 to 15 Reserved D1352 00 to 07 Error code 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1353 00 to 15 Number of response bytes 0000 to OSEA hex D1354 to D1399 00 to 15 Response data 92 bytes max 3 If a communications error occurs A641 02 Execution Error Flag will turn ON and the error code will be stored in D1352 14 18 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications DM Area Data DM Fixed Allocation Words for Modbus RTU Easy Master DM Area data in words D1301 to D1305 are set before the execution of the ladder program D1306 and D1307 do not need to be set They are modified by MOV instructions and are used to change start and stop frequency references Serial Option Port or Built in RS 485 Port Command Settin Slave Function Communications Communications data D1303 to D1349 maximum 9 address code data bytes 94 bytes 47 words max 00 00 Data for next reigister Inverter slave e g set 60 0 Hz 0258 address 1 hex hex for register 0002 frequency reference Inverter data write Data for starting register 10 hex e g set 0001 hex for register 0001 RUN command see below Use the 9 bytes from the upper byte of D1303 to the upper byte of D1307 uoun Jagseju
11. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function 32 BIT TO FLTL Converts a 32 bit signed binary value to 32 bit floating point data FLOATING FLTL 453 and places the result in the specified result words RE s as S 1st source word A R 1st result word R 1 R ane data FLOATING F Adds two 32 bit floating point numbers and places the result in the POINT ADD specified result words Au Au dala Babits en Add deren Au 1st augend word AD 1st addend word R 1st result word Result floating point R 1 R data 32 bits FLOATING F Subtracts one 32 bit floating point number from another and POINT places the result in the specified result words SUBTRACT 3 Mil d Mi 1 Mi floating point data 32 bits Subtrahend L s su eating paint Mi 1st Minuend word Su 1st Subtrahend word R 1st result word poi Ra R i M FLOATING E Multiplies two 32 bit floating point numbers and places the result POINT in the specified result words MULTIPLY Multiplicand Md 1 Md floating point data 32 bits Multipli x Mr 1 Mr floating point data v 32 bits Md 1st Multiplicand word Mr 1st Multiplier word R 1st It word ing poi st result wor R41 R Result oating point FLOATING IF Divides one 32 bit floating point number by another and places POINT DIVIDE the result in the specified result words Dividend Dd 1 Dd floating point data 32 bits Divisor gt Dr 1 Dr floating point
12. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function FAILURE FAL Generates or clears user defined non fatal errors Non fatal errors ALARM FAL 006 do not stop PC operation Also generates non fatal errors with the system FAL Error Flag ON N FAL number H ra Execution of CAL Sipebor Bag ON S 1st message word N FAL 006 Error code written to A400 or error 0000 generates a Error code and time code to generate non fatal error written to Error Log Area with FAL Ex ERR Indicator flashes number N UE SEVERE FALS Generates user defined fatal errors FALS 007 FAILURE 097 Fatal errors stop PC operation ALARM Also generates fatal errors with the system r FALS Error Flag ON E Error code written to A400 N FALS number H H FALS Execution of 1 S ist message word EA FALS 007 E DS Ie ER CaS AID or error code to generate generates a goer fataleror 3 ERR Indicator lit with FALS ER number N A 1 24 Other Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SET CARRY STC Sets the Carry Flag CY STC 040 CLEAR CLC Turns OFF the Carry Flag CY CARRY CLC 041 EXTEND WDT Extends the maximum cycle time but only for the cycle in which MAXIMUM WDT 094 this instruction is executed CYCLE TIME T Timer setting CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 51 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononuisu siso
13. CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 gt after Status at Write Name Function Settings Sens flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A295 10 Illegal Access Error This flag and the Access Error Flag ON Illegal access Cleared Cleared When pro A294 Flag AER will be turned ON when an ille occurred gram error A298 gal access error has occurred and the OFE Normal condi occurs A299 PLC Setup has been set to stop opera tion PLC tion an illegal access error This error Setup occurs when a region of memory is Opera accessed illegally CPU Unit opera tion when tion will stop and the ERR ALM indica instruc tor will light when this flag goes ON tion error The following operations are consid has ered illegal access occurred Reading writing the system area Indirect DM BCD error in BCD mode Note The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 11 No END Error Flag ON when there isn t an END instruction ON No END Cleared Cleared A294 in each program within a task OFF Normal condi A298 CPU Unit operation will stop and the tion A299 ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON Note The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 12 Task Error Flag ON when a
14. Address Status Related 5 f after Status at Write Name Function Settings sees flags Words Bits mode startup timing change settings A326 08 High speed Counter 4 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 4 son operation Cleared when operation starts starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter 4 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 4 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow 10 High speed Counter 4 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used Count Direction high speed counter is currently being for high speed incremented or decremented The counter valid counter PV for the current cycle is com during counter pared with the PV in last cycle to deter operation mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing A327 00 High speed Counter 5 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Not Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle sup Condition Met Flag high speed counter 5 is being operated during over ported in range comparison mode seeing pro 01 High speed Counter 5 A EU Y
15. Appendices A 1 15 Data Control Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function PID CON PIDAT Executes PID control according to the specified parameters The TROL WITH PIDAT 191 PID constants can be auto tuned with PIDAT 191 AUTOTUNING C First Parameter Word i5 o D c Set value SV C1 Proportional band P S Input word C42 Integral constant Tik C 1st parameter word D Output word C 3 Derivative constant Tdk C44 Sampling period t 15 8 7 43210 C 5 Forward reverse designation PID constant update timing designation Manipulated variable output setting 2 PID parameter 15141312 11 87 43 0 c 6 0 0 0 i L Output range Integral and derivative unit Input range Manipulated variable output limit control 15 0 C 7 Manipulated variable output lower limit P C 8 Manipulated variable output upper limit 5 uv 5141312 0 d C49 0 0 0 a A o 3 AT Calculation Gain E AT Command Bit 8 ct o 15 0 a C 10 Limit cycle Hysteresis C 11 Work area 30 words Cannot be used by user C 40 suononJjjsu O4JUOD geq SI L V CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 31 Appendices Instruction TIME PRO PORTIONAL OUTPUT Mnemonic TPO Variations Symbol Operand S Input word C 1st param
16. Polling Unit s Polled Unit No 0 4 4 Local area Local area Local area A Polled Unit No 1 ERE RE Not used Not used B Undefined Not used Not used Not used Polled Unit No 3 Net used Netused Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Example for Ten Link Words Maximum Number of Words The CPU Unit that is the Polling Unit either CP1E CP1H CP1L or CJ1M sends its data CIO 200 to CIO 209 to the same words CIO 200 to CIO 209 in all other CPU Units The Polled Units either CP1E CP1H CP1L or CJ1M send their data CIO 210 to CIO 219 to con secutive sets of 10 words CIO 210 to CIO 289 in the Polling Unit suongeouioedgs BunejedQo p S pL CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit CP1E N NA S type CPU Unit CP1L CPU Unit Example CJ1M CPU Unit Polling Unit Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 Polled Unit No 2 9 A O e p m E ISTE SISTI SIS EST fester federe o d O9 Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words CIO 200 to 209 CIO 200 to 209
17. eeeeeeeeeeee 12 11 12 17 Speed control continuous mode 12 49 Startup data read setting ssessessss 7 8 Step ladder program sections ssssese 4 23 Subroutiles ciere cette die 4 2 4 22 Switching from speed control continuous mode to positioning independent mode 12 56 Symbols Global symbols eene 4 6 Local symbols z 2 ppl Res 4 6 T Target value comparison 11 14 11 17 Taska i a a a a i taiii 4 2 4 6 Timer Area E eee a S 5 3 PV refresh method sese 5 14 Resetting or maintaining 5 14 TYPOS ee eire EE 5 13 Timing and interrupt settings 7 3 Triangular control eee 12 52 U Underflow Flag P UF ee 5 20 Up Down pulse input eennm 11 8 V Variable duty factor pulse outputs PWM outputs 13 2 Varlatioris 1 oe Rec eb e edes 4 10 WwW Word address 1 iaai ae aeaa aeaa aeaa eeu 5 5 Worle Area iiec e eerte etes 5 3 5 8 Index 3 Index 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W480 E1 05 Revision code Revision code Date Revised content 01 March 2009 Original production June 2009 Information added on pulse
18. CIO 3100 to 3109 CIO 3100 to 3109 No 0 CIO 210 to 219 4 CIO 210 to 219 CIO 3110 to 3119 CIO 3110 to 3119 No 1 CIO 220 to 229 au J No 2 CIO 230 to 239 No 3 CIO 240 to 249 No 4 CIO 250 to 259 No 5 CIO 260 to 269 No 6 CIO 270 to 279 No 7 CIO 280 to 289 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 25 14 Serial Communications Allocated Words Complete Link Method Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words 10 words CIO 200 Polling Unit CIO 200 CIO 200 to CIO 200 to CIO 200 to 201 202 209 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 20210 CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 0 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 202 CIO 204 to CIO 206 to CIO 220 to No 1 205 208 229 Polled Unit CIO 203 CIO 206to CIO 209 to CIO 230 to No 2 207 211 239 Polled Unit CIO 204 CIO 208 to CIO 212 to CIO 240 to Serial PLC No 3 209 214 249 Link Area Polled Unit CIO 205 CIO 210 to CIO 215 to CIO 250 to No 4 211 217 259 Polled Unit CIO 206 CIO 21210 CIO 218 to CIO 260 to No 5 213 220 269 Polled Unit CIO 207 CIO 214 to CIO 221 to CIO 270 to No 6 215 223 279 Polled Unit CIO 208 CIO 216 to CIO 224 to CIO 280 to No 7 217 226 289 CIO 289 Not used CIO 209 to CIO 218 to CIO 227 to 289 289 289 Polling Unit Link Method Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words 10 words CIO 200 Polling U
19. A 77 ssauppy Aq suone ojy eauy faeixny z v SPJOM 9IHAWPE8H c c V Appendices Address Status F after Status at Write ial he Name Function Settings ae flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A732 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when to 5 the power was turned ON five times power is A734 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A732 00 to A732 07 Seconds 00 to OO S 59 type A732 08 to A732 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Unit A733 00 to A733 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A733 08 to A733 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A734 00 to A734 07 Month 01 to 12 A734 08 to A734 15 Year 00 to 99 A735 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when to 6 the power was turned ON six times power is A737 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A735 00 to A735 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A735 08 to A735 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Unit A736 00 to A736 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A736 08 to A736 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A737 00 to A737 07 Month 01 to 12 A737 08 to A737 15 Year 00 to 99 A738 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when to 7 the
20. CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 f after Status at Write Name Function Settings pn flags Words Bits mode startup timing tti change Pegs A320 00 High speed Counter 2 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle Condition Met Flag high speed counter 2 is being operated during the in range comparison mode for upper overseeing 01 High speed Counter 2 and lower limits processes Range 2 Comparison e Cleared when operation starts Refreshed Condition Met Flag Cleared when range comparison when PRV 02 High speed Counter 2 table is registered instruction is i executed to Range 3 Comparison OFF PV not in range read the Condition Met Flag ON PV in range results of 03 High speed Counter 2 range com Range 4 Comparison parson Condition Met Flag 04 High speed Counter 2 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 2 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag 08 High speed Counter 2 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 2 son operation Cleared when operation starts starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter 2 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Unde
21. eene 12 17 L Ladder program WING iiir eto Deae a en pedes Less Than Flag P LT esee 5 20 Less than or Equals Flag P LE 5 20 Linear mode high speed counter 11 10 Local syrbols it eee eed 4 6 Index 2 M Maximum interrupt task processing time A440CH 10 13 Memory areas and stored data ssuuus 2 3 Modbus RTU Easy Master seere 14 3 DM fixed allocation words 5 12 14 12 Error codes ecce eec antec dou tees 14 13 Programming examples esee 14 14 Related Auxiliary Area sees 14 13 Monitor mode t tet eerte tee penne 3 3 Monitoring and debugging sseeeeessss 18 24 Forced set reset eeeeeeseeeesseee 18 26 Monitoring status eeenne 18 24 Online editing seen 18 27 MSKS instruction eeeeeeee 10 6 10 11 N N NA type CPU Unit eeeennneen 1 2 Negative Flag P N em 5 20 Non differentiated instructions ssssss 4 10 No protocol communications 14 3 14 8 PEG Setup tei huie Redi HE 14 9 Related Auxiliary Area cesses 14 10 Not Equal Flag P NE eene 5 20 Number of connected
22. Example for Ten Link Words Maximum Number of Words Each CPU Unit either CP1E CP1L CP1H or CJ1M sends data to the same words in all other CPU Units for the Polling Unit and all Polled Units Data is sent between the words that are allocated to the Polling Unit and Polled Units according to unit numbers CP1E N NADILI S type CPU Unit CP1E N NADIL S type CPU Unit CP1L CPU Unit Ex i i n T 4 ample CJ1M CPU Unit gt Polling Unit E Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 Polled Unit No 2 m E us sempers g 9 g o Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words Serial PLC Link Words CIO 200 to 209 gt CIO 200 to 209 CIO 3100 to 3109 CIO 3100 to 3109 No 0 CIO 210 to 219 No 0 CIO 210 to 219 No 0 CIO 3110 to 3119 No 0 CIO 3110 to 3119 No 1 CIO 220 to 229 No 1 CIO 220 to 229 j4 No 1 CIO 3120 to 3129 No 1 CIO 3120 to 3129 No 2 CIO 230 to 239 No 2 CIO 230 to 239 No 2 CIO 3130 to 3139 3 No 2 CIO 3130 to 3139 No 3 CIO 240 to 249 No 3 CIO 240 to 249 N
23. eee 5 12 INIAMStrUctlOn s it ertt tis 11 22 12 11 13 3 Inp t coristarit o eee ce cs 7 4 Input constant setting A 81 Input interrupts se m 10 5 Functions allocation eee 10 5 PEG Setup tete otn eene 10 4 Writing the ladder program seeen 10 5 Input differentiated instructions 4 11 instruction functions sen A 2 Instructions Basic understanding eeeeeeeee 4 8 Execution conditions eese 4 10 Operands ccc8 sects nine PAREN 4 9 Specifying addresses ssssesss 4 12 Vatlatlons wisest bee EE t Le EL cer n 4 10 Internal memory eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeennnenn enne 2 2 Interrupt input settings sseeee 7 12 Interrupt response time s e A 82 Interrupt task ener 10 11 Interrupt task priority and order of execution 10 13 Interrupt task with maximum processing time A441CH 10 13 Interrupts Input interrupts eeeeeerreeenmne 10 3 Precautions ctc pete rentes 10 13 Scheduled interrupts esessssss 10 10 TYPES sis api e rato iin gd an eta rae 10 2 Interrupts functions Interrupt response time A 82 IORF instruction l O refresh ssssssss 4 15 J JOGGING ze eee dera 12 17 Application example
24. Conversion Data Hexadecimal Decimal 4 to 20 mA Outputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 correspond to an analog current range of 4 to 20 mA 20 8 mA j L 1770 189C TEER Conversion Data 8000 FEDO 0 mA 6000 6300 Hexadecimal Decimal 15 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Analog I O Function 15 2 3 Special functions Averaging Function for Analog Inputs The averaging function stores the average a moving average of the last eight input values as the converted value Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval Use the CX Programmer to set the averaging function in the PLC Setup The averaging function can be set independently for each input Open circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs The open circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the volt age drops below 0 8 V or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3 2 mA When the open circuit detection function is activated the converted data will be set to 8 000 The time for enabling or clearing the open circuit detection function is the same as the time for con verting the data If the input returns to the convertible range the open circuit detection is cleared automatically and the output returns to the normal range Auxiliary Area bits
25. Vi Precautions for Correct Use The scheduled task will not be executed while the CPU Unit suspends operation for online editing A 3 3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance The response times for CPU Units connected via a Serial PLC Link polling unit to polled unit or polled unit to polling unit can be calculated as shown below Note A PT cannot be used in the Serial PLC Link o ueunojied esuodsay v Maximum I O response time not including hardware delay Polling unit cycle time Communications cycle time Polled unit cycle time 4 ms Minimum I O response time not including hardware delay Polled unit communications time 0 8 ms P p wo e Number of participat The number of polled units to which links have been established within the 3 ing polled unit nodes maximum unit number set in the polling unit E Number of non The number of polled units not participating in the links within the maximum unit E participating polled number set in the polling unit z unit nodes 2 Communications cycle Polled unit communications time x Number of participating polled unit nodes E time ms 10 x Number of non participating polled unit nodes 20 x Number of polled unit E nodes y Polled unit e Communications time set to Standard 3 communications 0 4 0 286 x No of polled units 1 x No of link words x 2 12 z time ms Communications time set to Fast 3 0 4 0 095
26. m i i i 1 E type CPU Units 50 hours at 25 NINA4ype CPU Units 40 hours at 25 i i 1 i 1 i V V Data is retained even if the power If a CP1W BAT01 Battery sold separately supply is interrupted for longer is mounted to an N INALILI S type CPU than the backup time of the built in Unit which is normally backed up by a capacitor built in capacitor data will be backed up by the battery I Built in RAM The built in RAM is the execution memory for the CPU Unit The user programs PLC Setup and I O memory are stored in the built in RAM The data is unstable when the power is interrupted If a CP1W BATO1 Battery sold separately is mounted to an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data is backed up by the Battery The user programs and parameters are backed up to the built in EEPROM so they are not lost i Built in EEPROM The built in EEPROM is the backup memory for user programs PLC Setup and Data Memory backed up using control bits in the Auxiliary Area Data is retained even if the power supply is interrupted Only the Data Memory Area words that have been backed up using the Auxiliary Area control bits are backed up Refer to 16 3 DM Backup Func tion All data in all other words and areas is not backed up CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit A Caution With an ELILI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI
27. 65 535 pulse 4 ms The settings are applicable to the N NALILI S type CPU Units with transistor outputs i Base Settings When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Undefined Origin Hold Hold At start of operation operation for limit signal turning ON Undefined 2 Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only Search Only When power is turned ON Always 3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation NO 4 Search Return Initial Speed 0 pps 0 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 7 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 PLC Setup i Origin Search Settings Name Default Possible settings When pie dics by 1 Use define origin operation Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 1 1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation CCW 1 2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation Method 1 Method 2 1 3 Search Operation Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation Inverse 2 1 4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation Mode 1 Mode 2 1 5 Origin Input Signal NC NC When power is turned ON NO 1 6 Proximity Input Signal NC NC At start of operation NO 1 7 Search High Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 1 8 Search Proximity Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pp
28. Interrupt input IN7 CIO 0 07 Upper Terminal Block L1 L2n com 01 09 11 DC Power Supply T v 5o oe o o w o NC CIO 0 Interrupt input IN2 CIO 0 02 Interrupt input IN4 CIO 0 04 i Writing the Ladder Program e Writing the Interrupt Task s Ladder Program Create ladder programs for interrupt tasks 2 to 7 which are executed for the corresponding interrupt inputs Right click a program in the CX Programmer and select Properties Select interrupt tasks 2 to 7 in the Task Type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box Program Properties x ai General Comments Name NewProgram2 0 Task type Unassigned Unassigned Cyclic Task nterrupt Task 00 nterrupt Task 01 Interval Timer Size nterrupt T ask 02 Built in Input 2 nterrupt T ask 03 Built in Input 3 nterrupt T ask 04 Built in Input 4 nterrupt T ask 05 Built in Input 5 nterrupt T ask 06 Built in Input 6 nterrupt T ask 07 Built in Input 7 v Interrupt input IN6 CIO 0 06 sdnusquy ndul z or uoneJedo jo MO 4 Z Z 0 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 5 10 Interrupts Execute MSKS Instruction in a Cyclic Task Execute the MSKS instruction from the ladder program in a cyclic task to use input interrupts MSKS has the following two functions and two of this instruction are normally used in combinati
29. R unsigned BCD P1 2 Bd BCD P1 3 Bs BIN H Converted value Bs S unsigned binary P1 First Parameter Word 15 0 j E Scaled value for point A Ar 0000 to 9999 4 digit BCD 15 0 L_ Unscaled value for point A As 0000 to FFFF binary 0 d j wem value for point B Br 0000 to 9999 4 digit BCD 15 0 P143 J Unscaled value for point B Bs 0000 to FFFF binary CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic SCALING 2 SCL2 Variations Symbol Operand SCL2 486 SR S Source word P1 1st parameter word R Result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Function Converts signed binary data into signed BCD data according to the specified linear function An offset can be input in defining the linear function Negative Offset R signed BCD Positive Offset R signed BCD S signed binary p S signed Offset binary Offset of 0000 P1 Offset_ Signed binary R signed BCD P1 1 AY Signed binary P142 AX Signed BCD AY Offset 0000 hex S signed binary P1 First Parameter Word 15 0 P1 J L Offset of linear function 8000 to 7FFF signed binary 15 0 P1 1 L Lax 8000 to 7FFF signed binary 15 0 P142 i AY 0000 to 9999 BCD Note P1 to P1 2 must be in the sa
30. Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for which tem perature ranges are given in the following table An incorrect setting may cause operating errors CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Precautions for Safe Use Observe the following precautions when using a CP series PLC e Handling To initialize the DM Area back up the initial contents for the DM Area to backup memory using one of the following methods Set the number of words of the DM Area to be backed up starting with DO in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area Include programming to back up specified words in the DM Area to built in EEPROM by turning ON A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit Check the ladder program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation The ladder program and parameter area data in the CP1E CPU Units are backed up in the built in EEPROM backup memory The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF and a memory error will occur the next time the power supply is turned ON With a CP1E CPU Unit data memory can be backed up to the built in EEPROM backup memory The BKUP indicator will light on the front
31. LI TIM 0000 100 102 00 Y Ko Output bits can also be used in input conditions 102 00 OQ Ladder Programming Restrictions Arung error will occur if a ladder program is not connected to both bus bars The ladder program must be connected to both bus bars so that the execution condition will flow from the left bus bar to the right bus bar If the rungs are not connected to both bus bars a rung error will occur during the program check on the CX Programmer and program transfer will be impossible p A rung error will occur if the instruction shown below is made to directly connect to the bus bar without an input condition OUT instructions timers counters and other output instructions cannot be connected directly to the left bus bar If one of these instructions is connected directly to the left bus bar a rung error will occur and pro gram transfer will be impossible Y k MOV 4 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming A location error will occur if an instruction is not connected directly to the right bus bar An input condition cannot be inserted after an OUT instruction or other output instruction The input condition must be inserted before an OUT instruction or other output instruction If it is inserted after an output instruction then a location error will occur du
32. Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function OUTPUT OUT Outputs the result execution condition of the logical processing to the specified bit OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT Reverses the result execution condition of the logical processing and outputs it to the specified bit KEEP KEEP S Set Operates as a latching relay R Reset KEEP 011 ese A B c E i B Bit e S execution ON condition OFF _ R execution ON i gm condition OFF 1 Status of B SpF DIFFERENTI DIFU DIFUTOTS DIFU 013 turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the ATE UP 013 execution condition goes from OFF to ON rising edge B Execution B Bit condition Status of B s One cycle DIFFERENTI DIFD DIFD 014 turns the designated bit ON for one cycle when the ATE DOWN execution condition goes from ON to OFF falling edge Execution B Bit condition E Status of B 9 One cycle SET SET R SET SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON Execution ON By condition of SET OFF B Bit Status of BON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 suono ung uononnsul T Y suoionuasu 1ndino eouenbes z L1 v Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function RESET RSET RSET turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON 8 Execution ON EH condition of
33. sees 5 4 5 17 B Backing up memory seeseeeeeee 3 5 Backup eate tad aet 5 12 Backup at6a 2 ibt rein IER 3 5 VO memory backup time sees 3 7 Backup memory sees 3 6 16 8 Backup time ien eee ite tere 1 2 Bit addresses onion eben hb ep 5 5 Built in EEPROM 2 2 2 3 3 6 5 12 16 8 Built in RAM ele redet 1 5 2 2 2 8 Built in RS 232C Port esee 7 5 C C Mode command eeeeee 14 4 14 30 Carry EFlag P OY de nie entis 5 19 GIO AC MEM ERE 5 2 5 7 Allocation 2 dai TE 6 2 Circular Ring mode high speed counter 11 11 Clock function AREE EEE 16 7 Glock Pulses eee entrent 5 4 5 21 Communications settings 7 5 7 8 Condition Flags essseeeeeeeeees 5 4 5 19 Connecting the Servo Drive and external sensors 12 6 Constants uiti tea eser dove ee dte 4 16 Gounter Area eene Lees 5 4 Resetting or maintaining eeseeeeeeees 5 16 TYPOS cedere eer te des e ede vo pce rete 5 15 Counter Completion Flags eese 5 4 Counter PMSzi aita ate e eer ERI die 5 4 Counting ranges eere ERR 11 10 CPU Unit O allocation eee essen 6 3 Internal memory eeeeeeeeeeeneennnne 2 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Memory areas and stored data 2 3 Operating modes 3
34. 14 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications e PLC Setup Boiler A Polling Unit Boiler C Polled Unit No 1 Communications Settings Custom Baud Rate 115200bps Parameters 7 2 E default Mode PC Link Master PC link Slave Link words 10 default PC Link Mode ALL NT PC Link Max 1 PC Link Unit No 0 1 e Programming Example Data in the Serial PLC Link Areas are transferred using data links by the Serial PLC Link and without using any special programming The ladder program is used to transfer the data that needs to be linked to the data link area sju 2 Id leues s rvT Boiler A Boiler B Boiler C CP1E Polled Unit No 1 CP1E Polling Unit CP1E Polled Unit No 0 l i Input Bits Input Bits CIO i dj i cio 2 A Temperature data 0 1 C Temperature data 0 E Clo 3 LA Temperature data 1 C Temperature data 1 Ka hi 1 m CIO 100 Output Bits x EI l D CIO 200 A_Temperature data 0 1 A Temperature data 0 d A Temperature data 0 8 CIO 201 i A Temperature data 1 A Temperature data 1 A Temperature data 1 5 S i i i S I CIO 209 i i i CIO 210 B Temperature data 0 B Temperature data 0 B Temperature data 0 CIO 211 B Temperature data B Temperature data 1 B Temperature data 1 Serial PLC I Link Areas CIO 219 i i i CIO 220 C Temperature data 0 C Temperatur
35. 14 Serial Communications 14 24 Complete Link The data from all nodes in the Serial PLC Links are reflected in both the Polling Unit and the Polled Units The only exceptions are the addresses of Polled Units that are not present in the network These data areas are undefined in all nodes Example Complete Link Method Highest Unit Number 3 In the following diagram Polled Unit No 2 is a Unit not present in the network so the area allocated for Polled Unit No 2 is undefined in all nodes Polling Unit Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 Polled Unit No 3 Localarea 9 Polling Unit Polling Unit Polling Unit Polled Unit No 0 4 Localarea Polled Unit No 0 gt Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 4 Polled Unit No 1 4 4 Localarea y Polled Unit No 1 Undefined 777777777 Undefined Undefined 777777777 Undefined Polled Unit No 3 4 4 Polled Unit No 3 Polled Unit No 3 4 Local area Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
36. i 9 i un 1 3 1 Connecting through Multiple Segments Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP and construct appli cations using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS TCP is the initial function supported by this Ethernet Option Board CP1W CIF41 It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing seinee4 z 1 1 17 1 2 Features B Compatibility and Speed The transmission medium of Ethernet side has been upgraded to 100Base TX while compatibility with some functions and application interfaces of the existing Ethernet Unit models for CS CJ series has been maintained Limited by the Host Link protocol used on the serial side the processing speed is only 115 2kbps slower than the existing Ethernet Unit The FINS frame length is less than 540 bytes so the system response performance for the same FINS message applications is longer than the existing Ethernet Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 3 17 Ethernet Option Board i Various Protocols Available on Ethernet A variety of protocols make a wide range of applications for use on an Ethernet network The protocols that can be selected include receiving commands by OMRON s standard protocol FINS and reading Ethernet Option Board settings and status by HTTP A communications service can be
37. 12 53 uremed 3ndino esind 6 ZT epoiN 1uepuedepu jo uo2 Buluolisog Z 6 ZL 12 Pulse Outputs Example Procedure Operation applica Frequency changes Description Instruc tion tion ettings Change Change PLS2 can be executed PULS Number of target posi the target Pulse frequency Specified number jd aret during positioning to l pulses m f pul T tion and position Newsuger hesuano Doe ee Stace change the target position ACC Relative or speed and target Target frequency Acceleration 7 number of pulses Indepen absolute smoothly speed fre c acceleration rate decel dent pulse spec quency p eration rate and target i ification H Time rin fr ncy aa caine Execution of ACC ede e PLS2 bd Port Independent mode Wh n h in nn multiple PLS2 executed to change the target S t li setti gs ca of Pulse Position target frequency and be changed without malin Direction start func acceleration deceleration rates taining the same speed A i tion ccelera range an error will occur tion rate and the original opera Decel e tion will continue to the i So original target position lon rate Target fre quency Starting frequency Change ai PLS2 can be executed PLS2 Number of Pulse frequency iy DiS pulses specifies s ne i the accel Acceleration re during positioning accel pulses eration and New target frequency ssa gt eration or de
38. ASCII TO HEX HEX Converts up to 4 bytes of ASCII data in the source word to their HEX 162 hexadecimal equivalents and writes these digits in the specified destination word S S o copas a D NE LER 2 First byte to convert d S 1st source word a Di Digit designator Left 1 Right 0 o D Destination word s 33 T 32 3 SH m T E P g ASCII Number of digits n 1 9 ed First digit to write HEX net f E M 2 DI Digit Designator Digit number 3 2 1 0 Le Specifies the first digit in D to receive converted data 0 to 3 Number of bytes to be converted 0 to 3 0 1 digit 1 2 digits 2 3 digits 3 4 digits First byte of S to be converted 0 Rightmost byte 1 Leftmost byte suomnonJjsu uois49AuO OL L V Parity 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 25 Appendices A 1 11 Logic Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function LOGICAL AND ANDW Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in single words of ANDW 034 word data and or constants Ih l2 OR I1 Input 1 I2 Input 2 R Result word DOUBLE ANDL Takes the logical AND of corresponding bits in double words of LOGICAL AND word data and or constants 1 151 1 1571 gt R R 1 lh i l2 zis R R 1 I1 Input 1 LOGICAL OR ORW Takes the
39. r Parameter Area I 1 I O Memory Areas I CIO Area Work Area Holding Area Timer Area Counter The CX Programmer can be I I Alig DM Area and Auxiliary used to set status in each I O rea memory area and to write data to the I O memory areas 2 1 4 Backup The CPU Unit will access the backup memory in the following process The program or PLC Setup are transferred from the CX Programmer The program is changed during online editing DM backup is operated by the Auxiliary Area During these processes BKUP LED will light indicating that the CX Programmer is being backed up There are the following limitations during backup The operation mode cannot be switched from PROGRAM mode to MONITOR RUN mode f the power is interrupted when the program or PLC Setup are being backed up memory error may occur the next time power is turned ON f the power is interrupted when the DM area is being backed up the reading of backed up DM area will fail the next time power is turned ON 2 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 CPU Unit Operation This section describes the operation of the CP1E CPU Unit Make sure that you under stand the contents of this section completely before writing ladder programs 3 1 CPU UnitOperation lesser 3 2 3 1 1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation 0 0 00 cee eee 3 2 3 1 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes 0 ce
40. H Precautions for Correct Use There are restrictions on the maximum response frequencies of the high speed counters when using target matching Use the counters for target matching under the frequencies in the following table If the pulse frequencies input to the high speed counters are higher than those in the table count values may not agree For unit version 1 0 Counter numbers for target matching Increment pulse Pulse plus direction Up and down pulses 11 High speed Counters Differential phase x4 More than 1 point For unit version 1 1 Enabling Disabling 20kHz max Counter numbers for 5kHz max Increment pulse Pulse plus direction Differential phase x4 pulse outputs target matching Up and down pulses Disabling pulse Only one point 100kHz max 30kHz max outputs More than two points 60kHz max 15kHz max Enabling pulse outputs Only one point 50kHz max 10kHz max More than two points 40kHz max sydnueul J4eguno peaeds ubiH TT uosueduio2 enj eA 1ueseJd z e LL When using target matching the interval between interrupts for target matches and the interval between interrupts for the next target matches after the count direction increment ing decrementing changing must be longer than 3 ms plus the sum of execution time for interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time The sum of execution time for interrupt tasks in one cycle is stored in A442 For CPU
41. OFF Execution nor mal or still in progress CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status E after Status at Write peated Name Function Settings Se flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A642 Analog Adjustment 1 Stores the value set on analog 0000 to OOFF hex Retained Cleared PV adjuster 1 as a hexadecimal value A643 Analog Adjustment 2 Stores the value set on analog 0000 to OOFF hex Retained Cleared PV adjuster 2 as a hexadecimal value A720 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when o 1 the power was turned ON one time power is A722 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A720 00 to A720 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A720 08 to A720 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Uni A721 00 to A721 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A721 08 to A721 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A722 00 to A722 07 Month 01 to 12 A722 08 to A722 15 Year 00 to 99 Note 1 All of the clock data from A720 to A749 is cleared if the capacitor becomes discharged 2 InanE S type CPU Unit or if the clock data is not set for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 A723 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained
42. Overview The Holding Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit It is used in programming Unlike the input bits and output bits in the CIO Area I O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode Precautions for Safe Use With an ELIDI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function If the DM backup function is being used be sure to refer to 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Star tup for details H eary DuipjoH tv s Notation H 20 02 is number 02 Word number 20 I O memory area designator H Range The Holding area contains 50 words with addresses ranging from HO to H49 Applications The Holding Area is used when you want to resume operation after a power interruption using the same status as before the power interruption CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 9 5 I O Memory i Details Bits in the Holding Area can be force set and force reset When a self maint
43. The function of the button is as follows Button Send Function Show the FINS status of the selected No CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board i Error Log Noo ErorCode Detail Code fo Send ear Enorcos No Show the error recorder number Error Code Show the error code of the error recorder Detail Code Show the detail error code of the error recorder Date Show the date of the error recorder The functions of the buttons are as follows Send Show the error log of the selected No Clear Error Log Clear the error log table sbumes T uonoun Bumegs smog d9M v ZL CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 25 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 4 Memory Allocations 17 4 1 DM Area Allocation The memory allocation about system setup is shown as the following diagram These data will be allo cated to the DM area of PLC The range of the DM area is D1300 to D1456 Offset D15 DO D1300 Mode setting 1 word D1301 FINS TCP port number 1 word D1302 FINS UDP port number 1 word D1303 IP address 2 words D1304 D1305 Subnet mask 2 words D1306 D1307 Reserved 1 word D1308 to IP address table 97 words D1404 D1405 to IP router table 33 words D1437 D1438 to FINS TCP connection setup 11 words D1448 D1449 to HTTP server setup 5 words D1453 D1454 FINS node address 1 w
44. sseeess 9 4 R Range comparison eeeeeeeee 11 14 11 20 Read protection e crc etg ert iuc bets 16 12 Relative coordinates eene 12 13 Relative positioning 12 13 Run mode retener p teens 3 3 S Scheduled interrupt sssessss 10 10 Writing the ladder program 10 11 SeclioriSz souci id i oce bolton M ATTAT 4 2 4 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Security function eese 16 12 Self diagnosis teer te edet 3 2 Serial communications Connecting the host computer 14 30 Modbus RTU Easy Master 14 10 14 11 No protocol communications with general components 14 8 Program free communications with PTs 14 5 Serial PLC Links 14 20 Types of communication sees 14 3 Serial Option Port 7 8 Serial PLC Link response performance A 83 Serial PEG Links 14 3 14 20 Allocated words sese 14 26 Data refresh method sseeeees 14 23 Example application eeseeeees 14 28 PEG S6etUp 53 etm UURENODADBMUN 14 21 Related Auxiliary Area 14 27 Software reset 11 12 Specifying addresses sssssssssss 4 12 Specifying offsets for addresses 4 19 SPED instruction
45. 16 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Ethernet Option Board SSS This section gives an overview of the Ethernet Option Board describes its setting methods I O memory allocations troubleshooting how to connect the CX Program mer and how to install an Ethernet network 17 1 Features and Specifications ccccc cece eee eee eee 17 2 17 1 1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide 0 000 ee eee eee 17 2 17 1 2 Eeatures ecce See en been Mee ee UD iude ges 17 3 173 Specificatioris s eee e ace ates e ERREUR ey eens kale 17 5 17 1 4 Software Configuration s es sasas aaaea anenee 17 5 17 1 5 FINS Communications a an aana aaea 17 6 17 1 6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board 17 8 17 2 Startup Procedure lt iui ie a enhn 17 9 17 2 1 Startup Procedure 0 cect eh 17 9 17 3 Settings soros ae a aene dc o CR oo A te Olean aaa aate 17 11 17 3 1 Ethernet Option Board Setup sslselees ellen 17 11 17 3 2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 17 12 17 3 3 Default Settings 0 cee eee eae 17 13 17 3 4 Web Browser Setting Function 0 0 00 cee ee eee 17 15 17 4 Memory Allocations ccc cece eens 17 26 17 4 1 DM Area Allocation 0 cette eee 17 26 17 4 2 ClO Area Allocation 0 0c tees 17 31 17 5 Trouble Shooting 0ccccee cece e eee nsns rn 17 33 17 571 Emorbog um
46. 2 s complement _ Complement 1 S R CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic DATA MLPX DECODER Variations Symbol Operand MLPX 076 S Source word C Control word R 1st result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Function Reads the numerical value in the specified digit or byte in the source word turns ON the corresponding bit in the result word or 16 word range and turns OFF all other bits in the result word or 16 word range 4 to 16 bit conversion n c v 4 1 Convert 2 digits ag CS T n 2 Start with second digit 4 to 16 bit decoding Bit m of R is turned ON 15 L 5 ju m 8 to 256 bit conversion cL Fa n 4 1 Convert 2 bytes i 1 n 1 Start with first byte p a T 8 to 256 bit decoding Bit m of R to R 15 is turned ON R 1 R 14 255 R 15 _ R 16 Re i Two 16 word ranges are used when Pinsent specifies 2 bytes R130 LL m R 31 C Control Word 4 to 16 bit decoder 15 12 11 87 43 0 c o d oh ul TO Specifies the first digit byte to be converted 0 to 3 digit 0 to 3 Number of digits bytes to be converted 0 to 3 1 to 4 digits Always 0 Conversion process 0 4 to 16 bits digit to word 8 to 256 bit conversion 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 c a i NE
47. CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 15 12 12 16 Pulse Outputs DM Area Settings Settings for PLS2 Instruction DO to D7 Setting Address Data Acceleration rate 300 Hz 4 ms DO 012C Deceleration rate 200 Hz 4 ms D1 00C8 Target frequency 50 000 Hz D2 C350 D3 0000 Number of output pulses 600 000 D4 27C0 pulses D5 0009 Starting frequency 100 Hz D6 0064 D7 0000 j Ladder Program 0 00 PLS2 0001 Start input 0100 DO D6 EN Additional Information lt Pulse output 1 lt Specifies Pulse Direction output method CW and relative pulses lt Acceleration rate deceleration rate target frequency number of pulses setting lt Starting frequency Absolute pulses can be specified when the origin position has been defined f a target frequency that cannot be reached has been set the target frequency will be reduced automatically i e triangular control will be performed In some cases where the acceleration rate is substantially greater than the deceleration rate the operation will not be true triangular control The motor will be operated at a constant speed for a short time between the accelera tion and deceleration CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 3 Jogging Jogging can be performed by using the SPED SPEED OUTPUT and ACC ACCELERATION CON TROL instructions This section describes
48. For the details of the host link commands and FINS commands refer to Communication Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W342 e List of C Mode Commands C mode commands host link commands are shown below Type Header code Name Function I O memory RR CIO area read Read the specified words from the specified words read of CIO area RH Holding area read Read the specified words from the specified words of Holding area H RC Timer and Counter PV area read Read the specified present values of timer and counter from the specified words RG Timer and Counter Completion Flag Read the specified Completion Flag of timer and read counter from the specified words RD DM area read Read the specified words from the specified words of DM area D RJ Auxiliary area read Read the specified words from the specified words of Auxiliary area A I O memory WR CIO area write Write the specified source words from the specified write words of CIO area in the unit of word WH Holding area write Write the specified source words from the specified words of Holding area H in the unit of word I O memory WC Timer and Counter PV area write Write the specified source words from the specified write words of Timer and Counter present value area in the unit of word WD DM area write Write the specified source words from the specified words of DM area D in the unit of word WJ Auxiliary area write Write the s
49. N 11CH CIO 11 i 12CH CIO 12 ae A 13CH CIO 13 E oa 14CH ClO 14 o 15CH CIO 15 ae Ni 16CH CIO 16 18 17CH ClO 17 Same as above Same as above Same as above Note The input constants of CP1W 40EDR EDT EDT1 are always 16ms regardless of the settings CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 PLC Setup 7 2 4 Built in RS 232C Port The settings are applicable to the N NALILI S type CPU Units Since this setting is reflected by power OFF and ON the PLC Setup and the actual operation settings may be different The actual operation settings can be confirmed in words A617 A618 i Communications Settings When setting is read by CPU Unit 1 Communications Settings Standard 9 600 Standard When power is turned ON 1 7 2 E Baud rate 9 600 bps Default setungs Start bits 1 bit Name Default Possible settings Data length 7 bits Parity Even Stop bits 2 bits Host Link Custom 2 Mode Host Link Host Link When power is turned ON When custom settings have been selected NT Link 1 N 1 N NT Links RS 232C No protocol PC Link Slave PC Link Master Modbus RTU Easy Master 2 1 Host Link Settings 2 1 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps When power is turned ON 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps 2 1 2 Format data le
50. Set Response Timeout s to 5 b The settings in the Driver Tab are as follows Network Settings Ethernet En Network Driver FINS node address generates automatically from the IP address in the computer Workstation Node Number fi E Auto detect vd IP Address 7 r Part Number FINS node address is the computer s 192 168 250 4 9600 IP address host number In this example it is 2 Set the UDP port number to 9600 default Set the Ethernet Option Board s IPaddress to 192 168 250 1 Cancel Help 17 38 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board The default setting for Address Conversion Mode of the Ethernet Option Board is Auto Dynamic so slecet Auto detect in the field of Workstation Node Number Therefore according to computer s IP address computer s FINS node address is set automatically in the CX Programmer At that time IP address post number and FINS node address are the same In this example 2 is displayed according to the host number of computer s IP address 192 168 250 2 set by manual and it is invalid to change the setting Set IP address to 192 168 250 1 which is the Ethernet Option Board s IP address Set FINS UDP Port to 9600 default which is the UDP port number in the FINS communications service 4 Connect the target PLC online Select Work Online in the PLC menu JounuejBo04d X 2 IP
51. V JV x J Byte order 0 Hex Most significant byte to least significant byte 1 Hex Lest significant byte Always 0 to most significant byte CS and DR signal monitoring 0 No CS and DR signal monitoring 1 CS signal monitoring 2 DR signal monitoring 3 CS and DR signal monitoring Serial port specifier 1 CPU Unit s RS 232C port 2 Serial Option Board Built in RS485 port A 49 suon ung uononnsul T Y suomnonuaisu suoneoiunululO2 jenas LZ L V Appendices A 1 22 Clock Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function CALENDAR CADD Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words ee See C Minutes Seconds CH R C 2 Year Month C 1st calendar word T 1st time word 15 87 0 R 1st result word T Minutes Seconds T 15 87 0 R Minutes Seconds R 1 Day Hour R 2 Year Month CALENDAR CSUB Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words SUBTRACT CSUB 731 CAESA C Minutes Seconds cH C 1st calendar word 7 T 1st time word 15 8 7 0 R 1st result word T Minutes Seconds TH 15 87 0 R Minutes Seconds R 1 R 2 Year Month CLOCK DATE Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the specified ADJUSTMENT DATE 735 source words CPU Unit S 1st source word Internal clock A 50 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 1 23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions Appendices
52. 0 x10 ms 9999 x10 ms When power is turned ON Modbus R TU Easy Master Settings 2 5 1 Baud CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 9 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps When power is turned ON sbumes dmes 51d Z Z I Mod S8b SH utiing HOd uondo eaS S 2 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by CPU Unit 2 2 5 2 5 2 Format 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even When power is turned ON data length stop bits par 7 bits 2 bits odd ity Name Default Possible settings 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1 bit no parity 2 5 3 Response Timeout 5s 58 When power is turned ON 1 x100 ms 255 x100 ms 2 6 PC Link Slave Settings 2 6 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps When power is turned ON 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps 2 6 2 PLC Link Unit No 0 0 When power is turned ON 2 7 PC Link Master Settings 2 7 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps When power is turned ON 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps 2 7 2 Link Words 10 words
53. 8 bits of the specified destination words Dil 0 YO m n D m Number of digits S Source word Ce First digit to convert n Di Digit designator sj 3 i D 1st destination word set Sl ey HEX isis 1 ightmost 8 bits 0 D mem 7 segment Di D 1 i D 2 Di Digit designator 15 1211 87 43 0 Di 0 1 0 m n First digit of S to convert 0 to 3 Digit 0 bits 0 to 3 of S Digit 1 bits 4 to 7 of S Digit 2 bits 8 to 11 of S 3 Digit 3 bits 12 to 15 of S y Number of digits to convert 0 to 3 1 to 4 digits gt First half of D to receive converted data Rightmost 8 bits 1st half Leftmost 8 bits 2nd half Lc suono ung uononnsul T Y gt Not used set to 0 Suomgonujsu HUN O Se Oz L V CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 45 Appendices Instruction DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT A 46 Mnemonic DSW Variations Symbol Operand I Data input word DO to D3 O Output word D 1st result word C1 Number of digits C2 System word Function Reads the value set on an external digital switch or thumbwheel Switch connected to an Input Unit or Output Unit and stores the 4 digit or 8 digit BCD data in the specified words I Input Word Data Line DO to D3 Inputs Specify the input word allocated to the Input Unit and connect the digital switch s D
54. CIO 100 01 CIO 100 01 Stored in A278 Pulse Connect to Servo Drive s pulse input PULS 03 CIO 100 03 and Rete Direction Connect to Servo Drive s direction input SIGN Normal input The external signal must be CW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal received as an input and sensor the input status must be written to A541 08 in the ladder program Normal input The external signal must be CCW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal received as an input and sensor the input status must be written to A541 09 in the ladder program CIO 0 05 CIO 0 05 Origin prox Connect to sensor for N14 CPU Unit imity input 07 CIO 0 07 Origin input Connectto open Connect to the Connect to the collector output phase Z signal phase Z signal from sensor or from the Servo from the Servo other device Drive Drive 11 CIO 0 11 Origin prox Connect to sensor for N20 30 40 60 or NA20 CPU Unit imity input CIO 100 05 CIO 100 05 Error counter Not used Connect to error counter reset ECRST reset output of the Servo Drive Normal input The external signal must be Positioning Not used Connect the Posi received as an input and completed tioning Completed the input status must be input Signal INP from written to A541 10 in the ladder program CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 the Servo Drive to a normal input ter minal 12 7 ANOIAJOAOQ T CT uoneiedo Jo MOJA Z L ZL 12 Pulse Output
55. Indicates in binary the number of bytes of data received when the A394 15 RS 485 Port serial option port or built in RS 485 port is in no protocol mode 14 10 Reception Counter No protocol Mode The start code and end code are not included CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 4 Modbus RTU Easy Master Function The Modbus RTU Easy Master Function can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 4 1 Overview Using the Modbus RTU Easy Master enables easy control of Modbus compatible slaves such as inverters using serial communications The serial communications mode is set to Modbus RTU Easy Master 15 08 07 00 D1200 Slave address D1201 Function code D1202 Number of communications data bytes Communications are easily achieved D1203 by simply turning ON A640 00 after Communications data setting the Modbus RTU command in H the DM fixed allocation words oove address Function code Communications data pt 0 A m w Slave address Function code Communications data sc PORE 7 Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Master Execution mac Bit for Port 1 A640 00 H ENE im OMRON Inverters FE eut 3G3JX 3G3MX 3G3RX 3G3JV 3G3MV or 3G3RV oJ 7v W CP1E N NA type CPU Uni Modbus RTU commands can be sent simply by turn
56. RUPT MASK MSKS 690 rupts Both I O interrupt tasks and scheduled interrupt tasks are masked disabled when the PC is first turned on MSKS 690 can be used to unmask or mask l O interrupts and set the time inter vals for scheduled interrupts N Interrupt number C Control data VO i interrupt 1 eee Mask 1 or unmask 0 zi interrupt inputs 2 to 7 he ey Time interval Scheduled interrupt Set scheduled interrupt time interval CLEAR CLI Clears or retains recorded interrupt inputs for I O interrupts or sets INTERRUPT the time to the first scheduled interrupt for scheduled interrupts N 102 to 107 amp 4 Interrupt Interrupt N Interrupt number inputn P C Control data Internal Internal status t status Recorded interrupt cleared Recorded interrupt retained N 4 MSKS 690 i Execution of scheduled V interrupt task Time to first scheduled interrupt DISABLE DI Disables execution of all interrupt tasks INTERRUPTS DI 693 ENABLE El Enables execution of all interrupt tasks that were disabled with INTERRUPTS EI 694 DI 693 Ji DI Disables execution of all interrupt tasks EI Enables execution of all disabled interrupt tasks A 36 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices A 1 18 High speed Counter Pulse Output Instructions Instruction Mnemonic MODE CON INI TROL Variations Symbol Operand oe P Port specifier C Co
57. Retained Written when o 2 the power was turned ON two times power is A725 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A723 00 to A723 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A723 08 to A723 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Uni A724 00 to A724 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A724 08 to A724 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A725 00 to A725 07 Month 01 to 12 A725 08 to A725 15 Year 00 to 99 A726 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when o 3 the power was turned ON three times power is A728 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A726 00 to A726 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A726 08 to A726 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Uni A727 00 to A727 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A727 08 to A727 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A728 00 to A728 07 Month 01 to 12 A728 08 to A728 15 Year 00 to 99 A729 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when o 4 the power was turned ON four times power is A731 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A729 00 to A729 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A729 08 to A729 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Uni A730 00 to A730 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A730 08 to A730 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A731 00 to A731 07 Month 01 to 12 A731 08 to A731 15 Year 00 to 99 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480
58. SYSMAC CP Series CP1E E SDI CP1E NL I SL DIE I2 J CP1E E I DLI L CP1E NI I JD J CP1E NALJL DI L CP1E CPU Unit Software USER S MANUAL OMRON OMRON 2009 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication SYSMAC CP Series CPIE E SD CPIE NI J S IDI CPIE E DU CPIE NI D CP1E NA I D CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual Revised November 2012 Introduction Thank you for purchasing a SYSMAC CP series CP1E Programmable Controller This manual contains information required to use the CP1E Read this manual completely and be sure you understand the contents before attempting to use the CP1E Intended Audience This manual is intended f
59. Start when ORG is executed Stop e Origin Detection Method 1 Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Not Required suoiesado uojees uiuo G r zL Deceleration starts when Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON Origin Proximity 1 Input Signal P i 0 After the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON the motor is stopped when the Origin Input Signal turns ON 1 Origin Input Signal 0 High speed jor origin Search Decel ration Proximity speed for origin search Pulse output Acceleration E Initial speed CCW Cw Start when ORG is executed Stop Origin Detection Method 2 Origin Proximity Input Signal Not Used The motor is stopped when the Origin Input Signal turns ON Origin Input Signal Proximity speed Pulse output for origin search Acceleration X Initial speed Start when ORG is executed Stop CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 29 12 Pulse Outputs Operation Patterns for Origin Search Operating Mode and Origin Detection Method Settings The following examples show how the operation patterns are affected by the origin detection method and origin search operating mode These examples have a CW origin search direction The search direction and Limit Input Signal direc tion would be different for an origin search in the CCW direction Method 0 is the recommended method for reversal mode 1 Inverse 1 Using Reversal Mode 1 Inverse 1 Origin search
60. The specified number of words starting from DO is restored from the built in EEPROM backup memory if the Restore DO from backup memory Check Box is selected in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Set tings Ranges not given above Not backed up Unstable when the power supply is OFF for longer than the I O memory backup time The values immediately before power interruption are retained The values will be cleared to all zeros at startup if the Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Check Box is selected in the PLC Settings 3 2 3 CIO Area Work Area W Timer Area T DM Area D 3 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 CPU Unit Operation i 1 0 Memory Backup Time The built in capacitor s backup time for I O memory during a power interruption is listed below for ELILI S type CPU Units and N NALILI S type CPU Units ELILI S type CPU Units 50 hours at 25 C N NALILI S type CPU Units without a battery 40 hours at 25 C CP1E ELILI S ype CPU Unit 50 hours Mown dn Buppeg z amp gt o 5 40 hours E Oo CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a battery o g 25 hours Sv 20hours Qa E o s m OhollsLoosseeesceeccemeseccooccN UU ce T hours paars Sea ee i i i 25 C 40 C 60 C Ambient temperature The following areas are unstable when power is interrupted for longer than the I O memory backup
61. VN O 0 A Q MN Qo 18 4 The flow of using the CX Programmer from startup through starting PLC operation is shown below Start CX Programmer Select Start Programs OMRON CX One CX Programmer CX Programmer Create new project Select CP 1E in the Change PLC Dialog Box Create program Example Press the C Key to input a NC input condition Save program Select File Save As Connect online to the CP1E Select PLC Work Online Change operating mode Select PLC Operating mode Program Transfer program PLC system Select PLC Transfer Transfer PC gt PLC settings Restart the CP1E Once turn OFF the power supply to the CP1E CPU Unit then turn ON again Start operation CP1E CPU Unit operation will start CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations i Start CX Programmer Select Start Programs OMRON CX One CX Programmer The CX Programmer will start The title display will appear followed by the Main Window D My Documents gm Internet Set Progam Access anc Oetauts 4 3 Email zl xtlcok Ey BS Windows Catalog DW Windows Update m O Frogranener V Accessories W ss Games od Raw B Notepad BD rere Explorer Vf Online Manroals Wi MEN Explorer di CNet Network Configuration Too MEN Ex LL MM rere DOF Progeacnmen Heip Un Fle Conversion Utity PH PLC Bacao Tool f Release Notes po Remote Assistance
62. Wd 1 Wd Wd Word DECREMENT Decrements the 4 digit hexadecimal content of the specified word BINARY by 1 Wd 1 Wd Wd Word DOUBLE DEC L Decrements the 8 digit hexadecimal content of the specified REMENT words by 1 BINARY Wd 1 Wd 1 Wd 1 Wd Wd 1st word INCREMENT B Increments the 4 digit BCD content of the specified word by 1 BCD B 594 Wd Wd Word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Wd 1 Wd A 17 suon ung uononnsul T Y suoinonasu jueuieJoeueuieJou 9 L V Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function DOUBLE 4 BL Increments the 8 digit BCD content of the specified words by 1 INCREMENT BL 595 BCD Wd 1 Wd 1 Wait Wd Wd 1st word DECREMENT B Decrements the 4 digit BCD content of the specified word by 1 BCD Wd 24 Wd Wd Word DOUBLE DEC BL Decrements the 8 digit BCD content of the specified words by 1 REMENT BCD A 1 9 Wd 1st word Symbol Math Instructions Wd 1 Wd 1 Wd 1 Wd Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SIGNED Adds 4 digit single word hexadecimal data and or constants BINARY ADD WITHOUT Signed binary CARRY Signed binary CY will turn Au Augend word ON when 8 Signed binary Ad Addend word there is a R Result w
63. sDumeg uieis g Ld pue dnjes 21d e vl CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 7 14 Serial Communications 14 3 No protocol Communications with General Components No protocol communications can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 3 1 Overview CP1E CPU Units and general devices with serial communications ports can be used for no protocol communications No protocol communications enable sending and receiving data using the TRANSMIT TXD and RECEIVE RXD instructions without using a protocol and without data conversion e g no retry pro cessing data type conversion or process branching based on received data The serial communications mode is set to RS 232C CP1E N NADIO S type CPU Unit Al Se al E z kA 9 nding receiving data TXD or RXD pe General component e g barcode reader RS 232C or RS422A 485 No protocol communications are used to send data in one direction to or from general external devices that have an RS 232C or RS 422A 485 port using TXD or RXD For example simple no protocol communications can be used to input data from a barcode reader or output data to a printer The following table lists the no protocol communication functions supported by CP1E PLCs Max Frame format Communica Transfer 5 UNDE Method amountof tions direction
64. 10 000A Decimal value Hexadecimal value integer using 0 to F Decimal symbol Hexadecimal symbol Application MOV amp 10 DO MOV 000A DO example Stores 10 decimal 000A hex in DO Stores 4000A hex amp 10 decimal in DO Precautions for An error will occur and the left bus bar An error will occur and the left bus bar will be correct use will be displayed in red if a hexadecimal displayed in red if a hexadecimal value value including A to F is input with amp including A to F is input without from the from the CX Programmer CX Programmer The input will be treated as an address The input will be treated as an address in the in the CIO Area and the contents of that CIO Area and the contents of that address address will be specified if a decimal will be specified if a decimal value without value without amp is input from the CX is input from the CX Programmer Programmer Range 16 bits amp 0 to 65535 0000 to FFFF 32 bits amp 0 to 4294967295 00000000 to 4FFFFFFFF CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Signed Binary 4 Understanding Programming Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values Notation Signed or With symbol 10 FFF6 Decimal value Hexadecimal value integer using 0 to F or sign Hexadecimal symbol Application MOV 10 DO MOV FFF6 DO example Stores 10 decimal FFF6 hex in DO Stores FFF6 hex 10 decimal in DO Pre
65. 17 24 OMRON Ethernet Option Board Status View Menu Unit Information Unit Status FINS Status Error Log hue Parameter Node i FINS Status FINS Status Node Connection Type Local Port No Remote IP Remote Port No TCP Connection No TCP status o vE Contents Show the FINS node address Connection Type Show the protocol used by connection with the related node address Local Port No Show the port number of the Ethernet Option Board for connection with the related node address Remote IP Show the IP address of the related node address Remote Port No Show the remote port number of the related node address for connection TCP Connection No If the connection is the FINS TCP show the connection number 1 to 4 TCP Status The details of TCP statu If the connection is the FINS TCP show the current con nection status s are listed as the following table Status Meaning CLOSED Connection closed LISTEN Waiting for connection SYN SENT SYN sent in active status SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent ESTABLISHED Already established CLOSE WAIT FIN received and waiting for completion FIN WAIT1 Completed and FIN sent CLOSING Completed and exchanged FIN Awaiting ACK LAST ACK FIN sent and completed Awaiting ACK FIN WAIT2 Completed and ACK received Awaiting FIN TIME WAIT After closing pauses twice the maximum segment life 2MSL
66. 17 3 2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit sesssssseseseeeeeeeneeeenennnee nennen nennen 17 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 3 3 Default Settinigs u gano ete this due re De BE a ER Cer Rede itus 17 13 17 3 4 Web Browser Setting Function sessssssesseseseeeneeneeenene mnes 17 15 17 4 Memory Allocations eere rnnn nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nai nna u o nana a anneau onu 17 26 17 441 DM Area Allocation eoi Ave cetero eroe erede te eee Rae eve e de cte er eeu dere 17 26 17 42 ClO Area Allocation iiie tp due ceci oe GNM CE eve dc E echte de ge 17 31 17 5 Trouble Shooting esee eene nennen ran rn ne n i a aua Ru enia anae 17 33 q7 551 Error LOG xr cett ae dev d o gend d EO RE ee te 17 33 17 522 ErrmorGodes s o e eed e eoe etu e ul UL i nus 17 34 17 5 3 Etror Status i 5 oe o edi Cere rei AE Eee BEI de eee gebe ce 17 36 17 6 Connection Method with the CX Programmer eere nnn nnns 17 37 qu Oi strane Se een eM ea cl ene tui obesse dlc toe pall irme ENDE E 17 37 14 0 dssdo tecti e aet eate redet delit dni rft Let dt ese 17 38 17 7 Network Installation eren eene nnne rne n n a aa i a a a 17 40 17 7 1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 17 40 1727 2 Network Installation cess ete ee dosi eei ei be et 17 40 17 8 Comparison with Previous Models 11 eene ennn nennen nn
67. 18 5 2 Force sevHReset Bits oui a RT rn dediti dares 18 26 1825 3 Online Editilig S553 ose ecole UU OUS RI eL UI NU MERI 18 27 Section A Appendices A 1 Instruction Functions sessi nennen ia aua ia i a RR ardani raa A 2 A 1 1 Sequence Input Instructions seessssesseseseeeeeeeeseene nennen nnne nennen nennen nennt enne A 2 A 1 2 Sequence Output Instructions sisii eonan ienie a senap aaeoa eiai area enne nnne nnne A 3 A 1 3 Sequence Control Instructions iesiti iante enai eeror iaeiaiai aN iria Ne NaN TE S o A 5 A 1 4 Timerand Counter Instr ctioris 2 2 101 er tete ER ae E S ABER DH DERART RATAS a A 7 A 1 5 Comparison Instructions 1 oce telo tL EHE Dese nns tere aaae qun tpe eta A 10 A 1 6 Data Movement Instructions essseesseeeeeeeenennennn enemies A 12 A 1 7 Data Shift InStr ctions siot rende potentie m noe teh o E P Adar A 15 A 1 8 Increment Decrement Instructions eeesessseeeeeeneeeen nennen nennen A 17 A 1 9 Symbol Math Instr ctiofis iccirco cient arent eee e reae kane ED A ee EP A 18 A 1 10 Conversion lristr ctions 1 2 een eee tt ed tdi i A 22 A 1 11 LOGIC nstF GliOns tem c iet a e fas Exe sh ee bise baec decere eee A 26 A 1 12 Special Math Instructions eeseesessssssssseseee eene enn netten nent rne nn nennt nitent enne A 27 A 1 13 Floating point Math Instructions ssseeseenennme enm emere nn
68. 1st word of comparison time UNSIGNED CMP Compares two unsigned binary values constants and or the con COMPARE CMP 020 tents of specified words and outputs the result to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area Unsigned binary comparison S1 Comparison data 1 Los s2 2 Comparison data 2 Arithmetic Flags gt gt lt lt lt gt A 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function DOUBLE CMPL Compares two double unsigned binary values constants and or UNSIGNED CMPL 060 the contents of specified words and outputs the result to the Arith COMPARE metic Flags in the Auxiliary Area Unsigned binary comparison n S1 Comparison data 1 L asiti BE p 824 se S2 Comparison data 2 L Arithmetic Flags gt 52 2 lt lt gt SIGNED CPS Compares two signed binary values constants and or the con BINARY COM CPS 114 tents of specified words and outputs the result to the Arithmetic PARE Flags in the Auxiliary Area Signed binary comparison Si 1 82 S1 Comparison data 1 L S2 Comparison data 2 l Arithmetic Flags gt gt lt lt lt gt DOUBLE CPSL Compares two double signed binary values constants and or the SIGNED CPSL 115 contents of specified words and outputs the result to the Arith BINARY COM metic
69. 9 600 Use Input Port No Check this checkbox if you want the user defined port number for UDP or TCP to be in effect Unchecked Address Conversion Mode Select any of the following as the method for finding and converting IP addresses from FINS node addresses Enabled for FINS UDP only Auto dynamic Automatic generation dynamic Auto static Automatic generation static Manual IP address table method Auto amp Manual Combined method Auto dynamic FINS UDP Option Select to dynamically change the remote destination IP address for FINS UDP or not To prohibit dynamic changes check the second box Change dynamically CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board Broadcast Option Set the method for specifying IP addresses for broadcasting in All 1 FINS UDP 4 3BSD All 1 4 3BSD Broadcast with host number set to all ones All 0 4 2BSD Broadcast with host number set to all zeros Normally the default setting should be used FINS TCP Protected When this option is selected if the FINS TCP connection is set to a Unchecked server and if an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 is set to destination IP address any connection request from other than the setting IP address will be denied Select this option to prevent faulty operation by FINS commands from specific nodes from affecting the PLC i HTTP Server Setup sbumes
70. Cleared when operation starts Mud Unit ARS url Cleared when range comparison Refreshed Qnetion Mer ag table is registered E Hus 02 High speed Counter 5 IDIUction ts gn sp OFF PV not in range executed to Range 3 Comparison ON py in range read the Condition Met Flag results of 03 High speed Counter 5 range com Range 4 Comparison parison Condition Met Flag 04 High speed Counter 5 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 5 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag 08 High speed Counter 5 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 5 son operation Cleared when operation starts starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter 5 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 5 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when the PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 63 ssauppy Aq suone ojry ery faeixny z v SpJOM Kuo peaH L 2 V Appendices Address Words Bits A327 10 High speed Counter 5 Count Direction Function This flag indicates whether the high speed counter is currently being in
71. Cmt1_1 gt Cmt2_1 Increment the numbers found from tail Cmt1_1 gt Cmt1_2 Assign a new number to the end of the IO comment Cmt1_1 gt Cmt1_1_ C Attach same I0 comment Cmt1_1 gt Cmt1_1 Target Automatic creation rule Description Symbol names Increment the numbers found The symbol name is searched for a number starting from from head the beginning and any number that is found is incre mented by 1 If no number is found an underbar and a sequential number starting from 1 are appended Assign a new number to the And underbar and sequential number starting from 1 end of the symbol name are appended to the end of the symbol name I O comments Increment the numbers found The I O comment is searched for a number starting from from head the beginning and any number that is found is incre mented by 1 If no number is found an underbar and a sequential number starting from 1 are appended Assign a new number to the An underbar and a sequential number starting from 1 end of the I O comment are appended to the end of the I O comment Attach same I O comment The same I O comment is used for the copy wre16o04d Joppe e Bunea 8T 18 3 2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs Always save the ladder program that you have created This section describes how to check save and read a ladder program i Checking a Ladder Program for Errors You can check for errors in a program by compil
72. Cycle time J Cycle time i Instruction Instruction execution execution i Output ON delay Outputs i i Minimum I O i D Response Time e Maximum I O Response Time The I O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I O refresh period of the CPU Unit The maximum I O response time is calculated as follows Maximum I O response time Input ON delay Cycle time x 2 Output ON delay O refresh Inputs i Input ON delay Status read to i the CPU Unit T Cycle time J Cycle time Instruction Instruction ml Instruction execution execution execution Output ON delay Outputs i Maximum I O Response Time A 80 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Calculation Example Conditions Appendices Input ON delay 1 ms normal input 0 08 to 0 11 with input constant set to 0 ms Output ON delay 0 1 ms transistor output Cycle time 20 ms Minimum I O response time 1 ms 20 ms 0 1 ms 21 1 ms Maximum I O response time 1 ms 20 ms x 2 0 1 ms 41 1 ms i Input Constant Setting Input constant setting can be set in the PLC Setup Increasing the input constants slowers the input response time and reduces the effects of chattering and noise Decreasing the input constants fasters the input response time and allows reception of shorter input pulses but the puls
73. High speed counter 1 A273 upper digits and A272 lower digits High speed counter 2 A317 upper digits and A316 lower digits High speed counter 3 A319 upper digits and A318 lower digits High speed counter 4 A323 upper digits and A322 lower digits High speed counter 5 A325 upper digits and A324 lower digits m t nm mm sm tw SH J SB J SJ eS High speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units i Reading the Value When a Ladder Program is Executed Reading the High speed Counter PV with a PRV Instruction Execution condition C1 Port specifier example for high speed counter input 0 fixed C2 Control data for reading PV 7 77 S First destination word 15 0 D100 PV data lower bytes D101 PV data upper bytes High speed counter PV that was read 11 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters 11 2 5 Frequency Measurement i Overview This function measures the frequency of the high speed counter input pulses synduj sauno p ds yIH Z TT The input pulse frequency can be read by executing the PRV instruction The measured frequency is output in 8 digit hexadecimal and expressed in Hz The frequency measurement function can be used with high speed counter 0 only The frequency can be measured while a high speed counter 0 comparison operation is in progress Frequency measurement can be performed at
74. Indicates in binary the number of Retained Cleared Refreshed 15 Built in RS 485 Port bytes of data received when the serial when data is Reception Counter option port or built in RS 485 port is in received No protocol Mode no protocol mode CP1E N30 40 60 SD or NA20 CPU Unit only A400 Error code When a non fatal error user defined Cleared Cleared Refreshed FALS or system error or a fatal error when error user defined FALS or system error occurs occurs the 4 digit hexadecimal error code is written to this word Note When two or more errors occur simultaneously the highest error code will be recorded A401 00 Other Fatal Error Flag ON when a fatal error that is not OFF No other fatal Cleared Cleared Refreshed A314 defined for A401 01 to A401 15 occurs error when error Detailed information is output to the ON Other fatal error occurs bits of A314 Note There are no errors that affect this flag at this time This flag is reserved by the system 06 FALS Error Flag ON when a fatal error is generated by ON FALS executed Cleared Cleared Refreshed A400 fatal error the FALS instruction The CPU Unit will OFF FALS not exe when error stop operating and the ERR ALM indi cuted occurs cator will light The corresponding error code will be written to A400 Error codes C101 to C2FF correspond to FALS numbers 001 to 511 Note This flag will be turned OFF when the FALS errors are cleared 08 Cycle Time Too Long ON if the cycl
75. PLS2 target position change in same direction at same speed PLS2 target position change in same direction at different speed The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts As a guideline the wait time will be O to 3 ms A 84 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices A 4 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions A Overview of Operation for Power Interruptions Power Supply Voltage Drop If the power supply voltage falls below the specified value 85 of rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode operation will be stopped and all outputs will be turned OFF Detection of Momentary Power Interruptions The system will continue to run if the momentary power interruption lasts less than 10 ms 2ms for DC power supply If power is interruped for longer than 10 ms 2ms for DC power supply a momentary power interruption will be detected or undetected If the momentary power interruption is detected the CPU Unit will be stopped and outputs will be turned OFF Below 85 of rated voltage 10ms 0 Oto10msmax TE 0 to 2ms max for DC power supply Momentary power interruption not detected Operation continues Supply lt n voltage i 10 ms min s 2ms min for DC power supply Supply voltage 1 Operation will continue or stop depending on whether a momentary power interruption is detected Automatic Rec
76. Phase Z 0 V COM 24V 0v 24V Do not use the same I O power supply as other equipment Power provided e OV Power supply ar L Encoder Y oT 24V ov CP1E CPU Unit lA Phase A o X i a lg ani Phase B o d bd LL z Phase Z mE o NJ z L E COM i Writing the Ladder Program Execution Generating interrupts for the high speed counter PV num ber of pulses and perform high speed processing Program Specify interrupt tasks with CTBL instructions Reference 11 3 High speed Counter Interrupts Reading the high speed counter PV number of pulses Read the high speed counter PV from the Auxiliary Area and convert it to position or length data using instruc tions or measure the length using con mparison instructions such as gt and lt 11 2 4 Reading the Present Value Reading the high speed counter frequency speed 11 6 Execute a PRV instruction 11 2 5 Frequency Measurement CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 1 3 Specifications 11 High speed Counters Item Description Pulse input method Increment pulse Differential phase Up down pulse Pulse direction Counting mode inputs inputs x4 inputs inputs Input signal Increment Phase A Up pulse Pulse Phase B D
77. Select Online Edit Begin from the 18 21 CX Programmer Running NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram FD File Edit View Insert Program iJK l Simulation Tools Window Help PLC Menu Ose mam ie A44 E The gray color will be cleared from aqa SENE aaae w ji opste the Ladder Section Window to indi DA A BB eS d R E operating Mode cate that the ladder program can be c grm seem edited ir nt 2mm Settings Clear All Memory Areas nisl PLC Configuration 4 Ft Memory eternal oes Ppa Force i i END l Set Reset 4 Edit the ladder program m 10065 hm o0 Tirer und OBca G Set value 2 top H cnr Counter 5 Select Online Edit Send 7 48 21 CX Programmer Running NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram F Fie Edt View Insert Program GES Simulation Tools Window Help Changes from the PLC Menu Ose Uam rs aw 259 Work Online Ctrl The edited rung will be transferred a X Q T8 E E a ao ors 1 o0og ggL ylei to the CP1E DA fa B6 RD operating uode xx El amp NewProject Transfer gt 8 NewPLC1 CPLE Monitor Mc 3 Symbols Protection gt Send Changes Ctrl Shift E g Fk Clear All Memory Areas Six Cancel Ctrl U rror log PLC Clock PLC Configuration Em Go to Online Edit Rung m Memory E El a Programs itor NewProgram1 00 Trace E 52 Symbols Baris pP A amp Section1 2 Qu Set Reset T 18 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Man
78. Settings tion that the Origin Input Signal s rising edge is detected when moving in the origin search 12 22 direction CW Performs origin search in the clockwise direction CCW Performs origin search in the counterclockwise direction Detection Set one of the following three methods to determine the parameters related to the Method Origin Proximity Input Signal Method 0 The direction is reversed at the Origin Proximity Input Signal The Origin Input Signal is accepted after the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON and then OFF Method 1 The direction is not reversed at the Origin Proximity Input Signal The Origin Input Signal is accepted after the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON Method 2 The Origin Proximity Input Signal is not used The Origin Input Signal is accepted without using the Origin Proximity Input Signal Only origin search proximity speed can be the origin search speed Search Select one of the following two modes for the origin search operation pattern Operation Inverse 1 The direction is reversed when the Limit Input Signal is received while moving in the origin search direction Inverse 2 An error is generated and operation is stopped if the Limit Input Signal is received while moving in the origin search direction Operation This parameter determines the I O signals that are used for origin search Mode Mode 0 Use when connecting to a stepping motor that does
79. Specify Hz 4ms the amount to decrease the speed Hz per 4 ms interval Origin Return Instruction ORG C1 Port specifier C4 1 Pulse output 0 0000 Pulse output 1 0001 C2 F C2 Control data Origin search and pulse direction output method 0100 Note An instruction execution error will occur if the origin is not defined relative coordinate system when the ORG instruction is executed to perform an origin return operation 12 32 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output The present value of the pulse output can be changed by using the INI instruction To define the present value as the origin set the pulse output PV to 0 using the INI instruction INI instruction executed uonisod uibuo buluysg p ZT New origin Present origin Pulse output PV Example Setting the Present Position as the Origin Execution condition INI 80000 r C1 Port specifier example for pulse output 0 0002 r C2 Control data example for changing PV D100 p S First word with new PV 15 0 Ly pool 0 000 D101 0 0 0 0 Operands Settings C1 Port specifier 0000 Pulse output 0 0001 Pulse output 1 C2 Control data 0002 Changes PV S First word with new PV Store the new PV in S and S 1 32 bits CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12
80. Specify the frequency after acceleration or deceleration in Hz A 42 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic ORIGIN ORG SEARCH Variations Symbol Operand ORG 889 P Port specifier C Control data CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Function Performs an origin search or origin return operation 1 Origin Proximity Origin Input i Signal i i Pulse frequency Origin search high speed Origin search deceleration rate i i Origin search H acceleration rate H Deceleration point Origin search low speed t Origin search L initial speed i Time Start Decelerate from high to low speed Stop Execution of ORG Indicated by the Origin Proximity Input Signal Indicated by the Origin Input Signal Example for reversal mode 1 and method 0 described later The following parameters must be set in the PLC Setup before ORG 889 can be executed Origin search Origin return Origin Search Function Origin Search Return Initial Enable Disable Speed Origin Search Operating Origin Return Target Mode Speed Origin Search Operation Origin Return Acceleration Setting Rate Origin Detection Method Origin Return Deceleration Origin Search Direction Rate Setting Origin Search Return Initial Speed Origin Search High Speed Origin Search Proximity
81. Temperature Sensor Unit 2nd Unit CP1W DA041 Analog Output Unit 3rd Unit Expansion I O Unit with 40 O Points CIO 0 00 to CIO 0 11 CIO 1 00 to CIO 1 11 CIO 210 CIO 5 24 inputs TS002 16 outputs CIO 100 00 to CIO 100 07 CIO 101 00 to CIO 101 07 one CIO 6 00 to CIO 6 11 Nonie CIO 7 00 to CIO 7 11 24i DA041 inputs 16 outputs CIO 102 to CIO 105 CIO 106 00 to CIO 106 07 CIO 107 00 to CIO 107 07 bit 15 14 O0 O1 Cannot be used 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 O2 it with 40 I O Points 03 O4 Tempe O5 O6 OO0o0000000 Cannot be used LE H 07 CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102 Cannot be used Expansion I O Unit with 40 yo Points CPU Unit with 40 I O Points CIO 103 CIO 104 Analog Output Uni CIO 105 CIO 106 CIO 107 Cannot be used Expansion I O Unit with 40 I O Points CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 PLC Setup This section describes the parameters in the PLC Setup which are used to make basic settings for the CP1E CPU Unit 7 1 Overview of the PLC Setup sseesen rn nmn 7 2 7 2 PLC Setup Settings ccc cece cece enn nnns
82. This value is cleared at the start of operation The value is c Cycle unstable for CPU Unit version 1 0 or earlier 3 i 10 4 3 Duplicate Processing in each Task Observe the following precautions if a word address in I O memory is manipulated by instructions both in a cyclic task and an interrupt task If the interrupt task overwrites an I O memory address used by one of the interrupted instruction s operands the data may be overwritten when the saved data is restored when processing returns to the cyclic task To prevent certain instructions from being interrupted during processing insert the DI or El instruction just before and after the instructions using the DI or El instruction before the instructions to disable interrupts and the DI or El instruction after the instructions to enable interrupts again EN Additional Information Normally if an interrupt occurs execution of the cyclic task will be interrupted immediately even during execution of an instruction in the cyclic task and the partially processed data is saved After the interrupt task had been completed the cyclic task restarts with the data saved before the interrupt processing UOnno9x3 JO BPO pue Ayoug xsej 1dnueju L p 0L CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 13 10 Interrupts 10 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 High speed Counters SSS This section describes the high speed counter inputs high speed counter interrupts and the f
83. a ale m res Ns tg 2 wo oy zw Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board Note 1 Please use CX Programmer version 9 12 or higher CX ONE version 4 1 or higher 2 Use the Web browser to set the CP1W CIF41 3 NS series HMI cannot use CP1W CIF41 through Ethernet i Connecting the CX Programmer to PLCs Online via Ethernet Connecting within the Same Segment Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS UDP FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETNOT1 ETN11 ETN21 and CJ1W ETN11 ETN21 The CX Programmer can be connected and used with FINS UDP Connecting through Multiple Segments Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss that occur during multilevel routing For CX Programmer FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online Using Media with Unreliable Connections Such as a Wireless LAN Use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS TCP It provides automatic recovery at the TCP IP layer from communications errors such as packet loss resulting from unreli able connections For CX Programmer FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online 17 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board Connecting from a Personal Computer
84. block Pulse plus direction Normal output PWM output number label CIO 100 00 Pulse output 0 pulse Normal output 0 01 Pulse output 1 pulse Normal output 1 PWM output 02 Pulse output 0 direction Normal output 2 03 Pulse output 1 direction Normal output 3 Origin Searches Use the following input and output terminals for origin searches Input Terminals N20 30 40 60 SL1 or NA20 CPU Units Input terminal block Setting in PLC Setup Other functions that cannot be used at the same time Terminal ick High speed aeni Terminal Enable origin searches for Normal Interrupt Beo counter setting label number pulse outputs 0 and 1 inputs inputs inputs Increment pulse input CIO 0 06 Pulse 0 Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick High speed input 6 input 6 response counter 5 input 6 07 Pulse 1 Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick input 7 input 7 response input 7 10 Pulse 0 Origin proximity Normal input signal input 10 11 Pulse 1 Origin proximity Normal input signal input 11 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 5 M IN AO T CT uonejedo JO MO 4 Z ZL 12 Pulse Outputs N14 CPU Units Input terminal block Setting in PLC Setup Other functions that cannot be used at the same time Terminal d Highspeed block Terminal Enable origin searches Normal Interrupt Quick response counter setting
85. label number for pulse outputs Oand 1 inputs inputs inputs Increment pulse input CIO 0 03 Pulse 0 Origin proximity Normal Interrupt Quick response input signal input 3 input 3 input 3 05 Pulse 1 Origin proximity Normal Interrupt Quick response High speed input signal input 5 input 5 input 5 counter 4 06 Pulse 0 Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick response High speed input 6 input 6 input 6 counter 5 07 Pulse 1 Origin input signal Normal Interrupt Quick response input 7 input 7 input 7 Output Terminals Output terminal block Setting in PLC Setup Other functions that cannot be used at the same time Terminal Terminal Enable origin searches for pulse block label number outputs 0 and 1 OIE fu de CIO 100 04 Pulse 0 Error counter reset output Normal output 4 05 Pulse 1 Error counter reset output Normal output 5 Note When the origin search is in operating mode 0 normal output 4 and 5 can be used at the same time i Connecting the Servo Drive and External Sensors Connections for Pulse Output 0 Terminal block Origin search Terminal i Addresses Signal block Terminal B Operating mode 0 Operating mode 1 Operating mode 2 label number CIO 100 00 CIO 100 00 Stored in A276 Pulse Connect to Servo Drive s pulse input PULS 02 CIO 100 02 ene Direction Connect to Servo Drive s direction input SIGN Normal input The external signal must be
86. signal from the Servo Drive Sor or other device Error counter Not used Connected to the error Connected to the error reset output The origin search operation counter reset of the Servo counter reset of the Servo is completed when the origin Drive Drive is detected Positioning Not used Not used Connected to the Position completed input CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 ing Completed Signal from the Servo Drive 12 25 12 Pulse Outputs Operations Detecting the Origin during Deceleration from High Speed Operating Mode 0 without Error Counter Reset Output without Positioning Completed Input Connect the sensor s open collector output signal to the Origin Input Signal The Origin Input Sig nal s response time is 0 1 ms when set as NO contacts When the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received the motor will begin decelerating from the origin search high speed to the origin search proximity speed In this operating mode the Origin Input Sig nal will be detected if it is received during this deceleration and an Origin Input Signal Error error code 0202 will be generated In this case the motor will decelerate to a stop Origin input turns ON during deceleration Origin Proximity 1 Input Signal 0 i s 1 i Origin Input 0 Signal Original pulse output pattern CCW CW Starts when ORG is executed Origin Input Signal Error error code 0202 P
87. tion is shown in the following diagram Power flow P F execution condition Power flow P F execution condition Instruction condition Instruction Instruction condition Flags Flag 1 Input instructions only 2 Not output for all instructions Operands Operands sources destinations e Power Flow The power flow is the execution condition that is used to control the execution and instructions when programs are executing normally In a ladder program power flow represents the status of the exe cution condition Input Instructions Load instructions indicate a logical start and outputs the execution condition Outputs the execution d condition Intermediate instructions input the power flow as an execution condition and output the power flow to an intermediate or output instruction Outputs the execution condition pe petet O D0j Output Instructions Output instructions execute all functions using the power flow as an execution condition LD power flow Power flow for V output instruction Input block Output block 4 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 3 2 Operands 4 Understanding Programming Operands specify preset instruction parameters that are used to specify I O memory area contents or constants Operands are given in boxes in the ladder programs Addresses and constants are entered for the operands to enable executing the instructions Operands are classified as
88. 0 8 V open circuit detection will activate and converted data will be 8000 Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal 189C 6300 1770 6000 0000 0 FED4 300 0 to 20 mA Inputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the 0 to 20 mA range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 The entire data range is FED4 to 189C 300 to 6 300 A negative voltage is expressed as a two s complement Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal 189C 63004 EN 1770 6000 1 mA 0000 0 nv 3 0 mA 20m 1mA FED4 300 15 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Analog I O Function e 4to 20 mA When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the 4 to 20 mA range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 The entire data range is FED4 to 189C 300 to 6 300 Inputs between 3 2 and 4 mA are expressed as two s complements If the input falls below 3 2 mA open circuit detection will activate and converted data will be 8000 Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal A 189C 6300 1770 6000 0000 0 FED4 300 soDuey jeubis 1ndino pue 1nduj Hoyeuy z s 15 2 2 Analog Output Signal Ranges 10 to 10 V Outputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values F 448 to OBB8 3 000 to 3 000 corre spond to an analog voltage range of 10 to 10 V Specify a neg
89. 00 g 4 WA C Origin search in progress 9 Origin search Origin search start switch completed ORG E ae 0000 H 0100 Origin search in progress A280 05 Origin search completed No origin Flag WO0 01 W0 02 ii Ale Origin search Lift positioning completed start W0 05 0 03 0 4 4 C Lift positioning start PCB stored PCB storage completed PCB storage enabled 100 03 PCB storage enabled Guiuonisog enissejBo4g ejdninjN sgod BurkeAuo LMA L Z ZL Positioning Lift 10 000 pulses relative at a time wo 02 wo 04 W0 03 T ift positioning in progress 4 O Ue pasa in rg Lift positioning Lift positioning start completed PLS2 WO0 03 FLS 0000 Lift positioning 0100 in progress DO D6 A280 03 W0 04 Lift positioning completed Pulse Output Completed Flag Counter for number of lifts number of PCBs stored WO0 04 ti CNTX Lift positioning completed 0000 WO0 09 D20 Lower positioning completed P First Cycle First Cycle Flag CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 39 12 Pulse Outputs When the stocker is not full CO OFF store PCB and repeat lift positioning after PCB storage is completed W0 05 mae woe um o Lift positioning Stocker full completed When the stocker is full CO 2 ON move the stocker and start lower positioning after stocker mo
90. 01 CP1E Ladder Program External power supply input Enables suondn uaquy Mod 104 uonejedo 21d t V Emergency E stop input Emergency stop emergency stop output Emergency 0 00 release input 0 01 stop output r Emergency Stop output awl esuodsey eDueu 1ndino asindg S g v CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 87 Appendices A 88 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Index Symbols D Specifying indirect addresses in BCD Mode 4 13 5 12 D Specifying indirect addresses in Binary Mode 4 13 5 12 Numerics 1 N NTUEIDkKS 7 pes 14 8 14 5 A Absolute coordinates eeeeeees 12 13 Absolute positioning eeeee 12 13 AGGANSIUCHON einen ac niis ee 12 11 12 17 Access Error Flag P AER 5 19 Allocated words CPU Units tidie uet ete eet ode 6 3 Expansion I O Unit seeeeeeenene 6 4 Allocating functions to built in input terminals 8 6 Allocating functions to built in output terminals 8 8 Allocations for Expansion I O Units 6 4 Allocations for Expansion Units essssse 6 6 Always OFF Flag P Off senes 5 19 Always ON Flag P On 5 19 Automatic I O comment creation sse 18 14 Automatic symbol name creation 18 14 Auxiliary Area
91. 1 word When power is turned ON 10 words 2 7 3 PC Link Mode ALL ALL When power is turned ON Masters 2 7 4 No NT PC Link Max 1 0 When power is turned ON Highest unit number of PT that can be connected to the PLC 7 7 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 2 6 Built in Inputs i High speed Counter Settings 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Use high speed counter 0 Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 1 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation Circular mode 1 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 1 2 Reset Z phase software reset Z phase software reset stop When power is turned ON Note Only a software reset can be Stop omparing comparing set if an increment pulse Software reset input is set for the input set stop comparing 2 Phase Z software reset compar ing Software reset comparing 1 3 Input Setting Differential phase input Differential phase input x4 When power is turned ON Note Make the same input setting for high speed counters 0 1 and 2 x4 Pulse direction input Up Down pulse input Increment pulse input 2 Use high speed counter 1 Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 2 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear
92. 11 High speed Counters i Pulse Direction Input The Pulse Direction Input uses a direction signal and a pulse signal The count is incremented or dec remented depending on the status ON or OFF of the direction signal Conditions for Incrementing Decrementing the Count Pulse f i f ii ji ji 1 1 f f 1 li jj ii Direction Pulse Count value OFF ON OFF No change Direction ON OFF2ON Increment ON OFF ON No change olt Te sl4 s e z 8 7 e s 4 s 2 o OFF ONOFF No change OFF OFF gt ON Decrement OFF gt ON ON No change ON ON OFF No change ON OFF OFF No change The count is incremented when the direction signal is ON and decremented when it is OFF Only rising edges are counted H Precautions for Correct Use Interval of Phase Z input signal Do not input the phase Z signal at a high frequency The interval of phase Z input signal must be longer than 500us If the phase Z signal is input at a high frequency cycle time exceeded error may occur Phase Z signal 500us min Interval of direction changing If the input setting is set for pulse direction inputs do not change the direction at a high fre quency The interval of direction signal ON or OFF must be longer than 3ms plus the sum of execution time for interrupt tasks that
93. 127 Ox7F Reset the IP address 03 IP address table The IP address table information is incorrect Reset the IP address table If the error problem cannot be resolved replace the CPU Unit 04 IP router table error The IP router table information is incorrect Reset the IP router table If the prob lem cannot be resolved replace the CPU Unit 13 Baud rate disagree Set the PLC Settings on the Serial Option Port Tab as follows and then turn the ment power ON again Baud 115200 Format 7 2 E Mode Host Link Unit Number 0 Except the settings mentioned above ERR LED will be lit without error codes 14 Address disagree The local IP address host number and FINS node address do not agree Confirm ment whether they agree or not The local IP address of the Ethernet Option Board is 192 168 250 1 The default FINS node address of the Ethernet Option Board is 1 Change the settings either in the allocated words in the DM area or by the Web browser function to make the local IP address host number and FINS node address be the same In addition Change the Address Conversion Mode to Manual or Auto amp Manual 15 EEPROM error Turn the power of the CPU Unit OFF and ON again to restart the Ethernet Option Board V Precautions for Correct Use When the values set by the Web browser function are wrong the local IP address in valid at that time will be saved not the values set in the words D1455 and D1456 Confirm the data o
94. 2 9 Built in AD DA Built in Analog I O Settings seeneneneennenee 7 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Section 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations 8 1 Built in Functions 1 cite eee eee 8 2 8 2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built in Functions errem 8 3 8 3 Terminal Allocations for Built in Functions uuuuuuuuuueessssseseeess 8 4 8 3 1 Specifying the Functions to Use nennen nennen nennen nennen rnnt nennen 8 4 8 3 2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup ssssseseseeeeeeeennen nennen nennen neni 8 4 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals seen eene 8 6 8 3 4 Allocating Built in Output Temrinals sess 8 8 Section 9 Quick response Inputs 9 1 Quick response Inputs eene nennen nene n aai a a i an 9 2 9 1 1 OVOtVIe Wis etre n D dte a C eie i rie ae ie ME 9 2 9 1 2 Flow of Opetaltion s Sis sal tease eite Aet e EUM e P URP eU us 9 3 Section 10 Interrupts 10 1 Interrupts 10 2 TOI OVERVIEW ike ih e uei eoi ERE te ae E eoe ee tle rentes 10 2 10 2 Input Interrupts i nnn nnn na iiu nra iiu nu sa iiu a no au uu nau a 10 3 10 271 QVerVIeW 5 ioci te eee epit m eet e er re m eh Bat 10 3 1022 2 Flow ol Operation visits eem oed ar Bee ee iln ie Gia aR 10 4 1023 Applicaton Example iinet ee ieee i eee eevee el ee
95. 3 300 to 3 300 A negative voltage is expressed as a two s complement Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal 0CE4 3300 0BB8 3000 soDuey jeubis 1ndino pue 1nduj Bojeuy z s 11V 10V 90000 0 0v 10V 11V F448 3000 F31C 3300 Oto 10 V Input When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the 0 to 10 V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 The entire data range is FED4 to 189C 300 to 6 300 A negative voltage is expressed as a two s complement sobue y jeubis 3nduj Bojeuy T Z ST Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal A 189C 6300 1770 6000 0 5 V 0000 0 l 4FED4 300 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 7 15 Analog I O Function e Oto 5 V Input When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the 0 to 5 V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 The entire data range is FED4 to 189C 300 to 6 300 A negative voltage is expressed as a two s complement Converted Data Hexadecimal Decimal A 189C 6300 1770 6000 0 25 V 0000 0 T FED4 300 1 to 5 V Input When the resolution is setto 1 6 000 the 1 to 5 V range corresponds to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 The entire data range is FED4 to 189C 300 to 6 300 Inputs between 0 8 and 1 V are expressed as two s complements If the input falls below
96. 33 12 Pulse Outputs 12 5 Reading the Pulse Output Present Value The present value of a pulse output can be read in the following two ways Value refreshed at the I O refresh timing Read PV from Auxiliary Area Value updated when a program is executed gt Read PV by executing a PRV instruction I Reading the PV Refreshed at the I O Refresh Timing The PV that is stored in the following words can be read using the MOVL instruction or other instruc tions Read PV Auxiliary Area words Pulse output 0 A277 upper digits and A276 lower digits Pulse output 1 A279 upper digits and A278 lower digits i Reading the Value When a Program is Executed e Reading the Pulse Output PV with a PRV Instruction Execution condition PRV 80000 t C1 Port specifier example for pulse output 0 0000 C2 Control data example for reading PV D100 4 r D First destination word 15 0 C D100 Present value data lower bytes Pulse output PV that was read D101 Present value data upper bytes 12 34 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags f Auxiliary Area Allocations Name Description Values hule uati Pube n uput Pulse Output PV PV range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Leftmost 4 digits A277 A279 Storage Words 2 147 483 64
97. 7 response signal input 7 E10CPU Units PLC Setup Interrupt input settings on Built in Input Tab High speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built Termi l Page in Input Tab Page nal Terminal Normal Interrupt Quick Use block number label Interrupt guci Increment Differential p e direc Normal input inputs response pulse input phase x4 or tion inputs up down CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 increment input phase A or up pulse input input 01 Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 Counter 1 increment input phase B or pulse input down input 02 Normal input 2 Interrupt Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 Counter 0 input 2 response increment input phase A or up direction input 2 input 03 Normal input 3 Interrupt Quick Counter 1 Counter 1 input 3 response phase B or direction input 3 down input 04 Normal input 4 Interrupt Quick Counter 3 Counter 0 Counter 0 input 4 response increment input Phase Z or reset input input 4 reset input 05 Normal input 5 Interrupt Quick Counter 4 Counter 1 Counter 1 input 5 response increment input Phase Z or reset input input 5 reset input Note 1 The same pulse inputs must be used for high speed counter 0 and high speed counter 1 2 High speed counter 2 cannot be used if the input setting of high speed counter 0 or high speed counter 1 is set for differential phase inputs 4x pulse direction inputs or up dow
98. 8 3 Terminal Allocations for Built in Functions 8 3 1 Specifying the Functions to Use A CP1E CPU Unit uses the same built in I O terminals for different functions Allocate the I O terminals in advance making sure that each terminal is used for only one function Specify the input functions in the PLC Setup from the CX Programmer and specify the output functions in PLC Setup and programming instructions 8 3 2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup Functions are enabled by setting parameters in the PLC Setup Set the functions so that no more than one function uses the same terminal Select function numbers so that high speed counter inputs and inputs for other functions such as interrupt inputs quick response inputs and origin inputs do no con flict with each other Input functions can be selected by selecting the Use high speed counter Check Box in a High speed Counter Area on the Built in Input Tab Page or by setting an input to Interrupt or Quick in the Interrupt Input Area of the same page PLC Settings NewPLC1 E 5 xj File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Puk 4 gt High Speed Counter 0 High Speed Counter 1 I Use high speed counter 0 Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode rmode Circ Counting mode 5 Select the Use high speed Circular Max Count Circular Max Count counter Check Box for a High Reset phase softwarer
99. Board 17 1 3 Specifications Item Specifications Name CP series Etherent Option Board Model number CP1W CIF41 Type 100Base TX Can be used as 10 Base T Applicable Programming Device CX Programmer version 9 12 or higher Unit classification CP series Option Board Mounting location One slot for a CP series Option Board Size of Buffers 8K bytes Transfer Media access method CSMA CD Modulation method Baseband Transmission paths Star form Baud rate 100 Mbit s 100Base TX 10 Mbit s 10Base T However the internal baud rate between the CPU Unit and the Ethernet H Option Board is 115 2 kbps a Transmission media Unshielded twisted pair UDP Unshielded twisted pair UDP i cable cable j Categories 5 5e Categories 3 4 5 5e 5 Shielded twisted pair STP cable Shielded twisted pair STP cable amp Categories 1000 at 5 5e Categories 1000 at 3 4 5 5e 1 Transmission Dis 100 m distance between hub and node E tance g Number of cascade No restrictions if switching hubs are used S connections Weight 23 g max Dimensions 36 4x36 4x28 2 mm WxHxD I 17 1 4 Software Configuration The software supported by the Ethernet Option Board runs in the layers shown in the following diagram suogeoyioeds L 1 It is necessary to set the communications settings before connecting the Ethernet Option Board to the CP1E CPU Unit by the Host Link p
100. C Run Restore DO from backup memory Execute Process Number of CH of DM for backup E CH Stop CPU on Instruction Error Don t register FAL to error log E type Max 1500CH DO D1499 N type Max 7000CH DO D6999 Detect Low Battery CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 3 3 CPU Unit Operation Changing the Operating Mode after Startup Use one of the following procedures Select PROGRAM MONITOR or RUN from the Startup Mode Menu Right click the PLC in the project tree and then select PROGRAM MONITOR or RUN from the Startup Mode Menu i Operating Modes and Operation The following table lists status and operations for each mode Operating mode PROGRAM MONITOR RUN Ladder program execution Stopped Executed Executed I O refresh Executed Executed Executed External I O status OFF after changing to PROGRAM mode but can be turned ON from the CX Programmer afterward Controlled by the ladder pro grams Controlled by the ladder pro grams l O memory Non retained memory Cleared Controlled by Controlled by Retained memory Retained the ladder pro the ladder pro grams grams CX Program I O memory monitoring Yes Yes Yes mui E Ladder program monitoring Yes Yes Yes Ladder pro From CPU Unit Yes Yes Yes gram transfer To CPU Unit Yes No No Checking programs Yes No No Setting the PLC Setup Yes No No Changing ladder programs Yes Yes No Force
101. CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 5 4 Operating Specifications Serial PLC Links can be used for built in RS 232C ports serial option ports or built in RS 485 ports for N30 40 60 SQ or NA20 CPU Units However two serial ports cannot be used simultaneously for Serial PLC Links Item Specifications Applicable PLCs CP1E CP1H CP1L CJ1M Baud rate 38 400 bps 115 200 bps Applicable serial ports Built in RS 232C ports serial option ports or built in RS 485 ports Both ports cannot be used for Serial PLC Links at the same time If both ports are set for Serial PLC Links either as polling node or polled node a PLC Setup setting error nonfatal error will occur and the PLC Setup Setting Error Flag A402 10 will turn ON Connection method RS 422A 485 or RS 232C connection via RS 422A 485 Option Board built in RS 485 port or RS 232C port Words allocated in CIO Area Serial PLC Link Words CIO 200 to CIO 289 Up to 10 words can be allocated for each CPU Unit Maximum number of Units 9 Units max comprising 1 Polling Unit and 8 Polled Units Link methods data refresh methods Complete link method or Polling Unit link method I Data Refresh Methods The following two methods can be used to refresh data Complete link method Polling Unit link method CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 23 SIU 2 Id Ieues s rT suoneouioeds BunejedQ p S pL
102. CPU Units have the following three operating modes PROGRAM mode The programs are not executed in PROGRAM mode This mode is used for the initial settings in PLC Setup transferring ladder programs checking ladder programs and making prepartions for executing ladder programs such as force setting resetting bits sepoy Buneiedo iun dO Z L MONITOR mode In this mode it is possible to perform online editing force set reset bits and change l O memory present values while the ladder programs are being executed Adjust ments during trial operation are also made in this mode RUN mode This is the mode in which the ladder program is executed Some operations are dis abled during this mode It is the startup mode at initial value when the CPU Unit is turned ON i Changing the Operating Mode The operating mode can be changed from the CX Programmer Changing the Startup Mode The default operating mode when the CPU Unit is turned ON is RUN mode To change the startup mode to PROGRAM or MONITOR mode set the desired mode in Startup Setting in PLC Setup from the CX Programmer a PLC Settings NewPLC1 5 x File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Builtin RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Put gt Startup Data Read Startup Mode Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Program The retained memory value becomes irregular C Monitor when running without battery
103. CW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal received as an input and sensor the input status must be written to A540 08 in the ladder program Normal input The external signal must be CCW limit Connect sensor to a normal input terminal received as an input and sensor the input status must be written to A540 09 in the ladder program CIO 0 03 CIO 0 03 Origin prox Connect to sensor for N14 CPU Unit imity input 06 CIO 0 06 Origin input Connect to open Connect to the Connect to the collector output phase Z signal from phase Z signal from from sensor or the Servo Drive the Servo Drive other device 10 CIO 0 10 Origin prox Connect to sensor for N20 30 40 60 or NA20 CPU Unit imity input CIO 100 04 CIO 100 04 Error Not used Connect to error counter reset ECRST counter of the Servo Drive reset output Normal input The external signal must be Positioning Not used Connect the Posi received as an input and completed tioning Completed the input status must be input Signal INP from the written to A540 10 in the Servo Drive to a nor ladder program mal input terminal 12 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Connections for Pulse Output 1 Terminal block Terminal A Terminal block number label Addresses Signal 12 Pulse Outputs Origin search Operating mode 0 Operating mode 1 Operating mode 2
104. Check Box is selected in the PLC Setup the backup data will automatically be restored to RAM when the power is turned back ON so that data is not lost even if power is interrupted CP1E CPU Unit A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit turned ON Built in RAM Built in EEPROM Backup Memory DM Area D DM backup data Specified number of words T 7 restored Specify the number of words starting from DO in the DM backup data is restored to the RAM when power supply is turned ON Number of CH of DM for again if the Restore D0 from backup memory Check Box is selected in the backup Box in the Startup Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup Data Read Area in PLC Setup Conditions for Executing Backup Specified words starting from DO in the built in RAM can be saved to the built in EEPROM backup memory by turning ON A751 15 These words are called the DM backup words and the data is called the DM backup data A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit can be used in any operating mode RUN MONITOR or PROGRAM mode Words that can be Backed Up ELILI S type CPU Units DO to D1499 N NALILI S type CPU Units DO to D6999 16 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 Other Functions e Number of Words to Back Up The number of words to back up starting from DO is set in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup Restoring DM Backup Data to the Built in
105. Cw XJ Search High Speed 0 Pl Detection Method Methd 0 T Search Proximity Speed O pps Acceleration Ratio Search Operation fives z Search Compensation vaw peration Mode Mode 0 Y Search Acceleration Ratio p oa Deceleration Ratio zi Origin Input Signal NC v Search Deceleration Ratio 0 Proximity Input Signal NC Positioning Monitor Time 0 a ms al DM Area Settings Settings for PLS2 for Fixed distance Positioning DO to D7 Setting details Address Data Acceleration rate 1 000 Hz 4 ms DO 03E8 Deceleration rate 1 000 Hz 4 ms D1 03E8 Target frequency 50 000 Hz D2 C350 D3 0000 Number of output pulses 10 000 pulses D4 2710 D5 0000 Starting frequency 0 Hz D6 0000 D7 0000 Settings for PLS2 to Return to Start D10 to D17 Setting details Address Data Acceleration rate 300 Hz 4 ms D10 012C Deceleration rate 200 Hz 4 ms D11 00C8 Target frequency 50 000 Hz D12 C350 D13 0000 Number of output pulses 0 pulse D14 0000 D15 0000 Starting frequency 100 Hz D16 0064 D17 0000 Number of Repeats of Fixed distance Positioning Operation D20 Setting details Address Data Number of repeats of fixed distance positioning D20 000F operation number of PCBs in stocker 12 38 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs i Ladder Program X N i Jog Operation 3 0 00 WO 01 WO0
106. D Duty Factor 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 units 0000 to 03E8 hex D specifies the duty factor of the PWM output i e the percent age of time that the output is ON Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function STEP DEFINE STEP When defining the beginning of a STEP 008 functions in following 2 ways depending on its position step a control bit is specified as and whether or not a control bit has been specified follows 1 Starts a specific step 2 Ends the step programming area i e step execution STEP 008 2 p prog g p B Bit When defining the end of a step a control bit is not specified as fol lows STEP 008 STEP START SNXT SNXT 009 is used in the following three ways SNXT 009 1 To start step programming execution B 2 To proceed to the next step control bit B Bit 3 To end step programming execution A 44 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices A 1 20 Basic I O Unit Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function I O REFRESH IORF Refreshes the specified I O words CP1W Expansion Units V O bit area CP1W Expansion I O Units B I O refreshing gt _ gt St Starting word E End word E 7 SEGMENT SDEC Converts the hexadecimal contents of the designated digit s into DECODER SDEC 078 8 bit 7 segment display code and places it into the upper or lower
107. EEPROM 03C8 Socket Error Arbitrary Resend the packet or the destination node is not in the network 03DO FLASH System setup sum value error Reset the value of system setup area Restart CPU Unit Saved 0601 LIT Option Board error Arbitrary Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the Ethernet Option Board Saved 0602 LIT Option Board mem ory error 01 Read error 02 Write error 06 Error log Restart the CPU Unit If the problem persists replace the Ethernet Option Board Saved except error log CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 FLASH Serial Option Port Communications Set tings error Set the PLC Settings on the Serial Option Port Tab as follows and then turn the power ON again Communications Settings Baud 115200 Format 7 2 E Mode Host Link 17 35 b5unoous ejqnour s T S9pO0D 1044 z S lL 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 5 3 Error Status 17 36 The Ethernet Option Board will output error status to the following word in CIO 80 of the CPU Unit This information can be used in troubleshooting errors Bit Error Correction 02 IP address setting The following cannot be used as the IP address of the Ethernet Option Board error All bits in the host ID are O or 1 All bits in the network ID are 0 or 1 All bits in the subnet ID are 1 The IP address begins with
108. Expansion Units that can be connected are given in the following table Allocated words Number of Expansion i CPU Unit a 7 Units and Expansion I O Input Bits Output Bits Units connected E E10 14 20 or CIO 0 CIO 100 0 Unit N14 20 CPU Unit E30 40 or N30 40 CIO 0 and CIO 1 CIO 100 and CIO 101 3 Units CPU Unit N60 CPU Unit CIO 0 CIO 1 and CIO 2 CIO 100 CIO 101 and CIO 102 3 Units NA20 CPU Unit CIO 0 CIO 90 and CIO 91 CIO 100 and CIO 190 3 Units Application Example CPU Unit with 40 I O Points CPU Unit with 40 I O Points CIO 0 CIO 0 00 to CIO 0 11 CIO 1 CIO 1 00 to CIO 1 11 24 inputs Input Bits sideouo uoneoollv O I Z 1 9 16 outputs Output Bits E 100 CIO 100 00 to CIO 100 07 CIO 101 CIO 101 00 to CIO 101 07 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Input Bits ciO 0 Cannot be used nput bits 24 CIO 1 I I I I I Output Bits CIO 100 Output bits 16 CIO 101 For a CPU Unit with 40 I O points a total of 24 input bits are allocated to the input terminal block The bits that are allocated are input bits CIO 0 00 to CIO 0 11 i e bits 00 to 11 in CIO 0 and input bits CIO 1 00 to CIO 1 11 i e bits 00 to 11 in CIO 1 In addition a total of 16 output bits are allocated to the output terminal block The bits that are allocated are output bits CIO 100 00 to CIO 100 07 i e bits 00 to
109. High speed counter 3 A321 10 High speed counter 4 A326 10 High speed counter 5 A327 10 High speed counter High speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units 11 2 2 Counting Ranges Settings 11 10 The following counting modes can be selected for high speed counters Linear Mode that counts in a fixed range and Circular Ring Mode that counts in a set range of any maximum value i Linear Mode Input pulses can be counted in the range between the lower limit and upper limit values If the pulse count goes beyond the lower upper limit an underflow overflow will occur and counting will stop Increment Mode 4294967295 FFFFFFFF Hex 0 000000 Hex PV overflow Up Down Mode 2147483648 0 2147483647 ie ih Hex icd Hex Maa ad Hex PV underflow PV overflow CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters i Circular Ring Mode Input pulses are counted in a loop within the set range f the count is incremented from the maximum ring count the count will be reset to 0 automatically and incrementing will continue f the count is decremented from 0 the count will be set to the maximum ring count automatically and decrementing will continue synduj auno poeoeds ubiH z rT Consequently underflows and overflows cannot occur when Ring Mode is used Count value 2 4 Maximum ring count Spouje W 1eseH E Z LL e Maximum Ring Count Use th
110. Input Setting X Input Setting z Interrupt Input IN2 Normal M IN3 Normal IN4 Normal IN5 Normal E ING Normal E IN7 Normal noma Select Quick is CPIE M40 Offline a o z Built in Input Tab Page Quick response input setting Corresponding bit address 2 IN2 Select Quick for IN2 CIO 0 02 Sg IN3 to IN7 CIO 0 03 INA CIO 0 04 IN5 CIO 0 05 ING CIO 0 06 IN7 CIO 0 07 Note 1 The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to validate the quick response input settings 2 IN6 and IN7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 9 3 9 Quick response Inputs Quick response Input Terminal The following terminals can be used for quick response inputs Input Terminal Block on CPU Unit with 20 I O Points Quick response input IN5 CIO 0 05 Quick response input IN3 CIO 0 03 Upper Terminal Block L1 E NC DC Power Supply COM nc Quick response input IN2 CIO 0 02 Quick response input IN6 CIO 0 06 Quick response input IN4 CIO 0 04 Creating Ladder Programs Pulse inputs shorter than the cycle time can be read in the CPU Unit I O memory using normal instruc tions Simply set the interrupt setting for the required input to Quick in the PLC Setup The status of CIO 0 02 to CIO 0 07 can be r
111. Ladder Program Execution Instructions are executed from the beginning of the program and I O memory is refreshed i 1 0 Refresh Data to and from external devices such as sensors and switches directly connected to the built in 1 0 terminals and expansion I O terminals is exchanged with data in the I O memory of the PLC This pro cess of data exchange is called the I O refresh i Peripheral Servicing Peripheral servicing is used to communicate with devices connected to the communications port or for exchanging data with the CX Programmer i Cycle Time The cycle time is the time between one I O refresh and the next The cycle time can be determined beforehand for SYSMAC PLOs 3 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 CPU Unit Operation EN Additional Information The average cycle time during operation will be displayed in the status bar on the bottom right of the Ladder Program Window on the CX Programmer i 1 0 Memory These are the PLC memory areas that are accessed by the ladder programs SYSMAC PLCs refer to these areas as the I O memory It can be accessed by specifying instruction operands There are words in the I O memory area where data is cleared and words where data is retained when recovering from a power interruption There are also words that can be set to be cleared or retained Refer to Section 5 I O Memory uonezedo NUN nid2 T 3 1 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes I Overview of Operating Modes
112. Lon rtt tee 14 9 14 3 8 PEC Setup uu net a de de e te Lo eR Lie dc PR ee ideo 14 9 14 3 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words eseeeen emen 14 10 14 4 Modbus RTU Easy Master Function eeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn ianua nnn 14 11 14 491 QVGPVICW EPE 14 11 14 4 2 Flow of OD6ratloh s oi p E er HE OE URN URN MEER ESMOAE 14 11 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 14 4 3 Setting and Word Allocation cccccccecsesececeseeeeeeeeceaceeecneeseeaeeeseeaeesecaeeeseneeesseeessaeeesenseeena 14 12 14 4 4 Programming Examples sid e ei pee ERES Pere e pee eben tee ae 14 14 14 5 Serial PLC Links ov see einen ennai 14 20 14 51 OVERVIEW hine ini idee c esse serere ante e era datore eus una 14 20 14 5 2 Flow of Operation n aee LEER ER e sd dte Peta Le dC cvv 14 21 14 53 BEC Set p isi tees ces pe hee ee teehee tere Re EID UE UNS 14 21 14 5 4 Operating Specifications sessesssssssseeseseeeeeeeeennee nnne nnne neret enne rris 14 23 14 5 5 JExample ApDpliCatlOEl uice e ten recette pei nit eee peret e etae pe Enna epe aed 14 28 14 6 Connecting the Host Computer ccsssesee seen eee 14 30 146 1 GVetVIQW x ib e tare qoe d eod DE EU emere p i Prise becas duse 14 30 14 6 2 Flow of Operation eene e vie eee Dee t e tte ede ce eee de doe Ede de 14 30 14 6 3 Command response Format and List of Commands sse
113. Material Interrupt Feeding 05 12 41 12 8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs lile eene 12 44 12 9 Pulse Output Pattern sessreeer nmn 12 49 12 9 1 Speed Control Continuous Mode liess esee eee 12 49 12 9 2 Positioning Control Independent Mode 2 000 e eee eee 12 51 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 1 12 Pulse Outputs 12 1 Overview Pulse outputs can be used only with the CP1E N NALIDI S type CPU Unit with transistor outputs 12 1 1 Overview Pulse outputs can be output from the CPU Unit s built in outputs using instructions to perform position ing or speed control with a servomotor or a stepping motor that accepts pulse inputs It is also possible to perform origin searches or origin returns Trapezoidal control Frequency speed Zo Travel distance Built in outpu Pulse output Time e Jogging Frequency speed Servomotor or Servo Drive or Travel distance stepping motor Origin search stepping driver Frequency speed Time Travel distance Time Positioning is performed with a servomotor or stepping motor in the following configuration CP1E Trapezoidal control with a PLS2 instruction i PE Jogging witha SPED Servo Drive or instruction steppi
114. O memory DO W0 gt D2 Offset WO amp 2 word address in I O memory L Start bit address bit address in I O memory a 2 gt D2 L Offset decimal value L Start word address symbol a one word symbol DO alb D2 L Offset symbol b one word symbol amp 2 Start word address symbol a one word symbol DO CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when using a word address or symbol for the offset For example write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using an input comparison instruction or other instruction If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address the system will access data in other area and unexpected operation may occur 4 5 2 Application Examples for Address Offsets It is possible to dynamically specify the offset by specifying a word address in I O memory for the offset in the brackets The contents of the specified word address will be used as the offset SesSseJppy 10 SESHO buii eds s p For example execution can be performed by increasing the address by incrementing the value in the brackets and using only one instruction Ladder Program Example In this example two areas of consecu
115. OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON S PRODUCT IS PROP ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM Programmable Products Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable Product or any consequence thereof Performance Data Data presented in Omron Company websites catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil ity and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Omron s test conditions and the user must correlate it to actual application require ments Actual performance is subject to the Omron s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Product may be changed without any notice When in doubt spe cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Omron s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product Errors and Omissions Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed t
116. Optic Sensors Amplified Photomicrosensors Measurement Sensors Ultrasonic Sensors Vision Sensors Industrial Components RFID Code Readers Relays Pushbuttons amp Indicators e Limit and Basic Switches Timers Counters Metering Devices Power Supplies Safety e Laser Scanners Safety Mats Edges and Bumpers Programmable Safety Controllers Light Curtains Safety Relays Safety Interlock Switches Note Specifications are subject to change O 2014 Omron Electronics LLC Printed in U S A Printed on recycled paper amp
117. Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box of the CP1E CPU Unit If the mode is set to Host Link and the baud rate to 9 600 or other values except 115 200 the CP1E CPU Unit cannot be connected with Ethernet ERR LED of the Ethernet Option Board will be lit Change the PLC Settings by USB port CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 37 17 Ethernet Option Board i Procedure 7 Connect the Ethernet Option Board to the computer Use cross cables when connecting directly use straight cables when connecting with hubs 2 Set computer s IP address by manual 1 Select Local Area Connection in Windows Network Connection Tab Right click and select Properties in the pop up menu 2 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 3 Select Use the following IP address and then set computer s IP address by manual Set computer s IP address to 192 168 250 A The setting range of the post number A is 2 to 254 For example set to 192 168 250 2 3 Register the target PLC using the CX Programmer 1 CX Programmer s Change PLC Dialog Box a Set Device Name to the target PLC PLCO for example b Select Ethernet in Network Type c Click the Settings Button on the right side of Network Type 2 Network Settings Ethernet Dialog Box a The settings in the Netwok Tab are as follows e Set the network address to O0 default and the node address to 7 in FINS Destination Address settings Set Frame Length to 540 bytes max
118. Origin Input Signal phase Z signal 0 toa t Origin Input or p Signalis A ignored during Motor stopped by an Origin Input Pulse output deceleration P Signal received after deceleration CW CCW The deceleration time is mn relatively long in this case Starts Epa when ORG is executed Stop Ideal time for the Origin Proximity Pod Input Signal to go OFF 1 Settings when the deceleration time is short MC CCW gt CW The deceleration time is relatively short in this case Stop The Origin Input Signal can be detected d immediately after the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns OFF if the deceleration time is short e g when starting from within the Origin Proximity Input Signal Star when ORG is execute CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 27 12 Pulse Outputs Operating Mode 1 without Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse Origin Detection Method Setting 1 Depending on the length of the deceleration time the stopping position may change when the Origin Input Signal is detected during deceleration Origin Proximity l Input Signal 0 H Origin Input Signal 1 phase Z signal 0 3 Org mpur Signal is ida Motor stopped by an Dm cetera Origin Input Signal CCW r gt CW The deceleration time is Ge a Stop relatively long in this case 1 pep se when ORG iS m is executed Motor stopped by an Origin Input i ve Signal
119. PLC Setup using the CX Programmer i Communications Settings Name 1 Communications Settings Default Standard 9600 1 7 2 E Default settings Possible settings Standard Baud rate 9 600 bps Start bits 1 bit Data length 7 bits Parity Even Stop bits 2 bits Custom When setting is read by CPU Unit When power is turned ON 2 Mode Host Link Host Link NT Link 1 N 1 N NT Links RS 232C No protocol PC Link Slave PC Link Master Modbus RTU Easy Master When power is turned ON 2 1 Host Link Settings 2 1 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps When power is turned ON Format data length stop bits par ity 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits odd 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1 bit no parity When power is turned ON Unit Number 0 31 When power is turned ON 2 2 NT Link 1 N Settings 2 2 1 Baud 115 200 bps 38 400 bps standard 115 200 bps high speed When power is turned ON 2 2 2 7 8 No NT PC Link Max
120. PLC Links issessesese mmn 14 20 14 5 1 OVERVIEW is nsus Ede drca exti ster Ree Feet debeas 14 20 14 5 2 Flow of Operation 0 0 cece n 14 21 145 3 PEG Setup vei eus ee Ub LE eh ee eg Se 14 21 14 5 4 Operating Specifications 0 0 cette 14 23 14 5 5 Example Application 0 0 eee tte 14 28 14 6 Connecting the Host Computer eee rn n n nnn 14 30 14 6 1 OvervieW soy e RR LR ee O ac Y rers 14 30 14 6 2 Flow of Operation lseseeeeeeee e e 14 30 14 6 3 Command response Format and List of Commands 14 31 14 7 Precautions on the usage of RS 485 cece eee eee 14 33 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 1 14 Serial Communications 14 1 Serial Communications Serial communications can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 1 1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports e N NACICI S type CPU Unit N14 20 or N30 40 60S CPU Units have one built in RS 232C port There are no option slots N30 40 60 or NA20 CPU Units have one built in RS 232C port and one option slot An RS 232C or RS 422A 485 Option Board can be mounted for serial communications N30 40 6081 CPU Units have one bulit in RS 232C port and one bulit in RS 485 port There are no option slots e ELILI S type CPU Unit There is no serial port Connected devices NS series PT or NP series PT C rd General component No protocol communications Inverter Mo
121. PV high speed counter input frequency for high speed counter input 0 15 0 1 word PV Status range comparison results CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand REGISTER CTBL COMPARISON CTBL 882 TABLE P P Port specifier C Control data TB First comparison table word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Function Registers a comparison table and performs comparisons for a PV of high speed counter 0 to 5 An interrupt task between 0 to 15 will be executed when an execution condition is turned ON Rotary Encoder A Built in input m la oJ g Present value Present value matches set target value Time Interrupt task Cyclic tasks ladder programs Interrupt occurs Ladder diagram END l O refresh P Port specifier 0000 hex High speed counter 0 0001 hex High speed counter 1 0002 hex High speed counter 2 0003 hex High speed counter 3 0004 hex High speed counter 4 0005 hex High speed counter 5 C Control data Registers a target value comparison table 0000 hex and starts comparison 0001 hex Registers a range comparison table and performs one comparison Registers a target value comparison table 0002 fiex Comparison i
122. S type CPU Unit without a Bat tery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function If the DM backup function is being used be sure to use one of the following methods for initialization 1 Clearing All Areas to All Zeros Select the Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT to Zero Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup 2 Clearing Specific Areas to All Zeros or Initializing to Specific Values Make the settings from a ladder program If the data is not initialized the unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of unstable data HUN Nd ew ur owanw jeuuaqu T Z 2 1 2 Memory Areas and Stored Data geq peJois pue seaejy AJoUe N Z Z The following table lists the CPU Unit memory areas and the data stored in each area Built in Built in Memory area and stored data Details RAM EEPROM User Program Area Stored Stored User Program The User Program Area stores the object code for executing the user program that was created using the CX Programmer Symbol Table The symbol table contains symbols created using the CX Pro grammer symbol names addresses and I O comments Comments Comments are created usi
123. Setup Use the CX Programmer to set the various PLC Setup including whether the I O point is being used the input range output range and averaging function usage The I O point usage input range output range and averaging function usage can be set independently for each I O point PLC Settings NewPLCI File Options Help Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output O Pulse Output 1 Built in AD DA Base Settings AD OCH AD 1CH M Use M Use Range 10 to 10 vj Range IV Use averaging 10 to 10 zj Use averaging 10 to 10V m 0 to 10V 1 to 5V to 5V to 20m 4 to 20m KIG CP1E NA Offline The input range can be setto 10 to 10 V Oto 10 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA The output range can be setto 10 to 10 V Oto 10 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V Oto 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Once the range has been set it cannot be changed as long as the CP1E CPU Unit s power is ON To change the input range or output range change the setting in the PLC Setup turn the CPU Unit OFF and then turn the CPU Unit ON again 15 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Analog I O Function i Wiring Analog I O e Wiring Analog Inputs Analog output device voltage output Voltage Input CP1E NA20DR A clo 0 Input Termina Block CIO 90 CIO 91 L1 L2 N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 LINO AG I N1 4 GH 00 0
124. Software User s Manual W480 Serial Communications eee se This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals PTs without using communications programming no protocol communications with general compo nents and connections with a Modbus RTU Easy Master Serial PLC Link and host computer 14 1 Serial Communications isse mann 14 2 14 1 1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports liliis 14 2 14 1 2 Overview of Serial Communications 20 00 eee eee eee 14 3 14 2 Program free Communications with Programmable Terminals 14 5 14 2 1 COVENVIEW x kx ix acres Duca FEEDER E aUe ERO e 14 5 14 2 2 Flow of Connection 0 ete ee 14 6 14 2 3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings 020000 e eee eee 14 6 14 3 No protocol Communications with General Components 14 8 1433 1 OVERVIEW issie ayasa ea dpeepeerbemuebe ee od nee eek Pese 14 8 14 3 2 Flow of Operation seseseeeeeeee rh 14 9 14 3 3 PLC Set p i cere IA eem C EUCH PIS 14 9 14 3 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words 0 2020000 eee 14 10 14 4 Modbus RTU Easy Master Function 0cccceeeeaeneenannaeeae 14 11 14 424 OVENVIEW ucc e uem ese eter m er Ree we Be dee pg 14 11 14 42 Flow of Operation sslseseeeeeee e I I 14 11 14 4 3 Setting and Word Allocation 0 0 0 ccc eee 14 12 14 4 4 Programming Examples eeeeee tees 14 14 14 5 Serial
125. Speed Origin Compensation Origin Search Accelera tion Rate Origin Search Deceleration Rate Limit Input Signal Type Origin Proximity Input Sig nal Type Origin Input Signal Type Positioning Monitor Time P Port Specifier 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 C Control Data 15 1211 87 43 0 c L Always 0 hex Always 0 hex Pulse output method 1 hex Pulse direction Mode 0 hex Origin search 1 hex Origin return A 43 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononasu indino asjng ajunoD peeds uBiH 8L L Y Appendices Instruction Mnemonic PULSE WITH PWM VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR Variations Symbol Operand PWM O P D P Port specifier F Frequency D Duty factor A 1 19 Step Instructions Function Outputs pulses with the specified duty factor from the specified port Built in outpu PWM output 100 lt Period is determined ley H5 by frequency Duty d 50 Duty factor 50 P Port Specifier PWM output 0 duty factor in increments of 1009 RISE 1 frequency 0 1 Hz PWM output 0 duty factor in increments of 1100 hx 1 frequency 1 Hz F Frequency F specifies the frequency of the PWM output between 2 0 and 6 553 5 Hz 0 1 Hz units 0014 to FFFF hex or between 2 and 32 000 Hz 2 Hz units 0002 to 7D00 hex
126. T WEB Password Set the password for accessing the Ethernet ETHERNET Option Board s settings and status monitor ing information Port Number Set the port No used to connect to the Web 80 browser uonoun Bumeg smog d9M v ZL CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 19 17 Ethernet Option Board i IP Address Table Set the IP address table that defines the relationship between FINS node addresses and IP addresses With FINS UDP this is enabled only when the IP address table method is set to the IP address conver sion method o Parameter Value O E NEN IE MN E WF NW Transfer J Cancel J Restart No FINSNode Address PRA Mee o v Stow oee FINS Node Address Set the node address for the remote device None IP Address Set the related IP address for the remote None device i IP Router Table Set the IP router table when the Ethernet Option Board is to communicate through the IP router with nodes on another IP network segment Transfer J Cancel J Restat No IPNetwork Address Router IP Address IP Network Address Set the network ID from the IP address Router IP Address Set the related IP address of a router con nected to a network None None 17 20 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board i FINS TCP Connection Setup No Shows the connection number This is a network API used when TCP is used for the FINS
127. Unit version 1 0 or earlier the interval must be longer than 6 ms plus the sum of execution time for interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time and the data in A442 is unsta ble If the input setting is set for up down pulse inputs or differential phase inputs x4 do not change the direction at a high frequency when using target matching If changing direction at a high frequency the interval of direction changing must be longer than 500us If changing direction at a high frequency when using target matching cycle time exceeded error may occur There is no restriction when target matching is not used Example Up down pulse inputs Increment Pulse Decrement Pulse s fohis r2 isfroje e 7 s s Je 7 e o 500ys min Cycle time exceeded error occurs when using target matching When using target matching if the encoder input values change fast due to vibration the direction changing may be at a high frequency cycle time exceeded error may occur as a result At this time take measures to stabilize the encoder inputs or use range comparison CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 19 11 High speed Counters i Range Comparison The specified interrupt task is executed when the high speed counter PV is within the range defined by the upper and lower limit values The comparison conditions upper and lower limits of the range are registered in the comparison table along with the corresponding in
128. Units eee eee eee eee 6 3 o Online editing eeeeeeeeseeeeeneennne 18 27 OperaridS sioe vene Ie ND Um 4 9 Operating mode at startup sssseeeee 7 3 Operating modes Changing method seneee 3 3 Operating modes and operation 3 4 The retaining of I O memory when changing 3 4 Operation for power interruptions A 85 Timing G hart ipei A 86 ORG instruction ess 12 11 12 24 12 32 Origin return settings 7 14 7 16 Origin search settings essesesss 7 13 7 15 OUT instruction een 12 11 12 24 Output interrupts co ceret de 10 2 Overflow Flag P OF 5 20 P P AER Access Error Flag 5 19 P GY Garty Flag enel un 5 19 P EQ Equals Flag eene 5 19 P ER ErrOor Flag beheben 5 19 P GE Greater Than or Equals Flag 5 20 P GT Greater Than Flag 5 19 P LE Less than or Equals Flag 5 20 P LT Less Than Flag ee 5 20 P N Negative Flag 5 20 P NE Not Equal Flag eee 5 20 P OF Overflow Flag 5 20 P Off Always OFF Flag eee 5 19 P On Always ON Flag 5 19 P UF Underflow Flag eene 5 20 Peripheral servicing eese 3 2 Phase Z signal
129. User s Manual W480 11 11 11 High speed Counters i Software Reset The high speed counter s PV is reset when the corresponding High speed Counter Reset Bit A531 00 to A531 05 goes from OFF to ON The CPU Unit recognizes the OFF to ON transition of the High speed Counter Reset Bit only at the begin ning of the PLC cycle during the overseeing processes Reset processing is performed at the same time The OFF to ON transition will not be recognized if the Reset Bit goes OFF again within the same cycle One cycle Reset bit Y v Y Y PV reset PV not reset PV notreset PV not reset EN Additional Information The comparison operation can be selected to stop or continue in the PLC Setup when a high speed counter is reset This enables applications where the comparison operation can be restarted from a counter PV of 0 when the counter is reset 11 2 4 Reading the Present Value The present value of a high speed counter can be read in the following two ways Value refreshed at the I O refresh timing Read PV from Auxiliary Area Value updated when a ladder program is executed Read PV by executing a PRV instruction i Reading the Value Refreshed at the I O Refresh Timing The PV that is stored in the following words can be read using the MOVL instruction or other instructions ReadPV AuxliaryAreaword gt High speed counter 0 A271 upper digits and A270 lower digits
130. a CP1E CPU Unit and the data that is stored 2 1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit cc cece cece e teeta 2 2 2 1 1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure 0 0 00 e eee eee 2 2 2 1 2 Memory Areas and Stored Data nuanua aana eese 2 3 2 1 3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device 0 002 eee 2 4 2 14 Backup och ieee ee tie wae vete bei b bite a Euren 2 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 2 1 2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit 2 1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit 2 1 1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure The internal memory in the CPU Unit consists of built in RAM and built in EEPROM The built in RAM is used as execution memory and the built in EEPROM is used as backup memory CPU Unit Built in EEPROM Built in RAM r Backup memory Execution Memory omatic Backup User Program Area D Uee Pora Ad Backup Read at sarup gt g Aut N Area where data is backed up even if the power supply is interrupted for longer than the back up time of the built in capacitor homes backup Read at startup yy PLC Setup PLC Setup Area where data is cleared if the power supply is interrupted for longer than the back up time of the built in capacitor I O Memory Areas ens using bit in Auxiliary Area DM Area DM Area DM Area data read at startup
131. addressesin be treated as binary data ELILI S type Binary Mode CPU Unit 0000 to 2047 N INACILI S type Contente CPU Unit 0000 to 8191 to specify the word 0100 hexadecimal address in DM Area 4 Add the symbol at the front to specify an Specify D00256 p indirect address in Binary Mode w Add E Specifying An offset from the beginning of the DM Area b200 MOV 0001 D200 i indirect DM is specified The contents of the address will T a Addresses be treated as BCD data ELILI S type CPU S Gone in BCD Unit 0000 to 2047 N NALILI S type CPU d Mode Unit 0000 to 8191 to specify the word y g address in the DM Area Specify D100 Add an asterisk at the front to specify an indirect address in BCD Mode us Note For Timer Completion Flags and Counter Completion Flags there is no distinction between word addresses and bit addresses B o S 4 3 6 Data Formats z i The following table shows the data formats that the CP1E CPU Units can handle a A 4 digit Type Data format Doc imal hexadeci equivalent mal Unsigned 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 amp 0 to 0000 to binary amp 65535 FFFF Binary gt 215 214 213 212 i QM g0 29 8 i 27 2e 25 94 i QU p p pE Hexadecima 2 2 2 2 2 2 gg p p gp at gimp mpm Decimal 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Signed 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Negative Negative binary 1 to 8000 to Binary 215 24 23 p2t2
132. an error is detected the error codes and time stamp are recorded in the error log in RAM inside the Ethernet Option Board Serious errors are also recorded in EEPROM The maximum number of errors that can be saved to EEPROM is 20 for the CP1L and CP1H The errors recorded in EEPROM will be saved even if the unit is restarted or power is turned OFF ka me 607 1013 S 1 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 33 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 5 2 Error Codes Error The error codes and ERR LED are described in the following table The detailed error code will provide detailed information on an error ERR Detailed error code Meanin Correction EEPROM code LED y 1st byte 2nd byte 0002 LIT CPU Unit service Monitor time ms Set the PLC Settings on Saved monitoring error the Serial Option Port Tab as follows and then turn the power ON again Communications Settings Baud 115200 Format 7 2 E Mode Host Link 0015 FLASH CPU Unit fatal error Eliminate the cause of the error in the CPU Unit 0110 Too many relay points Commands Reconstruct the network send failed Bit 15 OFF or correct the routing tables so that commands els Datos SNA are sent to within a 3 Bits 00 to 07 SA1 level network range 0111 Command too long Check the command for send failed Responses mat and set the correct Bit 15 ON command data 0112 Head
133. and ILC 003 are nor mally used in pairs Execution Execution Execution condition ON condition OFF condition it fi E eMe Interlocked section Bonis am Outputs of the program interlocked ke pere um Y INTERLOCK ILC All outputs between IL 002 and ILC 003 are interlocked when CLEAR the execution condition for IL 002 is OFF IL 002 and ILC 003 are normally used in pairs MULTI INTER MILH When the execution condition for MILH 517 is OFF the outputs LOCK DIFFER for all instructions between that MILH 517 instruction and the next ENTIATION MILC 519 instruction are interlocked MILH 517 and MILC 519 HOLD D are used as a pair N Interlock number MILH 517 MILC 519 interlocks can be nested e g MILH 517 D Interlock Status Bit MILH 517 MILC 519 MILC 519 If there is a differentiated instruction DIFU DIFD or instruction with a or 96 prefix between MILH 517 and the corresponding MILC 519 that instruction will be executed after the interlock is cleared if the differentiation condition of the instruction was estab lished MULTI INTER MILR When the execution condition for MILR 518 is OFF the outputs LOCK DIFFER MILR 518 for all instructions between that MILR 518 instruction and the next ENTIATION MILC 519 instruction are interlocked MILR 518 and MILC 519 RELEASE are used as a pair N Interlock number MILR 518 MILC 519 interlocks can be nested e g MILR 518 D Interlock Status Bit MILR 5
134. and specifications of the parts of all Units Basic system configuration for each CPU Unit Connection methods for Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units Wiring Wiring methods for the power supply Wiring methods between external I O devices and Expansion I O Units or Expansion Units Connecting 3 Online to the PLC Connecting Cables for CX Programmer Procedures for connecting the Support Software CX Programmer Support Software Software Setup Software setting methods for the CPU Units PLC Setup Creating the Program Program types and basic information Detailed information on CPU Unit operation programming instructions Internal memory Built in CPU functions Settings Checking and Debugging Operation Checking I O wiring setting the Auxiliary Area settings and performing trial operation Monitoring and debugging with the 7 Maintenance and CX Programmer Troubleshooting Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Manual Configuration The CP1E CPU manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables Refer to the appro priate section in the manuals as required CPIE CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W480 This Manual Section Contents Section 1 Overview This section gives an overview of the CP1E describes its application procedures Section 2 CPU Unit Memory This section descr
135. bit Starting point of block AND AND Symbol Takes a logical AND of the status of the specified operand bit and the current execution condition AND NOT AND NOT Symbol Reverses the status of the specified operand bit and takes a logi cal AND with the current execution condition OR OR Q o VYX9 176 Bus bar Takes a logical OR of the ON OFF status of the specified operand bit and the current execution condition OR NOT OR NOT I Bus bar Reverses the status of the specified bit and takes a logical OR with the current execution condition AND LOAD AND LD 2 Takes a logical AND between logic blocks LD to Logic block A LD to Logic block B AND LD Serial connection between logic block A and logic block B A 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function OR LOAD ORLD o Takes a logical OR between logic blocks to Logic block A LD to Logic block B OR ED 35 Parallel connection between logic block A and logic block B NOT NOT oo Reverses the execution condition CONDITION UP UP 521 UP 521 turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when the ON execution condition goes from OFF to ON CONDITION DOWN DOWN 522 DOWN 522 turns ON the execution condition for one cycle when OFF the execution condition goes from ON to OFF A 1 2 Sequence Output Instructions
136. bit no parity 2 5 3 Response Timeout 5s 5s When power is turned ON 1 x100 ms 255 x100 ms 2 6 PC Link Slave Settings 2 6 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps When power is turned ON 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps 2 6 2 PLC Link Unit No 0 0 When power is turned ON sbumes dmes 51d Z L n 2 7 PC Link Master Settings 2 7 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps When power is turned ON N 2 400 bps m 4 800 bps T vs 9 600 bps S 19 200 bps 3 D 38 400 bps o N 57 600 bps DS CO 115 200 bps E 2 7 2 Link Words 10 Words 1 word When power is turned ON 10 words 2 7 3 PC Link Mode ALL ALL When power is turned ON Masters 2 7 4 No NT PC Link Max 1 0 When power is turned ON Highest unit number of PT that can be connected to the PLC 7 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 7 7 PLC Setup 7 2 5 Serial Option Port Built in RS 485 Port The setting are applicable to the serial option ports mounting on N30 40 60 or NA20 CPU Units or the built in RS 485 ports on N30 40 60S1 CPU Units Since this setting is reflected by power OFF and ON the PLC Setup and the actual operation settings may be different The actual operation settings can be confirmed in words A617 A618 Note The built in RS 485 port of the N30 40 60S1 CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab of the
137. bit to the left including the Carry Flag CY ROL 027 CY 1514 10 TAL Tj Wd Word I J ROTATE ROR Shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right including the Carry Flag CY RIGHT ROR 028 WwW z Wd Word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1514 Wd 1 O 1514 Wd 0 CY A 15 suon ung uononnsul T Y Ssuogonuisu HUS eieqg 7 EV Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function ONE DIGIT SLD Shifts data by one digit 4 bits to the left SHIFT LEFT SLD 074 POOR EES podom E St Starting word E End word ONE DIGIT SRD Shifts data by one digit 4 bits to the right SHIFT RIGHT SRD 075 St Starting word E End word SHIFT N BITS NASL Shifts the specified 16 bits NASL or 32 bits NSLL of word data to LEFT NASL 580 the left by the specified number of bits D is wu ar ss o a D Shift word Shift n bits C Control word DOUBLE NSLL SHIFT N BITS deus germ Contents of LEFT po en JK Yum Lost of T rq shifted in D Shift word C Control word C Control word NASL 15 12 11 8 7 0 k J 0 No of bits to shift 00 to 10 Hex Always 0 Data shifted into register 0 Hex 0 shifted in 8 Hex Contents of rightmost bit shifted in NSLL 15 12 11 8 7 0 c 7 0 No of bits to shift 00 to 20 Hex Always 0 D
138. browser of a computer connected with Ethernet Allocated words in the CIO area CIO 80 to CIO 82 The status is stored in the CPU Unit from the Ethernet Option Board every 3 to 5 seconds It is used for the status confirmation in the ladder pro grammer 17 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 3 3 Default Settings 17 Ethernet Option Board The default settings of the Ethernet Option Board are shown in the following tables Make the initial settings by the Web browser function if the settings are not as follows Common Settings of the FINS UDP and FINS TCP Methods Item Initial settings IP Address 192 168 250 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 FINS Node Address 1 Baud Rate Auto IP Router Table Using the FINS UDP Method Item FINS UDP Port None IP router not enabled Initial settings 9 600 Address Conversion Mode Auto Dynamic IP Address Table None FINS UDP Option Destination IP address is changed dynamically Broadcast Option Using the FINS TCP Method Item FINS TCP Port All 1 4 3 BSD Initial settings 9 600 FINS TCP Connection Setup None FINS TCP Protected Use protection function according to IP address The following diagram describes how to restore the initial settings of the Ethernet Option Board Auxiliary Area Initializing Flag A525 01 is turned ON OFF when the initialization is completed Confirm A525 01 is
139. communica tions service Up to 2 can be used at a time and they are identified by connection numbers 1 to 2 The Ethernet Option Board can thus simultaneously execute the FINS communications service by TCP with up to 2 remote nodes IP Address When the Ethernet Option Board is used as a server If the option is selected to use IP addresses to pro tect set the IP addresses as required at clients from which connection is permitted If not set for those connections the default setting can be used When the Ethernet Option Board is used as a client Set the IP address for the remote Ethernet Unit i e the server that is to be connected by FINS TCP It is required that an IP address be set for the remote Ethernet Unit 0 0 0 0 Auto allocated FINS node If the client normally a personal computer applica tion supports FINS TCP and if FINS node addresses are not fixed the client will take O as its node address Then when a FINS command arrives the number set here from 251 to 252 will automatically be allocated as the client s FINS node address CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 From 251 to 252 for connection No 1 to 2 17 21 sbumes T uonoun Bumegs smog d9M v ZL 17 Ethernet Option Board i Unit Information Model Show the model information of the Ethernet Option Board Version Show the version information of the Ethernet Option Board IP Address Sh
140. correspond to unit numbers 0 to 7 ON Communicating respectively OFF Not communicating i Built in RS 232C Port A526 00 Turn ON this bit to restart built in Read write Cleared when power is turned ON Restart Bit RS 232C port Turn ON to restart built in RS 232C port Note The bit is automatically turned OFF by the System when restart processing has been completed Built in RS 232C Port A528 00to When an error occurs at built in RS Read write Cleared when power is turned ON Error Flags A528 07 232C port the corresponding error When an error occurs at built in RS 232C port the bit is turned ON corresponding error bit is turned ON e 7 A RE The flag is automatically turned OFF by the system f USE when built in RS 232C port is restarted Bit 2 Parity error i gt x Bit 3 Framing error In NT link mode only bit 05 timeout error is Bit 4 Overrun error enabled Bit 5 Timeout error n Serial PLC Link mode only the following bits are Bit 6 Not used enabled Bit 7 Not used Errors at the Polling Unit Bit 05 Timeout error Errors at Polled Units Bit 05 Timeout error Bit 04 Overrun error Bit 03 Framing error Serial Option Port Built in RS 485 Port Name Address Details Read write Refresh timing Serial Option Port A394 00to When serial option port or built in Read Cleared when power is turned ON Built in RS 485 Port A394 07 RS 485 port is being used in NT Turns ON the bit corresponding to the unit n
141. counter 10 kHzx1 counters counter Up down 10 kHzx2 counters Pulse plus direction 100 kHzx2 counters Pulse plus direction 10 kHzx2 counters e Differential phases 4x 50 kHzx1 counter Differential phases 4x 5 kHzx2 5 kHzx1 counter counters Not supported 2 outputs pulse plus direction only Section 12 Pulse outputs An external power supply is required for pulse outputs for N30 40 60S 1 CPU Units Not supported 1 output Section 13 PWM outputs An external power supply is required for PWM outputs for N30 40 60S 1 CPU Units Serial communications Not supported N14 20 CPU Units 1 port Section 14 N30 40 60 or NA20 CPU Units One standard port RS 232C plus option slot N30 40 60S CPU Units One standard port RS 232C N30 40 60S1 CPU Units Two standard ports RS 232C RS 485 Analog I O function Not supported Not supported Supported Section 15 PID temperature control Supported Supported Section16 1 Clock functions Not supported Supported While power is supplied Section16 2 DM backup Supported Supported Section16 3 Security function Supported Supported Section16 4 8 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations 8 2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built in Functions The overall procedure for using built in CP1E functions is described in this section Select the functions to use l Select Functions Example Interrupts high speed
142. counter inputs and pulse outputs 2 Set the functions with the applicable numbers Refer to Section 7 Make the Settings in using the CX Programmer PLC Setup and 8 3 the PLC Setup Example Using input interrupt IN3 and high Terminal Allocations speed counter 0 parameters in the for Builtin Func PLC Setup must be set for the fol tions lowing functions Input interrupts Origin searches Quick response Minimum cycle time inputs Serial communications High speed counters Write ladder diagrams using the CX Pro Create Ladder Program grammer Example Permitting interrupts with the MSKS instruction and program ming high speed counters with the CTBL instruction Special Instructions suon2ung uNg 3rd HUSN 104 eunpe2oud Ie1o 0 Z 8 Writing Related Example Stopping high speed counters Auxiliary Area Words Refer to A 2 Auxil iary Area Alloca tions by Address high speed counter Reading Related Example Reading the present value of a Auxiliary Area Words 4 Transfer the PLC Setup and ladder program Transfer PLC Setup from the CX Programmer to the CP1E CPU and Ladder Program RE Once turn OFF the power supply to the CP1E 1 Restart the CP1E CPU Unit then turn ON again 5 6 Start the CP1E CPU Unit operation Start Operation CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 8 3 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations
143. cycle time setting to create a consistent I O refresh cycle Minimum Cycle Time Setting a watch cycle time Watch Cycle Time Recording user defined errors for FAL in the error log is not required Related Auxiliary Area Flags FAL Error Log Registration ams Wod Bes o Ress A402 10 ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup Read only Flag Non fatal error PLC Setup Error e Setting Methods for the PLC Setup Set using the CX Programmer CX Programmer S PLC Setup CP1E CPU Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 2 PLC Setup Settings 7 2 1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings i Startup Data Read Setting 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Clear Held Memory HR DM CNT to Zero Do not clear Do not clear When power is turned ON Clear 2 Read DO from backup memory Do not read Do not read When power is turned ON Read 3 Number of CH of DM for backup 0 E S type CPU Unit 0 to 1 499 N NAL 6 999 S type CPU Unit 0 to When power is turned ON i Startup Mode Setting Default 1 Startup Mode Setting Run RUN mode Possible settings Program PROGRAM mode Monitor MONITOR mode Run RUN mode When setting is read b
144. de E 10 7 10 3 Scheduled Interrupt eese ennai 10 10 10 9 1 Overviews ieu eene cere iu sett Ae i edie 10 10 1023 2 Flow ot Operationen erc tn Ry iot EC ten ree bett te Due ie e Ree gon bi bore Ee eed 10 11 10 4 Precautions for Using Interrupts eeeeeeeeeener enne nnne nnn rana n a 10 13 10 4 1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution sse 10 13 10 4 2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits esssee emere 10 13 10 4 3 Duplicate Processing in each Task sseseenenm eme mener nnne 10 13 Section 11 High speed Counters 11 1 OVerVieW 11 2 Ated QVEWIOW aic te ire eee m UR as enatibus 11 2 11 1 2 Elow of Operation sis inier mcn ade ee Ge ree tive eg co e eot eee eee xd 11 3 TIAS e Specifications C 11 7 11 2 High speed Counter Inputs eese nennen nnn nana a a n i n na 11 8 11 2 1 Pulse Input Methods Settings sssssssseeneeenneenenen nennen nennen nennt nennen enn 11 8 1122 2 Counting Ranges Seltings iere e e RE URN II Re ties 11 10 112 3 eset Methods hear geht ere sed egets 11 11 11 2 4 Reading the Present Value eteeecececeesceeeeeneeeeeeceeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeseceeseseeneseeeseeneeesneeennenenees 11 12 11 2 5 Frequency Measurement 2 cceecceceseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaseeeseeeeseeeeseeee
145. decedente Reis ive ett teer ebbe einst 4 3 4 1 3 Basics of Programimlng s s ninh leer gd eile eile aay 4 3 4 2 Tasks Sections and Symbols eerie nennen enne nnn nana nnn nii annuo nnn 4 6 4 2 1 QVErVICW of TasSKS 5 ni e ne D e RU n ADR E Rim teteeeite teidetis 4 6 4 2 2 Overview of Sections 2 31 te hate dele qr b t b tree hein Og epp Sena 4 6 4 2 3 OverView of Symbols ior RAT E I RE ERU Het secretes 4 6 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 3 Programming Instructions neeeeee eene nnne nennen nnn nnn nani aaarnas annenin u uasa nana uua ann 4 8 4 3 1 Basic Understanding of Instructions seeeen emm eene 4 8 4 3 2 Operands 1 a teat e aH a cede Ue Rd dee e Tete Lu te ee ogg 4 9 4 3 3 STRUCTION VarlatlOris 2 5 orte o E EGRE Pid Re gE 4 10 4 3 4 Execution Conditions Smi ign ie tbe cane teer HERO n e Pas ie EE E RED ERRARE RA alate el 4 10 4 3 5 Specifying Data in Operands sse eene nnne nnne nnne eterne nns 4 12 4 3 6 Data Formats ona qp iie UE pee pem eec ie eee cd 4 13 4 3 7 l O Refresh Timirigs tnm end eee e ee tei e D PA SERERE 4 15 4 4 Constant ssssee nnn 4 16 4 5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses cstse ste scene eee eee 4 19 4 5 1 OVerVIeW udo deed eh Dee lea weed eel ee et os ee lee 4 19 4 5 2 Application Examples for Address Offsets 0 cccecscesseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseeeseaeetieeeneete 4 2
146. decre ments the count according to the status of Differential Phase 4x Conditions for Incrementing Decrementing the Count Phase A 1 l f l il f l f i Y Phase A Phase B Count value i H OFF gt ON OFF Increment Phase B Y Y l t l f l T 4 f ON OFF SON Increment ON OFF ON Increment OFF ON OFF Increment s e 718 OFF OFF ON Decrement OFF ON ON Decrement ON ON OFF Decrement ON OFF OFF Decrement I Up Down Pulse Input The Up Down Pulse Input uses two signals an increment pulse and a decrement pulse x4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 tid e s e s 4 s 2 1 Conditions for Incrementing Decrementing the Count Increment T f f 111 r i Decrement Increment Count value pulse pulse pulse OFF ON OFF Decrement Decrement I f li f ij f f f ON OFFSON Increment pulse ON OFF ON No change o 12e s 4 slel z es es lsl lIsla eo OFF ON OFF No change OFF OFF ON Increment OFF ON ON Decrement ON ON OFF No change ON OFF OFF No change The count is incremented for each increment pulse and decremented for each decrement pulse Only rising edges are counted 11 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480
147. l B amp Work Online Ctrew AXA Sli SI IEEE Auto online oet85tik 86i T3 A fa g a e Operating Mode am Program Ctri 1 e Transfer gt ee Monitor Ctri 3 c dle NewProject Daun toa NewPLCI CP1E Monitor Modi Online Edit gt 2 Symbols Protection Es settings Clear All Memory Areas EB Error log amp PLC Clock PLC Configuration 4 Memory A Programs a Differential Monitor Sg NewProgram1 00 RU Trace gt R Symbols Force CX Programmer v5 2 Make sure that there aren t any problems if the PLC is stopped Do you wish to switch the PLC into program mode 18 21 CX Programmer Stopped NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram File Edit View Insert Program PLC Simulation Tools Window Help Dc E t R d awe ath E Sit sm e Es E e i5 DARAS IDEE 22225 c dle NewProject f NewPLCI CP1E Stop Program Mode 2 Symbols s Settings EB Error log PLC Clock Ge Memory 5 A Programs gl NewProgram1 00 Stopped 3 Symbols Change to PROGRAM mode before transferring the PLC Setup and ladder program 18 20 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 isl 0 0 L t 0 00 wo 00 woor m JE woot EA 1 wo 02 5 1 ol TM 100ms Timer T 000 Timer number 90 Bed 90 Set value 2 too cd CNT Counter lal f 18 Programming Device Operations 18 4 3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup A ladder program cre
148. last one once a cycle by com mon processing Note This value is cleared when PLC operation begins The value is unstable for CPU Unit version 1 0 or earlier A444 Pulse Output 0 If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs for Retained Cleared Refreshed Stop Error Code pulse output 0 the error code is written when origin to this word search starts Refreshed when a pulse output Stop error occurs A445 Pulse Output 1 If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs for Retained Cleared Refreshed Stop Error Code pulse output 1 the error code is written when origin to this word search starts Refreshed when a pulse output stop error occurs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 69 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ery faeixny z v Spon uo pe y Z Y Appendices A 2 2 Address Name Words Bits A500 12 IOM Hold Bit Read Write Words Function Turn ON this bit to preserve the status of the I O Memory when shifting from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa Settings ON Retained OFF Not retained Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Not retained Write timing Refreshed when power is turned ON Related flags settings 13 Forced Status Hold Bit Turn ON this bit to preserve the status of bits that have been force set or force reset when shifting from PRO GRAM to MONITOR mode or vice versa Always use this bit together with t
149. logical OR of corresponding bits in single words of word data and or constants l 12 gt R I1 Input 1 I2 Input 2 R Result word DOUBLE ORWL Takes the logical OR of corresponding bits in double words of LOGICAL OR word data and or constants 15 151 L5 1571 R R 1 LP 2 l2 an R R 1 I1 Input 1 EXCLUSIVE XORW Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in single OR XORW 036 words of word data and or constants Ih l Th R I1 Input 1 I2 Input 2 R Result word DOUBLE XORL Takes the logical exclusive OR of corresponding bits in double EXCLUSIVE XORL 612 words of word data and or constants OR A 26 I1 Input 1 12 Input 2 R Result word 1 T T77T pF 12 1541 gt R R41 1 Pai o fo a ee p os Lo t t o o o CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function COMPLE COM Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd MENT COM 029 Wd Wd 1 gt 0 and 05 1 Wd Word DOUBLE COML Turns OFF all ON bits and turns ON all OFF bits in Wd and Wd 1 COML 614 COMPLE MENT Wd 1 Wd gt Wd 1 Wd A 1 12 Wd Word Special Math Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function ARITHMETIC APR Calculates the sine cosine or a linear extrapolation of the source PROCESS APR 069 data The linear extrapolation function allows any
150. mode At start of operation Circular mode 2 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 2 2 Reset Z phase software reset Z phase software reset stop When power is turned ON Note Only a software reset can be stop comparing comparing set if an increment pulse Software reset input is set for the input set stop comparing ing Phase Z software reset compar ing Software reset comparing 2 3 Input Setting Differential phase input Differential phase input x4 When power is turned ON Note Make the same input setting for high speed counters 0 1 and 2 x4 Pulse direction input Up Down pulse input Increment Pulse input 3 Use high speed counter 2 Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 3 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation Circular mode 3 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 3 2 Reset Software reset Software reset When power is turned ON Software reset comparing 3 3 Input Setting Increment pulse input Increment pulse input When power is turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 11 sbumes dmes 51d Z L n sindu ung 9 2 2 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 4 Use high speed counter 3 Do no
151. not have a Positioning Completed Signal Mode 1 In this mode the Positioning Completed Signal from the Servo Drive is not used Use this mode when you want to reduce the processing time Mode 2 In this mode the Positioning Completed Signal from the Servo Drive is used Use this mode when you want high positioning accuracy Origin Input Specifies the type of Origin Input Signal NC or NO Signal NC Sets a normally closed Origin Input Signal NO Sets a normally open Origin Input Signal Proximity Specifies the type of Origin Proximity Input Signal NC or NO Input Signal NC Sets a normally closed Origin Proximity Input Signal NO Sets a normally open Origin Proximity Input Signal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Item Selection Description Define Search High Sets the motor s target speed when the origin search is executed Specify the speed in Origin Speed the number of pulses per second pps oe Setting range 1 to 100k pps nt The origin search will not be performed in these cases dr Origin search high speed lt Origin search proximity speed Origin search proximity speed x Origin search initial speed Search Prox Sets the motor s speed after the Origin Proximity Input Signal is detected Specify the imity Speed speed in the number of pulses per second pps Setting range 1 to 100k pps The origin search will not be performed in these cases Origin search h
152. of Operation 1 Set the origin search parameters in the Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab Pages of the PLC Setup using the CX Pro grammer Set output pulse 0 or 1 and whether to use terminals 00 and 01 or 02 and 03 on the CIO100 terminal block for pulse outputs Output the status of the Limit Signal Inputs and Positioning Completed Signal to Auxil iary Area bits Execute ORG Specify an origin search 2 Ladder Cyclic task program interrupt task 12 4 3 Settings in PLC Setup To perform an origin search or to use a Limit Input Signal as an input to a function other than origin search set the parameters on the Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab Pages in the PLC Setup A PLC Settings NewPLC1 15 x File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quir Base Settings Undefined Origin Hold Search Return Initial Speed 0 i pps Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only Y Limit Input Signal NC hd Define Origin Operation Settings r Origin Retum IV Use define origin operation Speed Search Direction o y Search High Speed p pp 0 ppp Detection Method Men z Search Proximity Speed poa pp Acceleration Ratio Search Operation Invers 1 v Search Compensation Value o j Operation Mode Mode 0 T Search Acceleration Ratio 0 4 Origin Input Signal NC v Search Deceleration Ratio p a Proximity Input
153. of the CPU Unit It is used in programming Unlike the input bits and output bits in the CIO Area I O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode This data is unstable if power is reset when the battery is not mounted Refer to 5 4 Holding Area H Data Memory Area D This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word 16 bits These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode Specified words can be retained in the built in EEPROM backup memory using Auxiliary Area bits This data is unstable if power is reset when the battery is not mounted Refer to 5 5 Data Memory Area D e Timer Area T There are two parts to the Timer Area the Timer Completion Flags and the timer Present Values PVs Up to 256 timers with timer numbers TO to T255 can be used Timer Completion Flags Each Timer Completion Flag is accessed as one bit using the timer number A Completion Flag is turned ON when the set time of the timer elapses Timer PVs Each timer PV is accessed as one word 16 bits using the timer number The PV increases or decreases as the timer operates Refer to 5 6 Timer Area T CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 3 sea
154. operating in RUN or MONI TOR mode the instruction currently being executed will be stopped and then the CPU Unit will be reset i Malfunction Countermeasures If only a couple of Expansion I O Units or Expansion Units are connected to the CPU Unit resulting in a light power supply circuit load and a small current consumption the time required by the CPU Unit to detect a power interruption will be longer For this reason inputs may be incorrectly identified as being OFF if external power supply used for an input turns OFF before the power interruption is detected If an external NC contact input is used or the ladder program counts the number of ON to OFF transitions a malfunction may occur if the external power supply turns OFF A 86 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Power supply Power OFF detected voltage 85 Y v D I I M Power OFF Power OFF detection time l detected singal AC 10 ms min DC 2 ms min Program execution status Cyclic task or interrupt task CPU reset signal External power supply input Input signal to CP1E If the external power supply input turns OFF before the power interruption is detected the CPU Unit will read the input as being OFF The following diagram shows an example countermeasure for this situation Wiring Emergency stop input 100 VAC T External power supply input L1 L2 COM 0 00 0
155. operation Reversal mode 1 Inverse 1 Origin detection method 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal Origin Proximity reversal required Input Signal L 1 0 1 i Recommended method Origin Input Signal 5 1 Ml I l l l High speed for origin search Pulse output Proximity speed for origin search CCW D gt CW Start i Stop COW r CW StoP ow Limit Input Signal See note CCW lt T Cw Stop Start Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops without deceleration reverses direction and accelerates 1 Origin Proximity Input Signal m a Origin Proximity reversal not required Input Signal Origin Input Signal Pulse output i COW 7 gt CW onto 4 Start Stop CCW gt CW Sto P CW Limit Input Signal See note CCW gt CW Stop Start Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops without deceleration reverses direction and accelerates 2 Origin Proximity Input Signal not i used Origin Input Signal i 0 E Proximity speed for origin search COW 0W Start Stop CCW lt gt CW Stop Start CW Limit Input Signal See note COW Stop Start Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops without deceleration reverses direction and accelerates Pulse output 12 30 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Using Rev
156. or with quency the acceleration absolute Independent f unequa during posi T rate deceleration pulse speci accelera tioning rate and target fre Y fication tion and different Undenendent inci quency PLS2 e Port decelera accelera feqioney and acalealnecolraln To prevent the tar PLS2 Pulses tion rates tion and oue memara eroamen get position from y Direction decelera specified again being changed tion rates intentionally the PLS2 s Accelera n tion rate original target posi tion must be speci Decelera fied in absolute tion rate coordinates Target fre quency Starting fre quency Change Change the piles Hequendy Miribaccksuibes PLS2 can be exe PULS Number of target target posi Secified number h2 ged with PLS2 cuted during posi pulses position tion during eee rt Minn tioning to change ACC Relative or positioning deceleration the target position absolute ate N Barat pul Independent f multiple s number of pulses i pulse speci start When the target fication function PLS2 executed to change the target position cannot be PLS2 Port ijoeesie etus changed without PLS2 Pulse not changed anne ii Direction same speed range oA i an error will occur PLS2 and the original operation will con Decelera tinue to the original tion rate target position Target fre quency Starting fre quency CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480
157. or constants Dd BCD Dr BCD Dd Dividend word Rei R BCD Dr Divisor word Remainder Quotient R Result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 21 suon ung uononnsul T Y suogonuisu ure OQWAS 6 1 v Appendices Instruction DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE Mnemonic BL Variations Symbol Operand Dd 1st dividend word Dr 1st divisor word Function Divides 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants R ist result word Remainder Quotient A 1 10 Conversion Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function BCD TO BINA BIN Converts BCD data to binary data RY BIN 023 S BCD R BIN S Source word R Result word DOUBLE BINL Converts 8 digit BCD data to 8 digit hexadecimal 32 bit binary BCD TO DOU BINL 058 data BLE BINARY S BCD R BIN SH BCD R 1 _ BIN S 1st source word E R 1st result word BINARY TO BCD Converts a word of binary data to a word of BCD data BCD BCD 024 S BIN R BCD S Source word R Result word DOUBLE BCDL Converts 8 digit hexadecimal 32 bit binary data to 8 digit BCD BINARY TO data DOUBLE BCD S S S BIN R BCD R sH BIN R 1 _ BCD S 1st source word R 1st result word 2 S COMPLE NEG Calculates the 2 s complement of a word of hexadecimal data MENT A 22 S Source word R Result word
158. output 1 SV CIO 190 e Recorder e Other device Write conversion value SV uonejedo JO MO 4 T T ST e Handling Unit Errors When an error occurs in the built in analog I O system analog input data will be set to 0000 and the analog output will be setto 0 V or 0 mA If a CPU error occurs the analog output will be setto is setto 0 V or 0 mA even if the output range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA For any other fatal errors in the CPU Unit 1 V or 4 mA will be output if the output range is 1 to 5 V or4 to 20 mA CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 5 15 Analog I O Function 15 1 2 Analog I O Specifications The NA type CPU Units of the CP1E CPU Units are equipped with 2 built in analog inputs and 1 built in analog output i Analog Input Specifications Item Voltage input Current input Number of inputs 2 inputs Allocated 2 words CIO 90 to CIO 91 Input signal range 0to 5 V 1to0 5V Oto 10 V or 10 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA to 10V Max rated input 15 V 30 mA External input impedance 1 MQ min Approx 2500 Resolution 1 6000 Overall accuracy At25 C 0 3 full scale 0 4 full scale 0 to 55 C 0 6 full scale 0 8 full scale A D conversion data 10 to 10 V F448 to OBB8 hex FS Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS Averaging function Supported Set for individual inputs in the PLC Setup Open circuit detection function Supported Value
159. panel Sensor Unit Connect the temperature sensor to the Tempera ture Sensor Unit Connect the SSR to the transistor output 2 Wiring I O 3 Setting PIDAT and TPO Set parameters with the MOV instruction or other instructions parameters instructions Executing the PIDAT instruction Execute the PIDAT instruction 5 Execute autotuning for the PID constants Autotuning 6 Starting PID control Start PID control i Inputting the Temperature Sensor s PV to PIDAT Instructions Temperature Sensor Unit A 1aguop amed Aid T 9T Setting the Temperature Range Set the temperature range with the rotary switch on the front panel of the Temperature Sensor Unit If the rotary switch is set to 1 for a CP1W TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit the temperature range is 0 0 to 500 0 C Temperature Data Storage Format Temperature data is automatically stored in words in the Input Area allocated to the Temperature Sensor Unit as an Expansion Unit using four digit hexadecimal Example 100 C is stored as 0064 hex When the range code is a decimal number to one decimal point the value is multiplied by a factor of 10 and converted to a hexadecimal number without a sign then stored as binary data Example 500 0 C multiplied by 10 is 5000 decimal This is converted to 1388 in hexadecimal and stored f the temperature is negative it is stored as signed hexadecimal Example 200 C is stored as FF38 hex uoneJedo JO MO
160. port DM Fixed Allocation Words D1300 to D1399 A641 00 to A641 02 Word Built in RS 232C Serial option port rt of CP1E rbuilt in RS 4 n ml ius aa i Bie corans SO or NA20 N30 40 60 S1 or CPU Unit NA20 CPU Unit D1200 D1300 00to07 Command_ Slave address 00 to F7 hex 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1201 D1301 00 to 07 Function code 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1202 D1302 00 to 15 Number of communications data bytes 0000 to 005E hex D1203 to D1249 D1303 to D1349 00 to 15 Communications data 94 bytes maximum D1250 D1350 00 to 07 Response Slave address 01 to F7 hex 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1251 D1351 00 to 07 Function code 08 to 15 Reserved D1252 D1352 00 to 07 Error code See error codes in the following table 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1253 D1353 00 to 15 Number of response bytes 0000 to 03EA hex D1254 to D1299 D1354 to D1399 00 to 15 Response data 92 bytes maximum CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 e Error Codes 14 Serial Communications Code Description Description 00 hex Normal end 01 hex Illegal address The slave address specified in the parameter is illegal 248 or higher 02 hex Illegal function code The function code specified in the parameter is illegal 03 hex Data length overflow There are more than 94 d
161. power was turned ON seven times power is A740 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A738 00 to A738 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A738 08 to A738 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Unit A739 00 to A739 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A739 08 to A739 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A740 00 to A740 07 Month 01 to 12 A740 08 to A740 15 Year 00 to 99 A741 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when to 8 the power was turned ON eight times power is A743 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A741 00 to A741 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A741 08 to A741 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Unit A742 00 to A742 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A742 08 to A742 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A743 00 to A743 07 Month 01 to 12 A743 08 to A743 15 Year 00 to 99 A744 Power ON Clock Data These words contain the time at which See at left Retained Retained Written when to 9 the power was turned ON nine times power is A746 before the startup time stored in words turned ON CP1E A510 to A511 N NA A744 00 to A744 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A744 08 to A744 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Unit A745 00 to A745 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A745 08 to A745 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A746 00 to A746 07 Month 01 to 12 A746 08 to A746 15 Year 00 to 99 A 78 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Add
162. programming is possible between a CP1E CPU Unit and a Programmable Terminal PT by using the 1 N NT Link protocol Connect the serial port of the CP1E CPU Unit and PT with NT Link 1 N communication mode and connect the CP1E CPU Unit and PT 1 1 as shown below PT NS NP or NT31 631 V3 sjeumnuo o9jqeuuuuei60J4d YM suone iunuuilo 9a4 2ueiboJd z pT RS 232C 1 N NT Link CP1E N NALIDI S type CPU Unit MeIMIGAO L Z vl Connectable Programmable Terminals PTs High speed NT Links 115 200 bps can be used with NS series NP series or NT series PTs H Precautions for Correct Use Communications are not possible for CP1E CPU Units using the 1 1 NT Link protocol Do not connect more than one PT to a CP1E CPU Unit even if the 1 N NT Link protocol is used SAP Smart Active Parts on NS series PTs cannot be used for CP1E CPU Units The main unit of NT31 31C 631 631C cannot be connected with NT Link for the system pro grams preinstalled prior to Ver 1 and system programs in Chinese Simplified and Traditional version and Korean version Connect with Host Link CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 5 14 Serial Communications 14 2 2 Flow of Connection CP1E CPU Unit PT e g NS series 1 Select Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the PLC Setup of the CP1E CPU Unit using the CX Programmer Set the serial communication
163. received after deceleration CCW gt CW The deceleration time is t relatively short in this case Starts Stop when ORG is executed Operating Mode 2 with Error Counter Reset Output with Positioning Completed Input This operating mode is the same as mode 1 except the Positioning Completed Signal INP from the Servo Drive is used Connect the Positioning Completed Signal from the Servo Drive to a normal input If origin compensation is not being applied the Positioning Completed Signal is checked after the Error Counter Reset Output If origin compensation is being applied the Positioning Completed Sig nal is checked after the compensation operation is completed Pulse output gt Time Stop Error Counter k Reset Output Positioning 1 Completed Signal 0 12 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs i Origin Detection Method Setting Origin Detection Method 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Required Recommended Method Deceleration starts when Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON Origin Proximity Input Signal 0 uonisod uibuo buluyesg p ZT After the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns ON and then OFF the motor is stopped when the Origin Input Signal turns ON 1 Origin Input Signal 0 Pulse output High speed for origin search Deceleration s 1 7 Proximity speed for origin search Initial speed i CCW CW
164. representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes even when tolerances are shown PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of OMRON s test conditions and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 S afety Precautions Definition of Precautionary Information The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of a CP series PLC The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Additionally there may be severe property damage Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided ma
165. s 12 41 12 8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs rene nnne nennen nnn nnns 12 44 12 9 Pulse Output Pattern 11eeeeee eene nennen nnne nna nnn nu nuni naa suia usas a ia asa Ru uua dadan aana ani 12 49 12 9 1 Speed Control Continuous Mode nennen nnne nnne 12 49 12 9 2 Positioning Control Independent Mode nennen 12 51 Section 13 PWM Outputs 13 1 PWM Outputs Variable duty factor Pulse Outputs eene nnne nnn 13 2 19 1 1 Flow ofOp6ratiorn e E nen PRU n dhe RE hii ie Hp irit te 13 3 181 2 Ladder Program Example eret ay ded en steterit ctn 13 4 Section 14 Serial Communications 14 1 Serial Communications eese enne enne nnn rani e i i a ua a uaa 14 2 14 1 1 Types of CPU Units and Serial Ports nnne nennen 14 2 14 1 2 Overview of Serial Communications eene nennen nnne 14 3 14 2 Program free Communications with Programmable Terminals 14 5 14 2 1 QUVetVIQW ie elas e e n ec dee Hcr ayer tr evt eels de ee ER ee 14 5 14 2 2 Flow of Connectors issostni erant tice et ie dec paces eine e epe cea Poet tata een 14 6 14 2 3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings nennen nennen 14 6 14 3 No protocol Communications with General Components eene 14 8 14 3 1 QvetViQW iiie circo re t rece Lv hea wenn od iia dad Pee ce ee EY rp Do even 14 8 143 2 Flow Of Operationen tret eri cede rte esee a oer ete e cn
166. se3 n bu sngpoi 7 7T Attached data size in bytes 4 4 bytes from lower byte of D1305 to upper byte of D1307 Number of registers written 2 data for registers 0001 and 0002 Register number for starting data write 0001 Specifies to start writing data to Inverter starting at register 0001 sejdurex3 Bulwwes6oldg p p pL RUN Command Register 0001 Allocation and Details for Inverter 3G3MV Bit No Setting RUN command 1 Start Normal reverse rotation 1 Reversed External error 1 EFO Error reset 1 Error reset Multifunction input 1 1 ON Multifunction input 2 1 ON Multifunction input 3 1 ON Multifunction input 4 1 ON 1 ON o OD a o N o Multifunction input 5 o Multifunction input 6 1 ON 10 Multifunction input 7 1 ON 11 to 15 Not used For this example only the RUN command bit 00 will be used With the Modbus RTU Easy Master a CRC 16 checksum does not need to be set in the DM Area because it is calculated automatically CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 19 14 Serial Communications 14 5 Serial PLC Links Serial PLC Links can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 5 1 Overview Serial PLC Links enable exchanging data between CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Units CP1L CP1H CPU Units or CJ1M CPU Units without using special programming The serial communications mode is set to Ser
167. search function during pulse output which may stop the pulse output If an error occurs that stops pulse output the pulse output s Output Stopped Error Flag will be turned ON and the Pulse Output Stop Error Code will be written to Error Code word Use these flags and error codes to identify the cause of the error The Pulse Output Stop Errors will not affect the CPU Unit s operating status The Pulse Output Stop Errors do not cause a fatal or non fatal error in the CPU Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 e Related Auxiliary Area Flags 12 Pulse Outputs E F Pulse Pulse Function Settings output 0 output 1 Output Stopped Error Flags 0 No error A280 07 A281 07 ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in the 1 Stop error occurred origin search function Stop Error Codes A444 A445 When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs the error code is stored in that pulse outputs corresponding Stop Error Code word Pulse Output Stop Error Codes Error name med Likely cause Corrective action E aner CW Limit Stop 0100 Stopped due to a CW limit sig Move in the CCW direction Immediate stop Input Signal nal input No effect on other CCW Limit 0101 Stopped due to a CCW limit sig Move in the CW direction port Stop Input Sig nal input nal No Origin Prox 0200 The parameters indicate that the Check the wiring of the Origin Proximity Input No effect on other imity Input Sig Origin
168. selected according to need allowing the PLC to be flexibly integrated with the Ethernet information network i Improved FINS Message Communications The following functions have been maintained according to the existing Ethernet Unit models for CS CJ series The maximum number of nodes is 254 Communications are enabled even if the host computer s IP address is dynamic An automatic client FINS node address allocation function makes it possible to connect online to the PLC even if no FINS node address has been set for the host computer FINS message communications is enabled in both UDP IP and TCP IP but it is only enabled in TCP IP with up to 2 simultaneous connections Previously it is enabled in TCP IP with up to 16 simultaneous connections and all can be set to cli ent Multiple FINS applications such as the CX Programmer on the same computer can be connected online to the PLC via Ethernet Use Web Function to Read Ethernet Option Board Settings and Status A Web function is provided in Ethernet Option Board This enables use of a Web browser to read the Ethernet Option Board s system settings and statuses i Full Range of Functions for Handling Troubles A full range of functions is provided for promptly handling any troubles Self diagnostic function when power is turned ON Error log for recording error information when an error occurs 17 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option
169. set in the allocated 4 words in the DM area Remains the default setting Y 192 168 250 1 It is the IP address set in the It is the IP address set in the allocated Settings from the Web browser words in the DM area D1455 D1456 e Confirmation on Local IP Address The local IP address can be confirmed in the allocated words in the DM area D1455 and D1456 when the power of the PLC is turned OFF and then ON again 17 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 3 4 Web Browser Setting Function The Ethernet Option Board s Web window is displayed by accessing the URL from the Web browser The Web server supports the multi language function The supported language are English Chinese and Japanese Before setting users should select the appropriate language in the following URL English page http Ethernet Option Board s IP address E00 htm Chinese page http Ethernet Option Board s IP address CO0 htm Japanese page hitp Ethernet Option Board s IP address J00 htm In this example use the following procedure to set the IP address using Internet Explorer version 6 0 and the Ethernet Option Board s English Web pages 1 Connect the Ethernet Option Board to the computer Use cross cables when connecting directly use straight cables when connecting with hubs 2 Set computer s IP address by manual 1 Select Local Area Connection in Windows Network Connection Tab Right click and selec
170. signal or external sensors such as photoelectric sensors proximity sensors or limit switches In the following example the motor is started at a specified speed accelerated to the origin search high speed and run at that speed until the origin proximity position is detected After the Origin Proximity Input is detected the motor is decelerated to the origin search low speed and run at that speed until the origin position is detected The motor is stopped at the origin position Origin Proximity 1 l Input Signal 0 Ly Origin Input Signal 0 Pulse frequency 4 Origin search high speed Origin search deceleration rate Origin search acceleration rate LI LI I I I LI LI Origin search proximity speed t I Deceleration point Time Start Decelerate from high to low speed Stop Execution of ORG Indicated by the Origin Indicated by the Proximity Input Signal Origin Input Signal Example for reversal mode 1 and method 0 described later EN Additional Information The motor can be moved even if the origin position has not been defined but positioning opera tions will be limited as follows Origin return Cannot be used Positioning with absolute pulse specification Cannot be used Positioning with relative pulse specification Outputs the specified number of pulses after set ting the present position to O CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 2 Flow
171. software reset sse 11 11 PID temperature control eeeeee 16 2 PIDAT instruction 16 3 PEG Setup cete iren e conte etus 7 2 Base Settings 7 13 7 14 Communications settings ssss 7 5 7 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Execute process settings sseeesesees 7 3 High speed counter settings ssssse 7 11 Input constart errem 7 4 Interrupt input settings 7 12 Origin return settings 7 16 Origin search settings 7 13 7 14 7 15 Settings is exer Ree 7 3 Startup data read setting 7 3 Startup mode setting sees 7 3 Timing and interrupt settings sesssse 7 8 PLS2 instruction cccseeeeeeeenne 12 11 12 13 Positioning control 12 13 Positioning control independent mode 12 51 Precautions Ladder programming precautions 4 22 Precautions for using interrupts 10 13 Special program sections sssssss 4 22 Program capacity ssseee 1 2 4 3 Program rode eee teres 3 3 Program free communications with PTS 14 5 PLC Setup and PT system settings 14 6 Programmer device eese 18 4 Programming tte t ede Ete
172. stops Stops OFF Stopped ON Outputting pulses 05 Pulse Output 0 ON when the origin has not been Cleared Refreshed No origin Flag determined for pulse output 0 and goes each cycle OFF when the origin has been deter during the mined overseeing Turned ON when power is turned processes ON Turned ON when operation starts OFF Origin established ON Origin not established 06 Pulse Output 0 ON when the pulse output 0 PV Cleared Refreshed At origin Flag matches the origin 0 each cycle OFF Not stopped at origin during the A ie overseeing ON Stopped at origin processes 07 Pulse Output 0 ON when an error occurred while out Cleared Refreshed Output Stopped Error putting pulses in the pulse output 0 ori when origin Flag gin search function search The Pulse Output 0 Output Stop Error starts code will be written to A444 Refreshed OFF No error when a pulse output ON Stop error occurred stop error occurs A 56 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 after Status at Write Name Function Settings Sue flags Words Bits mode startup timing change settings A281 00 Pulse Output 1 This flag will be ON when pulses are Cleared Refreshed Accel Decel Flag being output from pulse output 1 each cycle according to an ORG ACC or PLS2 during the instruction and the output frequency is overseeing being changed in steps accelerating proc
173. task error has occurred A ON Error Cleared Cleared A294 task error will occur when there is no OFF Normal A298 program allocated to the task A299 Note The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 13 Differentiation Over The allowed value for Differentiation ON Error Cleared Cleared A294 flow Error Flag Flags which correspond to differentia OFF Normal A298 tion instructions has been exceeded A299 CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON Note The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 14 Illegal Instruction Error ON when a program that cannot be ON Error Cleared Cleared A294 Flag executed has been stored CPU Unit OFF Normal A298 operation will stop and the ERR ALM A299 indicator will light when this flag goes ON 15 UM Overflow Error ON when the last address in UM User ON Error Cleared Cleared A294 Flag Memory has been exceeded CPU OFF Normal A298 Unit operation will stop and the A299 ERR ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON A298 Program Address These words contain the program Lower digits of the Cleared Cleared A294 Where Program address of the instruction where pro program address Stopped gram execution was stopped due to a Lower digits program error A299 Program Address Note A294 co
174. the CX Programmer Terminals 02 to 07 on the CIO 0 terminal block can be used for interrupt inputs Bits CIO 0 02 to CIO 0 07 cor respond to terminals 02 to 07 Write the program in the interrupt task Interrupt tasks 2 to 7 correspond to interrupt inputs 2 to 7 Specify whether the interrupt is executed when the input turns ON or when it turns OFF in the MSKS instruction Set N to 112 to 117 in the MSKS instruction Enable input interrupts in the MSKS instruction Set N to 102 to 107 in the MSKS instruction A built in input cannot be used as a normal input high speed counter input or quick response input if it is being used as an interrupt input Refer to 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals for details i PLC Setup 10 4 Select Interrupt 7 PLC Settings NewPLC1 File Options Help Input constant Built in RS232C Pott Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output o Pulse Output 1 HL r High Speed Counter 0 Use high speed counter 0 Counting mode Lines de Circular Max Count f0 Reset e software rese M Input Setting Differential pha F M High Speed Counter 2 Use high speed counter 2 Counting mode Linea n rm Circular Max Count Reset Softwar E Input Setting Increment pulse input 7 High Speed Counter 4 Use high speed counter 4 Counting mode ec r modi Circular Max Count Reset z Input Setting v Interrupt Input IN2 Normal v IN3 No
175. the actual sensor as an input condition in the ladder program and output the result to this flag 10 Pulse Output 0 This is the positioning completed input Retained Cleared Positioning Com signal used in the origin search for pleted Signal pulse output 0 The input signal from the servo driver is output to this bit from the ladder program to enable using the signal A541 00 Pulse Output 1 The pulse output 1 PV contained in Retained Cleared A278 and Reset Bit A278 and A279 will be cleared when A279 this bit is turned ON 08 Pulse Output 1 This is the CW limit input signal for Retained Cleared CW Limit Input Signal pulse output 1 which is used in the Flag origin search To use this signal write the input from the actual sensor as an input condition in the ladder program and output the result to this flag 09 Pulse Output 1 This is the CCW limit input signal for Retained Cleared CCW Limit Input Sig pulse output 1 which is used in the nal Flag origin search To use this signal write the input from the actual sensor as an input condition in the ladder program and output the result to this flag 10 Pulse Output 1 This is the positioning completed input Retained Cleared Positioning Com signal used in the origin search for pleted Signal pulse output 1 The input signal from the servo driver is output to this bit from the ladder program to enable using the signal A 74 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W
176. the steps for jogging 12 3 1 High speed J ogging Start pulse output with acceleration or deceleration using the ACC instruction In this case acceleration and deceleration rate must be the same Set the target frequency of the ACC instruction to 0 Hz to stop the pulse output Bulbbo f er Target frequency ds I Q Pulse output started Pulse output stopped 74 E oO Target frequency Starting pulse output 1 Hz to 100 kHz in increments of 1 Hz 2 Gas Stopping pulse output 0 Hz e Q Acceleration and deceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65 535 Hz every 4 ms a Direction specification Set to CW or CCW Mode specification Set to continuous mode 12 3 2 Low speed J ogging Start pulse output without acceleration or deceleration using the SPED instruction Set the target fre quency of the SPED instruction to 0 Hz to stop the pulse output Target frequency Pulse output started Pulse output stopped Target frequency Starting pulse output 1 Hz to 100 kHz in increments of 1 Hz Stopping pulse output 0 Hz Direction specification Set to CW or CCW Mode specification Set to continuous mode 12 3 3 Application Example i Specifications and Operation The following example shows jogging without acceleration or deceleration executed using a SPED instruction It is used for low speed jogging Clockwise low speed jogging will be executed from pul
177. timer numbers they are reset under different conditions The PV for a TIML TIMLX instruction is reset to the SV Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details 5 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 7 Counter Area C i Overview The Counter Area contains Completion Flags 1 bit each and counter PVs 16 bits each A Comple tion Flag is turned ON when the counter PV reaches the set value counting out Precautions for Safe Use With an ELIDI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON y This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function g If the DM backup function is being used be sure to refer to 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Star i tup for details gt i 8 i Notation C 00 Counter number 002 l O memory area designator C i Range Counter numbers range from CO to C255 i Details Types of Counters The following table shows which instructions are used to refresh counter PVs in BCD and binary mode Counter instruction Binary mode COUNTER CNT CNTX REVERSIBLE COUNTER CNTR CNTRX Counter numbers 0 to 255 are used by all counters given above T
178. to 000F hex Interrupt task number 0 to 15 AAAA hex Do not execute interrupt task FFFF hex Ignore the settings for this range Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower limit for any one range I MODE CONTROL Instruction INI The INI instruction is used for the following items Starting and stopping comparison with the high speed counter comparison table Use the CTBL instruction to register the target value or range comparison table before using INI to start or stop comparison If the comparison is started simultaneously when registering the comparison table and then the high speed counter interrupts are always valid the INI instruction is not required Changing the PV of a High speed Counter Execution condition sesso C1 Port specifier SSS C2 Control data eae S First word of new PV Operand Settings C1 Port specifier 0010 High speed counter 0 i i 0015 High speed counter 5 C2 Control data 0000 Start comparison 0001 Stop comparison 0002 Change the PV S First word of S contains the first word of the new PV when C is set to 0002 new PV change the PV 11 22 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters i Example 1 Target Value Comparison In this example high speed counter 0 operates in linear mode and starts interrupt task 10 when the PV reaches 30 000 0000 7530 hex and starts interrupt task 11 when the PV reaches 2
179. type cannot be used Offsetting is possible for all addresses except the DM Areas When specifying symbols make the symbol table setting as the array variation The number of arrays will be the maximum number of offset 1 bit at least The I O comment for the start bit address is displayed Offset The offset can be specified as a decimal constant word address but CIO Area addresses cannot be specified or a one word symbol i e symbols with the following data types INT UINT WORD CHANNEL Words in the Auxiliary Area A can only be specified as a decimal constant If a word address is specified the contents of the specified word is used as the offset If the offset exceeds bit 15 in the specified word offsetting will continue from bit 00 in the next word If the offset is specified indirectly make sure that the final bit address does not exceed the upper limit of the memory area by using input comparison or other instruction CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 19 4 Understanding Programming Examples 10 0 2 10 02 Offset decimal value Start bit address bit address in I O memory 10 00 W0 10 02 Offset when WO amp 2 word address in I O memory L Start bit address bit address in I O memory e Word Addresses a 2 gt 10 02 Offset decimal value L Start bit address symbol a 10 0 bit symbol named a a b 10 02 Offset symbo
180. when the origin return is Setting range 1 to 100k pps Return executed Specify the speed in the number of pulses per second pps Acceleration Sets the motor s acceleration rate when the origin Setting range 1 to 65 535 Hz Ratio return operation starts Specify the amount to increase 4 ms the speed Hz per 4 ms interval Deceleration Sets the motor s deceleration rate when the origin Setting range 1 to 65 535 Hz Ratio return function is decelerating Specify the amount to 4 ms decrease the speed Hz per 4 ms interval The actual monitoring time will be the Positioning Monitor Time rounded up to the nearest 10 ms unit 10 ms max If the Positioning Monitor Time is set to 0 the function will be disabled and the Unit will continue waiting for the Positioning Completed Signal to come ON A Positioning Timeout Error will not be generated Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the settings for using the origin search CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 23 uonisod uibuo 6uiuged p ZT dnjes 21d ul sues r zL 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 4 Origin Search Instructions I Origin Search Instruction ORG Execute the ORG instruction in the ladder program to perform an origin search with the specified parameters 7 ORG C1 Port specifier C4 Pulse output 0 0000 H Pulse output 1 0001 C2 C2 Control data Origin search an
181. will turn ON einpeooJd Z 94 EN Additional Information Confirming Completion of DM Area Backup If user programs or the parameter area is being saved to the backup memory using operations from the CX Programmer the backup operation will not be executed immediately even if A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit is turned ON A751 14 DM Backup Save Flag will remain ON during this time and turn OFF when the DM backup operation has been completed You can confirm the completion of DM backup by checking to see if the DM Backup Save Flag A751 14 has been turned OFF CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 11 16 Other Functions 16 4 Security Functions The Security function can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 16 4 1 Ladder Program Read Protection i Read Protection With the CX Programmer it is possible to set read protection using a password for the whole ladder program When the program is read protected using a password it is not possible to display or edit any of the lad der programs using the CX Programmer unless the password is entered in the Disable Password Dia log Box from the CX Programmer This enables improved security for PLC data in equipment Setting Protection 7 Right click the PLC in the project tree to open the Protection Tab Page of the PLC Proper ties NewPLC1 CP1E Offline Jx PLC Properties F r J General Protection ES Settings Properties A Programs E NewPr
182. with any standards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer s application or use of the Product At Buyer s request Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod uct in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer s application product or system Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities iii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation Systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equip ment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iv Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop erty Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod uct NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE
183. 0 to 0 Turn the power of the CPU Unit OFF and then ON again eunpe2oug dnes z T Use the Ethernet Option Board Set only the IP address Set system settings freely without making any settings Access from the Web browser Access from the Web browser using the default IP address using the default IP address http 192 168 250 1 E00 htm http 192 168 250 1 E00 htm Set the local IP address to 0 0 0 0 Set any value from the Web from the Web browser browser Set in the allocated words in the DM area set by the ladder programmer or I Use the default IP address 192 168 250 1 e14npeo5o4g dnueis L o Zk transfer the PLC memory with the CX Programmer to make settings Start communication CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 9 17 Ethernet Option Board i Serial Communications Settings of the Option Board To make the settings of the Ethernet Option Board firstly it is necessary to set the serial communica tions settings of the CPU Unit It can be set by the following two methods 1 Set by the USB port of the CPU Unit 2 Set by the Ethernet port of the Ethernet Option Board For details on the method of connecting the CX Programmer to the Ethernet option port refer to 17 6 Connection Method with the CX P rogrammer Connect the CX Programmer to the CPU Unit and then change the PLC Settings as follows FJ PLC Settings HewPLC1 15 xl File Options Help Built in RS232C Port Seria
184. 0 000 0000 4E20 hex 4qqun0 gt D p ds yIH TT sydnueul 1 Set high speed counter 0 in the PLC Setup s Built in Input Tab Item Setting High speed counter 0 Use counter Counting mode Linear mode Circular Max Count Reset method Software reset Input Setting Up Down inputs 2 Set the target value comparison table in words D1000 to D1006 Word Setting Function D1000 0002 Number of target values 2 D1001 7530 Rightmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data 30000 Target value D1002 40000 Leftmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data 30000 30 000 0000 7530 hex D1003 000A Target value 1 Bit 15 0 incrementing Bits 00 to 07 A hex interrupt task number 10 D1004 4E20 Rightmost 4 digits of the target value 2 data 20000 Target value D1005 0000 Leftmost 4 digits of the target value 2 data 20000 20 000 0000 4E20 hex D1006 800B Target value 2 Bit 15 1 decrementing Bits 00 to 07 B hex interrupt task number 11 uomonuisu 1dnujeju 48JUNODD peeds uBiH LL 3 Create the programs for interrupt tasks 10 and 11 4 Use the CTBL instruction to start the comparison operation with high speed counter 0 and inter rupt tasks 10 and 11 W0 00 CTBL 0000 Use high speed counter 0 0000 Register a target value comparison D1000 4 table and start comparison operation First comparison table word When ex
185. 00 to FFFFFFFF hex S42 Upper word of target value 1 S wo Interrupt task number for target value 1 S 16 Lower word of target value 6 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex S 17 Upper word of target value 6 S418 Interrupt task number for target value 6 nterrupt Task Number 1514 1211 87 43 0 000 0 ie u Interrupt task number 00 to OF hex 0 to 15 Direction OFF Incrementing ON Decrementing CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 21 11 High speed Counters Range Comparison Table The range comparison table requires a continuous block of 30 words for comparison conditions 1 to 6 require 5 words each two words for the upper range value two words for the lower range value and one word for the interrupt task number 15 0 S Lower word of range 1 lower limit S S 2 Lower word of range 1 upper limit 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note Upper word of range 1 lower limit 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note S43 Upper word of range 1 upper limit Range 1 interrupt task number S 25 Lower word of range 6 lower limit 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note S426 Upper word of range 6 lower limit S427 Lower word of range 6 upper limit 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note NY S 28 Upper word of range 6 upper limit S429 Range 6 interrupt task number Interrupt task number 0000
186. 01 on terminal block CIO100 is always lit during PWM output 13 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 13 PWM Outputs Wiring for NOOS 1 type CPU Unit An external power supply is required for NLILIS 1 type CPU Units when using the PWM output Provide a DC24V external power supply to V and V terminals as follows e Wiring Example Sinking outputs V 00 01 V COM V COM 03 02 sindino esind 40326j Anp eIqeueA NANO Wid T ET Although V and COM V are connected internally also wire them externally Sourcing outputs V 00 01 02 V COM V COM 03 Although V and COM V are connected internally also wire them externally uonejedo JO MOI L L L Do not connect an external power supply to NLILI type CPU Units 13 1 1 Flow of Operation Terminal 01 on terminal block CIO100 is used for PWM output 0 Setting pulse output port number assigning pulse output terminals and wiring The PWM instruction is used to control PWM outputs Greate ladder Cyclic task PWM outputs are stopped with the INI instruction program interrupt task Pulse Output Port Number and Pulse Output Terminals The following terminals can be used for pulse outputs according to the pulse output method Output terminal block Other functions that cannot be used at the same time F J Specifications made Terminal Terminal
187. 07 in CIO 0 and output bits CIO 101 00 to CIO 101 07 i e bits 00 to 07 in CIO 1 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 6 3 6 I O Allocation 6 1 4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units connected to the CPU Unit are automatically allocated input bits and output bits in words following those allocated to the CPU Unit For example if a CPU Unit with 40 I O points is used CIO 0 and CIO 1 are allocated for inputs and CIO 100 and CIO 101 are allocated for outputs Thus words from CIO 2 onward for inputs and words from CIO 102 onward for outputs are automatically allocated to the Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units in the order that the Units are connected Allocations to Expansion I O Units There are Expansion I O Units for expanding inputs for expanding outputs and for expanding both input and outputs l O bits starting from bit 00 in the next word after the word allocated to the previous Expansion Unit Expansion I O Unit or CPU Unit are automatically allocated This word is indicated as CIO m for input words and as CIO n for output words Input bits Output bits Model No of No of No of No of bits Words Addresses bis words Addresses 8 point Input Unit CP1W 8ED 8 1 CIO m bits 00 to 07 None None 8 point Relay outputs CP1W 8ER None None 8 1 CIO n bits 00 Output Unit Sinking transistor CP1W 8
188. 1 4 6 Ladder Programming Precautions eere ennemi nnn nnn rna 4 22 4 6 1 Special Program Sections wi s ioci ceder ones eea coe tct dar itt dine ic nec teda 4 22 Section 5 I O Memory 5 1 Overview of 1 0 Memory Areas eren nnn enn a a a n i a 5 2 5 1 1 l O Memory AIG as oen etate ede nr de te creer ete adoret tte ear hoe eee 5 2 5 1 2 I O Memory Area Address Notation sesssssssseeeeeeeeneeneen nennen nnne nnns 5 5 5 1 3 O Memory Areas ie me etel i coe ier ieu ete eit aer ede ieee eee 5 6 CAMION ca 5 7 5 3 Work Area W sicsiticai svancans cina ni ineunda auus t aw eru ka Fa e a a i Y iaa ao va a x EO TEE UNA NN EN Eg e ae RE EUER ERR 5 8 5 4 Holding Area H 4 1 iso niin ananas Sua an iE Coo n2 ri 4330 cPa Unt Yun Ca sanada aaia daina I 3E G2 dan pe RR IIa Y ad ER Cd ann EE 5 9 5 5 Data Memory Area D 11 eere enne nennen nnn nnn nnn iia nna ua nai a ana u aono iua ansa a anon 5 11 5 6 Timer Area T sisncdiccsevvicsssccnsasicscscvevedtncnconadsecnneyocvensuahasdseGuntuccesdueustadundananoddectisustacesantavsdesannsend 5 13 5 7 Counter Area C ss cicvassdscvdecsncacscvscsuadcenssgabscdcetucnises nva Dan co E FEE RERE NY E Rao aaa EUR acuceisnacntccduthisauseustens 5 15 5 8 Auxiliary Area A o aeris cacaceeticsissaessstaccvasasccacecciecsevaceacacavesstauedaedsaususiaseadenacivusessddaaccstaeiiiaussaae 5 17 5 9 Condition Flags eese nennen nnn ir
189. 14 31 14 7 Precautions on the usage of RS 485 esses eene rana a a a 14 33 Section 15 Analog I O Function 15 1 OVerViCW 15 2 15 1 1 Flow of OperatiOh n dened aah lel terea Ce bo ree one e eerte o aad 15 2 15 1 2 Analog l O Specifications 2 4 5 on ied cete ere al i one e 15 6 15 2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges eese eene n 15 7 15 2 1 X Analog Input Signal Ranges sss nennen enne nennt nter tns enne nnne nnne 15 7 15 2 2 Analog Output Signal Ranges sssssssssssesseeee nennen nennen nnne nennen nnn nennen 15 9 15 2 37 Special FUNCIONS xoi teda eee eU eere e dd ate Rod EU EO eee 15 11 15 3 1 0 Allocation and Related Auxiliary Area Flags eeerernnnnnnnnnnnn 15 12 q5 3 t TO AIIOCation i ee GR r e a INIM 15 12 15 3 2 Related Auxiliary Area FlaQS cecsccceseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceneseneeeseesenseneesegeeeseeeeneneneeeesneeseneaeenes 15 12 Section 16 Other Functions 16 1 PID Temperature Control csescsssseeesssersseressseesseeessseoecssonsnsseeesssoesasseeesssonsessaeesnssesesssanenees 16 2 16 1 1 OVerVIOW inicie tei e eth D REPRE BATERM IAIMEHEU IMP 16 2 16 1 2 Flow of Operaltlon axes e Set me ete n a alin e eta dcr 16 3 1621 3 Application Example n eere el dee e hd reed eee ee 16 4 16 2 ClOCK 16 7 16 3 DM Backup F
190. 18 MILC 519 MILC 519 If there is a differentiated instruction DIFU DIFD or instruction with a or 96 prefix between MILR 518 and the corresponding MILC 519 that instruction will not be executed after the interlock is cleared even if the differentiation condition of the instruction was established MULTI INTER MILC MILC TET Clears an interlock started by an MILH 517 or MILR 518 with the LOCK CLEAR 919 same interlock number N ON All outputs between MILH 517 MILR 518 and the corresponding N Interlock number MILC 519 with the same interlock number are interlocked when the execution condition for MILH 517 MILR 518 is OFF JUMP JMP When the execution condition for JMP 004 is OFF program exe JMP 004 1 N Interlock number CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 cution jumps directly to the first JME 005 in the program with the same jump number JMP 004 and JME 005 are used in pairs Execution condition ll Jap 9N 9FF Instructions in this section N are not D executed and Instruc out put status is maintained The instruction Instructions tions jumped ex ecuted execution time for these r instructions is eliminated panes 4 E ences suono ung uononnsul T Y suoionasu j ouo2 eouenbes e 1 v Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Function Symbol Operand CONDITIONAL CJP T
191. 1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 8 1 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations 8 1 Built in Functions The following built in functions are provided by the CP1E ELILI S type and N NALILI S type CPU Units Type CP1E Basic Models CP1E Application Models f s NODO S type CPU NALIEI type CPU Reference Function ELILI S type CPU Units Units Units Appearance E N NALILI 000000 E NLILIS oJ E10 CPU Units 4 inputs 6 inputs Section 9 Quick response inputs E14 20 30 40 S CPU Units 6 inputs n E10 CPU Units 4 inputs 6 inputs Section 10 Input interrupts E14 20 30 40 S CPU Units 6 inputs Scheduled interrupts 1 interrupt 1 interrupt High speed counter Incremental Incremental 100 kHzx2 counters 10 kHzx4 Section 11 E10 CPU Units 10 kHzx5 counters counters E14 20 30 40 CPU Units 10 kHzx6 Up down 100 kHzx1
192. 1E CPU Units support the following types of serial communications Connected devices Programmable Terminal NS NP series PT L RS 232C NT Link amp e mm CP1E Description Data can be exchanged with PTs without using a communi cations program in the CPU Unit Note Only one PT can be con nected when using a 1 N NT Link It is not possible to connect two PTs Communications protocol 1 N NT Links Host Link is also supported Built in RS 232C OK Optional serial port or built in RS 485 OK RS 232C or RS 422A 485 General device with serial communications Communicates with general devices such as barcode readers with an RS 232C or RS 422A 485 port without a command response format The TXD and RXD instructions are executed in the ladder pro gram in the CPU Unit to trans mit data from the transmission port or read data in the recep tion port No protocol communications OK OK Modbus RTU slave devices such as invert ers Modbus RTU Easy Master Data can be easily exchanged with general devices that sup port Modbus RTU slave func tionality such as inverters and are equipped with an RS 232C port or RS 422A 485 port Modbus RTU Easy Master Function OK OK t or Bulit in RS 485 Port RS 422A 485 CP1E CPU Unit Polled Unit CP1L CPU Unit Polled Unit CP1E CPU Unit Softwar
193. 1y MOowW N O I JO M9IAJ9AO T S seeJy OW N O I L L S 5 I O Memory Counter Area C There are two parts to the Counter Area the Counter Completion Flags and the Counter Present Values PVs Up to 256 counters with counter numbers CO to C255 can be used These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode This data is unstable if power is reset when the battery is not mounted Counter Completion Flags Each Counter Completion Flag is accessed as one bit using the counter number A Completion Flag is turned ON when the set value of the counter is reached Counter PVs Each counter PV is accessed as one word 16 bits using the timer number The PVs count up or down as the counter operates Refer to 5 7 Counter Area C S ystem Areas System Areas contain bits and words with preassigned functions Auxiliary Area A The words and bits in this area have preassigned functions Refer to A 2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address Condition Flags The Condition Flags include the flags that indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always ON and Always OFF Flags The Condition Flags are specified with global symbols rather than with addresses For example P on Clock Pulses The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit s internal timer The Clock Pulses are specified with globa
194. 2 04 06 08 1 0 VINO COMO VIN COMI CP 1E NA20DLT D 11 INO AG I coM 01 03 05 07 09 NC 00 02 04 06 o8 1 0 VINO COMO VIN N1 COMI CIO 0 e Wiring Analog Outputs Analog output Terminal Block CP 1E NA20DR A Voltage Output CIO 90 CIO 9 Analog input device voltage NC IOUTO 00 01 02 04 05 07 JCOMJCOM COM 03 JCOM 06 N C VOUTO COMO CIO 100 CP 1E NA20DLT D CIO 190 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC IOUTO NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC VOUTOCOMO CIO 100 CIO 190 input Analog output device current output Input Terminal Current Input VINO Analog input 0 voltage input IINO Analog input 0 current input COMO Analog input 0 common AG Analog 0V VIN1 Analog input 1 voltage input IIN1 Analog input 1 current input COMI Analog input 1 common Analog input output Termina Block device current Current Output input VOUTO Analog output 0 voltage output IOUTO Analog output 0 current output COMO Analog output 0 common Note 1 Use 2 conductor shielded twisted pair cable for the I O wiring and do not connect the shield AG terminal 2 Ifan input is not being used connect short the i
195. 2 changes from OFF to ON the interrupt task is executed Sensor input interrupt input 2 Sensor input interrupt CIO 0 02 Interrupt task Interrupt task Interrupt task Workpiece execution execution execution Sensor input CIO 0 00 Sensor input Sensor input 3 Sensor input 1 CIO 0 01 i T Sensor input 2 Sensor input l CIO 0 03 N Reset input H i i 5 CIO 0 04 g n OK output _ 0 c 8 CIO 100 00 J L L NG output 1 i wem m 9 d CIO 100 01 MENGE E Ej NG output 2 _ W CIO 100 02 1 i t H NG output 3 c y CIO 100 03 1 1 r 1 1 j I L I NG output 4 CIO 100 04 ejdurex3 uoneoddy Z 0L CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 7 10 Interrupts 1 PLC Setup Set IN2 to Interrupt in the interrupt input settings on the Built in Input Tab Page 2 Connecting Interrupt Input Terminals Terminal 2 on terminal block OCH is interrupt input IN2 Interrupt task 2 corresponds to interrupt input 2 Interrupt input sensor input Sensor input 3 CIO 0 03 CIO 0 02 Sensor input 2 CIO 0 01 Reset input CIO 0 04 Sensor input 1 CIO 0 00 9 J 73 3 D leni PRPML PERIPHERAL OK output CIO 100 00 NG output 1 CIO 100 01 OJ gt NG output 2 CIO 100 04 NG o
196. 211 87 43 0 Always 0 L Mode 0 hex Continuous 1 hex Independent Direction 0 hex CW 1 hex CCW Pulse output method 1 hex Pulse direction hex F First pulse frequency word 15 0 F Lower word of F 1 Upper word of target frequency target frequency 0 to 100000 Hz 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex The value of F and F 1 sets the pulse frequency in Hz CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic SET PULSES PULS Variations Symbol Operand PULS 886 a P Port specifier T Pulse type N Number of pulses Appendices Function Sets the number of output pulses Actual output of the pulses is started later in the program using SPED 885 or ACC 888 in independent mode P Port specifier 0000 hex 0001 hex Pulse output 0 Pulse output 1 T Pulse type 0000 hex Relative 0001 hex Absolute N Number of pulses 15 0 N Lower word with number of pulses NL N 1 Upper word with number of pulses Relative pulse output 0 to 2 147 483 647 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Absolute pulse output 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex PULSE OUT PLS2 PUT PLS2 887 P P Port specifier M Output mode S First word of settings table F First word of starting frequency CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Ma
197. 3 Operations ss tee e ee EIDB 3 2 GTBL instr ctiohi certet 11 21 CX Programmer Help iie RE 18 7 Gycle time 5n ottica RENE ORE 3 2 WO response time eeeeeneeeeee A 80 Interrupt response time seeen A 82 Cycle time response performance A 80 Cyclic refreshing onionenn isai 4 15 D Data formats eio ette OR beer 4 13 Data Memory Area ssssssssssssseese 5 3 5 11 Data refresh method sene 14 23 Defining origin position 12 20 Operating mode 12 25 Operation pattern sessseseeeeeee 12 30 OrigitiTetUrfi zeit eins 12 32 Origin search operation setting 12 29 PEC Setup enne n 12 21 Differential phase input 4x 11 8 DM Area capacity eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenrennne 1 2 DM backup function eeee 16 8 E End code No protocol communications 14 8 Equals Flag P EQ esses 5 19 Error Flag P ER 2p ee 5 19 E type CPU Unit cise oit n reete edes 1 2 Execute process settings ssseeeeeee 7 3 F FINS Command eterne 14 4 14 30 Forced set reset eese 18 26 Functions allocation Selecting functions in the PLC Setup 8 4 Specifying method sees 8 4 G Global symbols iriso ninsiirin eiersiden 4 6 Greater Than Flag P GT 5 19 Grea
198. 30 40 60 SD or NA20 CPU Unit Contents Modbus RTU Master Execution Error Flag ON Execution error OFF Execution normal or still in progress Modbus RTU Master Execution Normal Flag ON Execution normal OFF Execution error or still in progress Modbus RTU Master Execution Bit Turned ON Execution started ON Execution in progress OFF Not executed or execution completed A641 02 CPU Unit 01 00 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Serial option port or built in RS 485 port of CP1E N30 40 60 S1 or NA20 Modbus RTU Master Execution Error Flag ON Execution error OFF Execution normal or still in progress Modbus RTU Master Execution Normal Flag ON Execution normal OFF Execution error or still in progress Modbus RTU Master Execution Bit Turned ON Execution started ON Execution in progress OFF Not executed or execution completed 14 13 uonoung Jayseyy se3 NLY SNGPON 7 7T uogeoolv p4oM pue Dunes r vL 14 Serial Communications 14 4 4 Programming Examples A bobbin winder on a spinning machine will be used in the following example The speed of the bobbin winder must be controlled as the thread is wound because the speed of the thread is constant Constant thread speed Fast rotation Slow rotation 60 00Hz 55 00Hz Speed 50 00Hz Stopped Contact A Contact B Contact C Contact Z ON ON ON ON W0 00 W0 01 W0 02
199. 4 4 Constants ccc cece eee eee 4 16 4 5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses llle n nnn 4 19 4 5 1 OVeIVIGW x akt eise ee AU HN to Ut uetus x sue 4 19 4 5 2 X Application Examples for Address Offsets 0 000 e ee eaee 4 21 4 6 Ladder Programming Precautions een nnn nnn 4 22 4 6 1 Special Program Sections lilseseselee eese 4 22 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 1 4 Understanding Programming 4 1 Programming 4 1 1 User Programs i Structure of User Programs User programs are created by using the CX Programmer 4 2 The user programs consist of the following parts Programs A program consists of more than one instruction and ends with an END instruction Tasks Smallest Executable Unit A program is assigned to an interrupt task to execute it In the CX Programmer the interrupt task number is specified in the program properties Tasks include cyclic tasks executed with normal cyclic processing interrupt tasks executed when interrupt conditions have been completed and scheduled interrupt tasks executed at specified inter vals The CP1E can use only one cyclic task Sections When creating and displaying programs with the CX Programmer the one program can be divided into any number of parts Each part is called a section Sections are created mainly to make programs easier to understand Subroutines You can create subroutines within a program I U
200. 480 Appendices 2 hex NT link 1 N 3 hex Non protocol 5 hex Host Link 7 hex Serial PLC Link Slave 8 hex Serial PLC Link Master 9 hex Modbus RTU Easy Master Address Status E after Status at Write peated Name Function Settings Bhs flags Words Bits mode startup timing 5 change settings A617 00 Built in RS232C Port Display the present communication Parity Retained See Refreshed Communication Set settings of the built in RS232C port 0 Even Function when power is tings Reflect the PLC Setup when power is column turned ON turned ON 1 Odd 01 Parity Retained See Refreshed 0 Yes Function when power is column turned ON 1 No 02 Stop bit Retained See Refreshed 0 2 bits Function when poweris column turned ON 1 1 bit 03 Data length Retained See Refreshed 0 7 bits Function when power is column turned ON 1 8 bits 04 Start bit Retained See Refreshed 0 1 bit fixed Function when power is column turned ON 08 Communication Retained See Refreshed to speed Function when power is 11 0 hex Default 9600 column turned ON 3 hex 1200 4 hex 2400 5 hex 4800 gt 6 hex 9600 N 7 hex 19200 4 8 hex 38400 9 hex 57600 lt A hex 115200 i 12 Communication Retained See Refreshed to mode Function when power is Ly 15 0 hex Default Host column turned ON Link o 2 a A618 00 Ser
201. 5 s OFF for 0 5s 1 min clock pulse P 1min 30s ON for 30 s OFF for 30 s 30s CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 21 SoS nd 49015 OT S 5 I O Memory Using the Clock Pulses The following example turns a bit ON and OFF at 0 5 s intervals 100 00 Instruction Operand LD P 1s OUT 100 00 100 00 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 I O Allocation This section describes I O allocation used to exchange data between the CP1E CPU Unit and other units Be sure you understand the information in the section before attempting to write ladder diagrams 6 1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits eese 6 2 6 1 1 VO Allocation 232 rm RRDCPLDLeRUPPUeNpn S REPRE dete eit hed 6 2 6 1 2 WOAllocation Concepts 0 cette 6 3 6 1 3 Allocations on the CPU Unit 0 0 0 eee eee 6 3 6 1 4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units 6 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 6 1 6 I O Allocation 6 1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits This section describes the allocation of input bits and output bits 6 1 1 1 0 Allocation OMRON calls allocating I O bits in memory I O allocation The I O on Expansion I O Units are allocated I O bits in the words following the allocated words to the built in I O on the CPU Units Allocated 12 bits Allocated 12 bits in the next word Inputs OCH CIO 0 1
202. 5 x No of polled units 1 x No of link words x 2 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 83 Appendices A 3 4 Pulse Output Start Time The pulse output start time is the time required from executing a pulse output instruction until pulses are output externally This time depends on the pulse output instruction that is used and operation that is performed Instruction 3 f execution t Starttime e a Pulse output Pulse output instruction Start time SPED continuous Minimum 500ys Wait time SPED independent ACC continuous ACC independent trapezoidal ACC independent triangular PLS2 trapezoidal PLS2 triangular The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts As a guideline the wait time will be O to 3 ms A 3 5 Pulse Output Change Response Time The pulse output change response time is the time for any change made by executing an instruction during pulse output to actually affect the pulse output operation Pulse output instruction Change response time INI immediate stop Minimum 100us Wait time 1 pulse output time SPED immediate stop ACC deceleration stop 1 control cycle 4 ms minimum 2 control cycles 8 ms maximum PLS2 deceleration stop SPED speed change ACC speed change PLS2 target position change in reverse direction
203. 6 Power ON Clock Data 10 A747 to A749 Operation Start Time A515 to A517 The time that operation started year month day of month hour minutes and seconds Operation End Time A518 to A520 The time that operation stopped year month day of month hour minutes and seconds e Time related Instructions Name Mnemonic Function CALENDAR ADD CADD Adds time to the calendar data in the specified words CALENDAR SUBTRACT CSUB Subtracts time from the calendar data in the specified words CLOCK ADJUSTMENT DATE Changes the internal clock setting to the setting in the speci fied source words CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 7 16 Other Functions 16 3 DM Backup Function This section describes the function that saves specified words from the DM Area in the built in EEPROM backup memory 16 3 1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data I Overview The contents of the DM Area D will become unstable if the power supply is interrupted for longer than the backup time of the built in capacitor 50 hours for an ELILI S type CPU Unit 40 hours for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery The contents of the specified words in the DM Area data can be backed up from RAM to the built in EEPROM backup memory during operation by turning ON a bit in the Auxiliary Area The number of DM Area words to back up is specified in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box in the PLC Setup If the Restore D0 from backup memory
204. 60 us Wait Maximum 230 us Wait Maximum 670 us Wait time time time The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts As a guideline the wait time will be 0 to 3 ms Note Input interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the user program I O refresh peripheral servicing or overseeing Even if an instruction is being executed execution of the instruction will be stopped to exe cute the interrupt task The interrupt response time is not affected by the above processing operations during which the interrupt inputs turns ON Input interrupts however are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even if the input interrupt conditions are satisfied Instead the input interrupts are executed after the current interrupt task has com pleted execution and the software interrupt response time has elapsed The interrupt response time of input interrupt tasks is calculated as follows Interrupt response time Input ON delay Software interrupt response time Inputs Input ON delay 1 A i Ready to acknowledge Interruptsignal next interrupt signal acknowledged Pod Software interrupt response time Interrupt task 1 execution lt lt a a Interrupt response Ladder program Return time time for input execution time from input i interrupt task interrupt task Cyclic task execution main program The time fr
205. 7 3 7 2 1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings 0 0 eect eee 7 3 7 2 2 Timing and Interrupt Settings llle 7 3 7 2 3 Input Constant Settings 0 cee cet 7 4 7 2 4 Built in RS 232C Port 0 00 ccc cts 7 5 7 2 5 Serial Option Port Built in RS 485 Port 00 0 0 cece eee eee 7 8 7 2 6 Builtin inputs ose eo eee ee ea ee ea 7 11 7 2 7 Pulse Output 0 Settings 0 0 cee tee 7 13 7 2 8 Pulse Output 1 Settings 0 eee 7 14 7 2 9 Built in AD DA Built in Analog I O Settings 00 0000 e ee eee 7 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 1 7 PLC Setup 7 1 Overview of the PLC Setup The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software parameter settings that the user can change to cus tomize PLC operation These settings can be changed from a CX Programmer Change the PLC Setup in the following case There is no need to reset if the default initial settings are correct The setting from the CX Programmer are saved to the built in EEPROM backup memory Application Reading the DM area words saved to the backup memory when power is turned ON Parameter Startup Data Read Changing the Startup Mode to PROGRAM or MONITOR mode when debugging Startup Mode Detection of low battery errors is not required when using bat tery free operation Detect Low Battery Finding instruction errors when debugging Stop CPU on Instruction Error A minimum
206. 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1 bit no parity When power is turned ON Start Code Disable Disable Set When power is turned ON Start Code setting 00 Hex 00 Hex FF hex When power is turned ON End Code None Received Bytes Received Bytes no end code CR LF Set End Code When power is turned ON Received Bytes setting 256 bytes 256 bytes 1 byte 255 bytes When power is turned ON Set End Code setting 00 Hex 00 Hex FF Hex When power is turned ON Delay 0 ms 0 x10 ms 9999 x10 ms When power is turned ON 2 5 Modbus RTU Easy Master Settings 2 5 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 When power is turned ON 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by CPU Unit 2 2 5 2 5 2 Format 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even When power is turned ON data length stop bits par 7 bits 2 bits odd ity Name Default Possible settings 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1
207. 8 to 2 147 483 647 Rightmost 4 digits A276 A278 Pulse Output The pulse output PV will be cleared when 0 Not cleared A540 00 A541 00 Reset Bit this bit is turned ON 1 Clear PV CW Limit Input This flag shows the status of the CW Limit ON when turned ON A540 08 A541 08 Signal Flag Input Signal which is used in the origin from an external input search The status of the signal from the CW limit input sensor connected to a normal input must be written to A540 08 or A541 08 CCW Limit Input This flag shows the status of the CCW ON when turned ON A540 09 A541 09 Signal Flag Limit Input Signal which is used in the ori from an external input gin search The status of the signal from the CCW limit input sensor connected to a normal input must be written to A540 09 or A541 09 Positioning com This flag shows the status of the position ON when turned ON A540 10 A541 10 pleted input signal ing completed input signal which is used from an external input in the origin search The status of the Positioning Completed Signal from the Servo Drive connected to a normal input must be written to A540 10 or A541 10 Accel Decel Flag ON when pulses are being output accord 0 Constant speed A280 00 A281 00 ing to an ORG ACC or PLS2 instruction 1 Accelerating or decel and the output frequency is being erating changed in steps accelerating or deceler ating Overflow Underflow ON when an overflow or underflow has 0 Norm
208. 80 13 1 13 PWM Outputs 13 1 PWM Outputs Variable duty factor Pulse Outputs PWM outputs can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit with transistor outputs A PWM Pulse Width Modulation pulse can be output with a specified duty factor The duty factor is the ratio of the pulse s ON time and OFF time in one pulse cycle Use the PWM instruction to generate PWM pulses from a built in output The duty factor can be changed during pulse output Application example Controlling temperature on a time proportional basis using the PWM output Controlling the brightness of lighting g 9j Built in output PWM output 100 Period is determined e a 15 by frequency LN Duty d 150 _ Duty factor 50 75 lt gt Duty acor75 Specifications Item Specification Duty factor 0 0 to 100 0 in 0 1 increments Duty factor accuracy is 1 0 at 10 kHz 5 0 at 10 to 32 kHz Frequency 2 0 Hz to 6 553 5 Hz Set in 0 1 Hz increments 2 Hz to 32 000 Hz Set in 1 Hz increments Output mode Continuous mode Instruction PWM The duty factor accuracy declines significantly at high frequencies because of limitations in the output circuit at high frequencies EN Additional Information For N30 40 60 SL1 or NA20 CPU Units the output indicator of terminal
209. 80 17 41 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 8 Comparison with Previous Models Item Previous Models New Models Model number CS1W ETN21 CP1W CIF41 CJ1W ETN21 Physical layer 100 10Base TX 100 10Base TX Auto MDIX Number of nodes 254 254 PLC maintenance via the Internet Can send commands including Not supported FINS commands by e mail over the Internet from a computer to the PLC Server specification Specification by IP address or by Not supported host name FINS commu Prerequisite to rout When multiple communica Not Supported nications ing tables tions Units are mounted on the For the CP1L CP1H CPU Units service network when sending or receiving FINS When routing tables are used for other PLCs on the same network commands from other nodes on the same Ethernet network by exe cuting SEND RECV or CMND instructions Automatic IP address acquisition A computer automatically acquir ing IP addresses can send com mands to the PLC and receive responses Same as previous models Possible with Automatic alloca tion by Ethernet Option Board Client FINS automatic node address allocation function TCP IP only FINS communication with computer without fixed node address Same as previous models Handling TCP IP With FINS communications both UDP IP and TCP IP with up to16 simultaneous connections and all With FINS communications both UDP IP and TCP IP with up to 2 simultaneous co
210. A434 00 to A434 01 are allocated as open circuit detection flags soDuey jeubis 1ndino pue 1nduj Hoyeuy Z S suonounj ei eds Z GT CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 11 15 Analog I O Function 15 3 I O Allocation and Related Auxiliary Area Flags LSE 15 3 1 l O Allocation Word 1 O Points Description Values CIO 90 ADO CIO words that I O conversion data for ADO is 10V to 10V range F448 to stored in 0BB8 hex ClO 91 AD1 CIO words that I O conversion data for AD1 is Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex stored in ClO 190 DAO CIO words that I O conversion data for DAO is stored in 15 3 2 Related Auxiliary Area Flags 15 12 Bit Name Description Values A434 00 Open circuit When analog Input 0 ADO open circuit Error 0 No error Detection Flags is detected this bit will be changed to 1 1 Open circuit error detected A434 01 Open circuit When analog Input 1 AD1 open circuit Error Detection Flags is detected this bit will be changed to 1 A434 04 Analog Initial The Analog Initialization Completed Flag will O Initializing ization Com be changed to 1 ON when initial processing 1 Initialization completed pleted Flag is completed If the system starts operating use this flag in the program to delay reading converted data from analog inputs until the data is valid A315 14 Built in Analog When the built in analog do not work normally 0 No error Error this bit will be chan
211. A518 to A520 Operation End Time A720 to A749 Power ON Clock Data 1 to 10 Power interruption time CPU Unit Within 1 0 Longer than ELILI S N NALILY S memory 1 0 memory type CPU type CPU backup time backup time Unit Unit Retained Unstable Supported Supported Supported Not provided Not provided Not provided Supported Not provided Not provided Not provided i Notation A 20 02 Bit number 02 Word number 20 I O memory area designator A i Range The Auxiliary Area contains 754 words with addresses ranging from AO to A753 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 v eai Aueuny 8 5 I O Memory i Applications Applications of the bits and words in the Auxiliary Area are predefined Ladder programs can be simpli fied and controllability can be improved by effectively using the bits and words in this area Details user Some words or bits are set automatically by the system and others are set and manipulated by the The Auxiliary Area includes error flags set by self diagnosis initial settings control bits and status data written A448 to A753 Words and bits in this area can be read and written from the program or the CX Programmer The Auxiliary Area contains words that are read only AO to A447 and words that can be read and Even the read write bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force set and force re
212. Allocation Words t for the Modbus RTU Easy for the Modbus RTU Easy o Master for Built in RS to Master for Built in RS 232C D1299 232C Port D1299 e D1499 Mac MISSAM IM LE EE ps eh ny D1300 D1300 DM Fixed Allocation Words D1500 to for the Modbus RTU Easy to Master for Serial Option P D2047 to D1399 dT D1400 to 26999 D6999 D7000 D7000 to to D8191 D8191 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 11 5 I O Memory i Applications The DM Area is for storing numeric data It can be used for data exchange with Programmable Termi nals serial communications devices such as Inverters and Analog I O Units or Temperature I O Units i Details Bits in the DM Area cannot be addressed individually Backing Up to the Built in EEPROM Backup Memory The number of words set in the PLC Setup can be saved to the built in EEPROM backup memory during operation by turning ON the DM Backup Start bit A751 15 Specify in the PLC Setup whether to read the data in the DM Area words to the RAM as the initial values when the power supply is turned ON Refer to 16 3 DM Backup Function for how to use DM Area words and bits DM Fixed Allocation Words for the Modbus RTU Easy Master The following DM area words are used as command and response storage areas with the Modbus RTU Easy Master function These words are used for other applications if the Modbus RTU Easy Master function is not served Refer to 14 4 Modb
213. Augend word Ad Addend word CY wiltun R Result word ON wh thre isa a eco carry DOUBLE BCD BCL Adds 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants with the ADD WITH BCL 407 Carry Flag CY CARRY Au U BCD BCD Au 1st augend word Ad 1st addend word T R 1st result word CY will turn ON when 8 ec there is a carry SIGNED Subtracts 4 digit single word hexadecimal data and or constants BINARY SUB TRACT WITH Signed binary OUT CARRY Signed binary CY will turn 7 Mi Minuend word ON when Cnr Signed binary Su Subtrahend word there is a R Result word borrow DOUBLE L Subtracts 8 digit double word hexadecimal data and or con SIGNED stants BINARY SUB TRACT WITH wi Signed binary OUT CARRY Mi Minuend word Su Subtrahend word R Result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 CY will wrn there ia L R_ Signed binary borrow A 19 suon ung uononnsul T Y suogonuisu ure OQWAS 6 1 v Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SIGNED C Subtracts 4 digit single word hexadecimal data and or constants BINARY SUB with the Carry Flag CY TRACT WITH CARRY Cm Signed binary Signed binary Mi Minuend word B Su Subtrahend word CY will tues R Result word ON when i there is a Cr Signed binary borrow
214. C Specifies the first digit byte to be converted 0 or 1 byte 0 or 1 Number of digits bytes to be converted O or 1 1 or 2 bytes Always 0 L Conversion process 1 8 to 256 bits byte to 16 word range A 23 suono ung uononnsul T Y suomnonJjsu uois49AuO OL L V Appendices Instruction DATA ENCODER A 24 Mnemonic DMPX Variations Symbol Operand DMPX 077 OR S 1st source word R Result word C Control word Function FInds the location of the first or last ON bit within the source word or 16 word range and writes that value to the specified digit or byte in the result word 16 to 4 bit conversion clo io 1 E Finds leftmost bit Highest bit address 15 p n 9 4 1 Convert s B LM A 2 words sitli Al J 16 to 4 bit decoding Lee 7 Location of leftmost Leftmostbit Rightmost bit bit m is writ ten to R i n 2 Start with digit 2 eetet E 256 to 8 bit conversion cC w m 4 0 Convert one 16 word range 15 31 16 Leftmost bit Finds leftmost bit Highest bit address 256 to 8 bit decoding The location of the leftmost bit in the 16 word range m is written to R n 1 Start with byte 1 C Control Word 16 to 4 bit conversion 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 C 0 l n e X rS A rj Specifies the first digit byte
215. C Corresponding nis Interrupt Terminal A Built in Input Interrupt bit address task number Tab Page identifier Enable Disable 02 on CIO 0 CIO 0 02 Interrupt input 2 102 0000 terminal block IN2 Enable interrupt 03 on CIO 0 CIO 0 03 Interrupt input 3 103 0001 terminal block IN3 Disable interrupt 04 on CIO 0 CIO 0 04 Interrupt input 4 104 terminal block INA 05 on CIO 0 CIO 0 05 Interrupt input 5 105 terminal block IN5 06 on CIO 0 CIO 0 06 Interrupt input 6 106 terminal block IN6 07 on CIO 0 CIO 0 07 Interrupt input 7 107 terminal block IN7 nterrupt input 6 and 7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts Example 1 Specifying Detecting ON or OFF Input Signals For interrupt input IN2 Specify 112 Specifies an interrupt when the input turns ON Cyclic task 2 Enabling Input Interrupt CIO 0 02 turns ON For interrupt input IN2 Specify 102 Enables Input interrupt Built in input terminal The specified input interrupt here IN2 is 01 0 enabled when the MSKS instruction is executed 07 09 11 10 2 3 Application Example In this example bent parts are detected in a moving workpiece such as an IC component When the sensor input terminal 02 on terminal block OCH CIO 0 0
216. CH CIO 1 CPU Unit Expansion I O Unit Outputs 400CH CIO 100 101CH CIO 101 00 to 07 00 to 07 Allocated 8 bits Allocated 8 bits in the next word Bit 03 in CIO 0 Bit 05 in CIO 1 OCH CIO 0 Inputs O O 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 5 0 9 9 9 CPU Unit Expansion I O Unit Bit 02 in CIO 101 i i 101CH eel CIO 101 WV IN IN Outputs 100CH CIO 100 6 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 6 I O Allocation 6 1 2 1 0 Allocation Concepts The CPU Unit automatically allocates I O bits to the Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units if con nected when the power supply is turned ON It is not necessary to specify I O bits allocation 6 1 3 Allocations on the CPU Unit e Input bits are allocated from CIO 0 and output bits are allocated from CIO 100 The first word from which input bits are allocated is CIO 0 The first word from which output bits are allo z cated is CIO 100 These cannot be changed s e Words Allocated by the System and the Number of Connected Units 3 The starting words for inputs and outputs are predetermined for a CP1E CPU Unit Input bits in CIO O 5 or CIO 0 and CIO 1 and output bits in CIO 100 or CIO 100 and CIO 101 are automatically allocated to H the built in O on the CPU Unit F The words from which bits are allocated by the system and the number of Expansion I O Units and g
217. CIO 289 Refer to Section 14 Serial Link Words 90 words Communications Work Area W 1 600 bits WO to W99 Refer to 5 3 Work Area 100 words W Holding Area H 800 bits 50 words HO to H49 The data is unstable if Refer to 5 4 Holding Area power is interrupted when H the battery is not mounted Data Memory ELILI S Hype 2K words DO to D2047 Data in specified words of Refer to 5 5 Data Memory Area D CPU Unit the DM Area can be Area D retained in the built in EEPROM in the backup memory by using a bit in the Auxiliary Area Applica ble words DO to D1499 One word can be speci fied at a time N NALILI S 8K words DO to D8191 Data in specified words of type CPU Unit the DM Area can be retained in the built in EEPROM in the backup memory by using a bit in the Auxiliary Area Applica ble words DO to D6999 One word can be speci fied at a time Timer Area T Present values 256 TO to T255 Refer to 5 6 Timer Area Timer Comple 256 m tion Flags Counter Area C Present values 256 CO to C255 The data is unstable if Refer to 5 7 Counter Area power is interrupted when C the battery is not mounted Counter Com 256 E pletion Flags Auxiliary Area Read only 7 168 bits AO to A447 The data is unstable if Refer to A 2 Auxiliary Area A 448 words power is interrupted when Allocations by Address Read write 4 896 bits A448 to A753 the battery is not mounted 306 words 5 6 CP1E C
218. CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light ON Error OFF No error Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error occurs A407 14 I O Bus Error Flag fatal error ONin the following cases When an error occurs in a data transfer between the CPU Unit and a Expansion Unit or Expansion I O Unit If this happens OAOA hex will be output to A404 CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared ON Error OFF No error Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error occurs A404 15 Memory Error Flag fatal error ON when an error occurred in memory CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The location where the error occurred is indicated in A403 00 to A403 08 and A403 09 will be turned ON if there was an error during automatic transfer at startup This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared The automatic transfer at startup error cannot be cleared without turning OFF the PLC ON Error OFF No error Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error occurs A403 00 to A403 08 A403 09 A402 00 Other Non Fatal Error Flag ON when a non fatal error that is not defined for A402 01 to A402 15 occurs Detailed information is output to the bits of A315 OFF No other non f
219. CW limit sensor connected to normal inputs to the Auxiliary Area bits Normal input from CW Limit Input Signal CW limit sensor A540 08 or A541 08 Normal input from CCW Limit Input Signal CCW limit sensor A540 09 or A541 09 Bits Written in the Auxiliary Area Auxiliary Area z Name Word Bit A540 08 Pulse Output 0 CW Limit Input Signal Signals must be received from exter 09 Pulse Output 0 CCW Limit Input Signal ral sensors connected to normal inputs and then written to the Auxil A541 08 Pulse Output 1 CW Limit Input Signal iary Area by the user program 09 Pulse Output 1 CCW Limit Input Signal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 11 12 Pulse Outputs 12 1 3 Specifications Item Specifications Output mode Continuous mode for speed control or independent mode for position con trol Positioning independent mode instruc tions PULS and SPED PULS and ACC or PLS2 Speed control continuous mode SPED or ACC instructions Origin origin search and origin return ORG instructions Output frequency 1 Hz to 100 kHz 1 Hz units two pulse outputs Frequency acceleration and decelera tion rates Set in increments of 1 Hz for acceleration deceleration rates from 1 to 65 535 Hz every 4 ms The acceleration and deceleration rates can be set independently only with the PLS2 instruction Changing SVs during instruction execu tion The targ
220. Cycle y END END I O refresh Condition for accepting interrupts I MSKS instruction executed Scheduled Interrupt Interval to set the scheduled 0 5 ms example I interrupt interval Internal timer ams ims ims Cyclic task ti Execution Cyclic task Execution Cyclic task Execution YSE tas gxecduon interrupted execution interrupted execution interrupted Executing 10 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts 10 3 2 Flow of Operation C Interrupt task Write the program for the corresponding interrupt task 1 fixed reate ladder Execute MSKS Use MSKS to specify the scheduled interrupt interval program instruction in a cyclic The setting can be 1 ms or longer Set N to 4 or 14 in the MSKS instruction task Jj Writing the Ladder Program e Writing the Interrupt Task Program Create the program for interrupt task 1 which is executed for the scheduled interrupt Right click a program in the CX Programmer and select Properties Select Interrupt Tasks 01 scheduled inter rupt in Task Type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box Program Properties x x General Comments Name IN ewProgram2 Task type ju nassigned m Cyclic Task nterrupt T ask 00 nterrupt T ask 01 Interval Timer nterrupt T ask 02 Built in Input 2 nterrupt T ask 03 Built in Input 3 nterrupt T ask 04 Built in Input 4 nterrupt T ask 05 Bui
221. D Stop pulse Decelerate to a Paise treguen y Decelerates SPED or Port output stop T rae Ratesetatthesian the pulse out ACC Continuous smoothly frequency put to a stop Continuous Target Target frequency 0 of the operation Time Execution of ACC i ACC Continuous frequency 0 f an ACC instruction started the operation the original acceleration deceleration rate will remain in effect If a SPED instruction started the operation the acceleration deceleration rate will be invalid and the pulse output will stop immediately 12 50 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 9 2 Positioning Control Independent Mode 12 Pulse Outputs The following operations can be performed in Independent Mode by combining instructions i Starting a Pulse Output Procedure Operation Example Frequency changes Description Instruc application Son Settings Output with Positioning Starts outputting PULS Number of Pulse frequency specified without accel n EU pulses at the speci pulses speed eration or fied frequency and SPED Relative or deceleration stops immediately absolute pa Indepen when the specified dent pulse speci b number of pulses fication Execution of SPED RE m e has been output e Port The target position Pulse specified number of Direction pulses cannot be Independent changed during positioning Target fre quency Simple
222. DOUBLE CL Subtracts 8 digit double word hexadecimal data and or con SIGNED stants with the Carry Flag CY BINARY WITH CARRY L mi _ Signed binary Signed binary Mi Minuend word Su Subtrahend word EM n a R Result word A 2 x there is a Y R 1 Signed bin there is Lk Signed binary BCD SUB B Subtracts 4 digit single word BCD data and or constants TRACT WITH OUT CARRY BCD cD CY will turn ON Mi Minuend word when there is CR BCD Su Subtrahend word carry R Result word DOUBLE BCD BL Subtracts 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants SUBTRACT WITHOUT aco CARRY BCD CY will turn Mi 1st minuend word ON when 5 BCD Su 1st subtrahend word ae a R 1st result word SONS BCD SUB BC Subtracts 4 digit single word BCD data and or constants with the TRACT WITH Carry Flag CY CARRY BCD BCD Mi Minuend word T Su Subtrahend word R Result word CY will turn Suns cv CR een there is a borrow DOUBLE BCD BCL Subtracts 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants with SUBTRACT WITH CARRY A 20 LR j Mi 1st minuend word Su 1st subtrahend word R 1st result word the Carry Flag CY eon eon CY will t ON when s Bee there isa borrow CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices
223. Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values or BCD values Notation No symbol value only Not possible E Number only Application SBS 0 example Jumps to subroutine 0 Precautions for correct use An error will occur and the left bus bar will be displayed in red if a decimal value is input with amp from the CX Pro grammer Using Floating point Real Number Notation for Operands Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values Notation With or With symbol m for single precision data Decimal value SDCCCCCD real number Hexadecimal value or sign using 0 to F Hexadecimal symbol Application FIX 0 10 DO FIX 3DCCCCCD DO example Converts floating point 0 10 into 16 Converts floating point 3DCCCCCD 0 10 deci bit signed binary data and stores the integer portion in DO mal into 16 bit signed binary data and stores the integer portion in DO Precautions for correct use The input will be treated as an address in the CIO Area an error will occur and the left bus bar will be displayed in red if a decimal value with a decimal point is input without from the CX Programmer EN Additional Information The input will be treated as an address in the ClO Area an error will occur and the left bus bar will be displayed in red if a hexadecimal value including A to F is input without from the CX Programmer Zero suppression can be used when inputting any data
224. Do not use Do not use Use When power is turned ON 2 Analog Input 1 Use Do not use Do not use Use When power is turned ON 2 1 Range 10to 10 V 10to 10 V 0to 10V 1to5V 0to5V 0 to 20 mA 4to 20 mA When power is turned ON 2 2 Use averaging Do not use Do not use Use When power is turned ON Jj DA OCH Analog Output Settings 1 Analog Output 0 Use Name Default Do not use Possible settings Do not use Use When setting is read by CPU Unit When power is turned ON 14 7 16 Range 10 to 10 V 10to 10 V Oto 10V 1to5V 0to5V 0 to 20 mA 4to 20 mA When power is turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations EXTERN This section describes the built in functions overall procedure and allocations for func tions of the CP1E 8 1 Built in Functions lsseeeeen hh hmmm hm rr 8 2 8 2 Overall Procedure for Using CP1E Built in Functions se 8 3 8 3 Terminal Allocations for Built in Functions eren 8 4 8 3 1 Specifying the Functions to Use esse 8 4 8 3 2 Selecting Functions in the PLC Setup 0 0 00 ee eee eee 8 4 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals llle 8 6 8 3 4 Allocating Built in Output Temrinals llle 8 8 CP
225. E 18 7 18 3 Creating a Ladder Program 0 cece cece eee e n nnn 18 8 18 3 1 Inputting a Ladder Program 0 cee tee 18 8 18 3 2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs 000 eee eee eee eee 18 15 18 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 0 0 cee eet eee 18 16 18 4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program 18 19 18 4 1 Connecting Online 0 0 ete 18 19 18 4 2 Changing Operating Modes 000 cece eee eens 18 20 18 4 3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup 18 21 18 4 4 Starting Operation 2 0 eet eae 18 22 18 5 Online Monitoring and Debugging enn n nnn nnn 18 24 18 5 1 Monitoring Status aeaa aaaea naaa eh 18 24 18 5 2 Force set Reset Bits eile 18 26 18 5 3 Online Editing 00 0 ccc tees 18 27 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 1 18 Programming Device Operations 18 1 Programming Devices Usable with the CP1E The Programming Devices that can be used with the CP1E are listed in the following table Compatible Unit version Support Saved pro Applicable Product Model CX Programmer of CP1E forSmart gram file Reference dun Unit versions CPU Un
226. E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 61 ssauppy Aq suone ojy eauy Auelpny z v Spon uo pe y z V Appendices Address Status Related 5 f after Status at Write Name Function Settings ESRA flags Words Bits mode startup timing E change settings A321 08 High speed Counter 3 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison Son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 3 Son operation Cleared when operation starts Starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter 3 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 3 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when the PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow 10 High speed Counter 3 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used Count Direction high speed counter is currently being for high speed incremented or decremented The counter valid counter PV for the current cycle is com during counter pared with the PV in last cycle to deter operation mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing A322to High speed Counter 4 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed A323 PV 4 each cycle The PV will be cleared at the sta
227. ET to 07 outputs Sourcing transis CP1W 8ET1 tor outputs 16 point Relay outputs CP1W 16ER None None 16 2 CIO n bits 00 Output Unit Sinking transistor CP1W 16ET to 07 outputs CIO n 1 bits Sourcing transis CP1W 16ET1 00 to 07 tor outputs 20 point Relay outputs CP1W 20EDR1 12 1 CIO m bits 00 to 11 8 1 CIO n bits 00 VO Units Sinking transistor CP1W 20EDT to 07 outputs Sourcing transis CP1W 20EDT1 tor outputs 32 point Relay outputs CP1W 32ER None None 32 4 CIO n bits 00 Output Unit Sinking transistor CP1W 32ET to 07 outputs CIO n 1 bits 00 to 07 CIO n 2 bits Sourcing transis CP1W 32ET1 00 to 07 tor outputs P CIO n 3 bits 00 to 07 40 point Relay outputs CP1W 40EDR 24 2 CIO m bits 00 to 11 16 2 CIO n bits 00 VO Unit Sinking transistor CP1W 40EDT CIO m 1 bits 00 to toO outputs 11 CIO n 1 bits Sourcing transis CP1W 40EDT1 0010 B7 tor outputs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 6 I O Allocation e I O Bits Allocation with Expansion I O Units Connected Allocation Example Expansion I O Unit with 40 I O Points CP1W 4OEDL 1 Twenty four input bits in two words are allocated bits 00 to 11 in CIO m and bits 00 to 11 CIO m 1 Sixteen output bits in two words are allocated in two words bits 00 to 07 in CIO n and bits 00 to 07 in CIO n1 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 201 00
228. Edition CX Pro grammer version 9 03 or higher CX Programmer for CP1E In the remainder of this section CX Programmer refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX Programmer version 9 03 or higher CX Programmer for CP1E When using the full version of CX Programmer provided in CX One refer to the CX P rogram mer Operation Manual Cat No W446 A Programing Console cannot be used for the CP1E Use the CX Programmer The windows described in this section are the windows using the CX Programmer for CP1E When using the CX Programmer or the Micro PLC Edition CX Programmer the specification may be different Check the window specifications sufficiently Refer to the CX P rogrammer Operation Manual Cat No W446 for details The CX Programmer for CP1E and CX Programmer CX One CX One Lite can be used at the same time The CX Programmer CX One CX One Lite and the CX Programmer for CP1E can be installed on the same computer and both applications can be run at the same time 18 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations Using ProjectFiles Saved with the CX Programmer CXP on the CX Programmer for CP 1E The CX Programmer for CP1E cannot open a CXP project created on the CX Programmer CX One CX One Lite Use programming from a project saved in a CXP file on the CX Program mer for CP1E according to the following procedure 1 Start the CX Programmer CX One CX One Lite and CX Program
229. Expansion I O Units can only be used in programming It is the same as the Work Area CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 7 5 I O Memory 5 3 Work Area W i Overview The Work Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit It is used in programming Unlike the input bits and output bits in the CIO Area I O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area i Notation W 20 02 Bit number 02 Word number 20 I O memory area designator W I Range The Work Area contains 100 words with addresses ranging from WO to W99 i Applications It is sometimes necessary to use the same set of input conditions many times in the same program In this case a work bit can be used to store the final condition to simplify programming work and program design i rk W10 0 NO bit W10 0 H NC bit Storing a Condition in a Work Bit i Details Bits in the Work Area can be force set and force reset The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode When the PLC power is reset When the Work Area is cleared from the CX Programmer When PLC operation is stopped due to a fatal error other than an FALS error occurs The con tents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS is executed 5 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 4 Holding Area H
230. F 1 Programs PLC Configuration gt on HM 3 Click the Yes Button CX Programmer v8 2 About to connect to the PLC Do you wish to continue CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 19 wei6oig oux BuLuajsueiL pue AT dD o1 euguo 6un 2euuo P 8T eujuo Buyseuu0D p 81 18 Programming Device Operations Once the online connection has been established the color of the Ladder Section Window will change to light gray EN Additional Information If it is not possible to establish an online connection check the PLC type setting and the commu nications settings To check them double click New PLC1 CP 1E Offline in the project tree For details on these settings refer to Creating a New Project in 18 3 1 Inputting a Ladder Program 18 4 2 Changing Operating Modes The operating mode can be changed to PROGRAM mode The procedure for changing to PROGRAM m 7 Select Operating Mode Program from the PLC Menu A dialog box to confirm changing the operating mode will be displayed Click the Yes Button The operating mode will be changed The operating mode is displayed in the project tree EN Additional Information ode is given below CX P for Manual1 CX Programmer Running NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram FD File Edit view Insert Program fake Simulation Tools Window Help Dah n eka B PRAS amp
231. Flags in the Auxiliary Area PARE S Signed binary comparison m e i S1 Comparison data 1 sid j s jJ se l S2 Comparison data 2 Arithmetic Flags T gt gt lt lt lt gt TABLE COM TCMP Compares the source data to the contents of 16 words and turns PARE TCMP 085 ON the corresponding bit in the result word when the contents are eae s T 0 1 Data NIS I aud rone f rz aren t equal S Source data T 1st word of table R Result word x iar i Lr L asl kia T First word of table T Comparison data 0 T 1 Comparison data 1 to to T415 Comparison data 15 UNSIGNED BCMP Compares the source data to 16 ranges defined by 16 lower limits BLOCK COM BCMP 068 and 16 upper limits and turns ON the corresponding bit in the PARE result word when the source data is within the range R S Source data T 1st word of table R Result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Ranges 1 In range 0 Not in range Lower limi Upper limit R 1 gt T to TH 0 i T 2 i E 1 Source data o T43 S Lg I i T 28 to T 29 14 1 gt T 30 to T 31 gt 15 B First word of block B Lower limit value 0 B 1 Upper limit value 0 B 2 Lower limit value 1 B 3 Upper limit value 1 to to B 30 Lower limit value 15 B 31 Upper limit value 15 A 11 suon ung uononnsul T Y suononujsu uosuedu
232. Highest unit number of PT that can be connected to the PLC 0 When power is turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 RS 232C Name No protocol Settings Default Possible settings 7 PLC Setup When setting is read by CPU Unit 2 3 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps When power is turned ON 2 3 2 Format data length stop bits par ity 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits odd 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1 bit no parity When power is turned ON 2 3 3 Start Code Disable Disable Set When power is turned ON 2 3 4 2 3 5 Start Code setting End Code 00 hex None Received Bytes 00 hex FF hex Received Bytes no end code CR LF Set End Code When power is When power is urned ON urned ON 2 3 6 Received Bytes setting 256 bytes 256 bytes 1 byte 255 bytes When power is urned ON 2 3 7 Set End Code setting 00 hex 00 hex FF hex When power is turned ON 2 3 8 Delay 0 ms
233. IONAL OUTPUT to perform time proportional control Control output To connect an SSR connect a 24 V power supply to the transistor output and output voltage pulses Ladder program PIDAT S S Input word C C First parameter word D D Output word TPO S S Input word C C First parameter word R R Pulse output bit Temperature Sensor Unit Model with Thermocouple CP Model with Platinum Resi TS001 002 ance Thermometer CP1W TS101 102 CP1E a E pomon m PID z TSOO0I m zu KA 9 Time proportional i transistor output Temperature Sensor SSR Le EN Additional Information The sampling cycle set for a PIDAT instruction is between 10 ms to 99 99 s in increments of 10 ms The actual calculation cycle is determined by the relationship with cycle time Refer to the CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 for the PIDAT instruction 16 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 Other Functions 16 1 2 Flow of Operation Set the temperature range with the rotary switch on 1 Setting the Temperature the front
234. It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the PLC or when the unit is restarted and it is automatically changed when a connection is established by means of the FINS TCP method or when a FINS command received The following functions are enabled by using this table P address conversion using the FINS UDP method Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS TCP method Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS TCP method Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications 17 7 E suone2yi2eds pue seumeeJ T T suoneoiunuiuo SNIA S L ZL 17 Ethernet Option Board H Precautions for Correct Use The differences between the Ethernet Option Board and the CS CJ series Ethernet Unit are as follows Connect with the CPU Unit by the Host Link serial communications whose internal baud rate is 115 2 kbps The size of communications buffers is 8K bytes one fifty of that of the CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Therefore the communication performance is slower than the CS CJ series Ethernet Unit Refer to the following processing time Netwok delay is not included when accessing to the CP series CPU Unit through the Ethernet Option Board When accessing to the CP1E CPU Unit and reading 269 words from the DM area if the cycle time of the CPU Unit is 10 ms the processing time will be more than 225 ms and less than 356 ms For the CS CJ series CP
235. KUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit turns ON when data is being written to the built in EEPROM backup memory Never turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit 1 0 Memory Backup I O memory is backed up to the built in EEPROM backup memory only when a bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned ON to back up specified words in the DM Area Area Backup to built in EEPROM backup memory Status at startup N NALILI S type CPU Unit with no Battery mounted or ELIEI S type CPU Unit N NALILY S type CPU Unit with Battery mounted Holding Area H Counter Area C Auxiliary Area A Not backed up Cleared to all zeros Unstable when the power supply is OFF for longer than the I O memory backup time The values immediately before power interruption are retained Initialized For N NALIDI S type CPU Units status of bits related to clock functions is unsta ble when the power supply is OFF for longer than the l O memory backup time Initialized For N NALILI S type CPU Units status of bits related to clock functions are retained at their status immediately before power interruption Number of words start ing from DO set in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box in the Star tup Data Read Area in the PLC Settings The specified number of words starting from DO is backed up by turning ON A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit
236. LC Link method 3 Start communications V Precautions for Correct Use Both serial ports cannot be used for PLC Links at the same time If both serial ports are set for PLC Links either as polling or polled nodes a PLC Setup setting error nonfatal error will occur and the PLC Setup Setting Error Flag A402 10 will turn ON su 2 Id leues s rT 14 5 3 PLC Setup i Settings at the Polling Unit 7 PLC Settings NewPLC1 E 5 xi File Options Help uone1edo Jo MOJA Z S rL Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Builin Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Outp 4 gt Communications Settings Link Words Standard 8600 1 7 2 E Custom Baud Format 115200 gt TAE iz IPC Link Master 10 default Start Code End Code PC Link Mode Disoble Received Byes d C AL C Set p ae TE 2 Master Response Timeout Unit Number Delay NT PC Link Max PC Link Unit No ams 0 p bom pa p4 default 5000ms ICP1E N40 Offline CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 21 14 Serial Communications Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab Page Note The built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab Parameter Communications Settings Setting Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected PLCs If the connected PLCs are set to 115 200 bps select the Cus
237. LILI S type CPU Units basic models for standard control operations using basic movement arithmetic and comparison instructions and N NALILI SLI type CPU Units application models that supports connections to Programmable Terminals Inverters and Servo Drives Basic Models CP1E Application Models NALILI type ELILY S type CPU Units NOO SO type CPU Units CPU Units CPU with 10 14 CPU Unit with 30 40 or CPU with 14 or TORIO CPU Unit with or 20 I O Points 60 I O Points 20 I O Points i Points 20 I O Points Appearance ELILI type ELIDI type NLIDLI type N NALILI type 0 O A S S e al WD eo bee S pee sisse oF 1 7 Hir 1 E ELILIS type Lm gt 2 bF lo Sz Wm I O points E00 10 14 20 30 40 NOO 14 20 30 40 60 20 ELILIS 14 20 30 40 60 NOOS 1 30 40 60 Progra
238. LILI type CPU Units and E NLILIS 1 type CPU Units are as follows Refer to A 1 Dimensions for the dimensions i E type CPU Units e Difference in Characteristics and Functions m lt t Function ELILI type ELILIS type s Analog adjusters 2 adjusters None Setting range 0 to 255 The analog adjuster PV in A642 A643 is fixed T on 0000 D E D e Product Lineup EOO CPU Unit ELILIS CPU Unit Transistor outputs Transistor outputs ESS PEOR Desv um UNUS E rowena DC AC DC AC DC AC DC supply 10 I O points O O O O 14 I O points O O 20 I O points O O 30 I O points O O 40 I O points O O 60 I O points O CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 5 1 Overview i N type CPU Units e Difference in Characteristics and Functions Function Analog adjusters N NALILI type 2 adjusters Setting range 0 to 255 NLILIS 1 type None The analog adjuster PV in A642 A643 is fixed on 0000 Built in RS 232C port 6 signals are supported SD RD RS CS DR and ER 4 signals are supported SD RD RS and CS DR pin 7 and ER pin 8 are not sup ported Pin Abbr Signal anes Pin Abbr Signal Pdl 1 FG Frame ground 1 FG Frame ground 2 SD TXD Send data Outputs 2 SD TXD Send data Outputs 3 RD RXD Receive data Inputs 3 RD RXD Receive
239. MV Settings Set the DIP switch as follows SW2 pin 1 ON terminating resistance connected Terminating resistance for RS422 485 communications Set the following parameters No Name Setting Description n003 RUN command selection 2 RS 422 485 communications is enabled n004 Frequency reference selection 6 Frequency reference through RS 422 RS 485 n019 Acceleration time 1 5 0 Acceleration time in seconds n020 Deceleration time 1 5 0 Deceleration time in seconds n151 RS 422 485 communications 1 Detect timeouts detect fatal errors and the Inverter timeover detection selection decelerates to a stop using deceleration time 1 default n152 RS 422 485 communications 1 Select the unit for communications of frequency frequency reference display references and frequency monitoring data Unit 0 01Hz unit selection default n153 RS 422 485 communications 1 Slave address unit number unit number 1 Slave address n154 RS 422 485 communications 2 Communications baud rate 9 600 bps default baud rate selection n155 RS 422 485 communications 0 Even parity parity selection n156 RS 422 485 communications 10 Sets the response wait time for request messages send wait time received from the master 10 ms default n157 RS 422 485 communications 0 RTS control enabled default RTS control selection CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 15 sejdurex3 Bulwwes6o
240. N m i Symbols Protection li La Settings Clear All Memory Areas rror lo _ i ae ok PLC Configuration ld G Memory 8 Programs gb NewProgrami 00 St Trace 2 Click the Yes Button CX Programmer v8 2 Do you wish to switch the PLC into Run mode The CP1 E Will change to RUN Make sure that there aren t any problems if the PLC is started mode and operation will start EN Additional Information PROGRAM mode cannot be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode when the user program PLC Setup settings and DM area data in the CPU Units are being backed up Change the operating mode after the backup is completed wei6oig eux BuLuajsueiL pue qdrd2 eu o1 euguo 6Dun 2euuo tp Sr uojejedo Bues v p 8L CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 23 18 Programming Device Operations 18 5 Online Monitoring and Debugging This section describes how to use CX Programmer to monitor and debug a ladder program 18 5 1 Monitoring Status Displaying Execution Status It is possible to display the execution status of a ladder program This enables checking the execution of the ladder program Change the CP1E s operating mode to MONITOR mode to display the execution status The execution status of the ladder program will be displayed 100ms Tyner Tener BCD Type oo Tener ruber a Sat vat s 2 2 a Counter Teo w Counter nutb w m am GJ Sat vai i Displaying the Execution Sta
241. NTPC Link Max PC Link Unit No fp 4 100 ms 0 p 4 10 ms 1 a j default 5000ms n il CP1E N40 Offline 14 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab Page Parameter Setting Communica Select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 115 200 same as the 1 N tions Settings NT Link High speed Mode It is not necessary to change the format setting Mode Select NT Link 1 N NT PC Link If only one NS series PT unit number 0 is connected set this parameter to 1 Max In any other case of NS series PTs select the unit number 1 to 7 of the con nected NS series PT In case of NP and NT series PTs select the unit number 0 to 7 of the connected NP and NT series PT i PT System Menu Set the PT as follows Example NS series PT sjeumnu9 9jqeuuuei604d UM suone iunuuio 9ea42ueiboJd zZ pT 1 Select NT Links 1 N from Serial Port A or Serial Port B on the Memory Switch Menu under the System Menu on the PT 2 Press the SET Touch Switch to set the baud rate to high speed A baud rate of 115 200 bps in the PLC Setup is the same as setting high speed for the PT i Connection with Other Company s Display Devices Select Host Link in the serial communications mode settings of the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit and set all other communications parameters to the same values as the other company s display device
242. Number of pulses setting The pulse output PV is reset to 0 just before pulses are output After that the specified number of pulses is output The following example shows the number of pulses setting 100 counterclockwise Number of pulses setting Number of movement pulses 100 Present position 0 Pulse output PV Target position Pulse output PV range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Number of pulses setting range 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex The pulse output PV after instruction execution PV Number of movement pulses The following example shows the num ber of pulses setting 100 counterclock wise Number of pulses setting LU Number of movement ipulses i 100 Pulse output o Target position Present position Origin Pulse output PV range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Number of pulses setting range 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Absolute pulse specification 12 14 The absolute pulse specification cannot be used when the origin location is undefined i e when the system is operating in the relative coordinate system An instruction execution error will occur Positions the system to an absolute position relative to the origin The num ber of movement pulses and movement direction are calculated automatically from the present position pulse output PV and target position The following example shows the num ber of pulses setting 100 200 1 i Pulse output O Tar
243. O comment is comment sequential numbers starting Source word incremented by 1 from 1 will be added after an underbar x Process Variable Automatically incremented Destination Acturator 1 Move Temperature Sensort Source word Process Varisble 1 Destination Automatic Creation Rules By default automatic creation is governed by the following rules Symbol names Increment the numbers The symbol name is searched for a number starting from the starting from 1 are appended found from tail end and any number that is found is incremented by 1 If no number is found an underbar and a sequential number I O comments Increment the numbers The I O comment is searched for a number starting from the starting from 1 are appended found from tail end and any number that is found is incremented by 1 If no number is found an underbar and a sequential number 18 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations Other rules may also be applicable Click the Advanced Button to select options The options are enabled when the Paste Button is clicked J lt lt Advanced Paste Cancel Symbol Name Setting C Increment the numbers found from head Namel 1 Name2 1 Increment the numbers found from tail Name 1 Namel 2 Assign a new number to the end of the symbol name Name1 1 Namel 10 Comment Setting Increment the numbers found from head
244. O to D3 data lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following diagram 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 nis e ie e ete es D3 DO D2 D 1 D1 D2 Rightmost DO D3 4 digits Leftmost 4 digits O Output Word CS RD Control Signal Outputs Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and con nect the digital switch s control signals CS and RD signals to the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram 1514131211109 87 65 4 32 1 0 o EIEIELFLELII Leas CS1 CS signal One Round Flag cs2 S signals RDO Read signal CS3 C1 Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits that will be read from the exter nal digital switch Set C1 to 0000 hex to read 4 digits or 0001 hex to read 8 digits C2 System Word Specifies a work word used by the instruction This word can not be used in any other application 15 C2 System word Cannot be accessed by the user CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function MATRIX INPUT MTR Inputs up to 64 signals from an 8 x 8 matrix connected to an Input Unit and Output Unit using 8 input points and 8 output points and stores that 64 bit data in the 4 destination words I Input Word Specify the input word
245. OFF Auxiliary Area Restart Flag A525 09 is turned ON OFF when the Ethernet Option Board is restarted Confirm A525 09 is OFF The initialization of the Ethernet Option Board is completed V ET CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 13 sbumes T sbunjes ynejeq e 1 17 Ethernet Option Board i FINS Node Address of the Ethernet Option Board The FINS node address of the Ethernet Option Board is factory set to 1 Local FINS Node Address 1 It can be changed in the Settings from the Web browser The setting range is 1 to 254 I IP Address of the Ethernet Option Board The IP address of the Ethernet Option Board Local IP address is factory set to 192 168 250 1 Local IP Address 192 168 250 1 Local IP address can be set by the following two methods Method 1 Set in the Settings from the Web browser Method 2 Set to 0 0 0 0 from the Web browser and then set in the allocated words in the DM area D1455 and D1456 by the ladder programmer If the local IP address is set neither by method 1 nor by method 2 at default settings it remains 192 168 250 1 IP address Factory setting 192 168 250 1 Except 192 168 250 1 When setting neither in the allocated words in the DM area nor by the Web browser function Method 1 Set by the Web browser Method 2 Set to 0 0 0 0 from the Web function browser and then
246. ON autotuning is immediately executed and PID control is started with the PID constants calculated by autotuning Ladder Programming Example for an Input Range of 200 to 1300 C fora K Thermocouple The CP1W TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit is used with an input type of K 200 to 1300 C set the rotary switch to 0 The decimal values 200 to 1300 C are converted to signed hexadecimal data FF38 to 0514 hex and stored in CIO 2 in the Input Area a However the PIDAT instruction can only handle unsigned hexadecimal data as the PV The value is KA thus converted from the range FF38 to 0514 to the PIDAT instruction input range of 0000 to 1FFF hex S 0 to 8191 using the APR instruction Specify 16 bit signed data bit 11 ON bit 10 OFF Number 3 ao e of coordinates in data table 1 bits 0 to 7 00 hex 3 C D500 0800 Wo 00 oe C 1 D501 200 aie variable input 200 decimal 3 APR i C 2 D502 0000 Minimum value in PID input range 0000 hex i C 3 D503 1300 Maximum manipulated variable input 1300 decimal C D500 0514 hex d oS _0 4 D504 HERF Maximum value in PID input range 1FFF hex 2 PV D D600 od RO f C D100 amp 1966 Set value 160 C set as calculated value 1966 within to 4H FFF hex C 1 D101 amp 1 P
247. OSDO O N type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals inverters and servo drives Application models of CPU Units are called NLILI S type CPU Units in this manual The models of NLILI S type CPU Units are shown below CP1E NOODO O CP1E NOOSDD O CP1E NOOS1D0 O NA type CPU Unit An application model of CPU Unit that supports built in analog and connections to Pro grammable Terminals inverters and servo drives Application models of CPU Units with built in analog are called NA type CPU Units in this manual CX Programmer A programming device that applies for programming and debugging PLCs The CX Programmer includes the Micro PLC Edition CX Programmer CX One Lite the CX Programmer CX One and the CX Programmer for CP1E This manual describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC Edition CX Programmer version 9 03 or higher CX Programmer for CP1E CX Programmer refers to the Micro PLC Edition CX Programmer version 9 03 or higher CX Programmer for CP1E in this manual Note E20 30 40 S and N20 30 40 SL1 CPU Units are supported by CX Programmer ver sion 8 2 or higher E10 14 S N14 60 SL1 and NA20 CPU Units are supported by CX Programmer version 9 03 or higher E60S CPU Units are supported by CX Pro grammer version 9 42 or higher CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Sections in this Manual Overview Hi
248. Option Board is removed Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402 00 Flag while the power is being supplied CPU when a A424 Unit operation will continue and the non fatal error ERR ALM indicator will flash occurs Note OFF when the error has been cleared 14 Built in Analog I O ON when a built in analog I O error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402 00 Error Flag occurs and stops the operation of when a built in analog I O CPU Unit operation non fatal error will continue and the ERR ALM indica occurs tor will flash OFF when the error has been cleared 15 Backup Memory Error ON when writing to the built in Cleared Cleared Refreshed A402 00 Flag EEPROM backup memory fails CPU when a Unit operation will continue and the non fatal error ERR ALM indicator will flash occurs Note OFF when the error has been cleared A316 to High speed Counter 2 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed A317 PV 2 each cycle The PV is cleared when operation during the starts overseeing processes A317 contains the upper 4 digits and e Refreshed A316 contains the lower 4 digits when PRV instruction is executed to read PV A318 to High speed Counter 3 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed A319 PV 3 each cycle The PV is cleared when operation during the starts overseeing processes A319 contains the upper 4 digits and e Refreshed A318 contains the lower 4 digits when PRV instruction is executed to read PV A 60
249. PM Pons uon2euuo 9 T I CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 39 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 7 Network Installation 17 7 1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network The basic configuration for a 100Base TX Ethernet System consists of one hub to which nodes are attached in star form using twisted pair cable The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network with 100Base TX type CP1W CIF41 so prepared them in advance Network device Contents 1 Ethernet Option Board The Ethernet Option Board is a Communication Unit CP1W CIF41 that connects a CP1E N NA type CPU Unit to 100Base TX Ethernet networks They can also be used as 10Base T 2 Twisted pair cable This is twisted pair cable for connecting 100Base TX type Ethernet Option Board to the hub with an RJ45 Modular Connector at each end Use a category 3 4 5 or 5e UTP unshielded twisted pair or STP shielded twisted pair cable 3 Hub This is a relay device for connecting multiple nodes in a star LAN 17 7 2 Network Installation 17 40 i Basic Installation Precautions Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System being sure to follow ISO 802 3 specifica tions You must obtain a copy of these specifications and be sure you understand them before attempting to install an Ethernet System Unless you are already experienced in installing communi cations systems we strongly recommend that yo
250. PU Unit 2 1 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit 1eeeeee rennen nennen nnn niani annua nia aa nnn uan 2 2 2 1 1 CPU Unit Memory Backup Structure ssssssssseeeeeeenenne nnne nnne nnns 2 2 2 1 2 Memory Areas and Stored Data sssssssssssssseseseeneeenn nennen nnne enne nennen 2 3 2 1 3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device eese emen 2 4 2 1 4 BACKUP he on np eget imn Dade 2 4 Section 3 CPU Unit Operation 3 1 CPU Unit Operation i i udiridie saeua nnda dor aua qni dann dna ras E FIR adu nd ana IY aU CYa Ra an E YET SFR adig RN Ra nV NR nd n aos 3 2 3 1 1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation esesssesseseseeeeeeeneenneneee nennen enne nene nnne 3 2 3 1 2 CPU Unit Operating Modes ete eene aaeeea Seu erbe e d Pagano ees 3 3 3 2 Backing Up Memory eese nnn 3 5 3 2 1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration sees nennen neret nnne nennen 3 5 3 2 2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup sse 3 6 3 2 3 l O Memory Backu p 21 1 edes ERI EU b SEU ed UR 3 6 3 2 4 Initializing O Memory at Startup nennen nennen nnne nnne neret 3 8 Section 4 Understanding Programming 4 l Programming 5 52 322022 03 22504322 o EYE EF V1 us 388 TL rr rand Ea TR us EET aa RON E IE VU cod da ia EET FAROS ERR RETE iuateaaadecenud 4 2 4 1 1 User Progtams eie dinde ee Diis 4 2 4 1 2 Program Capacity sos si Studd o
251. PU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 2 I O Bits overview These words are allocated to built in I O terminals of CP1E CPU Units built in analog I O terminals of CP1E NA type CPU Units and CP series Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units i Notation 0 02 Bit number 02 Word number 0 I O memory area designator None on CX Programmer CIO in documentation i Range Input bits CIO 0 00 to CIO 99 15 100 words Output bits CIO 100 00 to CIO 199 15 100 words f Applications Built in inputs can be used as basic inputs interrupt inputs quick response inputs or high speed counters sug O Z S Built in outputs can only be used as basic outputs Refer to Section 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations for details i Details Bits in the CIO Area can be force set and force reset The contents of the CIO Area will be cleared in the following cases When the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode When the PLC power is reset When the CIO Area is cleared from the CX Programmer When PLC operation is stopped due to a fatal error other than an FALS error occurs The con tents of the CIO Area will be retained when FALS is executed EN Additional Information Words that are not allocated to the built in I O terminals of the CPU Units built in analog I O ter minals of CP1E NA type CPU Units and the Expansion Units and
252. PU Unit will light Note A401 14 I O Bus Error Flag will turn ON A407 13to Too Many I O Points The 3 digit binary value of these bits 010 Too many Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401 11 15 Cause indicates the cause of the Too Many Expansion Unit and when error I O Points Error Expansion I O Unit occurs words A424 00to Error Option Board The bit corresponding to the option slot ON Error Cleared Cleared A353 13 15 Flags turns ON when an error occurs in an OFF No error Option Board A315 13 will be ON Bit 01 Option slot 2 A434 0 Open circuit Detection On when ADO open circuit is detected Retained Cleared Refreshed for Built in Analog when ADO Input 0 open circuit is detected 1 Open circuit Detection On when AD1 open circuit is detected Retained Cleared Refreshed for Built in Analog when AD1 Input 1 open circuit is detected 4 Built in Analog Initial ON when the built in analog initializa Retained Cleared Refreshed Flag tion is normally finished when built in analog initial ization is nor mally finished A 68 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 f after Status at Write Name Function Settings Pn flags Words Bits mode startup timing E settings change A436 00to Expansion Unit and ON when an error occurs in a OFF No error Retained Cleared 02 Expansion I O Unit CP series Expansion Unit or Expan ON Error Error Flag
253. PV E EENET zA i ON f Completion Flag OFF RESET CNR CNR 545 CNRX 547 resets the timers or counters within the TIMER BCD CNR 545 specified range of timer or counter numbers Sets the set value COUNTER m m SV to the maximum of 9999 for CNR BCD and FFFF for Ni CNRX Binary N1 1st number in range N2 Last number in range CNRX Binary CNRX 547 N1 1st number in range N2 Last number in range CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 9 suon ung uononnsul T Y suononuasu Jejuno pue wI p L V Appendices A 1 5 Comparison Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function Symbol Com LD AND OR LD Input comparison instructions compare two values constants parison lt gt lt lt gt and or the contents of specified words and create an ON execu Unsigned gt Symbol and option tion condition when the comparison condition is true Symbol Com LD AND OR Input comparison instructions are available to compare signed or parison Dou lt gt lt lt gt unsigned data of one word or double length data ble word gt L o LD ON execution condition when unsigned y comparison result is true Symbol Com LD AND OR AND T ee ae parison lt gt lt lt gt S1 Signed gt S Symbol and option s2 Symbol Co
254. PV s coordinate system absolute or relative is selected automatically as follows When the origin is undefined the system operates in relative coordinates When the origin has been defined the system operates in absolute coordinates Origin undefined Origin search has notbeen performed and PV has not been changed with the Origin has been Origin has been defined by Conditions defined by an origin executing the INI instruc search tion to change the PV INI instruction Pulse output Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates PV s coordinate system Refer to 12 4 1 Origin Searches for details CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 13 12 Pulse Outputs e Relationship between the Coordinate System and Pulse Specification The following table shows the pulse output operation for the four possible combinations of the coor dinate systems absolute or relative and the pulse output absolute or relative specified when the PULS or PLS2 instruction is executed Pulse output specified in PULS or PLS2 Relative pulse specification Relative coordinate system Absolute coordinate system Origin undefined The No origin Flag will be ON Positions the system to another position relative Origin defined The No origin Flag will be OFF to the present position Number of movement pulses Number of pulses setting The pulse output PV after instruction execution Number of movement pulses
255. Proximity Input Signal is Signal as well as the PLC Setup s Origin port nal being used but a Origin Proxim Proximity Input Signal Type setting NC or ity Input Signal was not received NO and execute the origin search again during the origin search No Origin Input 0201 The Origin Input Signal was not Check the wiring of the Origin Input Signal as Signal received during the origin well as the PLC Setup s Origin Input Signal Search Type setting NC or NO and execute the ori gin search again Origin Input 0202 During an origin search in oper Take one or both of the following steps so Decelerates to a Signal Error ating mode 0 the Origin Input that the Origin Input Signal is received after stop Signal was received during the deceleration is completed No effect on other deceleration started after the increase the distance between the Origin port Origin Proximity Input Signal Proximity Input Signal sensor and Origin was received Input Signal sensor Decrease the origin search high speed Limit Inputs in 0203 The origin search cannot be Check the wiring of the limit signals in both Operation will not Both Directions performed because the limit sig directions as well as the PLC Setup s Limit start nals for both directions are Signal Type setting NC or NO and execute No effect on other being input simultaneously the origin search again port Simultaneous 0204 The Origin Proximity Input Sig Check the wiring of the Ori
256. RAM When Power is Turned ON The DM backup data can be restored to the built in RAM when power is turned ON by selecting the Restore DO from backup memory Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup The DM backup data will be read from the backup memory even if the Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Check Box is selected in the PLC Setup Related Auxiliary Area Bits Name Address Description DM Backup Save A751 15 The number of words in the DM Area specified in the Number of CH of Start Bit DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup are saved from the built in RAM to the built in EEPROM backup mem ory when this bit is turned ON This bit will not automatically turn OFF again if the bit turns ON Design the ladder program so that this bit is turned ON and OFF again using upwardly differentiated bits If this bit is turned ON and OFF while the DM Backup Save Flag A751 14 is ON it will be ignored and the data will not be backed up again To backup the data again make sure that A751 14 is OFF and then turn ON A751 15 A751 15 is turned OFF when the power supply is turned ON DM Backup Save A751 14 This flag turns ON when A751 15 is turned ON to start the saving Flag operation This flag stays ON while data is being saved and turns OFF when finished uon2ung dr j eg Wd 9r Use this flag to confirm when the DM backup operation has been com pleted The flag is turned OFF
257. RICT LIABILITY In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY REPAIR OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED STORED INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION ABUSE MISUSE OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards codes or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer s application or use of the products At the customer s request OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product machine System or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions
258. RSET OFF B Bit Status of B ON MULTIPLE BIT SETA SETA 530 turns ON the specified number of consecutive bits ae E m 5 M D dissidia nimc ur S 14 N2 bits are set N2 Ne 1 ee m to 1 ON D Beginning word D 2 eed N1 Beginning bit N2 Number of bits MULTIPLE BIT RSTA RSTA 531 turns OFF the specified number of consecutive bits RESET DI gktrusua rei sos 00 N2 bits are p RR 0 0 OFF 0 D Beginning word z j N1 Beginning bit Ds N2 Number of bits SINGLE BIT SETB SETB 532 turns ON the specified bit in the specified word when SET the execution condition is ON D Unlike the SET instruction SETB 532 can be used to reset a bit in a DM word D Word address N Bit number SINGLE BIT RSTB RSTB 533 turns OFF the specified bit in the specified word when RESET RSTB 533 the execution condition is ON D Word address N Bit number Unlike the RSET instruction RSTB 533 can be used to reset a bit in a DM word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 1 3 Sequence Control Instructions Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function END END Indicates the end of a program END 001 NO OPERA NOP This instruction has no function No processing is performed for TION NOP 000 INTERLOCK IL mm Interlocks all outputs between IL 002 and ILC 003 when the exe 902 cution condition for IL 002 is OFF IL 002
259. Signal NC Positioning Monitor Time o 4 ms Deceleration Ratio CP1E N40 offline CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 21 uonisod uibuo buiuged p ZT uone1edo Jo MOJA Z r zL 12 Pulse Outputs Pulse Output 0 or 1 Tab Page Item Selection Description Base Undefined Hold When a Limit Input Signal is input the pulse output is Settings Origin stopped and the previous status is held Undefined When a Limit Input Signal is input the pulse output is stopped and origin becomes undefined Limit Input Search Only The CW CCW Limit Input Signal is used for origin searches Signal Opera only tion Always The CW CCW Limit Input Signal is used by functions other than origin search Limit Input NC Select when using NC contacts for the Limit Input Signal Signal NO Select when using NO contacts for the Limit Input Signal Search Set the motor s starting speed when performing an origin search or origin return Return Specified in units of pulses per second pps Initial Speed Setting range 0 to 100k pps The origin search will not be performed in these cases Origin search high speed lt Origin search proximity speed Origin search proximity speed lt Origin search initial speed Define Usedefine Select this check box to use origin searches Origin origin opera Opera tion tion Search Direc Set the direction for detecting the Origin Input Signal An origin search is performed so
260. Specify 10 02 Starting bit address Starting bit address A symbol can also be specified for the start ing bit address Only Holding Work and DM Area addresses can be used regardless of whether a physical address or symbol is used A constant or word address in I O memory can be used for the offset If a word address is specified the contents of the word is used as the offset Specifying In brackets specify the number of words to DO 2 MOV 3 DO 200 offsets for offset the specified starting bit address L Number of words to offset the address word Specify D2 addresses OO O L Starting word address Offset Constant of 0 or higher or word address in DO W0 4 12 O memory Starting word address A symbol can also be specified for the start ing word address Only Holding Work and DM Area addresses can be used regardless of whether a physical address or symbol is used A constant or word address in I O memory can be used for the offset If a word address is specified the contents of the word is used as the offset Number of bits to offset the address When WO amp 2 Specify D2 Starting word address CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming Operand Description Example pisei Specifying An offset from the beginning of the DM Area QD300 MOV 0001 D300 indirect DM _ is specified The contents of the address will 7
261. Step Junior pulse string input R7A CPZLILILIS W Series pulse string input R88A CPWLILILIS G Series pulse string input R88A CPGLILILIS Set the Servo Drive s command pulse mode to feed pulse and forward reverse signals because the method of pulse output from a CP1E CPU Unit is pulse direction Connecting to a SmartStep2 series Servo Drive Operating Mode 1 CP1E N NALILI SD type CPU Unit Output terminal block Pulse output CIO 100 00 R7A CPBL Pulse output 0 Direction output CIO 100 02 R7D BP SmartStep2 series Signal Error counter reset output 0 CIO 100 04 COM V NEILIS 1 type only V NLILIS 1 type only Input terminal block Pulse 0 origin input signal CIO 0 06 COM Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal CIO 0 10 Only NLILIS 1 type CPU Units can wire V and V Do not wire them in NLILI type CPU Units CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 9 ANOIAJOAOQ T CT uonejedo JO MO 4 Z L 2L 12 Pulse Outputs 12 10 R7A CPBLILILIS Cables for SmartStep2 series Servo Drives No Wire color mark color Symbol 1 Orange Re
262. U Unit who installs the Ethernet Unit when executing the same task the process ing time will be approximately 20 ms up to 17 times faster 17 1 6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board has two versions version 1 and version 2 Only version 2 can be used on the CP1E CPU Unit Comparison with CP1W CIF41 Version 1 0 Item Communications mode CP1W CIF41 version 1 0 Toolbus CP1L CP1H CP1W CIF41 version 2 0 Toolbus CP1L CP1H Host Link CP1E Reset system settings function Not supported Turn ON the Reset Flag A525 01 in the Auxiliary Area Restart function Click the Restart Button from the Web browser Click the Restart Button from the Web browser Turn ON the Restart Flag A525 09 in the Auxiliary Area Max number of units that can be mounted Cannot be used 1 set The CP1E CPU Unit does not support the Toolbus protocol so the Ethernet Option Board version 1 0 cannot be used 17 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 2 Startup Procedure 17 2 1 Startup Procedure Install the Ethernet Option Board Turn ON the power of the CPU Unit Set the serial communications settings of the option port with the CX Programmer Set by USB port Set by Ethernet port Set the baud rate to 115200bps Set the baud rate to 115200bps mode to Host Link and unit number mode to Host Link and unit number to
263. UE reverse video 0 3 Input the timer number too z For example input 3 and then press the Enter Key TM af 4 Input the timer set value oo z For example input 10 A Set value 2 2 TIM 3310 18 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations 5 Press the Enter Key zr TM 100ms Timer Timer BCO Type 003 Timer number This completes inputting the TIM instruction 0 Set value i Copying Rungs Using the Automatic Address Increment Function When rungs are copied and then pasted it is possible to automatically increment the addresses by the specified number when pasting the rungs Example When the following rung is copied the bit addresses can be incremented by 16 and the word address can be incremented by 10 when pasting the rung I 0 00 I 0 01 v0 00 100 00 1 Wu MOV 021 Move D100 Source word D200 Destination 1 Select the above rung and then select Address Increment Copy from the Edit Menu The following dialog box will be displayed Address Incremental Copy Offset Copy Count Bit la TIM o Include Symbols Comments CH fi CNT fo wei6oidg ppe e Bunea gr Name Address Offset Size Unit 10 Comment 0 00 1 Bit 0 01 1 Bit 100 00 1 Bit D100 1 CH 1 1 D200 CH w0 00 Bit ureJBo4g 4eppe e Bumndul 1 81 Advanced gt gt Cancel 2 In the Offset Area set
264. User s Manual W480 Appendices A 1 4 Timer and Counter Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function HUNDRED MS TIM TIM TIMX 550 operates a decrementing timer with units of 0 1 s TIMER BCD The setting range for the set value SV is 0 to 999 9 s for ON TIM BCD and 0 to 6 553 5 s for TIMX Binary sS ee ON d N Timer number Timer input OFF Ai z S Set value TUE TmerPV RENE E Binary i i Y N 1 N Completion ON i f N Timer number Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion Flag S Set value Turns ON ON Timer input OFF FE 7 i di Timer PV T c Completion ON Flag OFF TEN MS TIMH NAOS TIMH 015 TIMHX 551 operates a decrementing timer with units TIMER BCD 015 of 10 ms The setting range for the set value SV is 0 to 99 99 s o N for TIMH BCD and 0 to 655 35 s for TIMHX Binary S Lae O gained N Timer number Timer input OFF S Set value i L TIMHX m Timer PV sv Pts 0 LL Binary ON n ON f Completion s OFF S Flag o M N Timer number is S Set in Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion Flag Turns i ON a f 1 Timer input One I a i o i i S Timer PV Sv 4 ie ae 7 0 i E 5 g Completion ON o Flag OFF F ONE MS TMHH TMHH 540 TMHHX 552 operates a decrementing timer with TIMER BCD TMHH 540 units of 1 ms The setting range for
265. Vi Precautions for Correct Use Instruction A Instruction Operand Condition Flag Example _ LD Instruction A The result from instruction A is reflected in the Equals Flag AND Instruction B Instruction B The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions This means that program operation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing ladder programs to prevent unexpected operation CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 10 Clock Pulses overview The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit s internal timer These bits are specified with symbols rather than addresses The CX Programmer treats condition flags as system defined symbols global symbols beginning with P i Notation P_ 0_02s Clock pulse name 0_02s I O memory area designator P_ indicates a system symbol name Details The Clock Pulses are read only they cannot be written from instructions or from the CX Programmer e Clock Pulses Name ENING Description Programmer p 0 02 s Clock Pulse P 0 02s 0 01s ON for 0 01 s Te OFF for 0 01 s 0 01s gt 0 1 s clock pulse P 0 1s 0 05s ON for 0 05 s IS OFF for 0 05 s 0 05s gt e 0 2 s clock pulse P 02s ON for 0 1 s OFF for 0 1 s 1 s clock pulse P 1s ON for 0
266. W0 15 The target speed is changed according to inputs from multiple contacts Acceleration and deceleration are controlled using the acceleration and deceleration of an inverter i Wiring Examples The CP1E and OMRON 3G3MV Inverter are connected using RS 485 for frequency and start stop con trol CP1E NLILI type CPU Unit CP1W CIF11 12 RS 422A 485 Option Board RS485 Symbol 1 S Control circuit 2 g terminal block 3 R J communications amp 4 R terminals 5 CP1W CIF11 12 RS 422A 485 Option Board CP1E NODOS 1 type CPU Unit Built in RS 485 Port Symbol 1 A RS 485 1S Contro circuit 2 B S terminal block 3 FG 50 m max R communication RE s terminals Built in RS 485 Port 14 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications CP1W CIF11 12 Settings Set the DIP switch as shown in the following table Back 31 f I I CPU Unit connector DIP switch for operation settings g n a No Setting ON OFF Description c m 1 Terminating resistance selection ON Connects terminating resistance 8 2 2 4 wire selection ON 2 wire connections 3 2 4 wire selection ON 2 wire connections i 4 OFF Always OFF 5 5 RS control for RD ON Enabled g 6 RS control for SD ON Enabled Z e 3G3
267. Windows Meda Play Windows Media Player D Windows Move Maill ib Windows Messenger fh OURON LU LUE 7 Symantec Clent Security 9 Introduction Guide Lorary gt GR Cx One Ato Update E Release Notes i Names and Functions of Parts of the Main Window This section describes the names and functions of each part of the Main Window of the CX Programmer For details on the functions and operation of CX Programmer refer to the CX Programmer Online Help e Main Window Wied CX A romrarrewer Mew RETE PP P Ldt Wem meet Progen AC maton Took wider fp CEA EE ICE ARTUTWMW at L Fep Pe a us 9 DSER S E di senap P ermumum Title Bar Displays the name of the project Main Menu Displays the menus from which commands are selected Toolbar Displays the icons for executing commands CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 5 Jounueubo4g X 2 JO M9SIAI9AO Z 8T uome4edo oj dnes wos o 1euueJ8o4d X2 Z Z 84 18 Programming Device Operations Project Tree and e Project Workspace Used to manage programs and settings s Sections Allow ladder programming to be split up into a number of parts Ladder Section Window A window that is used to create and edit ladder programs l O Comment Bar Displays the name address value and I O comment of the symbol selected with the cursor 9 Output Window Displays messages such as search results and e
268. Z 1 9L PIDAT Instruction The PIDAT instruction treats the PV as unsigned hexadecimal data 0000 to FFFF hex Signed data cannot be used so if the temperature range includes negative values apply scaling with the APR instruction CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 3 16 Other Functions Autotuning Procedure Automatically Executing Autotuning When PIDAT Is Executed To automatically autotune the PID constants turn ON the AT Command Bit when the PIDAT instruc tion is executed 1 Set the PID parameter in words C to C 10 Word C is specified by the second operand Example Place the set value SV in C and place the input range in bits 08 to 11 of C 6 Turn ON bit 15 of C 9 AT Command Bit 2 Turn ON the PIDAT instruction s input condition The PIDAT instruction will execute autotuning When it has finished the AT Command Bit bit 15 in C 9 will turn OFF At the same time the proportional band C 1 integral constant C 2 and derivative constant C 3 calculated by autotuning will be stored and PID control will be started Executing Autotuning for Other Conditions When PIDAT Is Executed Here the AT Command Bit is left OFF when the PIDAT instruction is being executed Later it is turned ON by some other condition to start autotuning 1 Set the PID parameter in words C to C 10 Word C is specified by the second operand Example Place the set value SV in C the proportional band in C 1 the integral
269. a i a i RR RR 4 4 Anaia Roa Ra 5 19 5 10 Clock Pulses eese enne nnn nnn ra rara ii a Ru RR RR A RA Aa AR Aura Aaaa Ra 5 21 Section 6 1 0 Allocation 6 1 Allocation of Input Bits and Output Bits eere nennen nne nnne nnn n nna 6 2 6 1 1 ep Arcu Ec 6 2 6 1 2 l O Allocation GOorceplts oer ees coder etre co quer et orte pt tate cere certa ee 6 3 6 1 3 Allocationsonithe GPU Unit oit eno ee c Re eed pta urn 6 3 6 1 4 Allocations to Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units eeeen 6 4 Section 7 PLC Setup 7 1 Overview of the PLC Setup eene nnne nnne nnn nnn nana nuni aa aiia sunu iua a iia danais Edan 7 2 7 2 PLC Setup Settings inaran daiane ana aesan aa aeaaea niaaa anada aan ne a iia a i a Ru a andai nadia 8 7 3 7 2 1 Startup and CPU Unit Settings e tds rte tec eed reet eve dee v cerdos 7 8 7 2 2 Timing and Interrupt Settings sess eene nennen nennen tnnt neret 7 3 7 2 3 Input Constant Settings oot al dinette eoe teen be reete Dae eic EEK tana 7 4 7 2 4 Built in RS 232C POl n iioii oet UD mie eiecti e er d D Diete 7 5 7 2 5 Serial Option Port Built in RS 485 Port c ce ceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeseaeesneeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 8 7 2 6 Built ini Inputs eene ite HO e sands E 7 11 7 2 7 Pulse Output 0 Settings i re ate tec eed avete 7 13 7 2 8 Pulse Output Settings hee ERREUR HERE UD Dcinde 7 14 7
270. a read Read the contents of continuous I O memory area area SCEPSS iil Of 02 l O memory area write Write the contents of continuous I O memory area 01 03 l O memory area write all at once Replenish the specified ranges of I O memory area with the same data 01 04 I O memory area mixed read Read the contents of discontinuous I O memory area Parameter 02 01 Parameter area read Read the contents of continuous parameter area area access ge 02 Parameter area write Write the contents of continuous parameter area unable to execute in MONITOR or RUN mode 02 03 Parameter area write clear all at Replenish the specified ranges of parameter area once with the same data Operating 04 01 Operating mode change Operation Change the operating mode of CPU Unit to RUN or mode start MONITOR mode change 04 02 Operating mode change Operation Change the operating mode of CPU Unit to PRO stop GRAM mode System con 05 01 CPU Unit information read Read CPU Unit information figuration read Status read 06 01 CPU Unit status read Read the status information of CPU Unit 06 20 Cycle time read Read cycle time MAX MIN AVERAGE Time infor 07 01 Time information read Read present year month day of the month hour mation minute second day of the week ACCESS 07 02 Time information write Change present year month day of the month hour minute second day of the week Message 09 20 Message read cancel Read FAL and FALS display related Debugging 21 03 Error log
271. aining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit the self maintaining bit will not be cleared even when the power is reset If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self maintaining bit the bit will be turned OFF and the self maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is reset H0 00 H0 00 AC If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self maintaining bit the bit will be turned OFF by execution condition A when the power is reset H0 00 H Precautions for Correct Use When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP instruction never use a normally closed condition for the reset input When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted the input will go OFF before the PLCs internal power supply and the Holding Area bit will be reset Bad B W jj Sel NE KEEP H1 5 A Reset 5 T B Set KEEP H1 00 2 Reset E a CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 5 Data Memory Area D overview This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word 16 bits These words retain their contents when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode Some words in the DM Area can be saved to the built in EEPROM backup memory using Auxiliary Area bits These words are specifica
272. al A280 01 A281 01 Flag occurred in the pulse output PV 1 Overflow or underflow Output Amount ON when the number of output pulses has 0 No setting A280 02 A281 02 SetFlag been set with the PULS instruction 1 Setting made Output Completed ON when the number of output pulses set 0 Output not completed A280 03 A281 03 Flag with the PULS PLS2 instruction has been 4 Output completed output Outputin progress ON when pulses are being output from 0 Stopped A280 04 A281 04 Flag the pulse output 1 Outputting pulses No origin Flag ON when the origin has not been defined 0 Origin defined A280 05 A281 05 for the pulse output 1 Origin undefined At origin Flag ON when the pulse output PV matches 0 Not stopped at origin A280 06 A281 06 the origin 0 1 Stopped at origin Output Stopped ON when an error occurred while output 0 No error A280 07 A281 07 Error Flag ting pulses in the origin search function 1 Stop error occurred Stop Error Code When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs A444 A445 the error code is stored in that pulse out puts corresponding Stop Error Code word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 35 Sbe 4 ea1y Arey pegejou 9 ZT 1ndino aging eui jo enjeA 1ueseug eui BulBueUD 7 v zI 12 Pulse Outputs 12 7 Application Examples 12 7 1 Vertically Conveying PCBs Multiple Progressive Positioning i Specifications and Operation e Outline PCBs with components mou
273. allocated to the Input Unit and connect the 8 input signal lines to the Input Unit as shown in the following diagram Data input word 1514131211109 876 54 3 2 O Output word EERBARE p D 1st destination word C System word 0 c Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Input Unit inputs 0to7 NOoBRWPD O Output Word Selection Signal Outputs Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and con nect the 8 selection signals to the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 210 Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Output Unit outputs 0 to 7 NOaRWNM O C System Word Specifies a work word used by the instruction This word can not be used in any other application 15 0 Se X 7 System word Cannot be accessed by the user suon ung uopnysul T Y suononuisu yun O I 9 seg Oz L V CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 47 Appendices Instruction 7 SEGMENT DISPLAY OUT PUT A 48 Mnemonic 7SEG Variations Symbol Operand 7SEG 214 O E S 1st source word O Output word C Control data D System word Function Converts the source data either 4 digit or 8 digit BCD to 7 seg ment display data and outputs that data to the specified output word O Output Word Data and Latch Outputs Specify the output word allocated to the Output Unit and con nect the 7 segment disp
274. alues click the Transfer Button to transfer the settings to the Ethernet Option Board Crranster J Cancel J Restan 9 To enable the new settings turn the power to the Ethernet Option Board OFF and ON again or click the Restart Button The functions of the buttons are as follows uonouny Dunes Jasmolg Q M v 1 Transfer Transfer the entered values from the personal computer to the Ethernet Option Board The new settings are invalid until the Ethernet Option Board has been reset Cancel Cancel the entered values Restart Restart the Ethernet Option Board to enable the new settings after transfer The Restart button is invalid to the PLC System setup for the Ethernet Option Board is as follows CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 17 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 18 OMRON Ethernet Option Board Settings Menu 1 IP Address and Protocols o System o HTTP 2 IP Address Router Table o IP Address Table o IP Router Table 3 FINS TCP o Connection Item IP Address System Format Parameter Value IP Address 192 168 250 p Subnet Mask 255 21255 255 No FINS Node Address 0 defautt 1 FINS UDP Port D Use Input Port No Default 9600 FINS TCP Port jo Use Input Port No Default 9600 3 Auto Dynamic O Auto Static Address Conversion Mode OManual O Auto amp Manual Destination IP address is changed dynamically FINS UDP Opti un Destination IP address i
275. an Not needed Needed A sistor outputs Do not connect an external power supply It is necessary to connect a DC24V exter S Li o n B 2 8 Ume DUPY T onl H connect the external power supply to the terminals except 00 and 01 on terminal Wiring Example block CIO 100 Sinking outputs Wiring Example Sinking outputs External power supply NC 00 01 02 NC COM COM COM 03 SeJn e8J JO M IM AQ L L L Sourcing outputs Sourcing outputs External power supply NC 00 01 02 NC COM COM COM 03 Product Lineup NOCO CPU Unit NOOS CPU Unit NOOS1 CPU Unit RS 232C 1 option slot Built in RS 232C Built in RS 232C RS 485 Transistor Transistor Transistor Relay outputs Relay outputs Relay outputs outputs sinking Outputs sinking Outputs sinking sourcing sourcing sourcing Power ac pc ac pc ac DC AC DC ac DC ac DC supply 10 I O points 14 I O points O O O 20 I O points O O O 30 I O points O O O O O O O 40 I O points O O O O O O O 60 I O points O O O O O O O Only N30 40 60 has option slot CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 7 1 1 8 Overview CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit This section describes the types of internal memory in
276. and origin searches 12 1 OvervieW uses nnns 12 2 12 1 1 OVERVIEW cis roe e ee CRUS pe eee he AM i a 12 2 12 1 2 Flow of Operation sleseseseeeeeeee ren 12 4 12 1 3937 Specifications s 4 084 eed See de en eee IAE 12 12 12 2 Positioning Control ccc cece eee mnn 12 13 12 2 1 Positioning Control Configuration llle 12 13 12 2 2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning 5 12 13 12 2 3 Application Example sssseee RII 12 15 12 3 J ogging i ure hy ay ORA a a ADR ROCRCA ELSE DN RR RC 12 17 12 334 High speed Jogging lisse 12 17 12 3 2 Low speed Jogging lesse ee 12 17 12 3 3 Application Example sesseeee RB 12 17 12 4 Defining Origin Position isee n mmm 12 20 12 4 1 Origin Searches 0 cece ete eae 12 20 12 4 2 Flow of Operation sssseseseee ee 12 21 12 4 3 Settings in PLC Setup eee 12 21 12 4 4 Origin Search Instructions liliis 12 24 12 4 5 Origin Search Operations eese 12 25 12 4 6 Origin Return 0 e eee 12 32 12 4 7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output 12 33 12 5 Reading the Pulse Output Present Value liess 12 34 12 6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags lesen nnn 12 35 12 7 Application Examples lesen mmm 12 36 12 7 1 Vertically Conveying PCBs Multiple Progressive Positioning 12 36 12 7 2 Feeding Wrapping
277. ange 3 Compari A274 02 A275 02 A320 02 A321 02 A326 02 A327 02 son Condition Met Flag ON for match Range 4 Compari A274 03 A275 03 A320 03 A321 03 A326 03 A327 03 son Condition Met Flag ON for match Range 5 Compari A274 04 A275 04 A320 04 A321 04 A326 04 A327 04 son Condition Met Flag ON for match Range 6 Compari A274 05 A275 05 A320 05 A321 05 A326 05 A327 05 son Condition Met Flag ON for match Comparison ON when a com A274 08 A275 08 A320 08 A321 08 A326 08 A327 08 In progress parison operation Flags is being executed for the high speed counter Overflow ON when an over A274 09 A275 09 A320 09 A321 09 A326 09 A327 09 Underflow flow or underflow Flags has occurred in the high speed counter s PV Count Direc 0 Decrementing A274 10 A275 10 A320 10 A321 10 A326 10 A327 10 tion Flags 1 Incrementing High speed ON ata software A531 00 A531 01 A531 02 A531 03 A531 04 A531 05 Counter reset Reset Flags High speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units 11 26 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters 11 5 Application Example ejduuexa3 uone 2iddy s TT i Using a Rotary Encoder to Measure Positions e Functions Used High speed Counting for a Built in Input A high speed counter input can be used by connecting a rotary encoder to a built in input A CP1E CPU Unit is equipped with more than one high speed counter input making it possible to c
278. anged during acceleration or decel eration The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed The rate can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration ACC Independent to PLS2 The number of output pulses can be changed The setting can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration The frequency can be changed The target frequency can even be changed during acceleration or decel eration The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed The rate can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration ACC Continuous to PLS2 The frequency can be changed The target frequency can even be changed during acceleration or decel eration The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed The rate can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration PLS2 to PLS2 The number of output pulses can be changed The setting can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration The frequency can be changed The target frequency can even be changed during acceleration or decel eration The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed The rate can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration i Origin Search Error Processing The CP1E CPU Unit s pulse output function performs a basic error check before starting to output pulses when the instruction is executed and will not output pulses if the settings are incorrect There are other errors that can occur with the origin
279. anual W480 14 9 14 Serial Communications 14 3 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Address Name Details A392 04 Built in RS 232C Port Turns ON when a communications error occurs at the built in RS 232C Communications Error Flag port The port must be restarted when this flag turns ON Turns ON when a timeout error overrun error framing error parity error or BCC error occurs in Modbus RTU Easy Master Mode A392 05 Built in RS 232C Port Send ON when the built in RS 232C port is able to send data in no protocol Ready Flag mode No protocol mode A392 06 Built in RS 232C Port ON when the built in RS 232C port has completed the reception in no pro Reception Completed Flag tocol mode No protocol mode When the number of bytes was specified ON when the specified number of bytes is received When the end code was specified ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are received A392 07 Built in RS 232C Port ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the built in Reception Overflow Flag RS 232C port in no protocol mode No protocol mode When the number of bytes was specified ON when more data is received after the reception was completed but before RXD was executed When the end code was specified ON when more data is received after the end code was received but before RXD is executed ON when 257 bytes are received before the end code If a start code is specified ON when
280. ar mode Circular mode Circular Max Count f Reset M Input Setting M r High Speed Counter 5 Use high speed counter 5 e Counting mode Linear mode C lar mode Circular Max Count Circular Max Count f Reset Y Reset M Input Setting y Input Setting Y Interrupt Input IN Normal v IN3 Normal v iN4 Normal Y IN5 Normal he ING Normal F IN7 Normal E Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Circular Max Count Reset oftware rese Input Setting Increment pulse i m High Speed Counter 4 Use high speed counter 4 Counting mode Linear made C lar m CP1E N40 Offline Refer to 11 1 2 Flow of Operation in Page 11 3 for details I Determining High speed Counter High speed counters 0 to 5 can be used for high speed counter interrupts Refer to 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals for high speed counter interrupt Refer to 10 1 Interrupts for the interrupts excluding high speed counter interrupts i Writing the Ladder Program e Writing the Interrupt Task Program Create programs for interrupt tasks 0 to 15 which are executed for the corresponding high speed counter interrupts Right click a program in the CX programmer and select Properties Select any interrupt task in the Task type Field of the Program Properties Dialog Box 11 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters Execution of CTBL and INI Instructions for Cyclic Task Execute the instructions i
281. arches Section 13 PWM Outputs This section describes the variable duty factor pulse PWM outputs Section 14 Serial Communications This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals PTs without using communications programming no protocol commu nications with general components and connections with a Modbus RTU Easy Master Serial PLC Link and host computer Section 15 Analog I O Function This section describes the built in analog function for NA type CPU Units Section 16 Built in Functions This section describes PID temperature control clock functions DM backup functions security functions Section 17 Ethernet Option Board This section gives an overview of the Ethernet Option Board describes its setting methods I O memory allocations troubleshooting how to connect the CX Programmer and how to install an Ethernet network Section 18 Operating the Program ming Device This section describes basic functions of the CX Programmer such as using the CX Programmer to write ladder programs to control the CP1E CPU Unit to transfer the programs to the CP1E CPU Unit and to debug the programs Appendices CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 The appendices provide lists of programming instructions the Auxiliary Area cycle time response performance PLC performance at power interruptions i CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 Section Sect
282. are User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Ladder Program 0 00 A281 04 t SPED 0001 lt Pulse output 1 E Low speed Pulse Output 30100 lt Specifies Pulse Direction output method CW and continuous mode m CW Start in Progress DO Target frequency SET W0 00 8 W0 00 0 00 e _v SPED Low speed low speed RR CW output CW Start 0000 in progress RSET W0 00 0 01 A281 04 _ l 1A SPED e ati eed Pulse Output TH a Specie Pika Direction output method CCW and continuous mode z i lt 9p CCW Start in Progress DO Target frequency z 5 SET WO 01 S Wo 01 0 01 5 IV SPED E oed cw Sat ae ar o Ccw output 0000 s in progress RSET WO0 01 0 04 A281 04 ACC High speed Pulse Output 0001 lt Pulse output 1 mE CW Start in Progress 0100 lt Specifies Pulse Direction output method CW and continuous mode D10 lt Acceleration deceleration rate and target frequency SET WO0 02 W0 02 0 04 IV ACC High speed High speed 0001 CW Start 0100 Cw output D13 in progress RSET W0 02 0 05 A281 04 I ui ACC High speed Pulse Output 0001 Pulse output 1 n j CCW Start in Progress 0110 lt Specifies Pulse Direction output method CCW and continuous mode D10 lt Acceleration deceleration rate and target freq
283. artup Write the following type of ladder programming Example P First Cycle BSET D100 to D2047 are cleared toZ First Cycle Flag 0000 TS A200 11 Dii D2047 BSET H10 to H49 are cleared to Zero 0000 H10 D49 CNR CO to C255 are cleared to Zero co C255 3 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Understanding Programming SS This section provides basic information on ladder programming for CP1E CPU Units 4 1 Programming 0ccccc cece ener e eens e eee mr rra 4 2 4 1 1 User Programs uc en hale cee bee dicate le EU RE hate a REG 4 2 4 1 2 Program Capacity 0 cee tees 4 3 4 1 3 Basics of Programming sasare adea iatna n tees 4 3 4 2 Tasks Sections and Symbols lesen n nn nnn 4 6 4 2 1 Overview of Tasks lsllssseeleeeeee en 4 6 4 2 2 Overview of Sections 0 0c cette eee 4 6 4 2 3 Overview of Symbols 0 00 ccc eet eee eee 4 6 4 3 Programming Instructions sees 4 8 4 3 1 Basic Understanding of Instructions llle 4 8 43 2 Operands se tek cede RERO EM a Se Mu earl Ged et eats 4 9 4 3 3 Instruction Variations 0 0 000 eee 4 10 4 3 4 Execution Conditions 0 0 0 4 10 4 3 5 Specifying Data in Operands 0 000 cece tee 4 12 4 3 6 Data Formats enc voL USE Nd RR dee iT sra 4 13 4 3 7 V O Refresh Timing llsseseeeeeeee III 4 15
284. ata bytes 04 hex Serial communications mode The Modbus RTU Easy Master function was executed when the error serial communications mode was not the Modbus RTU Easy Mas ter Mode or when the option board is not equipped 80 hex Response timeout A response was not received from the slave 81 hex Parity error A parity error occurred 82 hex Framing error A framing error occurred 83 hex Overrun error An overrun error occurred 84 hex CRC error A CRC error occurred 85 hex Incorrect confirmation address The slave address in the response is different from the one in the request 86 hex Incorrect confirmation function The function code in the response is different from the one in the code request 87 hex Response size overflow The response frame is larger than the storage area 92 bytes 88 hex Exception response An exception response was received from the slave 89 hex Service being executed A service is already being executed reception traffic congestion 8A hex Execution canceled Executing the service has been canceled 8F hex Other error Other FINS response code was received e Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits The Modbus RTU command set in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus RTU Easy Master is automatically sent when the Modbus RTU Master Execution Bit is turned ON The results normal or error will be given in corresponding flags Word Bit Port A640 02 01 00 Built in RS 232C port of CP1EN14 20
285. ata shifted into register 0 Hex 0 shifted in 8 Hex Contents of rightmost bit shifted in A 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand SHIFT N BITS NASR D Shift word C Control word DOUBLE NSRL SHIFT N BITS RIGHT A 1 8 D Shift word C Control word Appendices Function Shifts the specified 16 bits NASR or 32 bits NSRL of word data to the right by the specified number of bits a SETTER Contents of cw a or 0 Ada i cy shifted in i j 3 I i Lost N bits C Control word NASR 15 12 11 8 7 0 S No of bits to shift 00 to 10 Hex Always 0 Data shifted into register 0 Hex 0 shifted in 8 Hex Contents of rightmost bit shifted in NSRL 15 12 11 8 7 0 MG No of bits to shift 00 to 20 Hex Always 0 Data shifted into register 0 Hex 0 shifted in 8 Hex Contents of rightmost bit shifted in Increment Decrement Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function INCREMENT Increments the 4 digit hexadecimal content of the specified word BINARY 590 by 1 eo a Wd 1 Wd Wd Word DOUBLE L Increments the 8 digit hexadecimal content of the specified words INCREMENT L 591 by 1 BINARY wd Wd 1 Wd 1
286. atal error ON Cther non fatal error Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error occurs A315 04 Battery Error Flag non fatal error ON if the CPU Unit s battery is discon nected or its voltage is low and the Detect Battery Error setting has been set in the PLC Setup The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash This flag can be used to control an external warning light or other indica tor to indicate that the battery needs to be replaced This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 ON Error OFF No error Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error occurs PLC Setup Detect Battery Error A 67 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ery Auelpny z v Spon uo pe y 1 z V Appendices Address Status Related f after Status at Write Name Function Settings ESRA flags Words Bits mode startup timing settin gs change A402 10 PLC Setup Error Flag ON when there is a setting error in the ON Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed non fatal error PLC Setup The CPU Unit will continue OFF No error when error operating and the ERR ALM indicator occurs on the front of the CPU Unit will flash Note This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 15 FAL Error Flag ON when a non fatal error is generated ON FAL error Cleared Cleared R
287. ated with the CX Programmer can be transferred to the CP1E 1 Change to PROGRAM mode select Operating Mode Program from the PLC Menu and then click the Yes Button 2 Select Transfer m Transfer PC PLC CX P for Manual CX Programmer Stopped NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram PE File Edit View Insert Program fafa Simulation Tools Window Help MS Symbols ivi E Comments Transfer All v CI Program index from the PLC Menu The Download DG B of TR ah g Work Online Ctrle Ww Options Dialog Box will be displayed Sz HSE y auto onine amp BAe a Operating Made Bree Norrie o A NewPLC1 CP1E Stop Prograr Online Edit gt J Transfer PLC gt PC CtrleShifteT o CX Symbols Protection CR Compare PC PLC i Es Settings Clear All Memory Areas 3 R PLC Configuration a z A Programs e Sg NewPrograml 00 St Trace o 3 Symbols Force gt 5 cM SetfReset i 8 3 click the OK Button p ape A s o A dialog box to confirm the transfer v will be displayed PM Newer m To transfer the PLC Setup select the Mie Cancel d iv rogram s Settings Check Box CIE Settings J v T i z e E g 3 Symbols Comments Program index Transfer To From EN Additional Information For details on the transfer options refer to the CX Programmer Online Help dnjas O1d 34 pue wes6old Jeppe7 e BuuejsueJ v 8l CP1E CPU Unit Software Us
288. atically to Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units so the user does not have to do anything Refer to Section 6 I O Allocation in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W480 P 5 Software Setup Make the PLC software settings With a CP1E CPU Unit all you have to do is set the PLC Setup When using an ELILI S type CPU Unit or when using an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery be sure to consider selecting the Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Settings Refer to 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Startup Section 7 PLC Setup in the CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W480 6 Writing the Programs Write the programs using the CX Programmer Refer to Section 4 Programming Concepts in the CP 1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W480 7 Checking Operation Check the I O wiring and the Auxiliary Area settings and perform trial operation The CX Programmer can be used for monitoring and debugging Refer to Section 8 Overview and Allocation of Built in Functions 8 Basic Program Operation Set the operating mode to RUN mode to start operation 1 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 Overview 1 3 Difference between E N NALILI type and E NLILIS 1 type dAHT SOON 3 pue edA p11VvN N 3 Uam DUPY T The differences among functions other than appearances of E N NA
289. ative voltage as a two s complement Hy LL 10 V F31C F448 8000 3300 3000 0000 0 l Conversion Data Ganev 5300 TFFF Hexadecimal Decimal sobuey jeubis yndyno 6ojeuy Z Z ST 0 to 10 V Outputs When the resolution is setto 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V Specify a negative voltage as a two s complement A 105V 10V FED4 300 0000 0 Conversion Data UN doy E350 TFFF Hexadecimal Decimal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 9 15 Analog I O Function 0 to 5 V Outputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to 5 V S pecify a negative voltage as a two s complement FED4 00 8000 300 0000 0 Conversion Data oy EOE 7FFF Hexadecimal Decimal 0 25 V 1 to 5 V Outputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 correspond to an analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V Conversion Data I 8000 LED did 1770 189C IERP Hexadecimal Decimal 6000 6300 0 to 20 mA Outputs When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 0 to 6 000 correspond to an analog current range of 0 to 20 mA A 21mAL 20 mA
290. atus 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O eom o o orojojo ojopo ojo ojo o Bit Switch Unit operation 0 FINS TCP Connection No 1 0 The connection is terminated 1 A connection is established 1 FINS TCP Connection No 2 0 The connection is terminated 1 A connection is established 21015 Reserved Always 0 17 32 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 5 Trouble Shooting 17 5 1 ErrorLog The Ethernet Option Board provides an error log that records errors occurred during Ethernet Option Board operation The contents of the error log can be read or cleared from the Web Brower j Logged Errors The following errors are recorded in the error log Errors in network operation Errors in data transfers Error in the CPU unit i Error Log Table Each error is recorded as one record in an error log table Up to 20 records can be saved If more than 20 errors occur the oldest errors will be deleted from the error log and the most recent error will be recorded The following information is recorded in the error log table Main error code see table later in this section Detailed error code see table later in this section Time stamp from the clock in the CPU unit Bunoous ejqnoar s 7T Note During the initialization of the Ethernet Option Board if an error occurs the error log time stamp will record as 2000 00 00 00 00 00 I Error Log Location When
291. ble Number of values 4 Target value 4 Jf 9N Target value 1 when counting up Target value 3p 4 54 N Beet deeem etd didum Interrupt task 0 Target value 2 when counting up Interrupt task 1 Target value 3 when counting up Interrupt task 5 soooooo Target value 4 when counting up Interrupt task 8 Time Comparison is executed according to the order of the Target wale 2b 4 4 Nha values in the table Target value 1 Interrupt task number that is started No 0 No 1 No 5 No 8 No 0 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 17 11 High speed Counters Example 2 High speed counter PV Target value 1 Target value 2 Comparison is executed according to the order of the i Target value 3 F values in the table Target value 4 Interrupt task number that is started No 0 No 1 No 5 No 8 Comparison table Number of values 4 Target value 1 when counting up Interrupt task 0 Target value 2 when counting down Interrupt task 1 Target value 3 when counting down Interrupt task 5 Target value 4 when counting down Interrupt task 8 Time Up to 6 target values between 1 and 6 can be registered in the comparison table A different interrupt task can be registered for each tar
292. broutines together just after all of the main program and before the END instruction A subroutine cannot be placed in a step ladder block program or FOR NEXT section If instructions other than those in a subroutine are placed after a subroutine SBN to RET those instructions will not be executed Program Subroutines CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming i Instructions not Supported in Subroutines The following instructions cannot be used in a subroutine Classification by function Instruction R Step Ladder STEP STEP DEFINE e structions SNXT STEP NEXT 3 g i Instructions not Supported in Step Ladder Program Sections The following instructions cannot be used in step ladder program sections 8 S RC Mnemonic Instruction Sequence Con FOR NEXT and BREAK FOR NEXT and BREAK LOOP g trol Instructions END END IL and ILC INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR JMP and JME JUMP and JUMP END CJP CONDITIONAL JUMP and CONDITIONAL JUMP NOT Subroutines SBN and RET SUBROUTINE ENTRY and SUBROUTINE RETURN Note A step ladder program section can be used in an interlock section between IL and ILC The step ladder section will be completely reset when the interlock condition is ON suonoes ueJBoJg eads 1 9 v CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 23 4 Understanding Programming CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 I O Memory This
293. cad SE Karen Clau LY aS C aan EI FEAR Raga o a UE Dada SDN RAD Rin adno 12 17 12 9 1 X High speed Jogging ierunt ete nt reete te lee rptu d cr oa Rena oe 12 17 12 3 2 Low speed Jogging nt ee Eee a hetero an 12 17 12 9 3 Application Example etg teh en n e Pent oe rest ctos tetra era rt ene cede rb eue 12 17 12 4 Defining Origin Position ener nennen nenne nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nana nnn annu 12 20 12 44 Otigir Searches rote ii gea Pet il ac Ge eem editas 12 20 12 422 FIOW of ODGrations ineo EE RE EC RUE EE UAE naoa aaea Naoise 12 21 12 4 3 Settings in PLC Setup aiiu anaa ae a eia a ee de iaa TAA aias 12 21 12 4 4 Origin Search Instructions sessesssssseseseseeeeenneen nennen nnne 12 24 12 4 5 Origin Search Operations imriss eiai naaasar enne nennen nenne nne ennt en resins nnns 12 25 d2 4 6 Qrigir Betti usine te eed io nei One DEDI iate 12 32 12 4 7 Changing the Present Value of the Pulse Output 12 33 12 5 Reading the Pulse Output Present Value enne enne nnn nnn nnn nnn nnns 12 34 12 6 Related Auxiliary Area Flags 11 eeeee ener erneuern nnn annnm 12 35 12 7 Application Examples eene ne nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nia a nni nnn 12 36 12 7 1 Vertically Conveying PCBs Multiple Progressive Positioning sesseeeeeees 12 36 12 7 2 Feeding Wrapping Material Interrupt Feeding
294. cautions for The input will be treated as an address in An error will occur and the left bus bar will be sjuejsuo c r correct use the CIO Area and the contents of that displayed in red if a hexadecimal value address will be specified if a decimal including A to F is input without from the value without or is input from the CX CX Programmer Programmer The input will be treated as an address in the CIO Area and the contents of that address will be specified if a decimal value without is input from the CX Programmer Range 16 bits Negative 32768 to 1 Negative 8000 to FFFF Positive 0 to 32767 Positive 0000 to 7FFF 32 bits Negative 2147483648 to 1 Negative 480000000 to 2FFFFFFFF Positive 0 to 2147483647 Positive 00000000 to 7FFFFFFF Unsigned BCD Data type Decimal values BCD values Notation None 0010 Decimal value using 0to9 BCD symbol Application B 0010 DO D1 example Adds 0010 and the contents of DO as BCD data and stores the result in D1 Precautions for The input will be treated as an address in the ClO correct use Area and the contents of that address will be specified if a decimal value without is input from the CX Programmer Range 16 bits None 0000 to 9999 32 bits 0000 0000 to 99999999 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming Using Operands to Specify Numbers
295. ce tee 3 3 3 2 Backing Up Memory cc cece cece eee 3 5 3 2 1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration 0 0 c eee eee 3 5 3 2 2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup 000 eee eee 3 6 3 23 l OMemory Backup ssssseseee ere 3 6 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Startup llis 3 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 1 3 CPU Unit Operation 3 1 CPU Unit Operation This section gives an overview of the CPU Unit operation describes the operating modes and explains how the Unit operates when there is a power interruption 3 1 1 Overview of CPU Unit Operation The CPU Unit reads and writes data to the internal I O memory areas while executing user ladder pro grams by executing the instructions in order one at a time from the start to the end Overhead processing i i self diagnosis A Change in status after all instructions i i have been executed i 1 Program execution eae OTOTO i Inputs i ccess Exch i T O olololololololo itia ci CPU Unit d d 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 O 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 A i rocessin i Sie s O 10 1 0 1 0 0 1 M i i i Outputs i l O refreshing eee ees 1 Refreshes external devices at this timing Peripheral servicing i Overhead Processing Self diagnosis Self diagnosis such as an I O bus check is performed i
296. celeration to PLS2 Accelera decelera Target frequency Riga f change the acceleration i deceleration rate 2 tion rate n Acceleration N A 1 bn rates C rate or deceleration rate Decelera gt lime uring l tion rate positioning Execution of PLS2 Execution of PLS2 Execution of PLS2 multiple Execution of PLS2 start func tion Change Change paso fequan y PLS2 can be executed PULS Number of direction the direc Giusto harp ue SUUS during positioning with L pulses tion during M of pulses specified deceleration rate absolute pulse specifica ACC Absolute T arget r 7 positioning frequency Number of pulses position tion to change to absolute Ind n pulse Spec changed by RLS pulses and reverse direc Indepe ificati Time f dent ification i tion Execution l x Port MS riu Pulse Execution of PLS2 PLS2 cupi S Direction PLS2 Accelera L tion rate PLS2 Decelera tion rate Target fre quency Starting frequency 12 54 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs i Stopping a Pulse Output Example t Procedure Operation RUE Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Stop pulse Immediate PETER Stops the pulse output immedi PULS Stop pulse output stop ately and clears the number of output o pien EE P output pulses setting ACC or SPED ting is not Independent preserved 1 Time i Execut
297. ck Counter 1 phase B Counter 1 response or down input direction input 3 04 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 4 Interrupt input 4 Quick Counter 3 Counter 0 phase Z Counter 0 response increment or reset input reset input input 4 input 05 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 5 Interrupt input 5 Quick Counter 4 Counter 1 phase Z Counter 1 response increment or reset input reset input input 5 input Note 1 The same pulse input must be used for high speed counter 0 and high speed counter 1 2 High speed counter 2 cannot be used if the input setting of high speed counter 0 or high speed counter 1 is set for differential phase inputs 4x pulse direction inputs or up down pulse inputs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 5 MO9IA JO O T TT uonejedo JO MO 4 Z L LL 11 High speed Counters e Wiring Example for High speed Counter Input Terminals Using a 24 VDC Open collector Encoder The following example shows the connections of an encoder with phase A phase B and phase Z inputs to high speed counter 0 Black Encoder Q fi 24 VDC White Phase B 0 01 l Example E6B2 CWZ6C 24 VDC power supp Orange Phase Z c Brown Vcc NPN open collector output A COM Blue OV CO CP1E CPU Unit Differential Phase Input Mode Phase A 0 00 9 High speed counter 0 Phase A 0 V High speed counter 0 Phase B 0 V High speed counter 0
298. clic Refreshing I O is all refreshed after ladder programs are executed Start 15 0 LD1 01 cooo 1 15 0 16 bit increments END All uie I O data Cyclic refreshing batch 1 O refresh Execute an instruction with the immediate refresh variation or an IORF instruction to perform I O refreshing while ladder programming is being executed Jj Immediate Refresh The method of specifying immediate refreshing depends on whether the object to be refreshed is built in I O or an Expansion Unit To specify immediate refreshing for the CPU Unit s built in I O specify the immediate refresh variation of the instruction To specify immediate refreshing for Expansion I O or an Expansion Unit use the IORF instruction e Instructions with Refresh Variation Add an exclamation mark in front of the instruction to specify immediate refreshing I O will be refreshed as shown below when an instruction is executing if a real I O bit in the CPU Unit s built in I O is specified as an operand Bit Operands I O refreshing for the bit will be performed Word Operands I O refreshing for the 16 specified bits will be performed Input or Source Operands Inputs are refreshed immediately before the instruction is executed Output or Destination Operands Outputs are refreshed immediately after the instruction is executed e IORF 097 Instruction An I O refresh IORF
299. constant in C22 the derivative constant in C 3 and the input range in bits 08 to 11 of C 6 Turn OFF bit 15 of C 9 AT Command Bit 2 Turn ON the PIDAT instruction s input condition PID control will be started with the specified PID constants 3 Turn ON bit 15 in C 9 the AT Command Bit while the input condition for the PID instruction is ON Autotuning will be performed When it has finished the AT Command Bit bit 15 in C 9 will turn OFF The proportional band C 1 integral constant C 2 and derivative constant C43 calculated by autotuning will be stored and PID control will be started with those PID constants 16 1 3 Application Example i System Configuration K thermocouple Controlled device CE u HW a Inputs connected to terminal Inputs connected to blocks CIO 0 and CIO 1 terminal block CIO 2 CP1E CPU Unit with 30 I O CP1W TS001 I Points Temperature Sensor Unit Control device SSR Transistor output erminals AK thermocouple is used for the temperature input Use a CP1W TS001 Temperature Sensor Unit thermocouple input 16 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 Other Functions The Temperature Sensor Unit s temperature input PV is stored in CIO 2 The control output is the transistor output used to control the heater through the SSR using time pro portional control The PIDAT sampling cycle is 1 second Control cycle 20 s When W0 00 turns
300. cremented or decremented The counter PV for the current cycle is com pared with the PV in last cycle to deter mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing Settings Status after mode change Status at startup Cleared Write timing Setting used for high speed counter valid during counter operation Related flags settings A339 to A340 Maximum Differentia tion Flag Number These words contain the maximum value of the differentiation flag num bers being used by differentiation instructions See Func tion col umn Cleared Written at the start of opera tion A295 13 A351 to A354 N NA t ype CPU Unit only Calendar Clock Area These words contain the CPU Unit s internal clock data in BCD The clock can be set from the CX Programmer with the DATE instruction or with a FINS command CLOCK WRITE 0702 A351 00 to A351 07 Seconds 00 to 59 BCD A351 08 to A351 15 Minutes 00 to 59 BCD A352 00 to A352 07 Hours 00 to 23 BCD A352 08 to A352 15 Day of the month 01 to 31 BCD A353 00 to A353 07 Month 01 to 12 BCD A353 08 to A353 15 Year 00 to 99 BCD A354 00 to A354 07 Day of the week 00 to 06 BCD 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday Note 1 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes dis charged Write the ladder pro gram and design the overall system to handle a
301. cuted INI Indepen Contin Inde Contin PLS2 ORG dent uous pendent uous SPED Independent e e x e x X x 1 3 SPED Continuous e X e x e X x 2 5 ACC Steady speed e x x e x e x Indepen 4 6 dent Accelerating or e x x e x e x decelerating 4 6 ACC Steady speed e x x x e e x Continuous 5 7 Accelerating or e X x x e e x decelerating 5 7 PLS2 Steady speed e x x e x e x 4 8 Accelerating or e x x e x e x decelerating 4 8 ORG Steady speed e x x x x x x Accelerating or e x x x x x x decelerating 1 SPED Independent to SPED Independent The number of output pulses cannot be changed The frequency can be changed CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 45 12 Pulse Outputs 12 46 SPED Continuous to SPED Continuous The frequency can be changed SPED Independent to ACC Independent The number of output pulses cannot be changed The frequency can be changed The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed ACC Independent to ACC Independent or PLS2 to ACC Independent The number of output pulses cannot be changed The frequency can be changed The acceleration deceleration rate can be changed The rate can even be changed during acceleration or deceleration SPED Continuous to ACC Continuous or ACC Continuous to ACC Continuous The frequency can be changed The target frequency can even be ch
302. d Cleared Reset Bit Phase Z signal Software reset the 01 High speed Counter 1 corresponding high speed counters Reset Bit PV will be reset if the phase Z signal is received while this bit is ON 9e Bm Counter 2 When the reset method is set to Soft ware reset the corresponding 03 High speed Counter 3 high speed counter s PV will be reset Reset Bit in the cycle when this bit turns ON 04 High speed Counter 4 Reset Bit 05 High speed Counter 5 Reset Bit Not supported by E10 CPU Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 73 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ery fueixny z v SPJOM 9IHAWPESH c c V Appendices Address Status Related F after Status at Write Name Function Settings AS flags Words Bits mode startup timing 5 change settings A540 00 Pulse Output 0 The pulse output 0 PV contained in Retained Cleared A276 and Reset Bit A276 and A277 will be cleared when A277 this bit is turned ON 08 Pulse Output 0 This is the CW limit input signal for Retained Cleared CW Limit Input Signal pulse output 0 which is used in the Flag origin search To use this signal write the input from the actual sensor as an input condition in the ladder program and output the result to this flag 09 Pulse Output 0 This is the CCW limit input signal for Retained Cleared CCW Limit Input Sig pulse output 0 which is used in the nal Flag origin search To use this signal write the input from
303. d 1 24VIN 2 Orange Black 1 RUN 3 Gray Red 1 RESET 4 Gray Black 1 ECRST VSEL2 5 White Red 1 GSEL VZERO TLSEL 6 White Black 1 GESEL VSEL1 7 Yellow Red 1 NOT 8 Yellow Black 1 POT 9 Pink Red 1 ALM 10 Pink Black 1 INP TGON 11 Orange Red 2 BKIR 12 Orange Black 2 WARN 13 Gray Red 2 OGND 14 Gray Black 2 GND 15 White Red 2 A 16 White Black 2 A 17 Yellow Black 2 B 18 Yellow Red 2 B 19 Pink Red 2 Z 20 Pink Black 2 Z 21 Orange Red 3 Z 22 Gray Red 3 CW PULS FA 23 Gray Black 3 CW PULS FA 24 White Red 3 CCW SIGN FB 25 White Black 3 CCW SIGN FB 26 Orange Black 3 FG 10126 3000PE Connector Plug 3M 10326 52AD 008 Connector Plug 3M AWG24 x 13P UL20276 Cable Each twisted pair has wires of the same color and number of marks R7A CPZLILILIS Cables for SmartStep J unior Servo Drives No Wire mark colors Symbol 1 Orange Red CW PULS 2 Orange Black CW PULS 3 Light gray Red CCW SIGN 4 Light gray Black CCW SIGN 5 White Red 24VIN 6 Yellow Black RUN 7 White Black OGND 8 Pink Red ECRST 9 Pink Black ECRST 10 Orange Red Z 11 Orange Black ZCOM 12 Light gray Red ALM 13 Light gray Black BKIR 14 Yellow Red INP CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs f Executing Pulse Control Instructions in a Ladder Program The pulse outputs are used b
304. d pulse direction output method 0100 l Precautions for Correct Use Limit Sensor Application Create a program that can identify the limit sensor when using the origin search The OUT instruction is used in the ladder program to write signals received from the CW limit sensor and CCW limit sensor connected to normal inputs to the Auxiliary Area bits Normal input from CW CW Limit Input Signal limit sensor A540 08 or A541 08 Normal input from CCW CCW Limit Input Signal limit sensor A540 09 or A541 09 Bits Written in the Auxiliary Area Auxiliary Area z Name Word Bit A540 08 Pulse Output 0 CW Limit Input Signal Signals received from external sen 09 Pulse Output 0 CCW Limit Input Signal S S connected to normal inputs must be written to the Auxiliary Area A541 08 Pulse Output 1 CW Limit Input Signal pits in the user program 09 Pulse Output 1 CCW Limit Input Signal 12 24 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 5 Origin Search Operations i Operating Mode The operating mode parameter specifies the kind of I O signals that are used in the origin search uonisod uibuo 6uiuged p ZT 1 0 signal Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Driver Stepping motor Servomotor Operation Origin Input Inputs signals are arranged Even if an Origin Input Signal is received during Signal so deceleration starts when deceleration it is ignored After the motor has the Origin P
305. d set reset operations Yes Yes No Changing timer counter PV Yes Yes No Change I O memory PV Yes Yes No i The Retaining of I O Memory When Changing the Operating Mode Non retained areas Retained areas Mode changes I O bits Serial PLC Link Words Work bits Timer PV Completion Flags Data Registers Auxiliary Area bits words are retained or not retained depending on the address Holding Area DM Area Counter PV and Completion Flags Auxiliary Area bits words are retained or not retained depending on the address RUN or MONITOR to Cleared Retained PROGRAM PROGRAM to RUN or Cleared Retained MONITOR RUN to MONITOR or Retained Retained MONITOR to RUN The data is cleared when the IOM Hold Bit is OFF The outputs from the Output Units will be turned OFF when a fatal error is occurred regardless of the status of the IOM Hold Bit and the status of the output bits in CPU Unit s I O memory is retained Refer to Section 5 I O Memory for details on the I O memory CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 CPU Unit Operation 3 2 Backing Up Memory This section describes backing up the CP1E CPU Unit memory areas 3 2 1 CPU Unit Memory Configuration Data backup to the CP1E CPU Unit s built in RAM memory describes as below Ladder programs and PLC Setup Automatically backed up to the built in EEPROM whenever changed Mowe dn Buppeg Z DM Area in the I O
306. data 32 bits Dd 1st Dividend word Dr 1st Divisor word R 1 I Result stresultword R 1 R floating point data 32 bits A 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function FLOATING LD AND or OR Using LD Compares the specified single precision data 32 bits or con SYMBOL m i stants and creates an ON execution condition if the comparison COMPARISON result is true F lt gt F lt F Haus lt F gt F or gt F LD connection ON execution condition when comparison result is true F i 1 i S2 RENE ON execution condition when AND connection comparison result is true Using OR E m F i i tows dee NE bol opti i i i ymbol option 1 i S2 i aL MEL OR connection S1 Comparison data1 Pins Betas ceu duce ta S2 Comparison data 2 m P r_ lt F a _ 2 ON execution condition when comparison result is true FLOATING FSTR Converts the specified single precision floating point data 32 bit POINT TO FSTR 448 decimal point or exponential format to text string data ASCII and ASCII outputs the result to the destination word C First Control Word D 0 hex Decimal format 1 hex Scientific notation S 1st source word C Control word 2 to 18 hex 2 to 24 characters see note D Destination word 0 to 7 hex see note Note There are limits on the total number o
307. data Inputs 4 RS RTS Requestto send Outputs 4 RS RTS Requestto send Outputs 5 CS CTS Clear to send Inputs 5 CS CTS Clear to send Inputs 6 5V Power 6 5V Power 7 DR DSR Dataset ready Inputs 7 NC 8 ER DTR Data terminal Outputs 8 NC ready 9 SG 0V Signal ground x SG 0V Signal ground nen FG E l FG Frame ground Option board 1 port N30 40 60 NA20 CPU Unit only The following option boards can be mounted RS 232C Option Board CP1W CIFO1 RS 422A 485 Option Board CP1W CIF11 12 Ethernet Option Board CP1W CIF41 Cannot be mounted There is no slot for an option board Built in RS 485 port None 1 port N30 40 60S1 CPU Unit only With 2 wire connections it can only com municate in half duplex Terminating resistance ON OFF can be set by DIP switch COM allocation Transistor outputs only 1 6 CIO 100 00 and CIO 100 00 correspond with different common terminals NC COM COM COM 03 y CIO 100 00 and CIO 100 01 are different COM CIO 100 00 and CIO 100 00 correspond with the same common terminal CIO 100 00 and CIO 100 01 are the same COM CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 Overview nal power supply when using terminals 00 Transistor outputs and 01 on terminal block CIO 100 Do not m 1 z Function N NALILI type NLILIS 1 type 3 Power supply for tr
308. data Start code End code Data PLC gt Execution 256 bytes Yes 00 to FF Yes 00 to FF transmission External of TXD in hex hex or CR LF device the ladder No None No None The program amount of data to receive is specified between 1 and Data External Execution 256 bytes 256 bytes when reception device gt of RXD in PLC tha ladder no end code is pistas specified program Other functions Send delay time delay between TXD execution and sending data from specified port 0 to 99 990 ms at the minimum unit 10 ms Controlling RS and ER signals Monitoring CS and DR signals Note 1 Because the built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit uses 2 wire connections so it can only communicate in half duplex Communications are not possible in full duplex 2 DR and ER signals are not supported by the built in RS 232C port on the NOOS 1 type CPU Unit 14 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 3 2 Flow of Operation 1 mE Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and external device using 2 Select Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the PLC Setup PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit Set the serial communications mode to RS 232C and set the communications conditions Create Cyclic tasks PLC to External device Execute the TXD instruction ladder External device to PLC Execute the RXD instruc
309. dbus RTU Easy Master communications CP series PLC or CJ1M PLC Serial PLC Links Host computer A Programming Device cannot be connected Host Link 14 2 Standard built in RS 232C port onua vunni no eoeu purt Q N14 20 or N30 40 60S CPU Unit One Option Board for serial communications CP1W CIF01 RS 232C Option Board CP1W CIF11 RS 422A 485 Option Board or CP1W CIF12 RS 422A 485 Option Board can be mounted in the option slot Standard built in RS 232C port 9 6 SE nrbes saTTERY a e e fl 00000 cogooo r3aExDna tam mp ld ao 9 EX WT te WU l N30 40 60S 1 CPU Unit Built in RS 485 port N30 40 6081 only Connected devices NS series PT or NP series PT B C General component No protocol communications Inverter Modbus RTU Easy Master communications Serial PLC Links Host computer A Programming Device cannot be connected Host Link Serial PLC Links cannot be used on two ports at the same time CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 1 2 Overview of Serial Communications 14 Serial Communications The CP
310. dition a is ON WO is Wi incremented NEXT Returns to FOR CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 21 4 Understanding Programming 4 6 4 6 1 Special Program Sections Ladder Programming Precautions For CP1E CPU Units programs have special program sections that will control instruction conditions The following special program sections are available Program sections Subroutine sections Instructions SBS SBN and RET instruc Instruction conditions Subroutine program Status The subroutine program tions is executed section between SBN and RET instructions is exe cuted IL ILC sections IL and ILC instructions During IL The output bits are turned Step ladder sections STEP instructions OFF and timers are reset Other instructions will not be executed and previous sta tus will be maintained FOR NEXT sections FOR and NEXT instructions Break in progress Looping f Instruction Combinations The following table shows which of the special instructions can be used inside other program sections Subroutine IL ILC MILH and Stepladder FOR NEXT A MILR MILC A sections sections sections sections sections Subroutine sections No No No No No IL ILC sections Yes No No No Yes MILH and MILR MILC sections Yes No Yes No Yes Step ladder sections No Yes Yes No No FOR NEXT sections Yes Yes Yes No Yes i Subroutines Place all the su
311. ducts as it deems proper for protection against nor mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Omron s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron or such other period expressed in writing by Omron Omron disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL 14 15 16 17 18 ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth erwise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Omron s sole obli gation hereunder shall be at Omron s election to i replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer respon
312. e High speed counter 0 Select Use Check CTBL 0000 0 to 15 Specified by High speed counter 1 Hox 0001 user High speed counter 2 0002 High speed counter 3 0003 High speed counter 4 0004 High speed counter 5 0005 High speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units H Precautions for Correct Use A built in input cannot be used as a normal input interrupt input or quick response input if it is being used as a high speed counter input Refer to 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals for details CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 15 11 High speed Counters i PLC Setup Click the Built in Input Tab and select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high speed counters 0 to 5 and then set the counting mode reset method and input setting PLC Settings NewPLC1 E Agtxl File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Pot Serial Option Port Built in Input Puk STi High Speed Lounter U IV Use high speed counter 0 Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode ear mode lar mode Circular Max Count Circular Max Count Reset Z phase software reset v Reset hase software rese Input Setting Ditferential phaseinput Input Setting Differential phase ir High Speed Counter 2 Use pet i High Speed Lounter 1 Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode Lir High Speed Counter 3 Jail th sf unte Counting mode Line
313. e Device Name OK Button NewPLC1 The Change PLC Dialog Box will Device Type close and the Main Window will be cP1E displayed for a new project E aA r ureJBo4g 4eppe e Bunindu 1 81 E r Cancel Help EN Additional Information If USB is not displayed for the network type refer to 4 2 2 Installing the USB Driver in the CP 1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 and check that the USB driver has been installed correctly CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 9 18 Programming Device Operations I Entering NO and NC Input Conditions For a NO input condition using the LD instruction press the L or C Key and select LD For an OR input condition press the O or W Key and select OR For a NC input condition press the L or Key and then select LD NOT For an OR NOT input condi tion press O or X and select OR NOT Press the Enter Key and then enter the address e inputting a NO Input Condition 1 Press either the L or C Key LD 0 0 00 will be displayed 2 Press the Enter Key Bit 1 1 will be displayed and Lb 0 00 will be displayed in reverse video 0 00 Ausiliary Relay Area 3 If the address is not CIO 0 00 input j the correct address from the key board For example input 0 02 Lp 0 02 To select an Auxiliary Area bit press the Down Cursor Key to move the cursor to the Auxiliary Area List LO Sai press the Enter Key and then sel
314. e Function when power is 15 0 hex Default Host column turned ON Link 2 hex NT link 1 N 3 hex Non protocol 5 hex Host Link 7 hex Serial PLC Link Slave 8 hex Serial PLC Link Master 9 hex Modbus RTU Easy Master A640 00 Built in RS 232C Port Turn ON this bit to send a command Turned ON Execu Retained Cleared DM Area Modbus RTU Easy and receive a response for the built in tion started words for Master Execution Bit RS 232C port using the Modbus RTU ON Execution in built in CP1E N NA IH S easy master function progress RS 232C type CPU Unit only port Note This bit will be turned OFF auto OFF Not executed Modbus matically by the system when or execution com RTU communications have been com pleted Easy pleted Master 01 Built in RS 232C Port ON when one command has been ON Execution nor Retained Cleared D01200 Modbus RTU Easy sent and the response received for mal to Master Normal End the built in RS 232C port using the OFF Execution error D01299 Flag CP1E Modbus RTU easy master function or still in progress N NA LILI S type i CPU Unit only 02 Built in RS 232C Port ON when an error has occurred in ON Execution error Retained Cleared Modbus RTU Easy communications for the built in FF E fe Master Error End Flag RS 232C port using the Modbus RTU M ee CP1E N NALILI S easy master function progress type CPU Unit only The error code is output to D01252 in t
315. e INT function extracts an integer from the fraction The non integer remainder is rounded CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs e Differences between Set Frequencies and Actual Frequencies Source clock frequency 32 MHz syndino easing Bursp usum suonne2aud 8 ZT Set frequency kHz Actual frequency kHz 99 844 to 100 000 100 000 99 534 to 99 843 99 688 50 040 to 50 117 50 078 49 961 to 50 039 50 000 49 884 to 49 960 49 921 10 002 to 10 004 10 003 9 999 to 10 001 10 000 9 996 to 9 998 9 996 i Combinations of Pulse Control Instructions The following tables show when a second pulse control instruction can be started if a pulse control operation is already being executed A second independent mode positioning instruction can be started if an independent mode positioning instruction is being executed and a second continuous mode speed control instruction can be started if a continuous mode speed control instruction is being executed Operation cannot be switched between the independent and continuous modes although a PLS2 instruction can be executed while a ACC instruction continuous mode is being executed It is possible to start another operation during acceleration deceleration and start another positioning instruction during positioning e Can be executed x Error occurs Instruction being started A SPED SPED ACC ACC Insmuconibeing exe
316. e PLC Setup to set the maximum ring count Circular Max Count which is the maximum value of the input pulse counting range The maximum ring count can be set to any value between 0000 0001 and FFFF FFFF hex 1 to 4 294 967 295 decimal M Precautions for Correct Use There are no negative values in Ring Mode f the maximum ring count is set to 0 in the PLC Setup the counter will operate with a maxi mum ring count of FFFF FFFF hex 11 2 3 Reset Methods It is called reset that a high speed counter s PV is set to O There are two reset methods Phase Z signal software reset software reset i Phase Z Signal Software Reset The high speed counter s PV is reset when the phase Z signal reset input goes from OFF to ON while the corresponding High speed Counter Reset Bit A531 00 to A531 05 is ON The CPU Unit recognizes the ON status of the High speed Counter Reset Bit only at the beginning of the PLC cycle during the overseeing processes Consequently when the Reset Bit is turned ON in the ladder program the phase Z signal does not become effective until the next PLC cycle One cycle Ge a i i 1 Phase Z p i 1 1 i JL i i Reset bit I PV not PV reset pV reset PV reset PV not reset PV Tesi reset Note The phase Z signal cannot be used if an incremental counter is specified Only a software reset can be used CP1E CPU Unit Software
317. e Pulses When operating with the absolute pulse specification the movement direction CW CCW is selected automatically based on the relationship between the pulse output PV when the instruction is executed and the specified target position The direction CW CCW specified in an ACC SPED or PLS2 instruc tion is not effective Using CW CCW Limit Inputs for Pulse Output Functions other than Origin Searches Pulse outputs will stop according to the PLC Setup when either the CW or CCW Limit Input Signals turns ON It is also possible to select whether or not the defined origin will be cleared when a CW or CCW Limit Input Signal turns ON for a pulse output function i Difference between Set Frequencies and Actual Frequencies The CP1E CPU Unit s pulse output frequency is determined by dividing the source clock frequency 82 MHz by an integer ratio Consequently there may be a slight difference between the set frequency and the actual frequency and that difference increases as the frequency increases The actual fre quency can be calculated from the following equations Pulse Output System Integer dividing ratio calculated from user s set frequency i L Output pulses actual frequency Source clock seu Frequency divider Equations Source clock frequency Dividing ratio Actual frequency Hz Dividing ratio INT seus clock frequency x 2 Set d Set frequency Hz x 2 Th
318. e User s Manual W480 Data links can be created for up to nine CP series or CJ1M CPU Units including one Poll ing Unit and up to eight Polled Units Up to 10 words can be shared per Unit Serial PLC Links OK OK 14 3 SUOQEIIUNLWILUOD Jeues T pT Ssuoneoiunuulo BAS JO MelIAJOAQ Z L vL 14 Serial Communications Connected devices Host computers Computer RS 232C Host Link Description PLC data can be read by the host computer or written to the PLC from the computer The host computer sends a Host Link command C Mode or a FINS command to the CPU Unit to read write I O memory change the operating mode or to force set reset bits in the CPU Unit A PT cannot be included in the Serial PLC Links Optional Communications Built in serial port protocol RS 232C or built in RS 485 Host Link OK OK Note Bulit in RS 485 on NLILIS 1 type CPU Units can only communicate in half duplex ER Additional Information Refer to A 3 Wiring for Serial Communications in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 for Serial communication wiring 14 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 2 Program free Communications with Programmable Terminals Programmable Terminal communications can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 2 1 Overview Communications without special communications
319. e data 0 C Temperature data 0 CIO 221 C Temperature data 1 Temperature data 1 C Temperature data 1 1 i i l CIO 289 Ladder Diagram Boiler A Boiler B Boiler C CP1E N type CPU Unit CP1E N type CPU Unit CP1E N type CPU Unit Polling Unit Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 P On P On P On L 4 XFER XFER XFER 2 2 2 2 2 2 200 210 220 Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to CIO 200 and CIO 201 using a BLOCK TRANSFER instruction CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to CIO 210 and CIO 211 using a BLOCK TRANSFER instruction Transfer CIO 2 and CIO 3 to CIO 220 and CIO 221 using a BLOCK TRANSFER instruction 14 Serial Communications 14 6 Connecting the Host Computer Host computers can be connected using this method only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit 14 6 1 Overview Commands are sent from a host computer to the CP1E CPU Unit to read and write data The serial communications mode is set to Host Link Note Because the built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit uses 2 wire connections so it can only com municate in half duplex Communications are not possible in full duplex Command flow Command type d Configuration Ap
320. e following I O memory area will be unstable after a power interruption DM Area D excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM function Holding Area H Counter Present Values and Completion Flags C Auxiliary Area related to clock functions A Mount the CP1W BATO1 Battery sold separately to an N INALIDI S type CPU Unit if data in the above areas need to be retained after a power interruption A Battery cannot be mounted to an ELILI S type CPU Unit Mo9I JO O 3EdO T T CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 3 1 Overview 1 2 Basic Operating Procedure In general use the following procedure 1 Setting Devices and Hardware Y Connect the CPU Unit Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units Set the DIP switches on the Option Board and Expansion Units as required Refer to Section 3 Part Names and Functions and Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 2 Wiring S Wire the power supply I O and communications Refer to Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP 1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 3 Connecting Online to the PLC Connect the personal computer online to the PLC Refer to Section 4 Programming Device in the CP 1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 4 I O Allocations Allocations for built in I O on the CPU Unit are predetermined and memory is allocated autom
321. e indicator is lit If the power supply to the PLC is turned OFF while the BKUP indicator is lit data will not be backed up In this case the DM Backup Restore Failed Flag A751 11 will turn ON when the power supply is turned ON again Therefore the backup data will not be restored to the DM Area Transfer the data from the CX Programmer to the DM Area again H Precautions for Correct Use To prevent operation from starting if the DM backup data is not restored correctly when the power supply is turned ON insert the following instructions into the ladder program to gener ate a fatal error A751 11 Generates a user defined fatal error DM Backup Restore Failed Flag To ensure concurrency between DM backup data and the contents of the DM Area in the RAM use exclusive processing in the ladder program so that contents of the DM Area words in the RAM that are set to be backed up are not changed during a backup operation uon2ung dr j eg Wd 9T DM Backup Save Flag A751 14 DM Area words that are set to be backed up will not be changed during a backup operation to ensure concurrency between DM backup data and words in the DM Area in the RAM Programming to change the contents of DM Area words that are set to be backed up Data can be written up to 100 000 times to the built in EEPROM backup memory Data cannot be written once this limit is exceeded If writing fails A315 15 Backup Memory Error Flag
322. e possible This problem will not occur for current inputs even if the same power supply is used Note When external power is supplied when setting the range code or when there is a power interruption pulse form analog output may be generated If this causes problems with operation take countermeasures such as those suggested below 1 Countermeasure 1 Turn ON the power supply for the CP1E CPU Unit first and then turn ON the power supply for the load after confirming correct operation Turn OFF the power supply for the load before turning OFF the power supply for the CP1E CPU Unit 2 Countermeasure 2 Control the machine notonly by analog output but also by other signals additional start stop control sig nal for machine CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Analog I O Function i Writing the Ladder Program e Reading A D Conversion Values CP 1E NA type CPU Unit Ladder program Analog input device e Temperature sensor e Pressure sensor e Speed sensor MOV MOV instruction Analog input 0 conversion value CIO 90 gt Analog input 1 conversion value CIO 91 e Flow sensor e Other device Read conversion value e Writing D A Conversion Values CP1E NA type CPU Unit M Q L GL Ladder program MOV MOV instruction Analog output device e Adjustment equipment e Servo Controller e Inverter p Analog
323. e serial option port or ON Able to send Retained Cleared Written after Built in RS 485 Port built in RS 485 port is able to send OFF Unable to send transmission Send Ready Flag data in no protocol mode No protocol Mode CP1EN30 40 60 SD or NA20 CPU Unit only 14 Serial Option Port ON when the serial option port or ON Reception com Retained Cleared Written after Built in RS 485 Port built in RS 485 port has completed the pleted reception Reception Completed reception in no protocol mode OFF Reception not Flag No protocol When the number of bytes was completed mode CP1E specified ON when the specified N30 40 60 SL1 or number of bytes is received ee eh Unitn When the end code was specified ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are received 15 Serial Option Port ON when a data overflow occurred dur ON Reception com Retained Cleared Built in RS 485 Port ing reception through serial option port pleted Reception Overflow or built in RS 485 port in no protocol OFF Reception not Flag No protocol mode completed mode CP1E When the number of bytes was N30 40 60 SL1 or specified ON when more data is NA20 CPU Unit only received after the reception was completed but before RXD was exe cuted When the end code was specified ON when more data is received after the end code was received but before RXD was executed ON when 257 bytes are received before the end code CP1E CPU Uni
324. e the correspond ing interrupt task f you shorten the scheduled interrupt interval and increase the execution frequency of the scheduled interrupt task the cycle time will increase and this will affect the execution timing of cyclic tasks f an interrupt task is being executed for another interrupt input interrupt or high speed counter interrupt when the scheduled interrupt occurs the scheduled interrupt will not be exe cuted until the other interrupt task had been completed Even in this case measurement of internal timer is continually executed in parallel so the exe cution of scheduled interrupt tasks will not be delayed Scheduled interrupt interval cannot be changed during the startup of scheduled interrupt Change the interval after the scheduled interrupt has stopped 10 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts 10 4 Precautions for Using Interrupts 10 4 1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution The priority of interrupt tasks is the same order for input interrupts scheduled interrupts and high speed counter interrupts Therefore if interrupt task A an input interrupt for example is being executed when interrupt task B a scheduled interrupt for example occurs task A execution will not be interrupted Task B execution will be started when task A had been completed For example if an interrupt task is being executed for another interrupt input interrupt or high speed counter inte
325. e time exceeds the maxi OFF Cycle time Cleared Cleared Refreshed PLC Flag mum cycle time set in the PLC Setup under max when the cycle Setup fatal error the cycle time monitoring time CPU ON Cycle time over time exceeds Cycle Unit operation will stop and the max maximum time mon ERR ALM indicator on the front of the itoring CPU Unit will light time A 66 Note This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Address Words Bits A401 09 Program Error Flag fatal error Function ON when program contents are incor rect CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light The task num ber where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 The type of program error that occurred will be stored in A295 08 to A295 15 Refer to the description of A295 for more details on program errors Settings ON Error OFF No error Status after mode change Cleared Status at startup Cleared Appendices Write timing Refreshed when error occurs Related flags settings A294 A295 A298 and A299 11 Too Many I O Points Flag fatal error ON when the number of Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units exceeds the limit when the number of words allocated to these Units exceeds the limit are mounted
326. e up to approx 115 days for TIML BCD and 49 710 days for TIMLX Binary D2 ioari ON SSeS eR a e RS D2 Timer input OFF m SV eee Iu D1 Completion Flag Timer Ev D2 PV word S SV word omma eter TIMLX N Completion Flag ON TIMLX Binary Bit 00 of D1 OFF 4 l D1 D1 Completion Flag D2 PV word S SV word COUNTER CNT Count owr CNT CNTX 546 operates a decrementing counter The setting BCD input CNT range for the set value SV is 0 to 9 999 for CNT BCD and 0 to 65 535 for CNTX Binary s Reset i ON input Count input OFF N Counter number ON S Set value Reset input ae CNTX Binary pount xi input Iw Counter PV au E bend ED ON ag OFF N Counter number S Set value CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function REVERSIBLE CNTR heeren CNTR 012 CNTRX 548 operates a reversible counter COUNTER BCD input CNTR 012 Decrement i input FH F1 Reset Increment input 4 FA input i pog H N Counter number i E F S Set value Decrement input 1 i Counter PV ONIRA x Increment Binary input CNTRX 548 Decrement Se 5 y T input Counter PV S Reset input i ES ane ee J N Counter number i S Set value i i ON Completion Flag OFF Sy ose rerasseserer 1 Counter
327. e width must be longer than the cycle time Input response time _ Input response time Inputs l O refresh CPU Unit e PLC Setup Name Description Input Constant Settings Input Constants Note The input constants of CP1W 40EDR EDT EDT1 are always 16ms regardless of the settings CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Pulses shorter than the input response time are not received Inputs i l O refresh CPU Unit 00 hex 10 hex 12 hex 13 hex 14 hex 15 hex 16 hex 17 hex Setting 8ms No filter 0 ms 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms Default 00 hex 8 ms A 81 BS UeULIOL ed esuodsey v awl asuodsay O I L V Appendices A 3 2 Interrupt Response Time Interrupt Response Time for Input Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time for input interrupt tasks is the time taken from when a built in input has turned ON or OFF until the input interrupt task has actually been executed The length of the interrupt response time for input interrupt tasks depends on the total of the hard ware interrupt response time and software interrupt response time Item Interrupt response time Counter 0 1 2 interrupts Counter 3 4 5 interrupts Hardware interrupt Upward differentiation 50 us response time Downward differentiation 50 Hs Software interrupt Minimum 70 us Minimum 120 us Minimum 150 us response time Maximum 1
328. each Task lle elles 10 13 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 1 10 Interrupts 10 1 Interrupts 10 1 1 Overview CP1E CPU Units normally repeat processes in the following order overseeing processes program exe cution I O refreshing peripheral servicing During the program execution stage cyclic tasks ladder programs are executed The interrupt function on the other hand allows a specified condition to interrupt a cycle and execute a specified program Interrupts can thus be used to perform high speed processing that is not restricted by the cycle time The CP1E performs the following processing when an interrupt occurs 1 When an interrupt occurs execution of the ladder programs in cyclic tasks is interrupted 2 The ladder program in the interrupt task is executed 3 When the interrupt task is finished the ladder program that was being executed is returned to Cyclic tasks ladder programs Cycle END 2 Interrupt task executed Ladder program 1 Interrupt occurs ibis END 3 When the interrupt task is finished I O refreshing the ladder diagram that was being executed is returned to i Interrupt Factors and Types of Interrupts Interrupts are classified by the interrupt factor There are the following three types of interrupts Changes in status of built in inputs on the CPU Unit gt Input Interrupts in Page 10 3 Specifi
329. ead using instructions such as the LD instruction Example Setting IN2 to Quick in the PLC Setup Interrupt Settings Even if the signal that is input to terminal 02 on terminal block OCH is shorter than the cycle time the signal will be latched in one cycle and the status will be stored in CIO 0 02 0 02 The minimum pulse width ON time that can be read for a quick response input is 50 us The status of the input that is stored in the I O memory for a short input will be cleared during the next I O refresh period CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Interrupts IEEE This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP1E PLCs including input interrupts and scheduled interrupts LO LinterruptS wo cece cece eee 10 2 10 1 1 OVERVIEW c eds ved Atel ee Rit ee eh HERE 10 2 10 2 Input Interrupts 2 c ccc 10 3 10 231 QOverview wee ee ian Qe Ae b Re De da REG D E 10 3 10 2 2 Flow of Operation seseseseeee e n 10 4 10 23 Application Example sseeeee BB 10 7 10 3 Scheduled Interrupts 0 0ce cece cece eee 10 10 10 3 1 Overview 3 5 0 et eee So ee ee ee 10 10 10 3 2 Flow of Operation 0 00 cette 10 11 10 4 Precautions for Using Interrupts seen nnn n nnn 10 13 10 4 1 Interrupt Task Priority and Order of Execution 0 0000 10 13 10 4 2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits 0 00 eee eee eee 10 13 10 4 3 Duplicate Processing in
330. earn the hard Describes the following information for CP1E CP1E CPU Unit Hard CP1E NOOSODD ware specifications PLCs ware User s Manual CP1E EOODO of the CP1E PLCs Overview and features CP1E NOODO I Basic system configuration CP1E NALIEIDEI Part names and functions Installation and settings Troubleshooting Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual Cat No W480 and Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 SYSMAC CP Series W483 CP1E ELILISDLT I To learn program Describes each programming instruction in CP1 E CPU Unit Instruc CP1E NOOSODLD ming instructions in detail tions Reference Manual CP1E EOODo detail When programming use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Man SEE ual Cat No W480 CP1E NALILIDLI CS CJ CP NSJ Series W342 CS1G H CPULILIH To learn communica Describes Communications Com CS1G H CPUOL V1 tions commands for 4 C moge commands and mands Reference Man CS1D CPU H CS CJ CP NSJ 2 FINS commands in detail ual series Controllers in i CS1D CPULILIS detail Read this manual for details on C mode and CS1W SCUDLLV1 FINS commands addressed to CPU Units CS1W SCBLILI V1 Note This manual describes commands addressed to CPU Units It i does not cover commands addressed to other Units or ports e g CJ1G H CPULILIH T ue serial communications ports on CPU Units communications ports CJ1G CPU P on Serial Communications Units Boards and other Commu
331. ect 0 00 a bit from the list Auxiliary Relay Area Condition Flag or previously regis Address Name Comment tered Auxiliary Area bit 0 CF113 P_On Always ON Flag y 1 CF114 P ff Always OFF Flag 2 CF102 P 1s 1 0 second clock p 3 CF103 P 0 02s 0 02 second clock 4 CF100 P D 1s D 1 second clock p 5 CF101 P 2s 0 2 second clock p B CF104 P 1min 1 minute clock puls 7 CFOOG P_EQ Equals EQ Flag 8 CFOO5 P_GT Greater Than GT 3 CFOO PLT Less Than LT Flag 4 Press the Enter Key I 0 02 This completes inputting the LD instruction 18 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations EN Additional Information The following instruction variations can be input Upward differentiation Downward differentiation 96 Immediate refreshing Example Immediate refreshing specified ITE 0 01 ILD ILDNOT The symbols indicating these instruction variations will be added to the beginning of the instruc tion whenever they are input regardless of whether the cursor is before example LD in the middle example L D or at the end example LD of the instruction After an instruction has been entered the variation can be changed as follows Upward differentiation 96 Downward differentiation Immediate refreshing Shift 0 No differentiation i inputting an OUTPUT Instruction To input an OUTPUT instruction press the O Key and s
332. ecution condition W0 00 turns ON the comparison starts with high speed counter 0 When the PV of high speed counter 0 reaches 30 000 cyclic task execution is interrupted and interrupt task 10 is executed When the PV of high speed counter 0 reaches 20 000 cyclic task execution is interrupted and interrupt task 11 is executed When interrupt task 10 or 11 execution has been completed execution of the interrupted cyclic task resumes CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 23 11 High speed Counters WO0 00 Upper limit 30 000 7530 Hex High speed counter 0 PV in A270 and A271 Lower limit 20 000 4E20 Hex 0 Counting enabled Cyclic task execution Processing interrupted Processing interrupted Cyclic task execution Interrupt task 10 execution Cyclic task execution Interrupt task 11 execution i Example 2 Range Comparison In this example high speed counter 1 operates in circular ring mode and starts interrupt task 12 when the PV is between 25 000 0000 61A8 hex and 25 500 0000 639C hex The maximum ring count is set to 50 000 0000 C350 hex 7 Set high speed counter 1 on the PLC Setup s Built in Input Tab Page Item Setting High speed counter 1 Use counter Counting mode Circular mode Circular Max Count 50 000 Reset method Software reset cont
333. ed intervals measured by internal timers PVs of high speed counter 10 2 Scheduled Interrupts in Page 10 10 High speed Counter Interrupts in Page 11 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts 10 2 Input Interrupts Input interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 10 2 1 Overview A corresponding interrupt task can be executed when a built in input on the CPU Unit turns ON or turns OFF Interrupt input Interrupt task Cyclic tasks ladder programs Interrupt occurs Ladder program Cycle END END I O refreshing Condition for _ pnmm accepting interrupt Example ClO 0 02 4 interrupt input IN2 i i MSKS instruction executed to enable the interrupt Processing interrupted Processing interrupted Cyclic task execution Cyclic task execution Interrupt task Interrupt task The pulse widths of interrupt input signals must meet the following conditions 50us min 50us min CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 3 sdnuau ndul z or M M AO L 2 0L 10 Interrupts 10 2 2 Flow of Operation Interrupt task Create ladder program Execute MSKS instruction in a cyclic task 1 H Precautions for Correct Use Set IN2 to IN7 for interrupt inputs on the Built in Input Tab Page of the PLC Setup using
334. eee A 50 A 1 23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions see A 51 A 1 24 Other Instructions 00 cece eee A 51 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address een A 52 A 2 1 Read only Words v octies kise bine aadi or ee A 52 A 2 2 Read Write Words 060 eee i a o eee A 70 Response Performance ccceeeee enar A 80 A 3 1 VO Response TIM cece ve ea Ae rene ei eid date ae A 80 A 3 2 Interrupt Response Time 0 0 eee eee ee A 82 A 3 3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance llus ee eeeeee A 83 A 3 4 Pulse Output Start Time 0 0 c eee tees A 84 A 3 5 Pulse Output Change Response Time 0 0c eee eee eee A 84 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions enn A 85 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 1 Appendices A 1 Instruction Functions The CP1E CPU Units support the following instructions Refer to the CP 1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 for details A 1 1 Sequence Input Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function LOAD LD l Bus bar Indicates a logical start and creates an ON OFF execution condi tion based on the ON OFF status of the specified operand bit Starting point of block LOAD NOT LD NOT I V e Bus bar Indicates a logical start and creates an ON OFF execution condi tion based on the reverse of the ON OFF status of the specified operand
335. eee enn n nmn 9 2 9 1 1 OVverVieWz iuc lr ete REPE en BUT ie cmd 9 2 9 1 2 Flow of Operation 0 0 0 cect tenes 9 3 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 9 1 9 Quick response Inputs 9 1 Quick response Inputs Quick response inputs can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 9 1 1 Overview The quick response inputs can read pulses with an ON time as short as 50 ys even if they are shorter than the cycle time Use the quick response inputs to read signals shorter than the cycle time such as inputs from photomicrosensors Pulse signal from photomicrosensor or other device I O refresh Cycle time mcd Input bit R Input bit LU wj ON for one scan in the next cycle Cyclic tasks ladder programs Cycle time Can read ON signals shorter than this time END I O refresh The pulse widths of quick response input signals must meet the following conditions 50us min 50us min 9 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 9 Quick response Inputs 9 1 2 Flow of Operation 1 Set IN2 to IN7 for quick response inputs on the Built in Input Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX Programmer The terminals 02 to 07 of CIO 0 can be used for quick response inputs Bits CIO 0 02 to CIO 0 07 correspond to ter minals 02 to 07 Read the status of CIO 0 02 to CIO 0 07 using
336. eeeneecensseeeestenaentes 11 13 11 3 High Speed Counter Interrupts 1 eren rennen nnne nnn nnn nnn nnns nnn nas 11 14 EE NEC MI MER 11 14 11 3 2 Present Value Comparison esses eene neret nennen nnne nennen nennen nnn 11 17 11 89 3 High speed Counter Interrupt Instruction 20 2 ee eee eeee cece teneeeeee teats teeeeeaeetaeeteaeeseeeeeeeteaeeeaeeeee 11 21 11 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words eere ener nnne nnns 11 26 11 5 Application Example 1er nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nnne nnns nuni n annuo nnn 11 27 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Section 12 Pulse Outputs 12 1 OVerViCW 12 2 1271 1 OVetvieW 3 etes dete tee ee at IO p Mon oet dire iet tetra a eee ae 12 2 12 1 2 Flow of Operation reet iter eT sheen ie eaten ee niin eine 12 4 12 1 3 Specificato nS mieis sasn re tec te etre dicet eee Hens an ea Eea Taia tede c anas etude 12 12 12 2 Positioning Control 11 eeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnn nnn nani nain nuu aea aia a suia uaa aia annua uana 12 13 12 2 1 Positioning Control Configuration sssssssseeeeneeeeennenneen nennen nenne 12 13 12 2 2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning ee 12 13 12 2 8 Application Example ecce recette cra co tete estes aces vere et eie cbe ede 12 15 12 3 J oggifig a nasa cri ua argon koc rd Tian nno or ud
337. efined position by origin searches or changing PVs An origin return operation moves the motor to the origin position from any other position The origin return operation is controlled by ORG The origin return operation returns the motor to the origin by starting at the specified speed accelerat ing to the target speed moving at the target speed and then decelerating to a stop at the origin posi tion Origin return target speed Origin return Pulse frequency A i deceleration rate Origin return acceleration p Origin return initial speed lime Start Stop Started by executing ORG PLC Setup The various origin return parameters are set on the Pulse Output 0 Tab Page in the PLC Setup Origin Return Parameters Name Setting Setting range Base Search Return Sets the motors starting speed when the 0 to 100k pps Settings Initial Speed origin return is executed Specify the speed in the number of pulses per second pps Origin Speed Sets the motor s target speed when the 1 to 100k pps Return origin return is executed Specify the speed in the number of pulses per second pps Acceleration Ratio Sets the motor s acceleration rate when the 1 to 65 535 Rate origin return function is accelerating Specify Hz 4ms the amount to increase the speed Hz per 4 ms interval Deceleration Ratio Sets the motor s deceleration rate when the 1 to 65 535 Rate origin return function is decelerating
338. efreshed A360 to non fatal error by executing FAL The CPU Unit will occurred when error A391 continue operating and the ERR ALM OFF FAL not exe occurs A400 indicator on the front of the CPU Unit cuted will flash The bit in A360 to A391 that corre sponds to the FAL number specified in FALS will be turned ON and the corre sponding error code will be written to A400 Error codes 4101 to 42FF corre spond to FAL numbers 001 to 2FF 0 to 511 Note This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared A403 00to Memory Error Location When a memory error occurs the ON Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401 15 08 Memory Error Flag A401 15 is turned OFF No error when error ON and one of the following flags is OCCUIS turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error occurred A403 00 Ladder program A403 04 PLC Setup When a memory error occurs the CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash Note The corresponding flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared 10 Backup Memory Error ON when the built in EEPROM backup ON Error Cleared Cleared Refreshed Flag memory is physically destroyed OFF No error when error is detected A404 I O Bus Error Details Contains information on I O bus errors 0A0A hex Expan Cleared Cleared Refreshed A401 14 The CPU Unit will stop operating and sion Unit error when error is the ERR ALM indicator on the front of detected the C
339. elect OUT To input an OUTPUT NOT instruction press the O or Q Key and then select OUT NOT Press the Enter Key and then enter the address wei6oldg ppe e Bunea 8r e Input Example 1 Press the O Key 0 OUT 100 00 will be displayed ureJBo4g 4eppe e Bumndul 1 81 ORNOT ORWw ORwL OUTNOT 2 Press the Enter Key t 0 02 An OUTPUT instruction will be dis played with 100 00 in reverse our MA video 100 00 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 11 18 Programming Device Operations 3 For an address other than CIO tom 7070 100 00 input the address from the keyboard Here 100 02 has been 4 aom input 4 Press the Enter Key dra e 10002 This completes inputting the OUT PUT instruction H Inputting Instructions A mnemonic can be entered directly as a character string When you enter the first letter a list of candidate mnemonics will be displayed Use the Up Cursor and Down Cursor Keys to move up and down through this list and then press the Enter Key to make a selection Then input the operands Example TIM Instruction 1 Press the T Key l 0 02 E A list of instructions beginning with T 100ms Timer Timer BCD Type will be displayed Ta TIM TCMP TIMH TIMHX TIML TIMLX TIMX TMHH TMHHX TPO TTIM 2 Press the Enter Key roo 0 f Timer number 1 2 will be dis A played and 0 will be displayed in Tw
340. endices Function Calculates the average value of an input word for the specified number of cycles S Source word _N Number of cycles R R 1 _ Pointer Average Valid Flag Average R 2 M R 3 N values R N 1 3 Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SUBROUTINE SBS Calls the subroutine with the specified subroutine number and CALL SBS 091 executes that program Execution condition ON N Subroutine number i 255 7 ei Y H sses H n f Main program B M SBN 3 L dn Subroutine A A program SBN 092 to RET 093 i mi RET Lr Program end L L me H SUBROUTINE SBN Indicates the beginning of the subroutine program with the speci ENTRY SBN 092 fied subroutine number N Subroutine number l SBS MCRO j i or s d m i Mitac sBN 1 amp Subroutine region RET t J SUBROUTINE RET Indicates the end of a subroutine program RETURN RET 093 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 35 suono ung uopnysul T Y suononjjsu eugnoJqng 94 L Y Appendices A 1 17 Interrupt Control Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SET INTER MSKS Sets up interrupt processing for I O interrupts or scheduled inter
341. er an operand has been input using the Com ment Dialog Box z z 4 LDO 01 ANS Comment 1 1 Comment Sample 1 Note The Comment Dialog Box shown above is displayed only when the Show with comment dialog Option is selected on the Options Diagrams Dialog Box The Options Diagrams Dialog Box is accessed by select ing Options from the Tools Menu 18 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations e inputting by Editing 1 0 Comments Multiple I O comments can be input or changed from an address list select Edit O Comment from the Edit Menu The I O Comment Editing Window will be displayed icon ends ASA ASST Sa pi oes ee ie S i E 9 a J r S i 3 u hennan EPE n 3 wo 45 EO S00 XX 25 2 3 2 Input I O comments or double click MM N the address for which the I O com SlatAddess o IDs Tease Address Symbol Comment We ments are to be changed Inputting the I O comment will be enabled so input the I O comment os swesBoldg Jappe Dunip3 e 8L CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 17 18 Programming Device Operations i Inputting Rung Comments Comments can be added to rungs in the program 1 Double click the header of the rung TE si LAMP Due to which a comment is to be arr attached CE The Rung Properties Dialog Box will j nemen fa be displayed 10 S
342. er error send Bits 08 to 14 DNA Check the command for failed Bits 00 to 07 DA mat and set the correct command data 0117 Internal buffers full Change the network so packet discarded that traffic is not concen trated 0123 Internal send buffers Change the network so E full packet discarded that traffic is not concen trated 0125 Time out error Resend the command 021A FLASH Logic error in setting 00 04 Unit Recreate the data speci Saved table Setup fied by the 2nd byte of the detailed error code 03CO FLASH FINS TCP setting 01 to 02 01 Set the FINS TCP error Connection No Automatically allo settings correctly cated FINS node address duplication 02 Destination IP address error 03 Destination port number error 03C2 FINS TCP packet 01 to 02 03 Resend the command discarded Connection No Reception There is too much load m an traffic on the Ethernet 17 34 Transmission error Option Board Correct the System so that traffic is not concentrated CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Error code 03C3 ERR LED FINS UDP Packet discarded Detailed error code 1st byte 00 2nd byte 01 to FE Node address 17 Ethernet Option Board Correction The automatic genera tion static method was used as the IP address conversion method so remote IP address infor mation in internal memory could not be changed
343. er is turned ON or the Ethernet Option Board restarted If the local IP address in the system setup is set to 0 0 0 0 this area will act as an IP address setting area The value will be read by the Ethernet Option Board when the power is turned ON or the Ethernet Option Board restarted and is used as the local IP address If the IP address for accessing the Ethernet Option Board through Web browser is forgotten find out it in this area Note When IP address in system setup area and DM area are all set to 0 0 0 0 the IP address will be 192 168 250 1 FINS node address 17 30 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 4 2 CIO Area Allocation 17 Ethernet Option Board The memory allocation about communication services status in the CIO area of PLC is shown as the following diagram The range of the CIO area is CIO80 to CIO82 Offset D15 DO CIO 80 Service Status CIO 81 Error Status CIO 82 FINS TCP Connection Status l Service Status 14 13 o o 15 sow TT Bit Name Unit operation 0 to 13 Reserved Always 0 14 Link Status 0 The link between hubs is terminated 1 A link is established between hubs 15 Reserved Always 1 M Precautions for Correct Use Bit 15 is used for detect power condition of PLC so do not change it at any time Otherwise the CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board will generate error CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 31 suone 2
344. er s Manual W480 18 21 18 Programming Device Operations 4 Click the Yes Button CXProgrammer v8 This command will affect the state of the connected PLC Do you wish to continue 5 Click the OK Button This completes transferring the lad der program Download Program Download to PLC NewPLC1 Download successful 18 4 4 Starting Operation To start operation turn ON the power or change the operating mode to RUN mode H Precautions for Correct Use Operation will not be started when the power is turned ON if the PLC Setup is set so that the PLC enters PROGRAM mode at startup Use the following procedure to change the operating mode to RUN mode To perform trial operation for debugging or adjustments change the operating mode to MONITOR mode Precautions for Safe Use Always confirm the safety of the controlled system before changing to MONITOR or RUN mode 18 22 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations 1 Select Operating Mode Run from CX P for Manual1 CX Programmer Stopped NewPLC1 NewProgram1 Section1 Diagram ED File Edit View Insert Program Eis Simulation Tools Window Help the PLC Menu Ded E X A5 BA ae B purius Ctr Ww eu P cy Auto Online E A dialog box to confirm changing the namas a 2P mme es am operating mode will be displayed R ES NewProject un Ctrl NowPLCi CPLE Stop Progray Online Edit COINMEKC
345. erations 18 3 Creating a Ladder Program This section describes the use of CX Programmer to create a ladder program 18 3 1 Inputting a Ladder Program This section shows how to input a ladder program for an example application using the CX Programmer commands i Creating a New Project To use the CX Programmer the first step is to create a new project To create a new project we must specify the PLC type and CPU Unit model for which the ladder program and data to be created will be used Select New tom te File Mo Change PLC Dialog Box will be dis View PLC Tools Help played N Ctr o 2 The CP1E will already be selected Change PLC as the Device Type Device Name NewPLC1 Device Type CP1E v Settings etwork ype fuss x Settings Comment Cancel Help 18 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations 3 Click the Settings Button The PLC Type Settings Dialog Box Device Name will be displayed NewPLC1 Device Type CP1E Network Type USB v Settings Comment OK Cancel Help 4 selecta CPU Unit model in the CPU Type box and then click the OK But ton The PLC Type Settings Dialog CPU Type Box will close ri no ri 4 r t E g i Timer Clock r f T flake Default g 3 5 Confirm that USB is displayed as Change PLC the network type and then click th
346. ersal Mode 2 Inverse 2 Origin search operation Origin detection metho 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal reversal required Reversal mode 2 Inverse 2 Origin Proximity 1 Input Signal 0 CO et 1 Origin Input Signal d Pulse output 1 ccw 7 CW 1 Start Stop 1 CCW lt T CW StoP cw Limit Input Signal See note Start COW CW Start Limit stop error code 0200 Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops without deceleration 1 Origin Proximity Input Signal A Origin Proximity reversal not required input Signal 1 i Origin Input Signal l i Pulse output i i CCW T gt CW Start Stop CCW 7 CW d CW Limit Input Signal See note CCW cw Start Limit stop error code 0200 Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops without deceleration 2 Origin Proximity Input Signal not used 1 Origin Input Signal 0 Proximity speed for origin search x Pulse output CCW gt CW Start Stop 1 COW gt CW Stop Start CW Limit Input Signal See note CCW gt CW without deceleration CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Start Limit stop error code 0201 Note When the Limit Input Signal is received the motor stops 12 31 uonisod uibuo buluysg p ZT suoiesado uojees ulbuO G r zL 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 6 Origin Return It is the function to move the origin to the d
347. eset Reset phase softwarereset speed Counter Input Setting al p i Y Input Setting erential phase ir Y High Speed Counter 2 High Speed Counter 3 IM Use high speed counter 2 Use high speed counter 3 Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Counting mode d Circular Max Count f0 Circular Max Count Reset Software reset ba Reset P Input Setting Increment pulse input pt Input Setting M High Speed Counter 4 High Speed Counter 5 Use high speed counter 4 Use high speed counter 5 Counting mode Linear Lj Counting mode L c Circular Max Count Circular Max Count Reset M Reset Input Setting E Input Setting E Interrupt Input IN2 3 E IN3 Normal IN4 Normal v INS Normal m ING Normal IN Normal E CP1E N40 Offline 8 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations The input and output terminals used by the origin search function can be enabled by selecting the Use define origin operation Check Box on a Pulse Output Tab Page a PLC Settings NewPLC1 E 101 xl Elle Options Help Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Builtin Input Pulse Output O Pulse Output1 4 Base Settings Undefined Origin Hold i Search Retum Initial Speed 0 z pps Limit Input Signal Operation Search Ony Select the U se d efin eo rig In Limit Input Signal NC operation Check Box Define Origin Operation Settings Or
348. esses or decelerating Cleared when operation starts or Stops OFF Constant speed ON Accelerating or decelerating 01 Pulse Output 1 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the pulse when the PV Flag output 1 PV is changed Cleared when operation starts by the INI OFF N i instruction Norma Refreshed ON Overflow or underflow when an overflow or underflow occurs 02 Pulse Output 1 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed Output Amount Set for pulse output 1 has been set with the when the Flag PULS instruction PULS Cleared when operation starts or instruction is stops executed OFF No setting sBefreshed when pulse ON Setting made output stops 03 Pulse Output 1 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed at Output Completed set with the PULS or PLS2 instruction the start or Flag has been output through pulse output completion of 1 pulse output Cleared when operation starts or stops OFF Output not completed ON Output completed 04 Pulse Output 1 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed Output In progress pulse output 1 when pulse Flag Cleared when operation starts or output starts or stops stops OFF Stopped ON Outputting pulses 05 Pulse Output 1 No ori ON when the origin has not been Cleared Refreshed gin Flag determined for pulse output 1 and goes each cycle OFF when the origin has been deter duri
349. et frequency acceleration deceleration rate and target position can be changed Duty factor Fixed at 5096 Pulse output method Pulse direction outputs CW CCW outputs cannot be used Number of output pulses Relative coordinates 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Accelerating or decelerat ing in either direction 2 147 483 647 Absolute coordinates 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Pulse output PV s relative absolute coordinate specifications Absolute coordinates are specified automatically when the origin location has been defined by setting the pulse output PV with the INI instruction or perform ing an origin search with the ORG instruction Relative coordinates are used when the origin location is undefined Relative pulse absolute pulse specifica tions The pulse type can be specified with an operand in the PULS or PLS2 instruc tion Note The absolute pulse specification can be used when absolute coordi nates are specified for the pulse output PV i e the origin location has been defined The absolute pulse specification cannot be used when rel ative coordinates are specified i e the origin location is undefined An instruction error will occur Pulse output PV s storage location 12 12 The following Auxiliary Area words contain the pulse output PVs Pulse output 0 A277 leftmost 4 digits and A276 rightmost 4 digits Pulse output 1 A279 leftmost 4 digits and A278 right
350. et val ram Sensum FYETE E iss 2 Input a comment into the Comment Rung Properties Field on the General Tab Page 4 General Annotations Rung Timer Delete 3 Close the Rung Properties Dialog mde Box ALARM 1 The input rung comment will be dis GEBEIZTIIINNINNININNINIMNNINNNIMMMMEM played in the ladder program D s EOE Set ve 18 18 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations 18 4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program This section describes how to make an online connection between the CX Programmer and the CP1E and then transfer a ladder program to the CP1E 18 4 1 Connecting Online To enable transferring programs from the CX Programmer to the CP1E it is first necessary to place the CX Programmer online with the CP1E Online is the state in which communications is possible between the computer and the CP1E CX Programmer CP1E 2 Select Work Online from the PLC Menu of the CX Programmer A dialog box to confirm going online Di up E pb E communication Settings 512 Work Online will be displayed a XQ Sri PSI 88 Auto onine amp m A EI ob s E Operating Mode gt E NewProject Transfer ff NewPLCI CP1E Offline Online Edit 3 Symbols Protection gt Es Settings AR Memory
351. eter word R Pulse output bit Function Inputs the duty ratio or manipulated variable from the specified word converts the duty ratio to a time proportional output based on the specified parameters and outputs the result from the spec ified output C First Parameter Word Bits 04 to 07 of C specify the input type i e whether the input word contains an input duty ratio or manipulated variable Set these bits to 0 hex to specify a input duty ratio or to 1 hex to specify a manipulated variable The following diagram shows the locations of the parameter data 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Manipulated variable range Input type Input read timing Output limit function C Control period C 2 Output lower limit C 3 Output upper limit C 4 Work area C 5 3 words cannot be used by user C 6 R Pulse Output Bit Specifies the destination output bit for the pulse output Normally specify an output bit allocated to a Transistor Output Unit and connect a solid state relay to the Transistor Output Unit SCALING A 32 SCL LR S Source word P1 1st parameter word R Result word Converts unsigned binary data into unsigned BCD data according to the specified linear function Scaling is performed according to the linear function defined by points A and B rome l P Ad 80D e Converted e P1 1 As BIN 7 value
352. ew rung at the bottom af the pragram section To enter elements in a new rung further up the program it is necessary to manually insert a new 2 Diagram rung into the ladder editar When the new rung 12 Insert Menu for Ladder Workspace 12 Inserting Ladder Program Elements 7 Ladder Diagram space has been placed elements contacts coils 7 Ladder Bieinm r and instructions may be entered 7 Dialog Ladder Rung E dit The Section Rung Manager can be used for easy 2 Line Connect manipulation and commenting of rungs Rung Comment Jounuei60Jd X 2 JO M9IAI9AO Z 9T I Accessing the CX Programmer Instruction Reference For an explanation of an instruction used in ladder programming refer to the CX Programmer Instruc tion Reference e Displaying the Instruction Reference from the Main Menu of the CX Programmer Select Instruction Reference CP1E from the Help Menu djeH z 8L The CX Programmer Instruction Reference Window will be displayed e Displaying the Instruction Reference while Creating a Ladder Program While creating an instruction in a ladder program in Smart Input Mode press the F1 Key to display the Instruction Reference page for the instruction being edited I Accessing the CP1E I O Memory Reference To check the CP1E I O memory address map from the CX Programmer select O Memory Reference from the Help Menu CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 7 18 Programming Device Op
353. f D1303 and D1304 in the PLC memory for the settings from the Web browser after connecting the CX Programmer online by USB CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 6 Connection Method with the CX Programmer The CX Programmer version 9 12 or higher can be connected online to the Ethernet Option Board with Ethernet The connection method shows below In the following example the Ethernet Option Board is connected without making any setting i Example A except 1 FINS node address 9 P Default 1 Display in Workstation Node Number on the Network Type Tab in CX Programmers Change PLC Dialog Box Auto generation in the CX Programmer Select Auto detect in Workstation Node Number Set to 192 168 250 A A is any value except 1 IP address p Default 192 168 250 1 Set IP address in Windows Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 4ounue4604d X D SU AM poussiy uon2 euuo 9 ZT Computer CX Programmer Ethernet Option Board Network type Ethernet pja Pll Ethernet Computer Ethernet Option Board 17 IP address 192 168 250 A 192 168 250 1 Set by manual on Windows Default Decision direction L T FINS node address A 1 Auto generation in the Default CX Programmer M Precautions for Correct Use Confirm the Communications Settings on the Serial
354. f characters and the number of fractional digits ASCII TO FVAL Converts the specified text string ASCII representation of sin FLOATING FVAL 449 gle precision floating point data decimal point or exponential for POINT mat to 32 bit single precision floating point data and outputs the S Source word D 1st destination word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 result to the destination words A 29 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononasu yew 1ujod Buneo 4 1 L1 v Appendices A 1 14 Table Data Processing Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function SWAP BYTES SWAP Switches the leftmost and rightmost bytes in all of the words in the SWAP 637 ran ge Byte position is swapped N Number of words R1 1st word in range N FRAME FCS Calculates the FCS value for the specified range and outputs the CHECKSUM FCS 180 result in ASCII RI D W Table length C First control word R1 First word in range D First destination word A ASCII conversion Calculation FCS value D 1 C First control word 15 0 W Number of words bytes in range amp 1 to amp 65535 decimal or 0001 to FFFF hex 15 14 13 12 11 0 C 00 0000 0000 0000 L_ 9 Starting byte Valid only when bit 13 is 1 0 Leftmost byte 1 Rightmost byte Calculation units 0 Words 1 Bytes A 30 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480
355. frequency tance posi Target i frequency tioning during operation i gt Time Execution of ACC continuous Execution of PLS2 Fixed dis Es ulse Trequenc tance feed Tn interrupt Present L 7 5 frequency i i gt Time Execution of ACC continuous Execution of PLS2 with the following settings Number of pulses number of pulses until stop Relative pulse specification Target frequency present frequency Acceleration rate Not 0 Deceleration rate target deceleration rate The starting frequency is ignored 12 56 Description PLS2 can be executed during a speed control operation started with ACC to change to position ing operation An error will occur if a con stant speed cannot be achieved after switching the mode If this happens the instruction execution will be ignored and the previous operation will be continued CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Procedure Instruction Settings ACC Port Continuous L PLS2 Acceleration rate Deceleration rate Target fre quency Number of pulses PWM Outputs This section describes the PWM Outputs variable duty factor pulse outputs 13 1 PWM Outputs Variable duty factor Pulse Outputs 13 2 18 1 1 Flow of Operation seeseseeeeeeee ee en 13 3 13 1 2 Ladder Program Example 0 c eee eee 13 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W4
356. ged to 1 1 Built in analog error CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Other Functions BE IIS This section describes PID temperature control clock functions DM backup functions security functions 16 1 PID Temperature Control 0cc cece cece eee n mmn 16 2 463124 OVERVIEW cuoi cre oe hes Ele rte ee ee dae oe 16 2 16 1 2 Flow of Operation eseseeseesee een 16 3 16 1 3 Application Example seeeeee BI 16 4 16 2 Clock i aiden evaded x ec xoa conce oe c ae ec n qe nan 16 7 16 3 DM Backup Function ccc cece eee enne 16 8 16 3 1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data 0 0002 16 8 16 3 2 Proced re isi oie eos led ht eat Goda padre eae cR SNO ORE OR RR ies 16 10 16 4 Security Functions cc cece eee eee 16 12 16 4 1 Ladder Program Read Protection 20 0 eee eee eee 16 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 1 16 Other Functions 16 1 PID Temperature Control PID temperature control can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 16 1 1 Overview The CP1E CPU Unit supports PID instructions with the autotuning function Ladder programs can be written to perform PID temperature control Temperature Input from Temperature Sensor Unit to words in the Input Area input PID control Execute using the PIDAT instruction in ladder program The PIDAT instruction is used in combination with the TPO instruction TIME PROPORT
357. get position Present position PV Number of pulses setting Origin Number of movement pulses Number of pulses setting Pulse output PV when instruction is executed The move ment direction is determined automati cally Pulse output PV when instruction is exe cuted Number of pulses setting Pulse output PV range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Number of pulses setting range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Precautions for Correct Use ky The absolute pulse cannot be specified with the origin undefined Please specify them when the iv origin is defined by performing the origin searches y o 2 A EN Additional Information The origin position is undefined in the following case Please define the origin position by per forming the origin searches again When the pulse output reset flag is turned ON When the RUN or MONITOR mode is changed to the PROGRAM mode S wo T 12 2 3 Application Example E S S i Specifications and Operation m 3 When the start input CIO 0 00 goes ON this example program outputs 600 000 pulses from pulse m output 1 to turn the motor rate 300Hz Ams Deceleration rate 200Hz Ams Number of output pulses Staring requency wot A HEN Start input 0 00 BEEN Applicable Instructions PLS2 I Preparations e PLC Setup There are no settings that need to be made in the PLC Setup
358. get value e f the PV is changed the changed PV will be compared with the target values in the table even if the PV is changed while the target value comparison operation is in progress l Precautions for Correct Use When the count direction incrementing decrementing changes at a PV that matches a target value or a count after a target value the next target value cannot be matched in that direction Set the target values so that they do not occur at the peak or trough of count value changes Bad OK Match Target value 1 Target value 2 Target value 1 Target value 2 Target value 1 Target value 2 Match Target value 1 Target value 4 2 The maximum response frequencies of the high speed counters are given in the following table nem ELILI S type CPU N NALILI S type Unit CPU Unit Incremental pulse 10kHz 100kHz Up and down pulses High speed counter 0 Pulse plus direction Differential phase x4 5kHz 50kHz Incremental pulse 10kHz 100kHz Up and down pulses 10kHz High speed counter 1 Pulse plus direction 100kHz Differential phase x4 5kHz 5kHz High speed counter 2 Incremental pulse 10kHz 10kHz High speed counter 3 Incremental pulse High speed counter 4 Incremental pulse High speed counter 5 Incremental pulse High speed counter 5 is not supported by E10 CPU Units 11 18 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480
359. gh speed Counters Internal Memory in the CPU Unit Pulse Gutputs CPU Unit Operation PWM Outputs Serial Communications Understanding Programming 1 0 Memory Analog I O Function 1 0 Allocation Other Functions E Ethernet PLC Setup Option Board dE Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations Programming Device Operations Quick response Inputs Appendices Interrupts CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 CONTENTS Introduction tiis nibo ap HUE AAINA ES KM IT OUENQRIO DP NEUDARS KR FULU SEO VALE CU HDD RETOUR CPIE CPU Unit Manuals sacos E rU RE CV d cu Y EROR RR UA RP ERN XVR ER CUN FE Ed Manual SUC OU eis ooo d n E WAR CEnH RE RAUS EYE EUR DURO ERE YOUR RA FEE V QUO Safety Precautions SUE RKIUEIE DES CURRERE DCED RA EBEN EE Vicensis cQ daanan 18 Precautions for Safe USB inianvieicQba adeb IP QURE UI IEEE EORR OV o is Fari idh de Regulations and Standards ees seen nnns 2 3 Related Mari als isis easi SE vkRE S ER CE PY ERES AR CER SUES aanas nadaira nananana V vr sMResMR CURIE amp Section 1 Overview T I CPIE OVervieW 1 2 1 1 1 Overview of Features a IRIS eaves aaaea a aa dine eee ee aed 1 2 1 2 Basic Operating Procedure qo eee nennen ne n a a i e i a nananana 1 4 1 3 Difference between E N NALTLI type and E NLILIS 1 type nennen 1 5 Section 2 Internal Memory in the C
360. gin Proximity Input Immediate stop Origin Proximity nal and the Limit Input Signal in Signal and the Limit Input Signal Also check Ni effect on other and Limit Inputs the search direction are being the PLC Setup s Origin Proximity Input Signal port input simultaneously during an Type and Limit Signal Type settings NC or origin search NO and then execute the origin search again Limit Input Sig 0205 When an origin search in one Check the wiring of the Limit Input Signal and Immediate stop nal Already direction is being performed the PLC Setup s I O settings Also check the No effect on other Being Input the Limit Input Signal is PLC Setup s Limit Signal Type setting NC or port already being input in the ori gin search direction When a non regional origin search is being performed the Origin Input Signal and the Limit Input Signal in the oppo site direction from the search direction are being input simultaneously CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 NO and then execute the origin search again 12 47 syndino easing Bursp usum suonne2aud 8 ZT BuipeeJ 1dnuiequ jeuere w BuiddejM DuipeeJ z zIL 12 Pulse Outputs Error Operation after Error name role Likely cause Corrective action TOR Origin Proximity 0206 When an origin search with Check the installation positions of the Origin Immediate stop Input Signal reversal at the limit is being Proximity Input Signal Origin I
361. gistered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other system names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 23 Related Manuals The following manuals are related to the CP1E Use them together with this manual Manual name Cat No Model numbers Application Contents SYSMAC CP Series W480 CP1E EOOSDO O To learn the software Describes the following information for CP1E CP1E CPU Unit Soft CP1E NOOsopo ee ee ofthe PLCs ware User s Manual P1E PLCs CPU Unit operation this manual Cee shin E CP1E NOODO O Internal memory CP1E NADODO Programming Settings CPU Unit built in functions Interrupts High speed counter inputs Pulse outputs Serial communications Analog I O function Other functions Use this manual together with the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 and Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 SYSMAC CP Series W479 CP1E ELILISDLI To l
362. gs Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Puk 4 gt Startup Data Read Startup Mode T Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT C Program The retained memory value becomes irregular C Monitor when running without battery Run Restore DO from backup memory Execute Process Number of CH of DM for backup 4 CH Stop CPU on Instruction Error Don t register FAL to error log E type Max 1500CH DO D1499 N type Max 7000CH DO D6999 Detect Low Battery CP1E N4D Offline 2 Turn ON A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit from the CX Programmer a Programmable Ter minal PT or a ladder program The specified number of words in the DM Area starting from DO will be backed up to the built in EEPROM backup memory Using a Ladder Program Execution condition A751 15 Execution Bit is turned ON to start backup DM Backup Save Start Bit One cycle DM Backup Save ON Start Bit A715 15 OFF DM Backup Save ON Flag A751 14 OFF A Backup started Backup finished When the saving operation has been completed A751 14 DM Backup Save Flag will turn OFF 16 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 Other Functions Precautions for Safe Use Power Interruptions during Backup The BKUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will be lit when DM Area data is being saved to the built in EEPROM backup memory Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while th
363. he CPU Unit the execution condition i e power flow flows from left to right and top to bottom The flow is different from that for circuits that consist of hard wired control relays For example when the diagram in figure A is executed by the CPU Unit power flows as though the diodes in brackets were inserted so that output R2 is not controlled by input condition D The actual order of execution is indicated on the right with mnemonics To achieve operation without these imaginary diodes the diagram must be rewritten Also the power flow in figure B cannot be programmed directly and must be rewritten Figure A Good example AD Signal flow p D Order of execution mnemonics RM fp que LD A AND B c Q G p YY LD C OUT R1 OUT TRO LD TRO amp AND D AND E EO NR OR LD OUT R2 R2 Ss der CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 3 4 Understanding Programming e Number of Times Bits Can be Used and Connection Method There is no limit to the number of I O bits work bits timers and other input bits that can be used Program structure should be kept as clear and simple as possible to make the programs easier to understand and maintain even if it means using more input bits There is no limit to the number of input conditions that can be connected in series or in parallel on the rungs Two or more OUT instructions can be connected in parallel
364. he DM fixed allocation words for Mod bus RTU Easy Master A641 00 Serial Option Port Turn ON this bit to send a command Turned ON Execu Retained Cleared DM Area Built in RS 485 Port and receive a response for the serial tion started words for Modbus RTU Master option port or built in RS 485 port ON Execution in built in Execution Bit CP1E using the Modbus RTU easy master progress RS 232C N30 40 60 SL1 or function port NA20 CPU Unit only OFF Not executed Modbus Note This bit will be turned OFF auto Or execution com RTU matically by the system when pleted Easy communications have been com Master pleted D01300 01 Serial Option Port ON when one command has been ON Execution nor Retained Cleared to Built in RS 485 Port sent and the response received for the mal D01399 Modbus RTU Master serial option port or built in RS 485 OFF Execution error Execution Normal port using the Modbus RTU easy or still in progress Flag CP1E master function N30 40 60 SL1 or NA20 CPU Unit only 02 Serial Option Port ON when an error has occurred in ON Execution error Retained Cleared Built in RS 485 Port Modbus RTU Master Execution Error Flag CP1E N30 40 60 SL1 or NA20 CPU Unit only A 76 communications for the serial option port or built in RS 485 port using the Modbus RTU easy master function The error code is output to D01352 in the DM fixed allocation words for Mod bus RTU Easy Master
365. he IOM Hold Bit A500 12 i e turn them ON at the same time ON Retained OFF Not retained Retained Not retained Refreshed when power is turned ON 14 Error Log Reset Bit Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer A300 to 00 Note 1 The contents of the Error Log Area itself A100 to A199 are not cleared 2 This bit is automatically reset to 0 after the Error Log Pointer is reset OFF to ON Clear Retained Cleared A100 to A199 A300 15 Output OFF Bit Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from the CPU Unit CP series Expan sion Units and CP series Expansion I O Units The INH indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light while this bit is ON Note This bit is cleared when the power supply is turned OFF Retained Cleared A508 09 Differentiate Monitor Completed Flag ON when the differentiate monitor con dition has been established during execution of differentiation monitoring Note This flag will be cleared to 0 when differentiation monitoring starts ON Monitor condi tion established OFF Not yet estab lished Retained Cleared Startup Time A 70 These words contain the time at which the power was turned ON The con tents are updated every time that the power is turned ON The data is stored in BCD A510 00 to A510 07 Second 00 to 59 A510 08 to A510 15 Minute 00 to 59 A511 00 to A511 07 Hour 00
366. he operation of CJP 510 is the basically the opposite of JUMP CJP 510 N Interlock number JMP 004 When the execution condition for CUP 510 is ON pro gram execution jumps directly to the first JME 005 in the program with the same jump number CJP 510 and JME 005 are used in pairs Execution condition Instructions in this section are not executed inari and out put ions Instructions gt Status is jumped maintained EX The instruction ecuted execution time i for these y instructions is eliminated JUMP END JME JME 005 N Interlock number Indicates the destination of a jump instruction FOR NEXT LOOPS FOR FOR 512 N Number of loops The instructions between FOR 512 and NEXT 513 are repeated a specified number of times FOR 512 and NEXT 513 are used in pairs FOR Repeated N times Repeated program section NEXT il BREAK LOOP BREAK BREAK 514 Programmed in a FOR NEXT loop to cancel the execution of the loop for a given execution condition The remaining instructions in the loop are processed as NOP 000 instructions N repetitions Condition a ON end Repetitions Mi forced to Processed as NOP 000 FOR NEXT LOOPS NEXT NEXT 513 The instructions between FOR 512 and NEXT 513 are repeated a specified number of times FOR 512 and NEXT 513 are used in pairs CP1E CPU Unit Software
367. he refresh method for counter PVs can be set from the CX Programmer to either BCD or binary Built in high speed counters 0 to 5 do not use counter numbers CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 15 5 I O Memory H Precautions for Correct Use It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are counting simultaneously If two or more counter instructions use the same counter number an error will be generated dur ing the program check Counter Example Counter Number 0 with a Counter Set Value of 10 BCD mode Counter Completion Flag CNT C000 000 Em 10 Binary mode CNTX esed Completion Flag 000 amp 10 or A e Resetting or Maintaining Counter PVs Counter Completion Flags can be force set and force reset Counter PVs cannot be force set or force reset although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force setting resetting the Counter Completion Flag There are no restrictions in the order of using counter numbers or in the number of N C or N O conditions that can be programmed Counter PVs can be read as word data and used in programming The following table shows when counters PVs are reset or maintained a CNT CNTX CNTR CNTRX Instruction COUNTER REVERSIBLE COUNTER PV and Counter Completion Flag when counter PV 0 is reset Counter Completion Flag OFF When the
368. he time that operation stopped as a result of changing the operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in BCD A518 00 to A518 07 Seconds 00 to 59 A518 08 to A518 15 Minutes 00 to 59 A519 00 to A519 07 Hour 00 to 23 A519 08 to A519 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A520 00 to A520 07 Month 01 to 12 A520 08 to A520 15 Year 00 to 99 Note 1 If an error occurs in operation the time of the error will be stored If the operating mode is then changed to PROGRAM mode the time that PROGRAM mode was entered will be stored 2 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged 3 In an ELILI S type CPU Unit or if the clock data is not set foran N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 Settings See at left Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Retained Write timing See at left Related flags settings A525 01 Ethernet Option Board Reset Flag Serial Option Port Turn ON this bit to reset the Ethernet Option Board mounted on the serial Option port OFF to ON Reset Retained Cleared 09 Ethernet Option Board Restart Flag Serial Option Port Turn ON this bit to restart Ethernet Option Board mounted on the serial Option port OFF to ON Restart Retained Cleared A526 00 Built in RS 232C Port Restart Bit CP1E N NA S type CPU Unit only T
369. hen pulses are Cleared Refreshed Accel Decel Flag being output from pulse output 0 each cycle according to an ORG ACC or PLS2 during the instruction and the output frequency is overseeing being changed in steps accelerating processes or decelerating Cleared when operation starts or stops OFF Constant speed ON Accelerating or decelerating 01 Pulse Output 0 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the pulse when the PV Flag output 0 PV is changed Cleared when operation starts by the INI OFF N l instruction Normal Refreshed ON Overflow or underflow when an overflow or underflow occurs 02 Pulse Output 0 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed Output Amount Set for pulse output 0 has been set with the when the Flag PULS instruction PULS Cleared when operation starts or instruction is stops executed OFF No setting aol ics when pulse ON Setting made output stops 03 Pulse Output 0 ON when the number of output pulses Cleared Refreshed at Output Completed set with the PULS or PLS2 instruction the start or Flag has been output through pulse output completion of 0 pulse output Cleared when operation starts or stops OFF Output not completed ON Output completed 04 Pulse Output 0 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed Output In progress pulse output 0 when pulse Flag Cleared when operation starts or output starts or
370. high speed counters with the pulse input method E20 30 40 60 S N20 30 40 60 S L1 or NA20 CPU Units Input terminal block Terminal block label CIO 0 11 4 Pulse input method Counting mode Other functions that cannot be used at the same time Differential phase Pulse Quick gd 1 Increment 1 i Interrupt Origin searches for Terminal k x4 or up down direction Normal input response pulse input input input input input pulse outputs 0 and 1 00 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 phase A Counter 0 increment or up input pulse input input 01 High speed _ High speed High speed Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 phase B Counter 1 increment or down input pulse input input 02 High speed _ High speed High speed Normal input 2 Interrupt input 2 Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 phase A Counter 0 response increment or up input direction input 2 input 03 High speed High speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Quick Counter 1 phase B Counter 1 response or down input direction input 3 04 High speed _ High speed High speed Normal input 4 Interrupt input 4 Quick Counter 3 Counter 0 phase Z Counter 0 response increment or reset input reset input input 4 input 05 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 5 Interrupt input 5 Quick Counter 4 Counter 1 phase Z Counter 1 response increment or reset input rese
371. i ETETEN mnt Kom Feats Le 1 rang 18 0 100 Smet 18 5 2 Force set Reset Bits Input bits can be controlled from CX Programmer regardless of input status from the input devices This is used to establish input and output conditions when performing trial operation or to see the effect of establishing conditions when debugging Jj Bits that can be Force set Reset I O bits Word Area bits W Timer Completion Flags Holding Area Bits H Counter Completion Flags Precautions for Safe Use Always check the safety of the system before force setting or force resetting a bit and before releasing forced status I Force setting Force setting a bit 1 Set the CP1E operating mode to either MONITOR or PROGRAM mode 2 Move the cursor o an oio NEN tion for the input bit that is to be BEC Wu force set m d ia TM 100ms Tir 30 Bed 90 Set value 18 26 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations J Fichicick ant solect Foree Cn NEN The input bit will be force set A 5 symbol indicating the force set sta tus will be displayed at the input con p dition E woo EN Additional Information Select On to turn ON a bit and Off to turn OFF a bit To cancel forced status select Cancel 18 5 3 Online Editing i About Online Editing A ladder program running on the CP1E can be edited
372. i Details Types of Timers The following table shows which instructions are used to refresh timer PVs in BCD and binary mode D y PuL 9 G Timer instruction BCD mode Binary mode HUNDRED MS TIMER TIM TIMX TEN MS TIMER TIMH TIMHX ONE MS TIMER TMHH TMHHX ACCUMULATIVE TIMER TTIM TTIMX Timer numbers 0 to 255 are used by all timers listed above Note Only timer numbers 0 to 15 can be used in 1ms TIMER TMHH TMHHX e Timer Example Timer Number 0 and a Timer Set Value of 1s BCD mode PEN TIM Timer Completion Flag T000 000 10 Binary mode Timer Completion Flag TMX T000 000 HA or amp 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 13 5 I O Memory e Timer PV Refresh Method Timer n m Timer PV refresh method bers TO to T255 The timer PV is refreshed when the instruction is executed This can cause a delay depending on the cycle time When the cycle time is longer than 100 ms delay is generated by the TIM TIMX instruction When the cycle time is longer than 10 ms delay is generated by the TIMH TIMHX instruction When the cycle time is longer than 1 ms delay is generated by the TMHH TMHHx instruction V Precautions for Correct Use It is not recommended to use the same timers number in two timer instructions because the tim ers will not operate correctly if they are operating simultaneously Do not use the same timer number for more than
373. i Gosek be Bie Gs Be I pa 17 33 1 5 2 Error CodeS mise fe A nina Se eat bi rae s ect dade it naue 17 34 1725 3 Error Status ioci dr DER RR aa ee ee 17 36 17 6 Connection Method with the CX Programmer se 17 37 17 7 Network Installation ssesee nme 17 40 17 7 1 Devices Required for Constructing a Network 0 00 0 eee 17 40 17 7 2 Network Installation 0 0 ee eas 17 40 17 8 Comparison with Previous Models eene 17 42 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 1 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 1 Features and Specifications 17 1 1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide I Overall system configuration example Ethernet Option Board provides receiving commands by OMRON standard protocol FINS for CP1E programmable controllers The Ethernet Network Interface allows you to easily connect CP1E Program mable Controllers onto new or existing Ethernet network and upload download programs communicate between controllers do not support real time scanning I O on Ethernet Option Board Connecting from a computer with a dynamic private IP address Use Connecting within the same FINS TCP or FINS UDP segment Use FINS UDP CX Programmer gt CX Programmer Q j al J lt d FINS FINS Ethernet A DL Ite kJ S PLC
374. ial Option Port Display the present communication Parity Retained See Refreshed Built in RS 485 port settings of the serial option port or 0 Even Function when power is z Communication Set built in RS 485 port Reflect the PLC column turned ON no tings Setup when power is turned ON 1 Odd m 01 Parity Retained See Refreshed 8 0 Yes Function when power is e column turned ON z 1 No D 02 Stop bit Retained See Refreshed z 0 2 bits Function when power is a column turned ON o 1 1 bit 03 Data length Retained See Refreshed 0 7 bits Function when power is s column turned ON 1 8 bits 04 Start bit Retained See Refreshed 0 1 bit fixed Function when power is column turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 75 Appendices Address Status Related F after Status at Write Name Function Settings timi flags Words Bits mode startup ming settings change A618 08 Serial Option Port Display the present communication Communication Retained See Refreshed to Communication Set settings of the serial option port speed Function when power is 11 tings Reflect the PLC Setup when power is o hex Default 9600 column turned ON turned ON 3 hex 1200 4 hex 2400 5 hex 4800 6 hex 9600 7 hex 19200 8 hex 38400 9 hex 57600 A hex 115200 12 Communication Retained See Refreshed to mod
375. ial PLC Links Up to 9 PLCs can be linked i Configuration Connecting CP1E CP1L CP1H or CJ 1M CPU Units 1 N 8 Nodes Maximum CP1E N NALILI S ype CPU Unit Polling Unit RS 422A 485 Option Board NN or Built in RS 485 Port wo RS 422A 485 ue CJ1M CPU Unit Polled Unit BR j EM lk gt CP1E N NA type 5E CP1L CPU Unit F CPU Unit Polled Unit Polled Unit 8 nodes maximum Connecting CP1E CP1L CP1H or CJ 1M CPU Units 1 1 CP1E N NALILI S type 5 CPU Unit d Polling Unit s Shared data RS 232C or RS422A 485 CP1E or CP1L CPU fF Unit Polled Unit H Precautions for Correct Use With the CP1E CPU Units a Programmable Terminal PT cannot be included in a Serial PLC Link 14 20 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 5 2 Flow of Operation 1 T Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and the CP1E or other CPU Units using RS 232C or RS 422A 485 ports 2 PLC Set Set Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the SP PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit Set the serial com munications mode to Serial PC Link Master or Serial PC Link Slave and set the communications conditions link words and P
376. iation ON These instructions are executed only once when the exe variations cution condition turns ON OFF These instructions are executed only once when the exe cution condition turns OFF Immediate refreshing Data in the built in I O area specified by the operands is refreshed when the instruction is executed Example MOV Instruction mnemonic Differentiation variation Immediate refresh variation 4 3 4 Execution Conditions The following two types of basic and special instructions can be used Non differentiated instructions Executed every cycle Differentiated instructions Executed only once i Non differentiated Instructions Output Instructions Instructions That Require Input Conditions These instructions are executed once every cycle while the execution condition is satisfied ON or OFF Non differentiated Example Output instructions executed every cycle Input Instructions Logical Starts and Intermediate Instructions These instructions read bit status make comparisons test bits or perform other types of processing every cycle If the results are ON the input condition is output i e the execution condition is turned ON Input instruction executed every cycle Example s E 5 4 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming i Input differentiated Instructions Upwardly Differentia
377. ibes the types of internal memory in a CP1E CPU Unit and the data that is stored Section 3 CPU Unit Operation This section describes the operation of a CP1E CPU Unit Section 4 Programming Concepts This section provides basic information on designing ladder programs for a CP1E CPU Unit Section 5 I O Memory This section describes the types of I O memory areas in a CP1E CPU Unit and the details Section 6 I O Allocation Section 7 PLC Setup This section describes I O allocation used to exchange data between the CP1E CPU Unit and other units This section describes the PLC Setup which are used to perform basic settings for a CP1E CPU Unit Section 8 Overview and Allocation of Built in Functions This section lists the built in functions and describes the overall applica tion flow and the allocation of the functions Section 9 Quick response Inputs This section describes the quick response inputs that can be used to read signals that are shorter than the cycle time Section 10 Interrupts This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP1E PLCs including input interrupts and scheduled interrupts Section 11 High speed Counters This section describes the high speed counter inputs high speed counter interrupts and the frequency measurement function Section 12 Pulse Outputs This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control jogging and origin se
378. igh speed lt Origin search proximity speed Origin search proximity speed lt Origin search initial speed Search Com After the origin has been defined the origin compensation can be set to compensate pensation for a shift in the Proximity Sensor s ON position motor replacement or other change Value Setting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 pulses Once the origin has been detected in an origin search the number of pulses specified in the origin compensation is output the present position is reset to 0 and the pulse output s No origin Flag is turned OFF Search Sets the motor s acceleration rate when the origin Setting range 1 to 65 535 Hz Acceleration search is executed Specify the amount to increase 4 ms Ratio the speed Hz per 4 ms interval Search Sets the motor s deceleration rate when the origin Setting range 1 to 65 535 Hz Deceleration search function is decelerating Specify the amount to 4 ms Ratio decrease the speed Hz per 4 ms interval Positioning When the operating mode is set to mode 2 this setting Setting range 0 to 9 999 ms Monitor Time specifies how long to wait in ms for the Positioning Completed Signal after the positioning operation has been completed i e the pulse output has been com pleted A Positioning Timeout Error error code 0300 will be generated if the motor driver s Positioning Com pleted Signal does not come ON within the specified time Origin Speed Sets the motor s target speed
379. igin Retum iv n Speed Search Direction few zl Search High Speed p 4 pps Detection Method Men z Search Proximity Speed Acceleration Ratio Search Operation Invers 1 7 Search Compensation Value p Zi peration Mode Meo z Search Acceleration Ratio Deceleration Ratio Origin Input Signal NC v Search Deceleration Ratio Proximity Input Signal NC Positioning Monitor Time CPIE N40 Offline suomun urymng 10 suone ojy PUIUL 8 dnjes 21d eui ui suonoun Dunoeres z 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 8 5 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals Allocating Functions to Built in Input Terminals Input terminals are allocated functions by setting parameters in the PLC Setup Set the PLC Setup so that each terminal is used for only one function e E20 30 40 60 S N20 30 40 60 S L1 or NA20 CPU Units PLC Setup Interrupt input settings on Built in Input Tab High speed counter 0 to 3 settings on Built Origin search set tings on Pulse ando Page in Input Tab Page Output 0 1 Tab nal Terminal Page lock Fh number Normal Interrupt Quick Use Use t Interrupt Quick Increment piferenual Pulse direc as Normal input response 5 phase x4 or 3 Origin search inputs i pulse input tion inputs up down CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 incremen
380. ing ON a software switch after setting the Modbus slave address function and data in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus RTU Easy Master The response when received is automatically stored in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus RTU Easy Master 14 4 2 Flow of Operation 1 Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and Modbus RTU Slave 2 Select Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port in the PLC Setup PLC Setup and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX Pro grammer to the CP1E CPU Unit Set the serial communi cations mode to Modbus Easy Master and set the communications conditions Create Set the Modbus RTU frame in the DM Fixed Allocation ladder Cyclic tasks Words Program Interrupt tasks Turn ON the Modbus RTU Master Execution Bit A640 00 or A641 00 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 11 uonoung Jayseyy se3 n bu sngpoi 7 7T MeIMIGAO L vl 14 Serial Communications 14 4 3 Setting and Word Allocation 14 12 DM fixed allocation words and Auxiliary Area words are allocated for the Modbus RTU Easy Master according to the CPU Unit type and connected port as shown below CP1E CPU Unit serial port CP1E N14 20 or N30 40 60S CPU Unit Built in RS 232C port DM fixed allocation words D1200 to D1299 Auxiliary Area bits A640 00 to A640 02 CP1E N30 40 60 S1 or NA20 CPU Unit Built in RS 232C port D1200 to D1299 A640 00 to A640 02 Serial option port or built in RS 485
381. ing it 1 Select Compile All PLC Programs from the Program Menu sureJ604g 1eppe Bulpeey pue Bulaes z e gt Compiling will start Once compiling has been completed the results of the program check will be displayed in the Output Window For Help press F1 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 15 18 Programming Device Operations 2 If an error was found double click the error message displayed in the Output Window The cursor will move to the location of the error Correct the ladder pro gram as required Note When there is more than one error press the Shift J keys to search in for errors in order PST AT E consis rie een Tense For Help press Fl Saving a Ladder Program Once created a ladder program must be saved Ladder programs are saved in projects 1 Select Save As from the File Menu The Save CX Programmer File Dia log Box will be displayed 2 Specify the save location input the file name and then click the Save Button The CX Programmer project file will be saved File name Save as type CX Programmer Project Files c e 18 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs A ladder program can be edited in the CX Programmer Also I O comments and rung comments can be input I Inputting and Editing I O Comments inputting an I O Comment with the Ladder Editor In Smart Input Mode an I O comment can be input aft
382. instruction is supported as a special instruction to refresh actual I O data in the specified word range By using this instruction it is possible to refresh all data or data in a spec ified range of actual I O in CP series Expansion I O and Expansion Unit during the cycle IORF instruction can also refresh actual I O data in an NA type CPU Unit at CIO 90 CIO 91 and CIO 190 H Precautions for Correct Use It is not possible to use the immediate refresh variation for the actual I O of Expansion I O or an Expansion Unit Use the IORF instruction CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 15 suop ongsu 6uiunuei60Jg Buru usejeud O I 2 7 4 Understanding Programming 4 4 Constants I Overview Constants are numeric values expressed in 16 or 32 bits and can be specified as instruction operands The following types of constants are supported Bit Strings or Numeric Values Integers Decimal values with amp symbol hexadecimal values with symbol BCD values with symbol or signed decimal values with or symbol Operands Specifying Numbers Decimal Notation No Symbol Floating Point Real Number Notation Signed decimal notation with or symbol and decimal point I Notation and Ranges Using Operands for Bit Strings or Numeric Values Integers Unsigned Binary Data type Decimal values Hexadecimal values Notation With amp symbol With symbol amp
383. inue comparing Input Setting Up Down inputs 2 Set the range comparison table starting at word D2000 Even though range 1 is the only range being used all 30 words must still be dedicated to the range comparison table Word Setting Function D2000 61A8 Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 lower Lower limit value 25 000 limit D2001 0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit D2002 639C Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 upper Upper limit value 25 500 limit D2003 0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit D2004 000C Range 1 interrupt task number 12 C hex D2005 All Range 2 lower and upper limit values Range 2 settings to 0000 Not used and do not need to be set D2008 D2009 FFFF Disables range 2 2 D2014 FFFF Set the fifth word for ranges 3 to 6 listed at left to FFFF Range D2019 settings are invalid to disable those ranges D2024 D2029 11 24 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters 3 Create the program for interrupt task 12 4 Use the CTBL instruction to start the comparison operation with high speed counter 1 and inter rupt task 12 J4eguno peaeds ubiH TT sydnueul W0 00 Use high speed counter 1 sees Register a range comparison table 4 and start comparison operation First comparison table word When execution condition WO 00 turns ON the comparison starts with high speed counter 1 When the PV of high
384. io2 S Y Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function AREA RANGE ZCP Compares the 16 bit unsigned binary value in CD word contents COMPARE or constant to the range defined by LL and UL and outputs the results to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area CD Comparison data 1 word LL Lower limit of range UL Upper limit of range DOUBLE ZCPL Compares the 32 bit unsigned binary value in CD and CD 1 word AREA RANGE ZCPL 116 contents or constant to the range defined by LL and UL and out COMPARE puts the results to the Arithmetic Flags in the Auxiliary Area A 1 6 CD Comparison data 2 words LL Lower limit of range UL Upper limit of range Data Movement Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function MOVE MOV Transfers a word of data to the specified word MOV 021 Source word S Source D Destination Bit status not t changed DOUBLE MOVL Transfers two words of data to the specified words MOVE MOVL 498 S iLLEEEELEEEL EHE ELE ELLE ELE LET ELE T I See prem qe L S 1st source word Bit status not D 1st destination word i changed a ee eee CEE MOVE NOT MVN Transfers the complement of a word of data to the specified word MVN 022 Source word S Source D Destination Bit status i inverted A 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices
385. ion 1 Overview and Specifica tions Contents This section gives an overview of the CP1E describes its features and provides its specifications Section 2 Basic System Configura tion and Devices This section describes the basic system configuration and unit models of the CP1E Section 3 Part Names and Functions This section describes the part names and functions of the CPU Unit Expansion I O Units and Expansion Units ina CP1E PLC Section 4 Programming Device This section describes the features of the CX Programmer used for pro gramming and debugging PLCs as well as how to connect the PLC with the Programming Device by USB Section 5 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire CP1E Units Section 6 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur with a CP1E PLC including the error indications provided by the CP1E Units Section 7 Maintenance and Inspec tion This section describes periodic inspections the service life of the Bat tery and how to replace the Battery Section 8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units This section describes application methods for Expansion Units Appendices The appendices provide information on dimensions wiring diagrams and wiring serial communications for the CP1E i CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 Section Section 1 Summary of Instructio
386. ion Execution IN l of SPED of INI PLS2 INI Stop pulse Immediate E E Stops the pulse output immedi PULS Port output stop ately and clears the number of Indepen edid 7 Peen le a output pulses setting SPED dent ane Independent Target fre ing is no jl quency 0 preserved ty Time Execution Execution SPED ofSPED of SPED Independent Stop sloped Decelerate puise frequency Decelerates the pulse output PULS Port pulse out to i stop Present Original acceleration to a stop Indepen put n frequency aud rate If ACC started the operation ACC or SPED dent smoothly the original acceleration decel Independent Target fre Mid hic Tus eration rate will remain in l quency 0 Ulises set frequency 0 is not Execution of ACC effect g If SPED started the operation ACC preserved CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 the acceleration deceleration rate will be invalid and the pulse output will stop immedi ately Independent PLS2 i ACC Independent 12 55 uremed andino esind 6 ZT epoiN 1uepuedepu jo 1uo Buluolisog Z 6 ZL 12 Pulse Outputs S witching from Speed Control Continuous Mode to Positioning Independent Mode Example P Frequency changes application Change Outputs the number of pulses from speed specified in PLS2 Both relative and absolute pulse specification can be control to xoa used fixed dis ulse
387. ion for NA type CPU Units I5sl OVervieW olei a et eae eee a oe eae a ee MR Ee 15 2 151 1 Flow of Operation oer oet ea pede wn e E ote 15 2 15 1 2 Analog I O Specifications 0 2k eh 15 6 15 2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges Lesess 15 7 15 2 1 Analog Input Signal Ranges sssssee eee nen 15 7 15 2 2 Analog Output Signal Ranges 0 ects 15 9 15 2 3 Special functions i csse eer dele bed ee ee de Bowie 15 11 15 3 I O Allocation and Related Auxiliary Area Flags 15 12 15 3 L WO Allocation i eye EGO WEE DERE A EOS ED RAT 15 12 15 3 2 Related Auxiliary Area Flags lisse m 15 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 1 15 Analog I O Function 15 1 Overview 15 1 1 Flow of Operation luem D Set whether each input or output will be used Each I O point is set independently Set the I O resolution The same setting is used for all I O points Set the analog input range 0to5V 1to5V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA Each input is set independently Setthe analog output range 0to5V 1to5V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA Each output is set independently 2 Wiring analog I O 3 Write the ladder program Wire the I O devices Select correct wire method according to the voltage or current input Analog inputs Read the conversion value Analog outputs Write the conversion value i PLC
388. ions and licenses regarding i export of products or information iii sale of products to forbidden or other proscribed persons and ii disclosure to non citizens of regulated technology or information Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron s written consent c Law These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which Buyer is purchasing the Products without regard to conflict of law princi ples d Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Omron relating to the Products and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties e Severability If any provi sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision f Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice g Definitions As used herein including means including without limitation and Omron Compa nies or similar words mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use 1 Suitability of Use Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity
389. is held Undefined When a Limit Input Signal is input the pulse output is stopped and origin becomes undefined Limit Input Signal Search Only The CW CCW Limit Input Signal is used for origin Operation searches only Always The CW CCW Limit Input Signal is used by functions other than origin search Limit Input Signal NC Select when using NC contacts for the Limit Input Signal NO Select when using NO contacts for the Limit Input Signal Search Return Ini tial Speed Set the motor s starting speed when performing an origin search Specified in pulses per second pps Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the pulse output settings Refer to 12 4 Defining Origin Position for origin search settings in the PLC Setup 12 4 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Setting the Pulse Output Port Number Assigning Pulse Output Terminals and Wiring Pulse Output Method Only the following pulse output plus a direction output can be used as the pulse output method Pulses ON CW Direction OFF CCW Pulse Output Port Number and Output Terminals The following terminals are used for pulse outputs according to the pulse output port number Output terminal Other functions that cannot be block pup e copes meroa used at the same time Terminal Terminal
390. it Input extension CX Programmer WS02 CXPC Version 8 2 or Version 1 Not CXP Refer to the CP1E LI20LIDLI CX One 1 V8 higher See note supported CX Programmer CP1E LISO0LIDLI CXONE ALO Operation Manual CP1E LI40LIDLI E 1C V3 Cat No W446 WS02 CXPC Version 9 03 or Version 1 0 Supported CP1E E10LIDLI 1 V9 higher CP1E LI20LIDD I CXONE ALO CP1E LI30LIDL I 1C V4 CP1E LI40LIDD I CP1E N60LIDL E CP1E NA20LIDLI CXONE ALO Version 9 42 or Version 1 L1 Supported All units are 1C V4 higher supported Micro PLC Edition WS02 CXPC Version 8 2 or Version 1 0 Not CXP Described in this CP1E O200D0 0 CX Programmer 2 V8 higher supported section CP1E O300D0 0 CX One Lite CXONE LTO CP1E D400D0 O0 1C V3 WS02 CXPC Version 9 03 or Version 1 0 Supported CP1E E100DO O 1 V9 higher CP1E O200D0 O0 CXONE LTO CP1E O300D0 O0 1C V4 CP1E O400D0 O0 CP1E N60LIDEI E1 CP1E NA200DO O WS02 CXPC Version 9 42 or Version 1 0 Supported All units are 2 V9 higher supported CXONE LTO 1C V4 CX Programmer WS02 CXPC Version 1 0 Version 1 0 Supported CXE CP1E O200D0 O0 for CP1E B CP1E LI30LIDET EI CP1E O400D0 O0 Note 1 To use CX Programmer version 8 2 with a CP1E CPU Unit the CX One version 3 auto update must be installed 2 Use the CX Programmer version 9 12 or higher when CP1W CIF41 is applied i Precautions for Correct Use This section describes the unique applications and functions of the Micro PLC
391. it will be ignored and the data will not be backed up again Note Select the Restore D0 from backup memory Check Box and set the number of DM Area words to back up in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box in the PLC Setup before using this bit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 ON Start saving OFF Execution nor mal or still in progress Retained Cleared A 79 ssauppy Aq suogesojiy ery Auelpny z v SPJOM 9IHAWPE8H c c V Appendices A 3 Response Performance A 3 1 O Response Time The I O response time is the time it takes from when an input turns ON the data is recognized by the CPU Unit and the ladder programs are executed up to the time for the result to be output to an output terminal The length of the I O response time depends on the following conditions Timing of Input Bit turning ON The cycle time e Minimum I O Response Time The I O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before I O refresh of the CPU Unit The minimum I O response time is calculated as follows Minimum I O response time Input ON delay Cycle time Output ON delay Note The input and output ON delays depend on the type of terminals used on the CPU Unit or the model number of the Unit being used O refresh Inputs Input ON delay Status read to the CPU Unit 1 i
392. its starting from CIO 0 A Timer Area T Work Area W DM Area D Counter Area C Condition Flags Holding Area H Output bits starting from CIO 100 Clock Pulses CIO Area CIO 0 to CIO 289 In the CIO Area input bit addresses range from CIO 0 to CIO 99 output bit addresses range from CIO 100 to CIO 199 and addresses for serial PLC links range from CIO 200 to CIO 289 For NA type CPU Units built in analog input terminals are CIO 90 and CIO 91 built in analog output terminal is CIO 190 The bits and words in the CIO Area are allocated to built in I O terminals on the CP1E CPU Unit and to the Expansion Units and Expansion I O Units Input words and output bits that are not allocated may be used as work bits in programming Refer to 5 2 1 0 Bits CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory i User Areas These areas can be used freely by the user e Work Area W The Word Area is part of the internal memory of the CPU Unit It is used in programming Unlike the input bits and output bits in the CIO Area I O to and from external devices is not refreshed for this area Use this area for work words and bits before using any words in the CIO Area These words should be used first in programming because they will not be assigned to new functions in future versions of CP1E CPU Units Refer to 5 3 Work Area W Holding Area H The Holding Area is part of the internal memory
393. ity Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contam inants i Hub Connection Methods If more hub ports are required they can be added by connecting more than one hub There are two possible connection methods for hubs Cascade and stacked Cascade Connections Connect two hubs to each other as follows Connect an MDI port to an MDI X port with a straight cable Connect two MDI ports with a cross cable Connect two MDI X ports with a cross cable Note It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appearance Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail We recommend using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible With cascade connections up to 5 segments can be connected using up to 4 repeaters i e 4 hubs uonejreisuj SUOMION Z 7T Stack Connections Connect the hubs using special cables or special racks Normally there is no limit to the number of hubs in a stack and each stack is treated as one hub 17 Some hubs however are limited in the number of hubs per stack o Hub N T bv z Four stackable hubs Two stackable hubs g EELEELCLITE e Stack cable Stack cable gt 5 o m 7 E J T HAF maa SUD f ma maara bc un un o o nn ojo ojo ojo CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W4
394. jinstruction executed rers TAE LV VEVELEUEUELELFLELELE LET A High speed counter PV Target value range 0 Time Cyclic task execution Interrupt task execution Counting enabled Cyclic task execution Interrupted Interrupted Interrupt task execution Cyclic task execution CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters Flow of Operation 1 Enable the required high speed counters PLC Setup Select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high speed counters 0 to 5 Set the input setting counting mode and reset method on the Built in Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX Pro grammer Terminals 00 to 06 on the OCH terminal block can be used for high speed counters High speed counters 0 to 5 correspond to terminals 00 to 05 Jeguno peaeds u6iH TT sydnueul Write a program for interrupt tasks O to 15 Interrupt task Set the comparison values for the high speed Mod Execution of CTBL and counter and the interrupt tasks 0 to 15 to be started using the CTBL instruction Start the comparison using the INI instruction The comparison can be started simultaneously when registering the comparison values using the CTBL instruction M M AO L E LL program INl instructions in a cyclic task High speed Counter Interrupts Settings m see qe dm Instruction CTBL port specifier C1 goss
395. k and then of the section pressing in at the bottom of the Units as shown below uoneoo1 uomeljeisul Z S Special Information See below Icons are used to indicate precautions and additional information CL amp La EN H Precautions for Correct Use Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques M4 1 2 Nem M3 0 5 N m Manual name PIE CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual W479 This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual Special Information Special information in this manual is classified as follows amp 9 Precautions for Safe Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely n Precautions for Correct Use Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance B Additional Information Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier CL References to the location of more detailed or related information CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Terminology and Notation Term E type CPU Unit Description A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such as basic movement arithmetic and comparison instructions Basic models of CPU Units are called ELILI S type CPU Units in this manual The models of ELILI S type CPU Units are shown below CP1E EOODO 0 CP1E EO
396. l 7 name network tasks local task a Global PLC tree Not Possible Possible Supported P symbols possible z fm NewPLC1 CP1E Offline 3 3 Symbols g Settings A Local Program tree Not Possible Not supported i symbols ossible y z A Programs a S NewProgram1 00 A Symbols CJ Sectiont Note Global and local indicate only the applicable scope of the symbol They have nothing to do with the applicable scope of memory addresses Therefore a warning but not an error will occur in the following cases and it will be possible to transfer the user program The same addresses is used for two different local symbols The same addresses is used for a global symbol and a local symbol SjoquiAS JO MSIAJSAQ E Z EN Additional Information In programs in the CX Programmer global symbols and local symbols can be identified by the following character colors and symbol icons Classification Display color Example default color Global symbols Black default Start 3 00 Local symbols Blue default Error WO 00 Select Tools Options and select Local Symbols or Global S ymbols in Appearance to change the color CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming 4 3 Programming Instructions 4 3 1 Basic Understanding of Instructions Structure of Instructions Programs consist of instructions The conceptual structure of the inputs to and outputs from an instruc
397. l Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Output 1 4 gt Communications Settings Link Words Formai Mode 115200 v fie x es Link Y Start Code End Code c c G ns OTRE Cn y z Response Timeout Unit Number Delay NT PC Link Max PC Link Unit No 4 100 ms 0 4 10 a default Serial Option Port Tab Page Parameter Setting Communications Settings Select the Custom option set the baud rate to 115200 and the format to 7 2 E Mode Select Host Link default or Host Link Unit Number Select 0 H Precautions for Correct Use When the Ethernet Option Board is applied on the CP1E CPU Unit it is necessary to set the baud rate to 115 200 and the mode to Host Link At the following settings ERR LED of the Ethernet Option Board will be flashing Check and change the settings It is possible to change settings either by USB or by Ethernet Baud rate 9 600 Unit number Except 0 However except the settings mentioned above ERR LED will be lit if the communications is impos sible between the CPU Unit and the Ethernet Option Board Check and change the settings If setting the mode to Host Link and the baud rate to any value except 9 600 or 115 200 the CP1E CPU Unit cannot be connected with Ethernet Change the PLC Settings by USB 17 10 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 3 Settings 17 3 1 Ethernet Option Board Setup The Ethernet Op
398. l b amp 2 L Start bit address symbol a 10 0 The word address is offset by the amount specified by n number of offset words from A start word address A n Word T5 Start word address A Offset n Start Word Address BE 15 141 de Ae Biss Brom om m It is possible to specify the start word address with a word address or with a symbol except the NUMBER data type cannot be used Offsetting is possible only for addresses in the Holding Word and DM Areas The I O comment for the start bit address is displayed When specifying symbols make the symbol table setting as the array variation The number of arrays will be the maximum number of offset 1 word at least Offset The offset can be specified as a decimal constant word address but CIO Area addresses cannot be specified or one word symbol i e symbols with the following data types INT UINT WORD CHANNEL If a word address or symbol is specified the contents of the specified word is used as the offset If the offset exceeds bit 15 in the specified word offsetting will continue from bit 00 in the next word If the offset is specified indirectly make sure that the final bit address does not exceed the upper limit of the memory area by using input comparison or other instruction Examples DO 2 De L Offset decimal value L Start word address word address in I
399. l settings of the Ethernet Option Board using the Web browser function CIO area allocation Store the status of the Ethernet Option Board CPU Unit Ethernet EE Option Board 1 O memory Read the initial settings D1300 E Port 1 right Di454 When the power is ON or the board is restarted DM area allocation Initial settings Web browser function Ethernet CIO area allocation G Read the Internal status status Status Each cycle Note The initial settings of the Ethernet Option Board cannot be set in the allocated words in the DM area or in the CX Programmer s system settings Confirmation on the Settings of the Ethernet Option Board The settings of the Ethernet Option Board can be confirmed by the following two methods Web browser function Confirm from the Web browser of a computer connected with Ethernet Allocated words in the DM area D1300 to D1356 The setting values will be read to the CPU Unit from the Ethernet Option Board when the power is ON Confirm the PLC memory with the CX Pro grammer i Confirmation on the Status of the Ethernet Option Board The status of the Ethernet Option Board can be confirmed by the following two methods Web browser function Confirm from the Web
400. l symbols rather than with addresses For example P 0 02 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 1 2 O Memory Area Address Notation An I O memory can be addressed using word addresses or bit addresses The word addresses and bit addresses are given in decimal format e Word Addresses Specifies a16 bit word amp 000 I O memory area The word number within designator the area given in decimal Examples D A W e Bit Addresses A bit addresses specifies one of the 16 bits in a word seaiy A10UJ9IA O I JO MoIAJ9AO T S The word number and bit number are separated with a period I O memory Word number Period Bit number area designator 00 to 15 On the CX Programmer addresses in the CIO Area including addresses for Serial PLC Links are given with no I O memory area designator CIO is used as the I O memory area designator in this manual for clarity WO M a en N OO gi 000000 Inputs begin from CIO 0 Period Bit number gog Q O 6 9 Outputs begin from CIO 100 00 to 15 UOI e ON sseJppy Beauly AuouleW O I Z L S CPIE CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 5 5 I O Memory 5 1 3 1 0 Memory Areas Name No of bits Word addresses Remarks Reference CIO Area Input Bits 1 600 bits CIO 0 to CIO 99 Refer to 5 2 I O Bits 100 words Output Bits 1 600 bits CIO 100 to CIO 199 100 words Serial PLC 1 440 bits CIO 200 to
401. lay to the Output Unit as shown in the following diagram Converting 4 digits 151413 1211109 8 7 6 54 32 0 o EEETEELI One Round Flag LES L Do LE2 ni Latch outputs LE D2 4 digit data LEO pg output Converting 8 digits 15 14 131211109 8 765 43 2 1 0 ol T One Round Flag LE3 4 DO LE2 D1 Latch LE1 p2 f Leftmost outputs LEO D3 4 digit data output DO D1 p2 7 Rightmost 4 digit D3 data output C Control Data The value of C indicates the number of digits of source data and the logic for the Input and Output Units as shown in the fol lowing table The logic refers to the transistor output s NPN or PNP logic Source data pua id Display s latch inputlogic C 4 digits S Same as Out Same as Output Unit 0000 put Unit Different from Output Unit 0001 Different from Same as Output Unit 0002 Output Unit Different from Output Unit 0003 8 digits S S 1 Same as Out Same as Output Unit 0004 par Unit Different from Output Unit 0005 Different from Same as Output Unit 0006 Sipe ant Different from Output Unit 0007 D System Word Specifies a work word used by the instruction This word can not be used in any other application 15 0 L Syste
402. led In Serial PLC Link mode only the following bits are enabled Errors at the Polling Unit Bit 13 Timeout error Errors at Polled Units Bit 13 Timeout error Bit 12 Overrun error Bit 11 Framing error n the same way as for the existing 1 N NT Link the status communicating not communicating of the Polled Unit in Serial PLC Links can be checked from the Polling Unit CPU Unit by reading the Built in RS 232C Port Com municating with Polled Unit Flag A393 00 to A393 07 for unit numbers 0 to 7 or the Serial Option Port Built in RS 485 Port Communicating with Polled Unit Flag A394 00 to A394 07 for unit numbers 0 to 7 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 27 SIU 2 Id Ieues s rT suoneouioeds BunejedQo p S pL 14 Serial Communications 14 5 5 Example Application I Operation The present temperature information is exchanged between the boilers This information is used to adjust the temperature control of one boiler depending on the status of the other boilers and for moni toring individual boilers Boiler A Boiler B H H Boiler C H e Wiring Example Boiler A CP1E Polling Unit Boiler B CP1E Polled Unit No 0 Boiler C CP1E Polled Unit No 1 CP1W TS101 CP1W TS101 CP1W TS101 CP1E N type Temperature CP1E N type Temperature CP1E N type Temperature CPU Unit _Sensor Unit CPU Unit Sensor Unit CPU Unit Sensor Unit A o k S oG PTS i mcm FIT m EESLI m rS Big
403. lg p p pL 14 Serial Communications e PLC Setup Click the Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box NoteThe built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab 7 5 PLC Settings hewPLEI Serial Option Port Tab Page Communications Set the Modbus communications settings to match those of the Settings Inverter If the Inverter is set to 9 600 bps one stop bit and even parity select the Custom Option and set the baud rate to 9 600 Set the format to 8 1 E Mode Select Modbus Easy Master Response Timeout Set the default value of 0x100 ms 14 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications e Programming Example P First Cycle vov 0000 D1306 Stop operation when communications start wor gt RUN command 0 Stop L Frequency reference 00 00Hz 0000 F D1307 4 MOV 0000 8 A641 W0 00 a 4 Mov g T Contact A 0117 5 D1306 RUN command 1 Start S MOV Frequency reference 60 00Hz 1770 Hex 7000 D1307 W0 01 L 4 MOV Contact B 0115 D1306 RUN command 1 Start gt MOV Frequency reference 55 00Hz 157C Hex E 7C00 E D1307 J W0 02 mov u t o Contact C 0113 E o D1306 RUN command 1 Star
404. lly referred to as the backed up words in the DM Area Precautions for Safe Use With an ELIDI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function If the DM backup function is being used be sure to refer to 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Star tup for details a easy owanw eyeg S S Notation D 200 Word number 200 I O memory area designator D Range ELILI S type CPU Units have DM Area addresses ranging from DO to D2047 Of these DO to D1499 can be backed up in backup memory built in EEPROM N NALILI S type CPU Units have DM Area addresses ranging from DO to D8191 Of these DO to D6999 can be backed up in backup memory built in EEPROM ELID S type CPU Unit N NNALILI S type CPU Unit All CPU Units Regardless N14 20 CPU Unit N30 40 60 S or NA20 CPU Unit of I O Capacity DO DO DO Words that b to pear can be backed to Words that can be backed ords that can be up to backup memory back to backed up to backup D1199 J J D1199 i i e UE memory D1200 DM Fixed Allocation Words D1200 DM Fixed
405. long as shown below If it is not necessary to set six ranges set the interrupt task number to FFFF hex for all 15 unused ranges 0 TB Lower word of range 1 lower limit ange 1 lower limit 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note TB 1 Upper word of ri TB 2 Lower word of range 1 upper limit TB 3 Upper word of range 1 upper limit Je 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note Range 1 interr upt task number TB 25 Lower word of range 6 lower limit TB 26 Upper word of range 6 lower limit Jomo 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note TB 27 Lower word of range 6 upper limit TB 28 Upper word of range 6 upper limit Je 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex See note TB429 Range 6 interrupt task number Interrupt task number 0000 to 000F hex AAAA hex FFFF hex Interrupt task number 0 to 15 Do not execute interrupt task Ignore the settings for this range Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower limit for any one range SPEED OUT PUT A 40 SPED SPED 855 P Port specifier M Output mode F First pulse frequency word Sets the output pu se frequency for a specific port and starts pulse output without acceleration or deceleration Pulse frequency A Target frequency SPE P Port specifier i gt Time D 885 executed 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 M Output mode 15 1
406. lt in Input 5 nterrupt T ask 06 Built in Input 5 nterrupt T ask Q7 Built in Input 7 Execute MSKS in a Cyclic Task The MSKS instruction must be executed from the ladder program in a cyclic task in order to use scheduled interrupts sydnuequj pejnpeu s OT Execution condition MSKS Specifies scheduled interrupt interrupt task 1 Sets the scheduled interrupt interval and starts timing The MSKS instruction must be executed only once to make the settings so in general execute MSKS in just one cycle using the upwardly differentiated variation of the instruction uoneJedo jo MO 4 Z O1 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 11 10 Interrupts Specifying MSKS Operands N and C MSKS Operands MSKS Operands N C Interrupt number Scheduled interrupt interval Scheduled interrupt interrupt 0 decimal Disable interrupt stop internal timer task 1 10 to 9 999 decimal Enable interrupt Reset internal timer 14 Reset and restart and then start timer with interrupt interval between 1 0 4 Reset and restart and 999 9 ms Either is reset Example Scheduled Interrupt Time Unit Scheduled interrupt Cyclic tasks itis In intervals of 1 ms Interrupt Interrupt task 1 H Precautions for Correct Use Set a scheduled interrupt interval is longer than the time required to execut
407. m LD AND OR S SUME parison Dou lt gt lt lt gt condition when ble word gt SL AND comparison result is true sighed fT ne a a Mi e E accede OR OR One word a L S1 Comparison data 1 i S2 Comparison data 2 i Double length i S1 1st word of comparison data 1 c MER PLI CESRTEUEUTESDP S2 1st word of comparison data 2 ON execution condition when comparison result is true Time Compari LD AND OR Time comparison instructions compare two BCD time values and son DT lt gt DT create an ON execution condition when the comparison condition DT lt DT is true gt DT gt DT There are three types of time comparison instructions LD LOAD AND and OR Time values year month day hour minute and second can be masked unmasked in the comparison so it is easy to create calendar timer functions C Control Word Bits 00 to 05 of C specify whether or not the time data will be masked for the comparison Bits 00 to 05 mask the seconds minutes hours day month and year respectively If all 6 val ues are masked the instruction will not be executed the execu tion condition will be OFF and the Error Flag will be turned ON 15 8765432120 c o 000 0 0 0 o o o Masks seconds data when ON Masks minutes data when ON Masks hours data when ON Masks day data when ON Masks month data when ON Masks year data when ON C Control word S1 1st word of present time S2
408. m capacity 2K steps 8K steps DM Area capacity 2K words 8K words Of these 1 500 words can be written to the built in EEPROM Of these 7 000 words can be written to the built in EEPROM Mounting Expan Not possible 3 Units maximum Not possible 3 Units maximum sion I O Units and Expansion Units Model with transis Available CPU Unit with 10 I O points only Available tor outputs Pulse outputs Not supported Supported Model with transistor outputs only Built in serial com Not provided RS 232C port provided munications port RS 485 port provided NLILIS1 type only Built in analog Not available Not available Available Option Board Not supported Not supported N NALILT type Supported for one port NOOS 1 type Not Supported Connection port for USB port USB port Programming Device Clock Not provided Provided Using a Battery Cannot be used Can be used sold separately Backup time of 50 hours at 25 C 40 hours at 25 C built in capacitor Battery free opera Always battery free operation Battery free operation if no battery is attached Only tion Only data in the built in EEPROM will be retained data in the built in EEPROM will be retained if power is if power is interrupted for longer than 50 hours interrupted for longer than 40 hours CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 Overview H Precautions for Correct Use For CP1E CPU Units th
409. m word Cannot be accessed by the user D CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices A 1 21 Serial Communications Instructions Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function TRANSMIT TXD Outputs the specified number of bytes of data without conversion from the RS 232C port or built in RS 485 port built into the CPU Unit or the serial Option Board according to the start code and end code specified for no protocol mode in the PLC Setup C Control word 15 1211 87 43 0 G H i S 1st source word i L C Control word IN A N Number of bytes L Byte order 0000 to 0100 hex 0 Most significant bytes first 0 to 256 decimal 1 Least significant bytes first RS and ER signal control 0 No RS and ER signal control Al 0 1 RS signal control Ways 2 ER signal control 3 RS and ER signal control Serial port specifier 1 CPU Unit s RS 232C port 2 Serial Option Board Built in RS485 port RECEIVE RXD Reads the specified number of bytes of data starting with the a D 1st destination word C Control word N Number of bytes to store 0000 to 0100 hex 0 to 256 decimal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 specified first word from the RS 232C port or built in RS 485 port built into the CPU Unit or the serial Option Board according to the start code and end code specified for no protocol mode in the PLC Setup C Control Word 15 1211 8 7 43 0
410. may possibly happen at the same time For CPU Unit version 1 0 or earlier the interval must be longer than 6 ms plus the sum of execution time for interrupt tasks that may possibly happen at the same time The sum of execution time for interrupt tasks in one cycle is stored in A442 If the direction signal is ON or OFF at a high frequency count values may not agree Pulse Direction 1 L 3ms plus the sum of execution time for interrupt tasks Interval of pulse input after direction changing If the input setting is set for pulse direction inputs the Interval of pulse input after the direction changing must be longer than 500us If the pulse is output immediately after the direction changing count values may not agree Pulse Direction a 500ys min CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 9 synduj auno poeoeds ubiH Z TT sBunes spoyjeyy Indu easing 1 2 11 11 High speed Counters EN Additional Information The count of a high speed counter can be monitored to see if it is currently being incremented or decremented The count in the current cycle is compared with the count in the previous cycle to determine if it is being incremented or decremented The results are reflected in the High speed Counter Count Direction Flags Address of High speed Counter Count Direction Flag High speed counter 0 A274 10 High speed counter 1 A275 10 High speed counter 2 A320 10
411. me area A 33 suon ung uononnsul T Y suononJjjsu j oJju02 geq SI L V Appendices Instruction Mnemonic SCALING 3 SCL3 A 34 Variations Symbol Operand We S Source word P1 1st parameter word R Result word Function Converts signed BCD data into signed binary data according to the specified linear function An offset can be input in defining the linear function Positive Offset Negative Offset R signed binary R signed binary Max conversion Max E A Do a conver sion AY AY AX Offset Offset S signed BCD Min N conver S signed BCD 4 sion Min conversion Offset of 0000 R signed binary Max conver sion AX S signed BCD Min conversion P1 First Parameter Word 15 0 P1 us of linear function 8000 to 7FFF signed binary 15 0 aha j Ls 0001 to 9999 BCD 15 0 P142 L L AY 8000 to 7FFF signed binary 15 0 P14 3 L Maximum conversion 8000 to 7FFF signed binary 15 0 P1 4 Minimum conversion 8000 to 7FFF signed binary Note P1 to P1 4 must be in the same area CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Instruction AVERAGE Mnemonic AVG Variations Symbol Operand C S Source word N Number of cycles R Result word A 1 16 Subroutine Instructions App
412. memory Data in specified words of the DM Area can be backed up to the built in EEPROM by using bits in the Auxiliary Area Other words are not backed up Other areas in the I O memory including Holding Area data Counter PVs and Counter Completion Flags Not backed up to the built in EEPROM CP1E CPU Unit Built in EEPROM m backup memory Built in RAM Ladder programs Ladder programs Changing program H H uomneinBijuoo foule v HUN Add L Z PLC power turned ON Parameter Area PLC Setup changed Parameter Area l O Memory Areas PLC power turned ON I O Area Work Area Holding Area Operation using control Auxiliary Area bits in Auxiliary Area Timer Counter Areas DM Area Part of DM Area PLC power turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 5 3 CPU Unit Operation 3 2 2 Backing Up Ladder Programs and PLC Setup Ladder programs and the PLC Setup are automatically backed up to and restored from the built in EEPROM backup memory Backing Up Memory Ladder programs and PLC Setup are backed up to the built in EEPROM backup memory by trans ferring them from the CX Programmer or writing them using online editing e Restoring Memory Ladder programs and PLC Setup are automatically transferred from the built in EEPROM backup memory to the RAM memory when power is turned ON again or at startup Precautions for Safe Use The B
413. mer for CP1E together 2 Copy the rungs of the program to be used from the Ladder Programming Window of the CX Pro grammer CX One CX One Lite and paste them into the CX Programmer for CP1E EN Additional Information Files created with the CX Programmer for CP1E CXE can be opened with CX Programmer version 8 2 and higher ATdD F uim aiqesn se2ieg Hunuwei601d T ST CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 3 18 Programming Device Operations 18 2 Overview of CX Programmer This section describes the preparations that must be completed before a ladder program can be cre ated including connecting the CP1E to the computer and installing the USB driver 18 2 1 CX Programmer The CX Programmer is a programming application for creating the ladder programs that are executed in a CP1E CPU Unit In addition to ladder program creation the CX Programmer also has functions that are needed to set up and operate the CP1E including functions for debugging ladder programs displaying addresses and present values monitoring setting the connected PLC programming and monitoring The CX Programmer has fewer sub menus making it relatively simple The installation of the CX Programmer is described in 4 1 5 Installing the Software in the CP1E CPU Unit Hardware User s Manual Cat No W479 For details on the operation of the CX Programmer refer to the CX Programmer Online Help 18 2 2 CX Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation
414. mming P recautions for details Always ON Flag Name in CX Programmer P On s6e 4 uonipuo 6 S Function Always ON Always OFF Flag P_Off Always OFF Error Flag P ER Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect an instruction processing error to indicate that an instruction ended because of an error When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error Instruction Error Operation program execution will be stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag 4295 08 will be turned ON when the Error Flag is turned ON Access Error Flag P AER Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs The Illegal Access Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of memory that should not be accessed When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error Instruction Error Operation program execution will be stopped and the Instruction Processing Error Flag A4295 10 will be turned ON when the Access Error Flag is turned ON Carry Flag P CY Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera tion or a 1 is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol Math instructions Greater Than Flag PGT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range Equal
415. most 4 digits The PVs are refreshed during regular I O refreshing CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 2 Positioning Control This section describes how to use pulse outputs with trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration when using the PLS2 instruction 12 2 1 Positioning Control Configuration If the target frequency starting frequency acceleration and deceleration rate direction are set before hand the following time chart will perform trapezoidal positioning control Joquo gt Buruonisod Z ZT Specify the output waveform in the instruction operands Target frequency Acceleration Deceleration rate rate d Specified number of MUN EEE pulses Starting frequency uoneunBijuo2 oquo Buiuonisog L 2 zL Target frequency 1 Hz to 100 kHz in increments of 1 Hz Starting frequency 0 Hz to 100 kHz in increments of 1 Hz Acceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65 535 Hz every 4 ms Deceleration rate Set in increments of 1 Hz from 1 to 65 535 Hz every 4 ms Direction specification Set to CW or CCW Specified number of Relative coordinates 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Incre pulses menting and decrementing in each direction 2 147 483 647 Absolute coordinates 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 12 2 2 Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning e Selecting Relative or Absolute Coordinates The pulse output
416. n An origin search is performed using the Origin Search Start Switch CIO 0 00 When the origin search is finished the PCB Storage Enabled Output CIO 100 03 is turned ON When a PCB has been stored the stocker is raised relative positioning using the PCB Storage Completed Input CIO 0 03 Storing PCBs is repeated until the stocker is full QA QNS The number of PCBs in the stocker is counted with counter CO by counting the number of times the stocker is raised 6 When the stocker is full it is moved CIO 100 01 and only the conveyor is lowered absolute positioning when stoker movement is completed CIO 0 04 7 An emergency stop is executed to stop pulse output with the Emergency Stop Switch Input CIO 0 01 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 37 12 Pulse Outputs i Preparations e PLC Setup Setting Use define origin operation for pulse output 0 Note The Use define origin operation setting is read from the PLC Setup when the power supply is turned ON q PLC Settings NewPLC1 5 x File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Patt Serial Option Part Built in Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Out gt Base Settings Undefined Origin Hold C Search Retum Initial Speed al pps Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only v Limit Input Signal NC f Define Origin Operation Settings r Origin Return IV Use define origin operation Speed i 0 ds Search Direction
417. n below the decimal point in 1 0000 in binary T t Indicates this value The 8 bits from bit 23 to bit 30 contain the exponent The exponent is expressed in binary as the n in 2 The actual value is 2 7 This format conforms to the IEEE 754 standard for single precision floating point data It is used only with instructions that convert or calculate floating point data Input using operands in the CX Programmer as signed decimal or 32 bit hexadecimal with the symbol When inputting operands in the I O Memory Edit Monitor Window of the CX Programmer as signed decimal values with seven digits or less the value will be automatically converted to scientific notation mantissax 10EXponent for setting and monitoring Inputs must be made using scientific notation for val ues with eight or more digits Example When 1234 00 is input it will become 1 234000e 003 in scientific notation For the mantissax10EXponent the value before the e is the man tissa and the value after the e is the signed exponent Data range for single precision floating point decimal 3 402823 x 1038 lt Value x 1 175494 x 10 38 0 41 175494 x 10 38 Value lt 3 402823 x 1038 4 14 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming 4 3 7 1 0 Refresh Timing The following methods are used to refresh external I O Cyclic refreshing Immediate refreshing instructions with the variation and IORF i Cy
418. n A 27 A 1 14 Table Data Processing Instructions essseeenenenn eene A 30 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 13 14 A 2 A 1 15 Data Control Instr ctions itte terit irte Re FR pet ipee Ced cue A 31 A 1416 Subroutine Instructions oa e en eii tee Ye te ce Rte e A 35 A 1 17 Interrupt Control Instructions nnne nnne nnne nennen nnns A 36 A 1 18 High speed Counter Pulse Output Instructions esseeseseeneennenen A 37 A 19 Step Instructions ete ter el Seneca Deos eden A 44 A 1 20 B sicT O UnitInstr ctions scit oe bte Pede IGNEUS A 45 A 1 21 Serial Communications Instructions nennen nnne A 49 A 1 22 GlockInstr ctlons 5 itti e ee ERTPER BERE DA HD Du ee RES A 50 A 1 23 Failure Diagnosis Instructions 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenneeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeneneeeeseeeeseneeeeseneeeeenaeereaes A 51 A 1224 Other Instructioris inii peterem Cere Lee t de d DER T ea tend A 51 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address eese eee na A 52 A 2 1 Read only Words iei LR acte hi Ee LEER Hec fe eed ees s A 52 A 2 2 Read Write Words niet dep enin nude Ha nerd teed ecto dese ipee ed A 70 Response Performance sss A 80 A 3 1 V O Response Time ici 2 pene te e a odi ee ee es A 80 A 3 2 Interrupt Response TME aA ette e m RUE ERRARE iara AINEENA A 82 A 3 3 Serial PLC Link Response Performance ssssssssseeeneeneee nennen nnne nnns A 83 A 3 4 P
419. n pulse inputs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 suonoung uiing 104 suone ojy jeuruuo 8 sjeuiuue 1nduj uiing Duneoojv c e 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations i Prohibiting Repeated Use of Input Terminal Number The input terminals 00 to 11 of CIO 0 are used for input interrupts quick response inputs high speed counters origin searches and normal inputs Therefore do not use the input terminals repeatedly For example if quick response input 2 is used then input terminal 02 is occupied so it cannot be used for normal input 2 input interrupt 2 quick response input 2 counter 2 increment counter 1 phase A increment or counter 0 direction A priority is as follows when used repeatedly Origin search settings High speed counter settings Input settings 8 3 4 Allocating Built in Output Temrinals i Allocating Functions to Built in Output Terminals Output terminals are allocated functions by setting parameters in the PLC Setup Set the PLC Setup so that each terminal is used for only one function e E14 20 30 40 60 S N14 20 30 40 60 S 1 or NA20 CPU Units When a pulse output instruc PLC Setup When the PWM 5 Other than those s 5 SH Output terminal block shown at the right tion SPED ACC PLS2 or Origin search settings on instruction is exe ORG is executed Pulse Output 0 1 Tab Page cuted Termina lrenmimel Fixed duty ratio pulse outpu
420. n the following order Register the comparison table with the CTBL COMPARISON Register the comparison table TABLE LOAD instruction Specify the interrupt tasks to be started in this step Jeguno peaeds u6iH TT sydnueul Start comparison with the CTBL COMPARISON TABLE Start comparison LOAD or INI MODE CONTROL instruction Here high speed counter interrupts will be valid Stop with the INI MODE CONTROL instruction Stop comparison Refer to 11 3 2 Present Value Comparison for details 11 3 2 Present Value Comparison The comparison of the high speed counter PV has the following two ways Target Value Comparison and Range Comparison i Target Value Comparison The specified interrupt task is executed when the high speed counter PV matches a target value regis tered in the table The comparison conditions target values and counting directions are registered in the comparison table along with the corresponding interrupt task number The specified interrupt task will be exe cuted when the high speed counter PV matches the registered target value Comparison is executed in the order set in the comparison table Once comparison has cycled through the comparison table it will return and wait for a match with the first target value again uosueduio enj eA 1ueseJd z e LL The following examples show the operation of an interrupt task for a comparison table Example 1 High speed counter PV Comparison ta
421. n was stopped to 800F task 0 to 15 occurs because of a program error Note A298 and A299 contain the pro gram address where program execution was stopped A295 08 Instruction Processing This flag and the Error Flag ER willbe ON Error Flag ON Cleared Cleared When pro A294 Error Flag turned ON when an instruction pro OFF Error Flag OFF gram error A298 cessing error has occurred and the occurs A299 PLC Setup has been set to stop opera PLC tion for an instruction error CPU Unit Setup operation will stop and the ERR ALM Opera indicator will light when this flag goes tion when ON instruc Note The task number where the error tion error occurred will be stored in A294 has and the program address will be occurred stored in A298 and A299 09 Indirect DM BCD Error This flag and the Access Error Flag ON Not BCD Cleared Cleared When pro A294 Flag AER will be turned ON when an indi OFF Normal gram error A298 rect DM BCD error has occurred and occurs A299 the PLC Setup has been set to stop PLC operation an indirect DM BCD error Setup This error occurs when the content of Opera an indirectly addressed DM word is not tion when BCD although BCD mode has been instruc selected CPU Unit operation will stop tion error and the ERR ALM indicator will light has when this flag goes ON occurred Note The task number where the error occurred will be stored in A294 and the program address will be stored in A298 and A299 A 58
422. ncy The target changed rection position is not changed Indepen dent Target fre quency Change Changing Nuriberidf poses ACC can be exe PULS Number of m specified with PULS 1 i speed the target Pulse frequency Spetifed number of Gaes not change cuted during posi l pulses smoothly speed fre New target frequency a Mith PULSI mund tioning to change ACC ad Relative or with quency Target frequency i zagar me acer eraon Independent absolute accelera during posi E i deceleration rate pulse speci tion rate tioning and target fre l fication decelera accelera pine quency ACC Port A Execution of ACC tion rate tion rate independent mode The target position Independent Pulse e ACC indi d d d MI decelera eros ee ee specified number PLS2 Direction tion rate The target position is not changed of ulses is not but the acceleration deceleration rate p l Indepen is changed changed ACC dent Independent Accelera tion decel eration rate Target fre quency CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Example M Procedure Operation MUR Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Change Changing Pulse frequency Specified number of pulses PLS2 can be exe PULS Number of speed the target Newigrgotirequenoy ee ee cuted during posi pulses smoothly speed fre Tring tioning to change ACG Relative
423. net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Omron s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts Interest Omron at its option may charge Buyer 1 1 2 interest per month or the maximum legal rate whichever is less on any balance not paid within the stated terms Orders Omron will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Products Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture production sale delivery importa tion consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Omron may without liabil ity and in addition to other
424. ng driver ru Jogging with an ACC Pulse output instruction 1 ace Pulse output PV in Auxiliary Area Origin search with ORG Origin input instruction phase Z CW limit input ORG CCW limit input Origin proximity input Positioning completed Error counter reset 12 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Wiring for NOOS 1 type CPU Unit An external power supply is required for NLILIS 1 type CPU Units when using the PWM output Provide a DC24V external power supply to V and V terminals as follows E Wiring Example H 9 Sinking outputs L i v 00 01 02 v COM V COM 03 E m 9 Although V and COM V are connected internally also wire them externally S Sourcing outputs V 00 01 02 COM V COM 03 Although V and COM V are connected internally also wire them externally Do not connect an external power supply to NLILI type CPU Units CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 3 12 Pulse Outputs 12 1 2 Flow of Operation 2 Create ladder Cyclic task interrupt task program Setting is required for the following situations Performing an origin search Using the Limit Input Signal as an input to func tions othe
425. ng fre quency CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 51 uremed 3ndino esind 6 ZT apo 1uepuedepu jo 1uo2 Buluolisog Z 6 ZL 12 52 12 Pulse Outputs Triangular Control If the specified number of pulses is less than the number required just to reach the target frequency and return to zero the function will automatically reduce the acceleration deceleration time and perform triangu lar control acceleration and deceleration only An error will not occur Pulse frequency Specified number of pulses Pulse frequency Specified with PULS Specified number of pulses Specified with PLS2 Target Target frequency frequency Time Execution of ACC Execution of PLS2 Changing Settings Example Procedure Operation s Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Change Changing Number of pulses SPED can be exe PULS Number of speedin thespeedin Pulse frequency Specified umae E ER cuted during posi pulses one step one step New target frequency tioning to change SPED e Relative or during oper Target frequency raise or lower the Independent absolute ation pulse output fre j p pulse speci Sie cal in one step fication e target position Execution of SPED 9 p SPED Port independent mode specified number Independent SPED independent mode f t ad Pulse executed again to change the o pu ses IS nO Di ti target freque
426. ng over mined seeing pro Turned ON when power is turned CESSeS ON Turned ON when operation starts OFF Origin established ON Origin not established 06 Pulse Output 1 ON when the pulse output 1 PV Cleared Refreshed At origin Flag matches the origin 0 each cycle OFF Not stopped at origin during over r E seeing pro ON Stopped at origin gesses 07 Pulse Output 1 ON when an error occurred while out Cleared Refreshed Output Stopped Error putting pulses in the pulse output 1 ori when origin Flag gin search function search The Pulse Output 1 Output Stop Error starts code will be written to A445 Refreshed OFF No error when pulse output stop ON Stop error occurred error occurs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 57 ssauppy Aq suone ojy eauy faeixny z v SpJOM Ajuo peay Z Y Appendices Address Status Related 5 E after Status at Write Name Function Settings es flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A283 00 PWM Output 0 ON when pulses are being output from Cleared Refreshed Output In progress PWM output 0 when pulse Flag Cleared when operation starts or output starts or stops Stops OFF Stopped ON Outputting pulses A294 Task Number when This word contains the task number of Cyclic tasks 0000 Cleared Cleared When pro A298 Program Stopped the task that was being executed when Interrupt tasks 8000 gram error A299 program executio
427. ng the CX Programmer and include annotations and row comments Program Index The program index provides information on program sections created using the CX Programmer as well as program com ments Parameter Area Stored Stored Setting PLC Setup Various initial settings are made in the PLC Setup using soft ware switches Refer to Section 7 PLC Setup I O Memory Areas The I O Memory Areas are used for reading and writing from Stored Not stored the user programs It is partitioned into the following regions according to purpose Regions where data is cleared when power to the CPU Unit is reset and regions where data is retained Regions where data are exchanged with other Units and regions that are used internally DM Area words backed up to backup memory built in Stored Stored EEPROM using control bits in the Auxiliary Area CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 2 3 2 Internal Memory in the CPU Unit 2 1 3 Transferring Data from a Programming Device Data that has been created using the CX Programmer is transferred to the internal memory in the CPU Unit as shown in the following diagram CX Programmer CPU Unit ees User created Programs Ms User Program Area q User programs User programs a 1 1 1 1 p 1 I Symbol Table Symbol Table 1 1 1 1 1 1 Comments and Comments and program index program index eooo
428. ngth stop 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even When power is turned ON bits parity 7 bits 2 bits odd 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity 8 bits 1 bit even 8 bits 1 bit odd 8 bits 1 bit no parity 2 1 3 Unit Number 0 0 When power is turned ON 31 2 2 NT Link 1 N Settings 2 2 1 Baud 115 200 bps 38 400 bps standard When power is turned ON 115 200 bps high speed 2 2 2 No NT PC Link Max 1 0 When power is turned ON Highest unit number of PT that can be connected to the PLC 7 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 5 sbumes dmes 51d Z Z I Od Dc ec SuH ung v c 7 7 PLC Setup 2 3 Name RS 232C No protocol Settings Default Possible settings When setting is read by CPU Unit 2 3 1 Baud 9 600 bps 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps 38 400 bps 57 600 bps 115 200 bps When power is turned ON Format data length stop bits par ity 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits even 7 bits 2 bits odd 7 bits 2 bits no parity 7 bits 1 bit even 7 bits 1 bit odd 7 bits 1 bit no parity 8 bits 2 bits even 8 bits 2 bits odd 8 bits 2 bits no parity
429. nica CJ1M CPULII tions Units CJ1G CPU CJ1W SCULILI V1 SYSMAC CP Series WA461 CP1L L10DD To learn the basic Describes the following information for CP1L CP1E CPU Unit CP1L L14DD setup methods of the CP1L CP1E PLCs Introduction Manual CP1L L20D0 CP1L CP1E PLCs Basic configuration and component names CP1L M30DD Mounting and wiring a TD x Programming data transfer and debugging 4 E using the CX Programmer CP1E EOODD dated i e CP1E NOODO pplication program examples CP1E NADODD CX Simulator Operation W366 CXONE ALLILIC V4 Operating procedures Describes the operating procedures for the Manual ALLICID V4 for CX Simulator Simulation Support Software for Windows computersUsing simulation in the CX Programmer with CX Programmer CP1E CX Simulator CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Overview This section gives an overview of the CP1E and describes its procedures 1 1 1 2 1 3 CPIE Overview c cece cece cece e eee eee eee eee hm rar 1 2 1 1 1 Overview of Features ie si eresie dhoca ie pe cette teens 1 2 Basic Operating Procedure iesesessee nennen 1 4 Difference between E N NAO D type and E NLIDIS type i e 1 5 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 1 1 Overview 1 1 CP1E Overview 1 1 1 Overview of Features The SYSMAC CP1E Programmable Controller is a package type PLC made by OMRON that is designed for easy application The CP1E includes E
430. nit CIO 200 CIO 200 to CIO 200 to CIO 200 to 201 202 209 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 20210 CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 0 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 20210 CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 1 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 2 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to Serial PLC No 3 203 205 219 Link Words Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 4 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 5 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 6 203 205 219 Polled Unit CIO 201 CIO 202 to CIO 203 to CIO 210 to No 7 203 205 219 CIO 289 Not used CIO 202 to CIO 204 to CIO 206 to 289 289 289 14 26 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Built in RS 232C Port 14 Serial Communications Name Address Details Read write Refresh timing Built in RS 232C Port A393 00to When built in RS 232C port is Read Cleared when power is turned ON Communicating with A393 07 being used in NT link mode the bit Turns ON the bit corresponding to the unit number Polled Unit Flags corresponding to the Unit perform of the Polled Unit that is communicating via built in ing communications will be ON Bits RS 232C port in NT link mode or Serial PLC Link 00 to 07 correspond to unit num mode Dore Dto respectively Bits 00 to 07
431. nm nnn nnns 17 42 NOLES uid p ien ote credet pet ter etd e t c dua vein daft co dau cgo e es eed aed 17 42 Section 18 Programming Device Operations 18 1 Programming Devices Usable with the CPTE reernenenne nnne nnns 18 2 18 2 Overview of CX Programmer eerie nennen nnne nnn nain iaa nuni ia aiia nnn u uua ananin 18 4 18 2 1 OX Programmiet 2 e Ine ence Fee D EI de ee Coe E Ee N EE CAE EE 18 4 18 2 2 CX Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation esee 18 4 19 2 3 Belgio orent ieu ue el tees puse 21 bia ce ll A E Mie e EM 18 7 18 3 Creating a Ladder Program esses enne anra aia a n n na 18 8 19 9 1 Inputting a Ladder Program ete eerte ee tenen 18 8 18 3 2 Saving and Reading Ladder Programs nennen 18 15 19 83 83 Editing Ladder Programs oie Ern e ee re tede an adie 18 16 18 4 Connecting Online to the CP1E and Transferring the Program ense 18 19 18 4 1 Gornnectindg Onlihe ete eR HER IRE REM DABERRUERIREDAE 18 19 18 4 2 Changing Operating Modes nennen teneret nnnen renes 18 20 18 4 3 Transferring a Ladder Program and the PLC Setup sseeee 18 21 18 4 4 Starting Operation entente etae e Ett Lee ee Pug ib Gee n En 18 22 18 5 Online Monitoring and Debugging nere ener nnn nnnm nnns 18 24 18 5 1 Monitoring Status a2 ceto te emigrantes e ea een cane 18 24
432. nnections possi can be set to client possible ble Possible with both UDP IP and Simultaneous connec Same as previous models tion of multiple appli TCP IP cations in a computer Mail functions Supported Not Supported FTP server function Supported Not Supported Socket services function Supported Not Supported Automatic clock information adjustment Supported Not Supported FINS frame length 2 012 552 CP1E 1 016 CP1L CP1H Buffer numbers 392K bytes 8K bytes Inner bus Parallel Serial port Note Limited by the CP1W CIF41 inner bus protocol Host Link 7 2 E 115200 bps the system response perfor mance is longer than the existing Ethernet Unit Please consider the FINS command processing time and buffer limitation when using the CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board 17 42 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Programming Device Operations zT This section describes the use of the CX Programmer to create a ladder programs to operate the CP1E transfer the program to the CP1E and debug the program It also describes other basic functions of the CX Programmer 18 1 Programming Devices Usable with the CP1E se 18 2 18 2 Overview of CX Programmer ssssesese nnn nnn 18 4 18 2 GX Programmers iso pResk D RRLD UREPRETT teehee saddens 18 4 18 2 2 CX Programmer Flow from Startup to Operation 0200 18 4 18 2 3 Help ion RERO Rr PR ERE RSEN PE
433. nput Signal No effect on other Origin Reverse performed the Limit Input Sig and Limit Input Signal as well as the PLC port Error nal in the search direction was Setup s I O settings Also check the PLC input while the Origin Proxim Setup s Signal Type settings NC or NO for ity Input Signal was reversing each input signal and then execute the origin When an origin search with Search again reversal at the limit is being performed and the Origin Proximity Input Signal is not being used the Limit Input Signal in the search direction was input while the Origin Input Signal was reversing Positioning 0300 The Servo Drive s Positioning Adjust the Positioning Monitor Time setting No effect on other Timeout Error Completed Signal does not or Servo system gain setting Check the port come ON within the Positioning Positioning Completed Signal wiring correct Monitor Time specified in the it if necessary and then execute the origin PLC Setup search again 12 48 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 9 Pulse Output Pattern 12 Pulse Outputs The CP1E CPU Unit s pulse output function enables operation in Continuous Mode for which the num ber of output pluses is not specified or in Independent Mode for which the number of output pulses is specified Continuous Mode is used for speed control and Independent Mode is used for positioning 12 9 1 Speed Control Continuous Mode The following operation
434. nput s VIN I IN and COM terminals 3 Wire I O lines apart from power lines AC power supply lines three phase power lines etc 4 If noise is received from power supply lines insert a noise filter in the power supply input section CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 3 M Q L GL uoneJjedo JO MO 4 T T ST 15 Analog I O Function 15 4 5 Refer to the following diagram regarding wiring disconnections when voltage input is being used Example If analog input device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both devices as shown above approximately 1 3 or 1 6 V will be applied to the input for input device 1 If a wiring disconnection occurs when voltage input is being used the situation described below will result Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices or use an isolator for each input If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at points A or B in the above diagram an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line in the diagram If that occurs a voltage of approximately 1 3 to 1 2 of the output voltage of the other con nected device will be generated If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V open circuit detection may not be possible Also if a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram the negative side will be used in for both devices and open circuit detection will not b
435. ns Contents This section provides a summary of instructions used with a CP1E CPU Unit Section 2 Instruction This section describes the functions operands and sample programs of the instructions that are supported by a CP1E CPU Unit Section 3 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps This section provides the execution times for all instructions used with a CP1E CPU Unit Section 4 Monitoring and Computing the Cycle Time This section describes how to monitor and calculate the cycle time of a CP1E CPU Unit that can be used in the programs Appendices The appendices provide a list of instructions by Mnemonic and ASCII code table for the CP1E CPU Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Manual Structure Page Structure and Icons The following page structure and icons are used in this manual 5 Installation and wiring Level 1 h ead i ng Level 2 heading Level 2 heading 5 2 Installation r Level 3 heading Gives the current Level 3 heading 5 2 1 Installation Location headings J DiN Track Installation Step in a procedu re 1 use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to release g them and mount the Units to the DIN Track z Indicates a step ina a i procedure Pp 5 Page tab 2 Y Gives the number Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching the top of the Units on the Trac
436. nt frequency raig quency at a Ld Acceleration Time fixed rate The ACC deceleration rate Execution of ACC frequency can Continuous be acceler CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 ated or decel erated 12 49 uremed NANO esind 6 ZT POW snonunuoog joAUOD peeds L 6 Z4 12 Pulse Outputs Example ZR Procedure Operation QUIE Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Changing the Pulse frequency Acceleration Changes the ACC Port speed in a hte s acceleration or Continuous Continuous polyline curve ee eateney deceleration eo deceleration Target frequency r i deceleration 1 i during operation DUNS 1 7 rate during ACC Acceleration dni EN a acceleration or Continuous deceleration rate f time deceleration Execution of ACC Execution of ACC Execution of ACC Change Not supported direction Stopping a Pulse Output Example ne Procedure Operation xum Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Stop pulse Immediate stop puse frequency Stops the SPED or Port output pulse output ACC Stop pulse css immediately Continuous output L Time INI Execution of INI Stop pulse Immediate stop Pulse frequency Stops the SPED Port output t pulse output J e Continuous P t frequency immediately SPED Target Continuous frequency 0 gt Time Execution of SPE
437. ntains the task number of Upper digits of the Cleared Cleared Where Program HE task ids DUREE execu brogram address Stopped ion was stopped Upper digits CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 59 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ey fueixny z v Spon uo pe y 1 z V Appendices Address Status Related after Status at Write Name Function Settings ops flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A300 Error Log Pointer When an error occurs the Error Log 00 to 14 hex Retained Retained Refreshed A500 14 Pointer is incremented by 1 to indicate when error the location where the next error record occurs will be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log Area A100 to A199 Note 1 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged 2 The Error Log Pointer can be cleared to 00 by turning A500 14 the Error Log Reset Bit ON 3 When the Error Log Pointer has reached 14 hex 20 deci mal the next record is stored in A195 to A199 when the next error occurs A310 Manufacturing Lot The manufacturing lot number is stored Retained Retained Number Lower Digits in 6 digits hexadecimal X Y and Z in A311 Manufacturing Lot the lot number are converted to 10 11 Number Upper Digits and 12 respectively Examples Lot number 01805 A310 0801 A311 0005 Lot number 30Y05 A310 1130 A311 0005 A315 13 Option Board Error ON when the
438. nted are stored in a stocker When a stocker becomes full it is moved to the conveyance point Positioning Operation for Vertical Conveyor Stocker conveyance position From mounter Operation Pattern CDAn origin search is performed QFixed distance positioning is repeated The system is returned to the original position CCW Origin servo Origin cw limit phase Z proximity limit 1 Origin search Fixed distance positioning repeated cw 50 000 Hz C350 Hex 10 000 2710 Hex CCW cw Acceleration deceleration Return to start 1 000 Hz 4 ms 03E8 hex PCB storage i i PCB storage i i Stocker 1 Stocker movement enabled pi nm vi ic i moved completed Y y vi 12 36 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs e Wiring Example Using SmartStep A series Servo Drive Origin Search Start Switch CIO 0 00 Servo Drive LI Emergency Stop Switch CIO 0 01 gt 3 g Stocker Moved CIO 100 01 PCB Storage Completed CIO 0 03 g Stocker Movement Completed PCB Storage Enabled CIO 100 03 o CIO 0 04 3 6 m a SmartStep A series R88A CPUOOLIS and resistor inainmmaan ane 0000 o000 00000 D O
439. ntrol data NV First word with new PV CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Function INI 880 can be used to execute the following operations To start or stop comparison of a high speed counter s PV to the comparison table registered with CTBL 882 To change the PV of the high speed counter To change the PV of the pulse output origin fixed at 0 To stop pulse output INI instruction executed New origin Present origin Pulse output PV Example Setting the Present Position as the Origin Execution condition INI 0000 C1 Port specifier example for pulse output 0 0002 C2 Control data example for changing PV D100 H S First word with new PV 15 0 Di00 0 0 00 D101 0 000 P Port Specifier 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 0010 hex High speed counter 0 0011 hex High speed counter 1 0012 hex High speed counter 2 0013 hex High speed counter 3 0014 hex High speed counter 4 0015 hex High speed counter 5 1000 hex PWM 891 output 0 C Control Data 0000 hex Starts comparison 0001 hex Stops comparison 0002 hex Changes the PV 0003 hex Stops pulse output NV First Word with New PV If C is 0002 hex i e when changing a PV NV and NV 1 con tain the new PV Any values in NV and NV 1 are ignored when C is not 0002 hex 15 0 NV Lo
440. nual W480 Performs trapezoidal positioning control as the following time chart Sets the target frequency starting frequency acceleration and deceleration rate and direction Target frequency Acceleration Deceleration rate rate Specified number of pulses Starting frequency P Port Specifier 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 M Output Mode 15 121 87 43 0 M Relative absolute specifier 0 hex Relative pulses 1 hex Absolute pulses Direction 0 hex CW 1 hex CCW Pulse output method 1 hex Pulse direction Always 0 hex S First Word of Settings Table 15 0 S1 Acceleration rate 1 to 65535 Hz 0001 to FFFF S141 Deceleration rate Specify the increase or decrease in the requency per pulse control period 4 ms S142 Lower word with target frequency 1 to 100 000 Hz S143 Upperword with target frequency 0009 0000 t0 0001 S60 nex Specify the frequency after acceleration deceleration in Hz S1 4 Lower word with number of output pulses S145 Upper word with number of output pulses J Relative pulse output 0 to 2 147 483 647 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Absolute pulse output 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex A 41 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononasu 1ndino esing jejunoc peeds uBiH 8L L Y
441. nuary 1 2001 A514 Number of Power Contains the number of times that 0000 to FFFF hex Retained Retained Refreshed Interruptions power has been interrupted since the when power is power was first turned ON The data is turned ON stored in binary To reset this value overwrite the current value with 0000 Note The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged A515 Operation Start Time The time that operation started as a See at left Retained Retained See at left o result of changing the operating mode A517 to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored CP1E here in BCD N NA A515 00 to A515 07 Seconds 00 to S 59 type A515 08 to A515 15 Minutes 00 to CPU 59 Uni A516 00 to A516 07 Hour 00 to 23 only A516 08 to A516 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A517 00 to A517 07 Month 01 to 12 A517 08 to A517 15 Year 00 to 99 Note 1 The previous start time is stored after turning ON the power supply until operation is started 2 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged 3 In an ELILI S type CPU Unit or if the clock data is not set for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 71 ssauppy Aq suogesojiy ey Auelpny z v SPJOM 9IHAWPESH c c V Appendices Address Name Words Bits A518 to A520 CP1E N NA Das type CPU Unit only Operation End Time Function T
442. ny prob lems that might occur if this data becomes unstable 2 In an ELILI S type CPU Uint or if the clock data is not set for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 Retained Retained Written every cycle A360to 01 to A391 15 Executed FAL Number Flags A 64 The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will be turned ON when FAL is executed Bits A360 01 to A391 15 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511 Note The flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared ON That FAL was executed OFF That FAL wasn t executed Retained Cleared Refreshed when error OCCUIS A402 15 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 z after Status at Write Name Function Settings Bene flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A392 04 Built in RS 232C Port ON when an error has occurred at the ON Error Retained Cleared Refreshed Error Flag CP1E built in RS 232C port Not valid in NT OFF No error when error N NALILI S type CPU Link mode occurs Unit only 05 Built in RS 232C Port ON when the built in RS 232C portis ON Able to send Retained Cleared Written after Send Ready Flag able to send data in no protocol mode OFF Unable to send t
443. o 3 CIO 3140 to 3149 No 3 CIO 3140 to 3149 No 4 CIO 250 to 259 No 4 CIO 250 to 259 No 4 CIO 3150 to 3159 No 4 CIO 3150 to 3159 No 5 CIO 260 to 269 No 5 CIO 260 to 269 No 5 CIO 3160 to 3169 No 5 CIO 3160 to 3169 No 6 CIO 270 to 279 No 6 CIO 270 to 279 No 6 CIO 3170 to 3179 No 6 CIO 3170 to 3179 No 7 ClO 280 to 289 No 7 CIO 280 to 289 No 7 CIO 3180 to 3189 No 7 CIO 3180 to 3189 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications e Polling Unit Link Method The data for all the Polled Units in the Serial PLC Links are reflected in the Polling Unit only and each Polled Unit reflects the data of the Polling Unit only The advantage of the Polling Unit link method is that the addresses allocated for the local Polled Unit data are the same in each Polled Unit allowing data to be accessed using common ladder program ming The areas allocated for Polled Units not present in the network are undefined in the Polling Unit only Example Polling Unit Link Method Highest Unit Number 3 In the following diagram Polled Unit No 2 is a Unit not participating in the network so the corre sponding area in the Polling Unit is undefined Polling Unit Polled Unit No 0 Polled Unit No 1 Polled Unit No 3 A Local area 9 Polling Unt __ Polling Unit
444. o Iy Mow N t T uogeoo lvy PAV OID e v ZLE 17 Ethernet Option Board i Error Status The status of errors that occur at the Ethernet Option Board is reflected as shown in the following dia gram 15 CIO 81 14 13 12 11 Band rate disagreement Address disagreement EEPROM error 0 IP address setting error IP address table error IP router table error Bit Name Correction 0 to 1 Reserved Always 0 2 IP address setting The following cannot be used as IP address set error tings Host IDs that are all 0 or all 1 Network IDs that are all 0 or all 1 Subnetwork IDs that are all 1 Addresses beginning with 127 7F hex Reset the IP address 3 IP address table Correct the IP address table If the problem cannot be error resolved replace the CPU Unit 4 IP router table error Correct the IP router table If the problem cannot be resolved replace the CPU Unit 5106 Reserved Always 0 710 12 Reserved Always 0 13 Baud rate disagree Make sure that the baud rate setting of the Serial ment Option Port is 115 200 bps Change the baud rate of the Serial Option Port 14 Address disagree Make sure that the node number and the last byte of ment the IP address are the same and then set other host IDs to 0 Change the address conversion method 15 EEPROM error Restart the PC If the problem cannot be resolved replace the Ethernet Option Board i FINS TCP Connection St
445. o be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions OMRON AUTOMATION amp SAFETY OMRON AUTOMATION AND SAFETY THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS Chicago IL USA 847 843 7900 800 556 6766 e www omron247 com OMRON CANADA INC HEAD OFFICE OMRON ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE Toronto ON Canada 416 286 6465 866 986 6766 www omron247 com Cono Sur 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO HEAD OFFICE M xico DF 52 55 59 01 43 00 01 800 226 6766 mela omron com OMRON ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO SALES OFFICE OMRON CHILE SALES OFFICE Santiago 56 9 9917 3920 OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES Apodaca N L 52 81 11 56 99 20 01 800 226 6766 mela omron com 54 11 4783 5300 OMRON ELETR NICA DO BRASIL LTDA HEAD OFFICE Sao Paulo SP Brasil 55 11 2101 6300 www omron com br OMRON EUROPE B V Wegalaan 67 69 NL 2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands e 31 0 23 568 13 00 e www industrial omron eu Authorized Distributor ArLmU26 3 10 Automation Control Systems Machine Automation Controllers MAC Programmable Controllers PLC e Operator interfaces HMI Distributed I O Software Drives amp Motion Controls Servo amp AC Drives Motion Controllers amp Encoders Temperature amp Process Controllers Single and Multi loop Controllers Sensors amp Vision e Proximity Sensors Photoelectric Sensors Fiber
446. of month month year and day of week are stored each cycle Seconds 00 to 59 BCD Minutes 00 to 59 BCD Hour 00 to 23 BCD Day of the month 01 to 31 BCD Month 01 to 12 BCD Year 00 to 99 BCD Day of the week 00 Sunday 01 Monday 02 Tuesday 03 Wednesday 04 Thursday 05 Friday 06 Saturday A351 00 to A351 07 A351 08 to A351 15 A352 00 to A352 07 A352 08 to A352 15 A353 00 to A353 07 A353 08 to A353 15 A354 00 to A354 07 EN Additional Information 512915 Z 9T The clock cannot be used if a battery is not installed or the battery voltage is low Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Name Address Contents Start up Time A510 and A511 The time at which the power was turned ON day of month hour minutes and seconds Power Interruption Time A512 and A513 The time at which the power was last interrupted day of month hour minutes and seconds Power ON Clock Data 1 A720 to A722 Consecutive times at which the power was turned Power ON Clock Data 2 A723 to A725 ON year month day of month hour minutes and seconds The times are progressively older from Power ON Clock Data 3 A726 to A728 number 1 to number 10 Power ON Clock Data 4 A729 to A731 Power ON Clock Data 5 A732 to A734 Power ON Clock Data 6 A735 to A737 Power ON Clock Data 7 A738 to A740 Power ON Clock Data 8 A741 to A743 Power ON Clock Data 9 A744 to A74
447. of the CPU Unit when backup is in progress Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit If the power is turned OFF during a backup the data will not be backed up and will not be transferred to the DM Area in RAM the next time the power supply is turned ON Before replacing the battery supply power to the CPU Unit for at least 30 minutes and then com plete battery replacement within 5 minutes Memory data may be corrupted if this precaution is not observed The equipment may operate unexpectedly if inappropriate parameters are set Even if the appro priate parameters are set confirm that equipment will not be adversely affected before transfer ring the parameters to the CPU Unit Before starting operation confirm that the contents of the DM Area is correct After replacing the CPU Unit make sure that the required data for the DM Area Holding Area and other memory areas has been transferred to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation Do not attempt to disassemble repair or modify any Units Any attempt to do so may result in mal function fire or electric shock Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation Changing the operating mode of the PLC including the setting of the startup operating mode Force setting force resetting any bit in memory Changing the present value of any w
448. ogram1 00 3 Symbols Section amp END 2 Set any password 3 Select Protection Setting from the PLC Menu 4 Confirm that the setting item is checked then click the OK button 16 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Protection Release Procedure 1 Go online and select Protection Release Password from the PLC menu The Release Read Protection Dia log Box will be displayed 2 Enter the registered password If the password is incorrect the message shown on the right will be displayed and protection will not be released 16 Other Functions Release Read Protection x PLC NewPLC1 Gk Items to release Cancel MUM read protection leee UM read protection CX Programmer for CP1E v1 0 x Error releasing read protection Release Read Protection failed Online edit history area is full or the set parameter is invalid Try Release password again after Backup process is finished or check the password Auxiliary Area Bits Related to Password Protection x Status after Startup Bit M Name Description mode hold address change settings UM Read Protection A99 00 Indicates whether or not the whole ladder pro Hold Hold Status grams are read protected OFF UM read protection is not set ON UM read protection is set CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 13 suonouny Aun2es t 9r uono98 oJd peeH ureJ604d Jeppe L v 9L 16 Other Functions
449. ogrammer and to perform remote programming and monitoring Upgraded Functions With the CP1W CIF41 the following functions have been upgraded The FINS communications service can be executed not only with UDP IP but also with TCP IP and it is even possible to use FINS communications with both UDP IP and TCP IP together on the same network Using TCP IP makes FINS communications highly reliable Even if the IP address and UDP port number of the host computer a DHCP client computer are changed it is still possible for the host computer to send FINS commands to PLCs on the Ether net network and to receive responses When UDP is used either the automatic generation dynamic method or the IP address table method must be selected for IP address conversion When TCP is used changes in IP address and TCP port numbers are handled automatically Multiple FINS applications CX Programmer and user created application programs at the same computer can be connected online to a PLC via Ethernet using either TCP IP or UDP IP Note The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the destination node A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such as noise To prevent this from occurring when using message services it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are issued With the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions retry processing is executed automatically by speci f
450. om when execution of the input interrupt task is completed until execution of the cyclic task is resumed is 24 us A 82 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Interrupt Response Time for Scheduled Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS instruction has elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been exe cuted The length of the interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 0 1 ms max There is also an error of 10 us in the time to the first scheduled interrupt 1 0 ms min Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the ladder program even while an instruction is being executed by stopping the execution of an instruction I O refresh peripheral servicing or overseeing The processing operation in which the scheduled interrupt occurs does not affect the interrupt processing time Scheduled interrupts however are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even if the interrupt conditions are satisfied Instead the interrupts are executed in order of priority after the current interrupt task has completed execution and the software interrupt response time has elapsed As a guideline the wait time will be 0 to 3ms Scheduled interrupt time Leil 1 1 Internal timer Software interrupt response time Scheduled i i i interrupt task i i
451. on 1 Specifying whether to detect ON or OFF signals 2 Enabling input interrupts Execution condition MSKS 1 Specifies creating an interrupt when N the input turns OFF or when it turns C ON QMSKS 2 Enables input interrupts N C The MSKS instruction must be executed only once to make the settings so in general execute MSKS in just one cycle using the upwaraly differentiated variation of the instruction The first MSKS instruction can be omitted If it is omitted an interrupt will be created when the input turns ON by default Specifying MSKS Operands N and C 1 Specifying to Detect ON or OFF Input Signals 10 6 Operand N Operand C Terminal Corresponding do esas ds Interrupt t lt up down bit address P task number D differentiation of an Tab Page identifier s z interrupt input 02 on CIO 0 CIO 0 02 Interrupt input 2 112 0000 terminal block IN2 Up differentiation 03 on CIO 0 CIO 0 03 Interrupt input 3 113 0001 terminal block IN3 Down differentiation 04 on CIO 0 CIO 0 04 Interrupt input 4 114 terminal block INA 05 on CIO 0 CIO 0 05 Interrupt input 5 115 terminal block IN5 06 on CIO 0 CIO 0 06 Interrupt input 6 116 terminal block IN6 07 on CIO 0 CIO 0 07 Interrupt input 7 117 terminal block IN7 nterrupt input 6 and 7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units 2 Enabling the Input Interrupt 7 PLC Setup on Operand N Operand
452. one instruction If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number an error will be generated during the program check e Resetting or Maintaining Timers Timer Completion Flags can be force set and force reset Timer PVs cannot be force set or force reset although the PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force setting resetting the Completion Flag There are no restrictions in the order of using timer numbers or in the number of N C or N O con ditions that can be programmed Timer PVs can be read as word data and used in programming The following table shows when timers will be reset or maintained TMHH TTIM l TIM TIMX TIMH TIMHX TMHHX TTIMX pemanan HUNDRED MS ACCUMULA TIMER TEN MS TIMER ONE MS TIMER TIVE TIMER When the operating mode is PV 0 changed between PROGRAM or Flag OFF MONITOR mode and RUN mode When the PLC power is reset PV 0 Flag OFF CNR CNRX instructions PV 9999 FFFF timer counter reset Flag OFF Jumps JMP JME Retained Interlocks IL ILC with OFF inter Reset PV SV Timer Completion Flag OFF Retained lock conditions 1 If the IOM Hold Bit A500 12 is ON the PV and Completion Flag will be retained when a fatal error occurs including execution of FALS instructions or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa The PV and Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled 2 Since the TIML TIMLX instructions do not use
453. online This can be done while the CP1E is in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode Using the CX Programmer it is possible to either change part of a ladder program running on the CP1E or make an addition to the program Online editing is used to make minor changes to the ladder program without actually stopping the oper ation of the CP1E H Precautions for Correct Use When a ladder program has been changed using online editing the cycle time may increase by one or more cycles or it may not be possible to read an input signal Major changes such as moving a rung copying inserting or deleting should be done offline and then the program should be transferred to the CP1E again After completing online editing the results of editing are backed up to backup memory result ing in a longer cycle time While this is being done the BKUP indicator will be lit and the CX Programmer will indicate the progress An increase of one cycle will be 16ms maximum daring online editing and 8 of cycle time during back up Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit after online editing until the backup to the backup memory is completed the BKUP indicator is OFF CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 27 PBui66nqeg pue 6uuoyuopy euruo S 8T Bupa eujuo S 8 18 Programming Device Operations i Online Editing Procedure 1 Change the CP1E s operating mode to MONITOR or PROGRAM mode 2 Click the header of the rung to be edited
454. ontrol devices for multiple axes with a single PLC High speed counters can be used for high speed processing using either target value comparison or range comparison to create interrupts Interrupt tasks are executed when the counter value reaches a specific target value or range Operation Overview A sheet feeder is controlled to feed constant lengths in a given direction e g for vacuum packing of food products Motor speed Motor start input CIO 0 02 Motor run output i i io ii CIO 100 00 Motor low speed HEE H ij output CIO 100 01 Normal stop position output CIO 100 02 Error stop position output CIO 100 03 3550 NER NM Numberofpulses a500 vetements derent scans qiti suele arsenate counted by high 3000 Jb a P Speed counter Pulses A270 The High speed Counter Reset Bit A531 00 is turned ON in the ladder program as soon a operation starts and the reset process is performed While the pulse count is between 3 500 and 3 550 normal stop position output CIO 100 02 will be ON If the pulse count exceeds 3550 the error stop position output CIO 100 03 will turn ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 27 11 High speed Counters e System Configuration Wiring Example Encoder power Black Phase A supply 24 VDC O Example E6B2 CWZ6C NPN open collector output Blue M 24 VDC power supply P S
455. operated during over in range comparison mode for upper Seeing pro 01 High speed Counter 1 and lower limits cess Range 2 Comparison e Cleared when operation starts Refreshed Condition Met Flag Cleared when range comparison when PRV 02 High speed Counter 1 table is registered instruction is executed to Range 3 Comparison OFF PV not in range read the Condition Met Flag ON PV in range comparison O3 High speed Counter 1 results for Range 4 Comparison ones Condition Met Flag Sp 9 counter 04 High speed Counter 1 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 1 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag 08 High speed Counter 1 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 1 son operation Cleared when operation starts starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter 1 This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 1 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when the PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow 10 High speed Counter 1 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used Count Direction high speed counter 1 is currently being for high speed incremented or decremented The c
456. operating mode is changed between Retained PROGRAM or MONITOR mode and RUN mode When the PLC power is reset Retained Unstable when the battery is not mounted Reset Input Reset CNR CNRX instructions Reset Interlocks IL ILC with OFF interlock conditions Retained 5 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 8 Auxiliary Area A 5 I O Memory i Overview The words and bits in this area have preassigned functions Refer to A 2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for details Precautions for Safe Use With an ELILI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Battery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function If the DM backup function is being used be sure to refer to 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Startup for details Words in the Auxiliary Area related to clock function are unstable Bit word A100 to A199 Name Error Log Area A300 Error Log Pointer A351 to A354 Calendar Clock Area A510 to A511 Startup Time A512 to A513 Power Interruption Time A514 Number of Power Interruptions A515 to A517 Operation Start Time
457. or uses not described in this manual Nuclear energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user s programming of a programmable product or any consequence thereof 16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice When in doubt special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request Please consult with your OMRON
458. or the following personnel who must also have knowledge of electrical sys tems an electrical engineer or the equivalent Personnel in charge of installing FA systems Personnel in charge of designing FA systems Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities Applicable Products CP series CP1E CPU Units Basic Models CP1E ELILI S DEI LI A basic model of CPU Unit that support basic control applications using instructions such as basic movement arithmetic and comparison instructions Application Models CP1E N NALILI SEI DLI EI An application model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals invert ers and servo drives The CP Series is centered around the CP1H CP1L and CP1E CPU Units and is designed with the same basic architecture as the CS and CJ Series Always use CP series Expansion Units and CP series Expansion I O Units when expanding l O capacity I O words are allocated in the same way as for the CPM1A CPM2A PLCs i e using fixed areas for inputs and outputs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 1 CP1E CPU Unit Manuals Information on the CP1E CPU Units is provided in the following manuals Refer to the appropriate manual for the information that is required CP1E CPU Unit Hardware CP1E CPU Unit Software CP1E CPU Unit Instructions User s Manual Cat No W479 User s Manual Cat No W480 Reference Manual Cat No W483 Mounting and 1 Setting Hardware Names
459. ord D1455 y f D1458 Using IP Address Display Setting Area 2 words Note 1 D1300 to D1454 can only display all of the settings stared in the unit Modification in this area is invalid to the CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board 2 D1455 and D1456 will display the IP address used by the CP1W CIF41 when the power is turned ON 3 When the IP address is illegal such as using CLASS D CLASS E IP address the values in D1303 and D1304 will be different from the ones in D1455 and D1456 and the CP1W CIF41 will temporarily use the default IP address 192 168 250 1 Use this IP address to modify the IP address settings through Web browser 4 When the system settings are wrong A525 can be used to reset CP1W CIF41 Refer to Appendix A 2 for details 17 26 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board i Mode Setting 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 me o ojo o ojojo oy P 9 Broadcast address IP address conversion method FINS UDP port number FINS TCP port number FINS UDP destination IP mode FINS TCP protect function Bit Mode Settings 0 Reserved Always 0 1 Broadcast address 0 4 3BSD specifications 1 4 2BSD specifications 2103 IP address conversion method 00 01 Automatic generation method 10 IP address table reference method 11 Combined method 4 FINS UDP port number 0 Default 9600 Unit setup value Default 9600 Unit setup value 5 FINS TCP po
460. ord carry DOUBLE L Adds 8 digit double word hexadecimal data and or constants SIGNED BINARY ADD Signed binary WITHOUT WI E turn ON Au 1st augend word IS amp Cay Ad 1st addend word R 1st result word SIGNED C Adds 4 digit single word hexadecimal data and or constants with BINARY ADD the Carry Flag CY WITH CARRY Signed binary Signed binary Au Augend word Ad Addend word R Result word CY will turn ON when i i Carry DOUBLE CL Adds 8 digit double word hexadecimal data and or constants SIGNED with the Carry Flag CY BINARY ADD WITH CARRY Signed binary A 18 Au 1st augend word Ad 1st addend word R 1st result word CY po IEEE S s 2 N when tere CY Lf Signed binary is a carry CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function BCD ADD B Adds 4 digit single word BCD data and or constants WITHOUT CARRY BCD n BCD CY will turn Au Augend word ON when 8 BCD Ad Addend word More sa R Result word p DOUBLE BCD BL Adds 8 digit double word BCD data and or constants ADD WITH OUT CARRY aco BCD CY will turn Au 1st augend word ON when amp em Ad 1st addend word m Sa R 1st result word y BCD ADD BC Adds 4 digit single word BCD data and or constants with the WITH CARRY Carry Flag CY BCD BCD Au
461. ord or any set value in memory External Circuits Always configure the external circuits to turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control system If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply temporary errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PLC Fail safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from output terminals remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures which can occur in relays tran sistors and other elements CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 21 22 f the I O Hold Bit is turned ON the outputs from the PLC will not be turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode Make sure that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs When operation stops for a fatal error including those produced with the FALS instruction all out puts from PLC will be turned OFF and only the internal output status in the CPU Unit will be main tained CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Regulations and Standards Trademarks SYSMAC is a registered trademark for Programmable Controllers made by OMRON Corporation CX One is a registered trademark for Programming Software made by OMRON Corporation Windows is a re
462. ounter valid counter PV for the current cycle is com during counter pared with the PV in last cycle to deter operation mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing A276 Pulse Out Lowerfour Contain the number of pulses output Cleared Refreshed putOPV digits from the corresponding pulse output each cycle A277 Upper four port during the digits PV range 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF overseeing hex processes A278 Pulse Out Lower four TATA Refreshed iai 2 put PV digits 2 147 483 648 to d ins when the INI A279 Upper four When pulses are being output in the instruction is digits CW direction the PV is incremented by executed 1 for each pulse PV When pulses are being output in the change CCW direction the PV is decremented by 1 for each pulse PV after overflow 7FFF FFFF hex PV after underflow 8000 000 hex Cleared when operation starts Note If the coordinate system is rela tive coordinates undefined ori gin the PV will be cleared to 0 when a pulse output starts i e when a pulse output instruction SPED ACC or PLS2 is exe cuted CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 55 ssauppy Aq suone ojy eauy Auelpny z v Spon uo pe y z V Appendices Address Status Related 5 A after Status at Write Name Function Settings RERE flags Words Bits mode startup timing change settings A280 00 Pulse Output 0 This flag will be ON w
463. outputs and PWM outputs Information added on CX Programmer Micro PLC Edition version 8 2 upgrading to version 9 0 January 2010 Information added on E10 14 N14 60 and NA20 CPU Units June 2010 e CP1W DAO21 added for CP series Expansion Units e Information added on CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board Information added on NLILIS 1 type and ELILIS type CPU Units 05 November 2012 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Revision 1 Revision 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Terms and Conditions of Sale omnon Ti Qa 9 10 11 12 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all quotes agreements purchase orders acknowledgments price lists catalogs manuals brochures and other documents whether electronic or in writing relating to the sale of products or services collectively the Products by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Omron Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyers purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Prices Payment Terms All prices stated are current subject to change with out notice by Omron Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the
464. overy Operation is automatically restarted when the power supply voltage is restored CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 85 suondnusqu Mod 104 uoneredo 21d t V Appendices i Power OFF Timing Chart Operation always stopped at this point Power supply q b d voltage 8596 i i j Holding time for 5 V internal power supply after power OFF detection 1 ms Power OFF detection 1 v Power OFF Detection Time i i AC 10ms Pe o o Power OFF DC 2ms i detected signal i f rogram Gxecution Cyclic task or interrupt task Stop status CPU Unit reset signal Power OFF Detection Time The time from when the power supply voltage drops to 85 or less the rated voltage until the power interruption is detected Power Holding Time The maximum amount of time fixed at 1 ms that 5 V will be held internally after power shuts OFF Description of Operation The power interruption will be detected if the 100 to 240 VAC power supply falls below 85 of the minimum rated voltage for the power OFF detection time 10 ms minimum for AC power supply and 2ms minimum for DC power supply not fixed The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU Unit will be reset immediately Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions The power OFF detection time of CP1E CPU Units is 10 ms minimum for AC power supply and 2ms minimum for DC power supply If the power interruption is detected when
465. ow the IP address of the Ethernet Option Board Subnet Mask Show the subnet mask of the Ethernet Option Board FINS UDP Port Number Show the FINS UDP port number of the Ethernet Option Board Use Input Port Number Show the effective port number setting mode Broadcast Setting Show the broadcast setting of the Ethernet Option Board IP Address Conversion Show the IP address conversion method of the Ether net Option Board Ethernet Address Show the MAC ID of the Ethernet Option Board 17 22 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board Unit Status Error Flags Indicate the operating status and errors that occurred when the Ethernet Option Board is turned ON Total Number of Packets Show the total number of packets received by the Ether Received net Option Board Total Number of Receive Show the total number of errors detected while the Errors Ethernet Option Board was receiving The types of errors detected are short packet errors H alignment errors CRC errors frame length errors and Ww communication controller overflow errors a Total Number of Packets Show the total number of packets sent by the Ethernet Sent Option Board n Total Number of Errors Show the total number of errors detected while the Sent Ethernet Option Board was sending 1 uonoun Bumegs 1eswoig d9M ZL CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 23 17 Ethernet Option Board
466. owing diagram 1 6 bytes ee FINS node IP address number I IP Router Table Pointer of IP P router table IP router table router table records records Pointer of IP Router Table Point to the last recorder in IP router table For example if the last recorder number in IP router table is 6 the value of this word is 6 e IP Router Table Records Each IP router table record has 8 bytes The max number of records is 8 The configuration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram 1 8 bytes IP Network address Router IP address Network ID 17 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board i FINS TCP Connection Setup Offset 15 8 7 0 D1438 FINS TCP Port Settings D1439 FINS TCP connection No 1 FINS TCP connection No 1 D1440 FINS TCP connection No 1 FINS TCP connection No 1 D1441 FINS TCP connection No 1 FINS TCP connection No 2 D1442 FINS TCP connection No 2 FINS TCP connection No 2 D1443 FINS TCP connection No 2 FINS TCP connection No 2 D1444 Reserved Always 0 D1448 FINS TCP Port Settings 14 13 12 11 10 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 S3 2 1 0 E N pse ojojojoro o o o o o elelo jo Protect setting i Connection No 2 2 Protect setting gt Connection No 1 9 Bit Settings Unit operation 0 Reserved Always 0 1 Protect setting 0 The IP address of FINS TCP connection No 1 is not I
467. own pulse Direction Phase Z Reset Reset Frequency N NALILI S 100 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz and number 1 type CPU 2 counters 1 counter 1 counter 2 counters of high Unit 10 kHz 4 counters 5 kHz 1 counter 10 kHz 1 counter speed ECID S E10 CPU Unit 5 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz counters type CPU 10 kHz 5 counters 2 counters 2 counters 2 counters Unit E14 20 30 40 60 S CPU Unit 10 kHz 6 counters Counting mode Linear mode or circular ring mode Count values Linear mode 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Ring Mode 0000 0000 to Ring SV High speed counter PV storage locations High speed counter 0 A271 upper 4 digits and A270 lower 4 digits High speed counter 1 A273 upper 4 digits and A272 lower 4 digits High speed counter 2 A317 upper 4 digits and A316 lower 4 digits High speed counter 3 A319 upper 4 digits and A318 lower 4 digits High speed counter 4 A323 upper 4 digits and A322 lower 4 digits High speed counter 5 A325 upper 4 digits and A324 lower 4 digits The PVs are refreshed in the overseeing processes at the start of each cycle Use PRV to read the most recent PVs Data format 8 digit hexadecimal Range in linear mode 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex Range in Ring Mode 0000 0000 to Ring SV Circular Max Count Control method Target value Up to 6 target values and corresponding interrupt task numbers can be registered comparison Range Up
468. parisons tests bits or performs other types of pro cessing every cycle and will output an ON execution condition power flow when the result changes from ON to OFF The execution condition will turn OFF the next cycle Downwardly differentiated instruction Example 1 03 u I ON execution condition created for one cycle when CIO 1 03 turns ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 11 4 Understanding Programming 4 3 5 Specifying Data in Operands i Specifying Addresses E Application Operand Description Example examples Specifying The word address and bit number are speci 02 1 02 bit fied directly to specify a bit addresses Y i Bit number 02 E I 0000 00 Bit number Word address CIO 1 00 to 15 Word address Specifying The word address is specified directly to MOV 3 D200 word specify a 16 bit word En Word address CIO 3 addresses LLLI D200 Word address Word address D200 Specifying In brackets specify the number of bits to off 10 00 2 10 00 2 offsets for bit set the specified starting bit address L Number of bits to offset the address addresses Specify 10 02 L Starting bit address Offset Constant 21915 0E word m eunte of bits to offset the address i ey When WO amp 2
469. pecified source words from the specified words of Auxiliary area A in the unit of word CPU Unit MS CPU Unit status read Read the CPU Unit operating conditions operating status mode forced set reset fatal error related SC Status change Change the operating mode of CPU Unit MF Error information read Read the occurring error information of CPU Unit fatal error non fatal error Test TS Test Directly return 1 block sent from the host computer I O memory QQMR I O memory area mixed read registra Register the O memory words or bits that need to area mixed tion read into the table read QQIR I O memory area mixed registration Read all of the I O memory area words and bits that were registered Host link XZ Abort command only Interrupt the operation that being processed using communica the host link command and return to the initial sta tion process tus after abortion ing Initial command only Initialize the transmission control sequence for all the host link unit numbers IC Command undefined error response Response when the command s header code can only CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 not be broken 14 31 Jeynduuo 31soH eu 6un euuo 9 pr SPUBWWOD JO jsr pue yewo esuodsej pueuiuo 9 pL 14 Serial Communications e List of FINS commands FINS commands are shown below Command Type Siac Name Function l O memory 01 01 I O memory are
470. pies 5 words no related word the function of these 5 words is as fol Seconds 00 to 59 lows BCD First word Error code bits 0 to 15 First word 1 Error contents bits 0 to Minutes 00 to 59 15 BCD First word 2 Minutes upper byte Hours 00 to 23 BCD Seconds lower byte Day of month 01 to First word 3 Day of month upper 31 BCD byte Hours lower byte First word 4 Year upper byte Month 01 to 12 BCD Month lower byte Year 00 to 99 Note 1 The data will be unstable if the BED capacitor becomes discharged 2 Errors generated by FAL 006 and FALS 007 will also be stored in this Error Log 3 The Error Log Area can be reset from the CX Program mer 4 If the Error Log Area is full 20 records and another error occurs the oldest record in A100 to A104 will be cleared the other 19 records are shifted down and the new record is stored in A195 to A199 5 In an ELILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 A200 11 First Cycle Flag ON for one cycle after PLC operation ON for the first cycle ON Cleared begins after the mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR for example 12 Step Flag ON for one cycle when step execution ON for the first cycle Cleared Cleared is started with STEP This flag can be after execution of used for initialization processing at the STEP beginning of a step 14 Task Started Flag When a task switches from WAIT or INI ON ON fo
471. pit p10 29 28 27 26 2B 24 2B 2 pg 2 32768 sFFFF Hexadecimal gt 28 2 2 20 28 2 2 ojo 22 2 goi 2 pg 90 Decimal gt 3276N16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Positive Positive 0 to 32767 0000 to Sign bit 7FFF 1 Negative 0 Non negative The data is treated as 16 bit signed binary data using the leftmost bit as the sign bit The value is expressed in 4 digit hexadecimal Positive numbers If the leftmost bit is OFF it indicates a non negative value For 4 digit hexadecimal the value will be 0000 to 7FFF hex Negative numbers If the leftmost bit is ON it indicates a negative value For 4 digit hexadecimal the value be 8000 to FFFF hex It will be expressed as the 2 s complement of the absolute value of the negative value decimal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 13 4 Understanding Programming 4 digit Type Data format poc LU hexadeci equivalent mal BCD binary gs eae 3s 4 424 wc C ee a oe Xn Oe OB 0 to 9999 0000 to coded deci 9999 mal BcD gt a 2 2 2 2 a 3 P 3 30 GR Ca EJ Decimal Oto 9 0to9 0t09 0109 Single preci 3 30 29 28 22 21 20 19 2 1 0 i sion floating i l l i point decimal Y Sign of Exponent mantissa Mantissa Binary CM Value 1 x1 Mantissa x 2 Sign bit bit 31 1 Negative 0 Positive Mantissa The 23 bits from bit 00 to bit 22 contain the mantissa i e the portio
472. plication Remarks Host computer Host link Create frame Directly connect the host com Use this PLC command in the host puter in a 1 1 or 1 N system method when C Mode computer communicating and send the primarily from Host link command command to on the host com the PLC peres puter to the Receive the PLC response FINS command Directly connect the host com Use these The FINS com with Host Link 14 6 2 Flow of Operation 2 PLC Setup 3 Program from host 14 30 puter in a 1 1 system or 1 N methods when in the network Connect the computer and CP1E CPU Unit using RS 232C ports Set the PLC Setup select Host Link for the serial communications mode and set the communications conditions and transfer the PLC Setup from the CX Programmer to the CP1E CPU Unit C mode commands FINS commands mand must be header and system communicating placed between terminator sent primarily from a Host Link FINS the host com header and ter hetero puter to PLCs minator and then sent by the host computer Send the following commands from the host computer CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 6 3 Command response Format and List of Commands The outline of command response format and each command are listed below
473. pointer clearance Clear all the pointer of error log to zero related 23 01 Force set reset Force set force reset and release unable to spec ify multi bit 23 02 All bits release Release the forced status of all bits 14 32 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 Serial Communications 14 7 Precautions on the usage of RS 485 When using the built in RS 485 of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit or the RS 485 2 wire of the Option Board CP1W CIF11 CIF12 mounting on the NLILI type CPU Unit pay attention to the following precau tions and construct application When using the RS 485 2 wire it can only communicate in half duplex Please secure the waiting time shown below till the next data transmission after the remote device receives data from CP1E If the receive data are transmitted from the remote device within the waiting time shown below after CP1E data transmission the data may not be received by CP1E Send data Remote device Send data G9p Su JO 9Desn oui uo suonne 2aud VT Secure the waiting time shown below till the next data transmission after the data reception from CP1E Baud rate 9600 to 115200 bit s 1ms min 1200 to 4800 bit s 3ms min spuewwog JO ISI pue yewo esuodsej pueuiuo 9 pL CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 33 14 Serial Communications 14 34 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Analog I O Function SSS This section describes the built in analog funct
474. programs can be created and displayed in functional units called sections Any program in a task can be divided into sections Sections improve program legibility and simplifies editing 4 2 3 Overview of Symbols i Symbols l O memory area addresses or constants can be specified by using character strings registered as symbols The symbols are registered in the symbol table of the CX Programmer Programming with symbols enables programming with names without being aware of the addresses The symbol table is saved in the CX Programmer project file CXP along with other parameters such as the user programs i Symbol Types There are two types of symbols that can be used in programs e Global Symbols Global symbols can be accessed from all ladder programs in the PLC Local Symbols Local symbols can be accessed from only one task They are assigned to individual tasks CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming Addresses are allocated to symbols using one of the following methods User Specified allocation Automatic allocation using the CX Programmer The area of memory used for automatic allocations is set by selecting Memory Allocation Auto matic Address Allocation from the PLC Menu in the CX Programmer Scope Address and I O Types of sym Project tree in the Access Access Access comment with bols CX Programmer pena ad from other from the out a symbo
475. pun uoisuedx3 oi suoneoolv p L 9 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 6 5 6 I O Allocation i Allocations for Expansion Units e 1 0 Word Allocations to Expansion Units m Indicates the next input word after the input word allocated to the Expansion Unit Expansion I O Unit or CPU Unit connected to the left of the current Unit n Indicates the next output word after the output word allocated to the Expansion Unit Expansion I O Unit or CPU Unit connected to the left of the current Unit Name Model Input words Output words number No of words Addresses No of words Addresses Analog I O Unit CP1W MAD11 2 words CIO m and 1 word clon m 1 Analog Input Unit CP1W ADO0441 4 words CIO m to m 3 2 words CIO n to CIO n 1 Analog Output Unit CP1W DAO21 None 2 words CIO n to CIO n 1 CP1W DAO41 None 4 words CIO n to CIO n 3 Temperature Sensor Units CP1W TSO01 2 words CIO m and None m 1 CP1W TS002 4 words CIO m to m 3 None CP1W TS101 2 words CIO m and None m 1 CP1W TS102 4 words CIO m to m 3 None CompoBus S I O Link Unit CP1W SRT21 1 word CIO m 1 word clon e 1 0 Word Allocations to Expansion Units Allocation Example CPU Unit with 40 I O Points Temperature Senser Unit TS002 Analog Output Unit DA041 Expansion I O Unit with 40 I O points Input bits Output bits Input bits Output bits CPU Unit with 40 I O Points 1st Unit CP1W TS002
476. put limit C 4 D304 Work Area C 6 D306 M CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 5 16 Other Functions Description e When WO0 00 turns ON the work area in D111 to D140 is initialized cleared according to the parameters set in D100 to D110 After the work area has been initialized autotuning is started and the PID constants are calculated from the results from changing the manipulated variable After autotuning has been completed PID control is executed according to the calculated PID constants set in D101 to D103 The manipulated variable is output to D200 The manipulated vari able in D200 is divided by the manipulated variable range using the TPO instruction This value is treated as the duty factor which is converted to a time proportional output and output to CIO100 00 as a pulse output When W0 00 turns OFF PID is stopped and CIO100 00 turns OFF When W0 00 is ON the Thermocouple s PV 200 to 1300 is scaled to the PIDAT instruction input range 0 to 1FFF hex The set values must be input according to the scaled PV For example if the PV is 160 C it is set as 8191 1300 200 x 1604200 1966 16 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 Other Functions 16 2 Clock The clock can be used only with the CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit The current data is stored in the following words in the Auxiliary Area Name Address Function Clock data A351 to A354 The seconds minutes hour day
477. r 5 Use high speed counter 4 Use high speed counter 5 Counting mode Lin jade Circular mad Counting mode Linear mode Circul Circular Max Count Circular Max Count as Reset EE Reset o 7 Input Setting IDE Input Setting Interrupt Input IN2 Nomal IN3 Normal z IN4 Noma z INS Noma z ING Normal x Jin Noma z CP1E N40 Offline CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 3 11 High speed Counters Built in Input Tab Page Use high speed counter 0 to 5 Item Use high speed counter Setting Select Use high speed counter for each counter to be used Counting Mode Select Linear mode or Circular mode Circular Max Count maximum ring count If circular mode is selected set the maximum ring count 0 to 4 294 967 295 decimal Reset Phase Z and software reset Software reset Phase Z and software reset continue comparing Software reset continue comparing Input Setting Differential phase inputs 4x Pulse direction inputs Up down pulse inputs Increment pulse input Only a software reset can be used if an increment pulse input is specified Note The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the high speed counter settings I Determining High speed Counter Pulse Input Method and High speed Counter Input Terminals The following input terminals can be used for
478. r down input direction input 3 proximity input signal 04 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 4 Interrupt input 4 Quick Counter 3 Counter 0 phase Z Counter 0 response increment or reset input reset input input 4 input 05 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 5 Interrupt input 5 Quick Pulse 1 Origin Counter 4 Counter 1 phase Z Counter 1 response IU i increment or reset input reset input input 5 proximity input signal input 06 High speed Normal input 6 Interrupt input 6 Quick Pulse 0 Counter 5 response Origin input signal increment input 6 input 07 Normal input 7 Interrupt input 7 Quick Pulse 1 response Origin input signal input 7 Other functions that cannot be used at the same time Terminal Differential phase Pulse Quick block Terminal Mrs dels x4 or up down direction Normal input sei response label P P input input P input CIO 0 00 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 phase A Counter 0 increment or up input pulse input input 01 High speed _ High speed High speed Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 phase B Counter 1 increment or down input pulse input input 02 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 2 Interrupt input 2 Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 phase A Counter 0 response increment or up input direction input 2 input 03 High speed High speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Qui
479. r first cycle Cleared Cleared to RUN status this flag will be turned including transitions ON within the task for one cycle only from WAIT and IN Note The only difference between this OFF Other flag and A200 15 is that this flag also turns ON when the task Switches from WAIT to RUN sta tus 15 First Task Startup Flag ON when a task is executed for the first ON First execution Cleared Cleared time This flag can be used to check OFF Not executable whether the current task is being exe or not being exe cuted for the first time so that initializa cuted for the first tion processing can be performed if time necessary A262 Maximum Cycle Time These words contain the maximum 0 to FFFFFFFF and cycle time since the start of PLC opera 0 to 429 496 729 5 ms A263 tion The cycle time is recorded in 0 1 ms units 32 bit binary The upper digits are in A263 and the lower digits are in A262 A264 Present Cycle Time These words contain the present cycle 0 to FFFFFFFF and time The cycle time is recorded in 0 to 429 496 729 5 ms A265 32 bit binary The upper digits are in 0 1 ms units A265 and the lower digits are in A264 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 53 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ey faeixny z v Spon uo pe y Z Y Appendices Address Status Related after Status at Write Name Function Settings caps flags Words Bits mode s
480. r is turned ON 3 IN4 C O 0 04 Normal Normal Interrupt Quick When power is turned ON 4 IN5 C O 0 05 Normal Normal Interrupt Quick When power is turned ON 5 IN6 C O 0 06 Normal Normal Interrupt Quick When power is turned ON 6 IN7 C 7 12 O 0 07 Normal Normal Interrupt Quick When power is turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 2 7 Pulse Output 0 Settings 7 PLC Setup The settings are applicable to the N NALILI S type CPU Units with transistor outputs i Base Settings When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Undefined Origin operation for limit signal Hold Hold At start of operation turning ON Undefined 2 Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only Search Only When power is turned ON Always 3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation NO 4 Search Return Initial Speed 0 pps 0 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps i Origin Search Settings Name Default Possible settings when Gear by 1 Use define origin operation Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 1 1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation CCW 1 2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation Method 1 Method 2 1 3 Search Opera
481. r than origin searches Execute instructions related to pulse control Set pulse output 0 or 1 and whether to use terminals 00 and 02 or 01 and 03 on the CIO 100 terminal block for pulse outputs i PLC Setup To perform an origin search or to use a Limit Input Signal as an input to a function other than origin search set the parameters on the Pulse Output 0 and Pulse Output 1 Tab Pages in the PLC Setup PLC Settings NewPLC1 3 File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Quiz Search Retur Initial Speed 0 zl pps Base Settings Undefined Origin fod z Limit Input Signal Operation Search Only gt Inc Define Origin Operation Settings Use define origin operation Limit Input Signal Search Direction w Search High Speed NE ps E Detection Method Meno z Search Proximity Speed p 4 ps Acceleration Ratio Search Operation mesi 7 Search Compensation vae 3 0 zi peration Mode Meo z Search Acceleration Ratio p oa Deceleration Ratio Origin Input Signal hc zl Search Deceleration Ratio p 4 po Proximity Input Signal 7 Positioning Monitor Time Pulse Output 0 or 1 Tab Page Aalxl Origin Return Speed 0 CP1E N40 Offline Item Setting Description Base Undefined Origin Hold When a Limit Input Signal is input the pulse output is Settings stopped and the previous status
482. ransmission No protocol mode CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit only 06 Built in RS 232C Port ON when the built in RS 232C port has ON Reception com Retained Cleared Written after Reception Completed completed the reception in no protocol pleted reception Flag No protocol mode OFF Reception not mode CP1E When the number of bytes was completed N NACIH SHype CPU specified ON when the specified Unit only number of bytes is received When the end code was specified ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are received 07 Built in RS 232C Port ON when a data overflow occurred dur ON Overflow Retained Cleared Reception Overflow ing reception through the built in OFE No overflow Flag No protocol RS 232C port in no protocol mode mode CP1E When the number of bytes was N NALID S type CPU specified ON when more data is Unit only received after the reception was completed but before RXD was exe cuted When the end code was specified ON when more data is received after the end code was received but before RXD was executed ON when 257 bytes are received before the end code 12 Serial Option Port ON when a communications error has ON Error Retained Cleared Built in RS 485 Port occurred at the serial option port or OFF No error Communications Error built in RS 485 port Not valid in NT Flag CP1E N30 40 60 Link mode SQ or NA20 CPU Unit only 13 Serial Option Port ON when th
483. relationship between X and Y to be approximated with line segments C Control word S Source data R Result word BIT COUNTER BCNT Counts the total number of ON bits in the specified word s A 1 13 Floating point Math Instructions BCNT 067 R N Number of words S 1st source word R Result word s l amp N words Counts the number of to ON bits san n ug ub zl N Number of words The number of words must be 0001 to FFFF 1 to 65 535 words Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function FLOATING TO FIX Converts a 32 bit floating point value to 16 bit signed binary data 16 BIT FIX 450 and places the result in the specified result word Floating point data S 1st source word P R Result word a opm FLOATING TO FIXL Converts a 32 bit floating point value to 32 bit signed binary data 32 BIT and places the result in the specified result words S41 S Be data S 1st source word R 1 l 3 i st result word Rd R cigned binary data 16 BIT TO FLT Converts a 16 bit signed binary value to 32 bit floating point data FLOATING FLT 452 and places the result in the specified result words R S Source word R 1st result word CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Signed binary data 16 bits t Floating point data S R 1 R 32 bits A 27 suono ung uopnysul T Y suononasu YEN eroeds ZL L Y Appendices
484. remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Prod ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts including amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses Force Majeure Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to machinery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron Omron will not drop ship except in break down situations b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Omron at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer provided that Omron shall retain a security inter est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only and e Omron will package Pro
485. requency measurement function 11 1 Overview 2 cece 11 1 1 Overview 0 0 eee eee 11 1 2 Flow of Operation 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 11 1 3 Specifications 0 cee eee 11 2 High speed Counter Inputs eee 11 2 1 Pulse Input Methods Settings 11 2 2 Counting Ranges Settings 0 saaara aaaea eaea 11 2 3 Reset Methods seina eege aa aa a e a a E E a 11 2 4 Reading the Present Value asananuanaaaa aaaea 11 2 5 Frequency Measurement 0 00 cee tee 11 3 High speed Counter Interrupts 00 cece eee eee eee 11 9 1 Overview ciue ney oe eaea ee sk Gaede Sie odds Shae ud ERR S 11 3 2 Present Value Comparison 0 00 eee 11 3 3 High speed Counter Interrupt Instruction 11 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words 11 5 Application Example sen mmm mmm CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 1 11 High speed Counters 11 1 Overview High speed counters can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 11 1 1 Overview High speed counters are used to measure high speed pulse input signals that cannot be measured by counter CNT instructions Applications Detecting the position or length of a workpiece with an input from an incremental rotary encoder Measuring the speed of a workpiece from its position data using frequency measurement and rotational speed conversion High speed processing according to the workpiece
486. res to change the I O memory Devices connected to PLC outputs may incorrectly operate regardless of the operat ing mode of the CPU Unit With an ELILI S type CPU Unit or with an N NALILI S type CPU Unit without a Bat tery the contents of the DM Area D Holding Area H the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON This does not apply to areas backed up to EEPROM using the DM backup function If the DM backup function is being used be sure to use one of the following methods for initialization 1 Clearing All Areas to All Zeros Select the Clear Held Memory HR DM CNT to Zero Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area in the PLC Setup 2 Clearing Specific Areas to All Zeros or Initializing to Specific Values Make the settings from a ladder program If the data is not initialized the unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of unstable data Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused by extending the cycle time Otherwise the input signals may not be readable The DM Area D Holding Area H Counter Completion Flags C and Counter Present Values C will be held by the Battery if a Battery is mounted in a CP1E N NALILI SEI DLI L1 CPU Unit When the battery voltage is low however I O mem ory area
487. ress Words A747 to A749 CP1E N NA type CPU Unit only Bits Name Power ON Clock Data 10 Function These words contain the time at which the power was turned ON ten times before the startup time stored in words A510 to A511 A747 00 to A747 07 Seconds 00 to 59 A747 08 to A747 15 Minutes 00 to 59 A748 00 to A748 07 Hour 00 to 23 A748 08 to A748 15 Day of month 01 to 31 A749 00 to A749 07 Month 01 to 12 A749 08 to A749 15 Year 00 to 99 Settings See at left Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Retained Appendices Write timing Written when power is turned ON Related flags settings A751 11 DM Backup Restore Failed Flag ON when DM backup data could not be restored normally If this flag turns ON data will not be restored from the built in EEPROM backup memory to RAM Retained Cleared A751 14 DM Backup Save Flag ON when A751 15 is turned ON to start the saving operation This flag stays ON while data is being saved and turns OFF when finished Retained Cleared A751 15 DM Backup Save Start Bit Saving the specified words from the DM Area in RAM to the built in EEPROM backup memory is started when this bit is turned ON This bit will not turn OFF automatically even when saving the data has been completed If this bit is turned ON and OFF while the DM Backup Save Flag A751 14 is ON
488. rflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 2 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow 10 High speed Counter 2 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used Count Direction high speed counter 2 is currently being for high speed incremented or decremented The counter valid counter PV for the current cycle is com during counter pared with the PV in last cycle to deter operation mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing A321 00 High speed Counter 3 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle Condition Met Flag high speed counter 3 is being operated during over in range comparison mode for upper Seeing pro 01 High speed Counter3 and lower limits cess Range 2 Comparison e Cleared when operation starts Refreshed Condition Met Flag Cleared when range comparison when PRV 02 High speed Counter 3 table is registered instruction is i executed to Range 3 Comparison OFF PV not in range read the Condition Met Flag ON PV in range results of 03 High speed Counter 3 range com Range 4 Comparison parison Condition Met Flag 04 High speed Counter 3 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 3 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag CP1
489. ring the program check in the CX Programmer 0 01 102 01 e kc i E SLY A warning will occur if the same output bit is used more than once in an OUT instruction One output bit can be used in one instruction only Instructions in a ladder program are executed in order from the top rung in each cycle The result of an OUT instruction in a lower rung will be eventually saved in the output bit The results of any previous instructions controlling the same bit will be overwritten and not output Output bit ClO 100 00 Output bit CIO 100 00 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 GHunuweibald T Y BunuurejB04g Jo saseg 1 p 4 Understanding Programming 4 2 Tasks Sections and Symbols 4 2 1 Overview of Tasks There are basically two types of tasks Task settings must be made to use interrupt tasks with a CP1E CPU Unit Applicable Task type Description programming Execution condition language Cyclic task Executed once per cycle Ladder diagram Only one for the CP1E Normally the user does not have to con sider this Interrupt tasks Executed when a specific Ladder diagram An interrupt task is placed into READY condition occurs The process status when the interrupt condition being executed is interrupted occurs A condition can be set for the fol lowing interrupt tasks Scheduled interrupt tasks O interrupt tasks 4 2 2 Overview of Sections With the CX Programmer
490. rmal ING Normal hd IN Normal m TEPORE X Click the Built in Input Tab and select Interrupt in the interrupt intput settings 5 xi High Speed Counter 1 Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Circular Max Count o Reset phase software reset M Input Setting Differential pl put x High Speed Counter 3 Use high speed counter 3 Counting mode Linear mode C Circular Max Count Reset Y Input Setting Y High Speed Counter 5 Use high speed counter 5 Counting mode Linear mode Circular Max Count Reset z Input Setting x IN4 Normal hd IN5 Normal CPIE N40 Offline CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts Built in Input Tab Page Interrupt input settings CNET interrupt task IN2 Select Interrupt for CIO 0 02 2 IN3 N2to IN CIO 0 03 3 IN4 CIO 0 04 4 IN5 CIO 0 05 5 ING CIO 0 06 6 IN7 CIO 0 07 7 Note 1 The power supply must be restarted after the PLC Setup is transferred in order to enable the interrupt input settings 2 IN6 and IN7 are not supported by E10 CPU Units i Assigning Interrupt Input Terminals The following input terminals can be used for interrupt inputs These terminals correspond to CIO 0 02 to CIO 0 07 in I O memory e Input Terminal Block on CPU Unit with 20 I O Points Interrupt input IN5 CIO 0 05 Interrupt input IN3 CIO 0 03
491. rom Auxiliary Area or by executing a PRV a Create Read counter PV instruction m ladder m program Read counter frequency Execute a PRV instruction 2 o O 2 B S H Precautions for Correct Use A built in input cannot be used as a normal input interrupt input or quick response input if it is being used as a high speed counter input Refer to 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals for details PLC setup Click the Built in Input Tab and select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high speed counters 0 to 5 Set the counting mode reset method and input setting PLC Settings NewPLC1 3 ioj xj File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Pul 4 gt High Speed Counter 0 High Speed Counter 1 IV Use high speed counter 0 Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Counting mode Linear mode C ilar made Circular Max Count NEN Circular Max Count ce Reset Z phase software reset ha Reset EEEE EPER Input Setting Differential phase input M Input Setting Different High Speed Counter 2 High Speed Counter 3 Use high spee ite al igh speed counte Counting mode Linear mode Circular mod Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Circular Max Count 0 Circular Max Count 0 Reset oftware reset Reset Input Setting Increment pulse input Input Setting L High Speed Counter 4 High Speed Counte
492. roportional band 0 1 PIDAT C 2 D102 amp 1 Integral time 0 1 s D600 C 3 D103 amp 1 Derivative time 0 1 s gt Gin CHIPS C 4 D104 amp 100 Sampling period 1 s eo C45 D105 0002 Reverse operation bit 00 OFF PID constants updated each 2 D200 MV time a sample is taken while the input condition is ON bit 01 o C 6 D106 0595 ON 2 PID parameter a 0 65 bits 04 to 15 000 hex S C 7 D107 410000 N Input Output 13 bits bits 00 to 03 08 to 11 45 hex Integral 7 and derivative constants Time designation bits 04 to 07 9 3 TPO bed TOd 0000 hex Manipulated variable limit control No bit 12 OFF m D1 D200 MV ENSIOUS 9900 AT execution bit 15 ON AT Calculation Gain 1 00 8 C 10 D110 0005 bits 0 to 11 000 hex o D c D300 L CH EDIT y 100 00 Pulse output 2 Work Area__ Limit cycle Hysteresis 0 05 approximately 0 8 C C 40 D140 W1 00 M When autotuning is completed the content of D109 is automatically overwritten Wd l by 0000 hex and the calculated PID constants are input to D101 to 103 E i Manipulated variable range 13 bits bits 0 to 3 5 hex RSET i Input type Manipulated variable bits 4 to 7 1 hex i em always read input bits 8 to 11 3 hex Output limit 100 00 C D300 0315 A disabled bits 12 to 15 0 hex C 1 D301 amp 2000 Control cycle 20 00 s C 2 D302 amp 0 No upper output limit __ C 3 D303 amp 0 No lower out
493. rotocol Refer to Serial Communications Settings of the Option Board in section 17 2 1 CP series CPU Unit Host Link CP1E CPU Unit FINS Communication service FINS FINS UDP FINS TCP UDP Ethernet Option Board IP ICMP Ethernet Ver 2 0 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 5 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 1 5 FINS Communications i Overview of FINS Communication Service e Basic Functions FINS commands can be received from other PLCs or computers on the same Ethernet network by executing SEND 090 RECV 098 or CMND 490 instructions in the ladder diagram program This enables various control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations Ethernet E ENSA CP1E N NA type LP CPU Unit a al E Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board Ethernet Option Board Executing from the host computer FINS commands with UDP IP or TCP IP headers enables vari ous control operations such as the reading and writing of I O memory between PLCs mode changes and file memory operations For example it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communications applications such as the CX Pr
494. roximity Input reached the origin search proximity speed and the Signal is received and then Origin Input Signal is received the motor stops com the Origin Input Signal is pleting the origin search process received while the motor is Es decelerating to the origin amp search proximity speed If an 2 Origin Input Signal is 9 detected during this deceler S ation an Origin Input Signal 5 error will occur and the 5 motor will decelerate to a a stop g Positioning The Positioning Completed The Positioning Com After detecting the origin S Completed Signal from the driver is not pleted Signal from the the origin search pro a Signal connected driver is not connected cess is not completed Use this mode when you until the Positioning want to reduce the pro Completed Signal is cessing time even at the received expense of positioning Use this mode when you accuracy want high positioning accuracy There are stepping motor drivers that are equipped with a Positioning Completed Signal like a servomotor Oper ating modes 1 and 2 can be used with these stepping motor drivers The use of an error counter reset output and positioning completed input depends on the mode as described in the following table 1 0 signal Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Origin Input Connected to the open Connected to the phase Z Connected to the phase Z Signal collector output from a sen signal from the Servo Drive
495. rrors Status Bar Displays information such as the PLC name online offline status and position of the active cell Ladder Section Window Sensor01 ALARM LAMPO 1 Vi Oo MOV 021 Move D100 Temperature Sec Source word porro or aaataat tees A D200 Process Variable 3 Destination Rung Number 2 Program Address 3 Rung Header If a rung is incomplete a red line will be displayed on the right side of the rung header 4 Bus Bar 18 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations 18 2 3 Help The CX Programmer Help describes all the operations of CX Programmer It provides an introduction to the various windows and panes and describes basic operations ladder program creation and moni toring It also describes each of the instructions including operand notation and contents i Accessing CX Programmer Help Press the F1 Key from the CX Programmer The Help Window will be displayed E CX Programmer Help pa amp F Hide Punt Options Contents Index Search Favorites Rungs A rung is a single line of ladder program which contains a complete single set of logic instructions which allow power to flow from the left power bar to the right 0 Main Ladder Editor x Instructions Input F Main User Interface Screens 7 Basic Edit Options 3 Ladder Rung Edit Options Ladder Vio CX Programmer automatically creates space for a n
496. rrupt when a scheduled interrupt occurs the scheduled interrupt will not be executed until execution of the other interrupt task had been completed Even in this case internal timer is continually measured in parallel so the execution of the scheduled interrupt task will not be delayed 10 4 2 Related Auxiliary Area Words and Bits When the processing time of an interrupt task exceeds 0 1ms the processing time of the interrupt task and the task number of the interrupt with the maximum processing time can be found in the Auxiliary Area The actual processing time can also be checked Name Addresses Description Maximum A440 Contains the maximum interrupt task processing time in units of 0 1 ms Interrupt Task This value is cleared at the start of operation Processing Time Interrupt Task A441 Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maximum processing With Maximum time Here 8000 to 800F correspond to tasks 0 to 15 00 to OF hex Processing Time A441 15 will turn ON when the first interrupt occurs after the start of operation re The maximum processing time for subsequent interrupt tasks will be stored in y the rightmost digit in hexadecimal This value is cleared at the start of opera d tion 4 Total of Interrupt A442 Contains the total of interrupt task processing time in one cycle in units of 5 Task Processing 0 1ms Sets when the value is bigger than the last one once a cycle by com 3 Time in One mon processing
497. rt number 6 FINS UDP destination IP mode Enable Dynamically Disable Static Disable Only FINS TCP Server Enable Only FINS TCP Server 8 to 15 Reserved Always 0 i FINS TCP and FINS UDP Port Number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D1301 FINS TCP port number hex D1302 FINS UDP port number hex T FINS TCP protect function O 0 Of When displaying 0000 the port number is 9600 I IP Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 D1303 1 2 3 4 D1304 5 6 A wo M eo The IP address is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 hex CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 27 E suopevojiy IOWA t T uoneoo v BAY ING L v ZLE 17 Ethernet Option Board i Subnet Mask 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D1305 1 2 3 4 D1306 5 6 7 8 The Subnet mask is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 hex i IP Address Table D1308 D1309 to D1311 7 7 D1402 to D1404 Pointer of IP IP Address table 777777777777 IP address table address table records records Pointer of IP Address Table Point to the last recorder in IP address table For example if the last recorder number in IP address table is 6 the value of this word is 6 e IP Address Table Records Each IP address table record has 6 bytes The max number of records is 32 The configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the foll
498. rt of during the operation overseeing m processes A323 contains the upper four digits and e Refreshed A322 contains the lower four digits when PRV instruction is executed to read PV A324 to High speed Counter 5 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed A325 PV 5 each cycle Not The PV is cleared when operation during the Sup starts overseeing ported Kar copied diste dnd processes n 224 contains the lower 4 digi Refreshed CPU nx when PRV Unit instruction is executed to read PV A326 00 High speed Counter 4 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle Condition Met Flag high speed counter 4 is being operated during the in range comparison mode for upper overseeing 01 High speed Counter 4 ang lower limits processes Range 2 Comparison e Cleared when operation starts Refreshed Condition Met Flag Cleared when range comparison when PRV 02 High speed Counter 4 table is registered instruction is f executed to Range 3 Comparison OFF PV not in range read the Condition Met Flag ON PV in range results of 03 High speed Counter 4 range com Range 4 Comparison parison Condition Met Flag 04 High speed Counter 4 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 4 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag A 62 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices
499. rte EE enden 4 2 PRV instruction esssssee 11 12 12 11 12 34 Pulse Direction input 11 9 Pulse input methods sese 11 8 Pulse output change response time A 84 Pulse output Start Time ecceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 84 Pulse outputs tue ete ect 12 2 Application example eene 12 36 Changing the present value of the pulse output 12 33 Defining origin position eeeseesee 12 20 Functions allocation eesee 12 3 12 5 Jogging 3 Aen ee ei eal 12 17 Output patte Mises nreo aa 12 49 PEG Setup ioa e ere ees 12 4 Positioning control 12 13 Positioning control independent mode 12 51 Precautions when using pulse outputs 12 44 Reading the pulse output present value 12 34 Related Auxiliary Area 12 35 Specifications eate eene 12 12 Speed control continuous mode 12 49 Triangular control eee 12 52 Writing the ladder program 12 11 PWM instr ctlon siot rates 13 3 PWM outputs 3 5 1112 rr erede eee ep eunte 13 2 Q Quick response inputs seeene 9 2 Functions allocation seseeeeeeeee 9 4 PEG Set p s oett E RORIS 9 3 Writing the ladder program
500. s Pulse Output Wiring NLILI type Example Sinking outputs 24 VDC CP1E CPU Unit built in output terminals POWer supply 2 Servo Drive for 24 VDC input i Pulse output Direction output m Instruction pulse mode feed pulse and forward reverse signal NODOS 1 type Example Sinking outputs It is necessary to wire an external power supply to NOOS 1 type CPU Units Connect a DC24V external power supply between V and V in order to use terminals 00 and 01 on terminal block CIO 100 Note COM corresponding to CIO 100 00 and CIO 100 01 has been internally connected with V for sinking output models with V for sourcing output models Example Sinking outputs 24 VDC CP1E CPU Unit built in output terminals POWer supply H Servo Drive for 24 VDC input V S o e PULS L2 PULS AW NOTE LANG A hen Pulse output Hg SGN AW SGN dL SANG SF 3j I Direction output Instruction pulse mode feed pulse and forward reverse signal 12 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs i Connecting to OMRON Servo Drives Use the following cables to connect to an OMRON Servo Drive OMRON Servo Drive SmartStep2 Series pulse string input Cable mode O Indicates the cable length 1m or 2m R7A CPBLILILIS Smart
501. s 1 9 Origin Compensation Value 0 pps 2 147 483 648 At start of operation 0 2 147 483 647 1 10 Origin Search Acceleration Ratio 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation Rate 65 535 pulse 4 ms 1 11 Origin Search Deceleration Ratio 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation Rate 65 535 pulse 4 ms 1 12 Positioning Monitor Time 0 ms 0 ms At start of operation 9 999 ms CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 15 sbumes dmes 51d Z L I sbumes 1ndino asind 8 2 2 7 PLC Setup i Origin Return Settings Name Default Possible settings When setting is read by CPU Unit 1 Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 2 Acceleration Ratio rate 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation 65 535 pulse 4 ms 3 Deceleration rate 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation 65 535 pulse 4 ms 7 2 9 Built in AD DA Built in Analog I O Settings The settings are applicable to the NA type CPU Units with built in analog I O i AD OCH AD 1CH Analog Input Settings 1 Analog Input 0 Use Name Default Do not use Possible settings Do not use Use When setting is read by CPU Unit When power is turned ON 1 1 Range 10 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0to10V 1to5V 0to5V 0 to 20 mA 4to 20 mA When power is turned ON 1 2 Use averaging
502. s Flag P EQ CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are equal or the result of a calculation is 0 5 19 5 I O Memory 5 20 Name mcns Function Programmer Less Than Flag P_LT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less than the second or a value is below a specified range Negative Flag P_N Turned ON when the most significant bit of a result is ON Overflow Flag P_OF Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the result word s Underflow Flag P_UF Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of the result word s Greater Than or P_GE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is Equals Flag greater than or equal to the second Not Equal Flag P_NE Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are not equal Less than or Equals P_LE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less Flag than or equal to the second Using the Condition Flags The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions Their status may change after each instruction execution in a single cycle Therefore be sure to use Condition Flags on a branched output with the same execution condition immediately after an instruction to reflect the results of instruction execution Example Using Instruction A Execution Results
503. s Not changed dynamically Broadcast Option AIL 1 4 3BSD All 0 4 2BSD FINS TCP Protected Use FINS TCP Protection Function Transfer Jl Cancel I Restart l Contents Set the local IP address for the Ethernet Option Board Setting range 00 00 00 00 to 223 255 255 255 S ystem Format Default 192 168 250 1 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the Ethernet Option Board This is required if a method other than the IP address table method is used for address conversion 255 255 255 0 FINS Node Address Set the local FINS node address for the Ethernet Option Board Setting range 1 to 254 FINS UDP Port Specify the local UDP port number to be used for the FINS communica tions service The UDP port number is the number used for UDP identi fication of the application layer i e FINS communications service Setting range 1 to 65 535 9 600 FINS TCP Port Specify the local TCP port number to be used for the FINS communica tions service The TCP port number is the number used for TCP identifi cation of the application layer i e the FINS communications service in this case Setting range 1 to 65 535 Make the settings so that the TCP port number 80 for HTTP does not overlap The port number setting only has an effect on the FINS TCP server function not on the FINS TCP client function FINS TCP client port will switch from 3 000 to 65 535 automatically for connection
504. s can be performed in Continuous Mode by combining instructions i Starting a Pulse Output Acceleration Example a Procedure Operation REUS Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Output with Changing the Pulse frequency Outputs SPED Port specified speed fre eres ee pulses ata Continuous e Pulse direction speed uds in one apap Continuous P q y Target frequency Time Execution of SPED Output with Accelerating the Pulse frequency Outputs ACC Port ifi 1 H T ie aes e ds ses 2 Continuous Pulse 4 direction acceleratio equency at a Acal rion changes the e Continuous and speed fixed rate ae N frequency ata Time Execution of ACC fixed rate deceleration rate Target frequency i Changing Settings Example Procedure Operation UE Frequency changes Description application Instruction Settings Change Changing the ulesiiequendy Changes the SPED Port speedinone speed during frequency Continuous Continuous 1 Target frequency H step operation higher or J Target frequency lower of the Present frequency pulse output SPED in one step Continuous Execution of SPED Change Changing the Pulse frequency Changes the ACC or Port speed speed smoothly t frequency SPED Continuous smoothly during operation l 9etfreauency Razetti 7 from the Continuous Target frequency present fre il Prese
505. s input pulses with the CPU Unit s built in high speed counter and executes an inter rupt task when the count reaches the preset value or falls within a preset range target value or zone comparison An interrupt task between 0 and 15 can be allocated with the CTBL instruction Rotary Encoder g Present value Cyclic tasks ladder programs Interrupt Cycle END I O refresh Target value comparison The specified interrupt program can be started when the present value of the high speed counter matches a target value Present value matches set target value Time Interrupt task Ladder diagram occurs END Range comparison The specified interrupt program can be started when the present value of the high speed counter enters a set range Instruction execution condition y CTBLiinstruction executed FULL High speed counter PV High speed Counter Unit Target value 1 D Target value 2 gt 0 Time Cyclic task execution Interrupt task lexecution Counting enabled Cyclic task execution Interrupted Interrupted Interrupt task execution Cyclic task execution 11 14 Instruction execution condition A CTBL
506. s mode to NT Link 1 N set the baud rate and set the highest unit number to at least 1 2 Transfer screen data created Transfer the PLC Setup Transfer screen using the CX Designer to the NS series PT Check the communications settings in the NS series PT on the Comm Settings Tab Page in the system menu Create a project using the CX Designer and select Serial Port A or Serial Port B in the communications settings CX Designer PLC Setup 3 NS series PT System Menu 4 Set the same communications settings in the CP1E CPU Unit s PLC Setup and in the NS series PT 5 Connect the CP1E CPU Unit and external devices using the RS 232C or RS 422A 485 ports 14 2 3 PLC Setup and PT System Settings Set the parameters in the PLC Setup and the PT s System Menu i PLC Setup Click the Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box Note The built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab 73 PLC Settings NewPLC1 E 5 xi File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Builin Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Outp 4 gt Communications Settings Link Words Standard 9600 1 7 2 Custom Baud Format Mode 115200 LAE NT Link 1 N Start Code PE Link Mode Disable 6 ALL Set 00000 Master Response Timeout p Unit Number r Delay Ji
507. s position data The present value of the high speed counter is stored in the Auxiliary Area and can be used as posi tion data When it reaches preset values interrupts can be generated The count can be started and stopped Depending on the instruction the frequency speed can be read from the present value of the high speed counter Changes to PV Reading PV from Auxiliary Area Ki Encoder IET High speed counter PV or using PRV instruction stored in Auxiliary Area Reading frequency using PRV instruction m PRV Range comparison for Interrupt task upper and lower limits Phase A phase B Up down pulse inputs Reset input phase Z Etc High speed counter PV comparison Target value comparison Setting target values or range upper lower limits and starting comparison specifying interrupt task to be started BJ 11 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters 11 1 2 Flow of Operation P f 1 Enable the required high speed counters 9 PLC Setup Select the Use high speed counter Check Box for high g speed counters 0 to 5 Set the input setting counting 2 mode and reset method on the Built in Input Tab Page of the PLC Setup using the CX Programmer Terminals 00 to 06 on the CIO 0 terminal block can be used for high speed counters High speed counters 0 to 5 correspond to terminals 00 to 06 2 Read the PV f
508. s sion I O Unit A436 00 1st Unit A436 01 2nd Unit A436 02 3rd Unit A436 03 4th Unit A436 04 5th Unit A436 05 6th Unit Note CP1W TS002 TS102 AD041 DAO 41 32ER 32ET 32ET1 are each counted as two Units A437 Number of Connected Stores the number of Expansion Units 0000 to 0006 hex Retained Cleared Units and Expansion I O Units connected as a hexadecimal number Note This information is invalid only when a Too Many I O Points error has occurred CP1W TS002 TS102 AD041 DAO 41 32ER 32ET 32ET1 are each counted as two Units A440 Max Interrupt Task Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task 0000 to FFFF hex Cleared Cleared Written after Processing Time Processing Time in units of 0 1 ms the interrupt k with th Note This value is cleared when PLC uh bis operation begins ma pro ing time is exe cuted A441 Interrupt Task with Contains the task number of the inter 8000 to 800F hex Cleared Cleared Written after Max Processing Time rupt task with the maximum processing the interrupt time Hexadecimal values 8000 to task with the 800F correspond to task numbers 00 to max process OF Bit 15 is turned ON when an inter ing time is exe rupt has occurred cuted Note This value is cleared when PLC operation begins A442 Total Interrupt Task Contains the Total Interrupt Task Pro 0000 to FFFF hex Cleared Cleared Each cycle A440 Processing Time One cessing Time in one cycle in units of Cycle 0 1ms Sets when the value is bigger than the
509. s started with INI 880 0003 hex Registers a range comparison table Com parison is started with INI 880 TB First comparison table word TB is the first word of the comparison table The structure of the comparison table depends on the type of comparison being per formed For target value comparison the length of the comparison table is determined by the number of target values specified in TB The table can be between 4 and 19 words long as shown below 15 0 TB Number of target values 0001 to 6 hex 1 to 6 target values TB 1 Lower word of target value 1 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex TB 2 Upper word of target value 1 TB 3 Interrupt task number for target value 1 TB 16 Lower word of target value 6 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex TB 17 Upper word of target value 6 TB 18 Interrupt task number for target value 6 nterrupt Task Number 1514 1211 87 43 0 000 0 L Interrupt task number Direction 00 to OF hex 0 to 15 OFF Incrementing ON Decrementing A 39 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononajsu 1ndino esing jejunoc peeds uBiH 8L L Y Appendices Instruction REGISTER COMPARISON TABLE Mnemonic CTBL Variations Symbol Operand CTBL 882 P Port specifier C Control data TB First comparison table word Function For range comparison the comparison table always contains six ranges The table is 30 words
510. s that are held including the DM Holding and Counter Areas will be unsta ble The unit or device may operate unexpectedly because of unstable data Use the Battery Error Flag or other measures to stop outputs if external out puts are performed from a ladder program based on the contents of the DM Area or other I O memory areas Sufficiently check safety if I O bit status or present values are monitored in the Ladder Section Pane or present values are monitored in the Watch Pane If bits are set reset force set or force reset by inadvertently pressing a shortcut key devices connected to PLC outputs may operate incorrectly regardless of the operat ing mode CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when using a word address or symbol for the offset For example write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using an input comparison instruction or other instruction If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address the system will access data in other area and unexpected operation may occur Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor con nected to the Unit Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range does not match the sensor
511. se output 1 while CIO 0 00 is ON Counterclockwise low speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0 01 is ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 17 12 Pulse Outputs cw Target frequency 1 000Hz Pulse frequency CCW CW low speed jogging CIO 0 00 CCW low speed jogging CIO 0 01 The example shows jogging with acceleration and deceleration executed using an ACC instruction It is used for high speed jogging Clockwise high speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0 04 is ON Counterclockwise high speed jogging will be executed from pulse output 1 while CIO 0 05 is ON cw Target frequency 1 000Hz Acceleration deceleration rate 100Hz Ams Pulse frequency Acceleration deceleration rate 100Hz Ams CCW CW high speed jogging CIO 0 04 CCW high speed jogging CIO 0 05 i Preparations PLC Setup There are no settings that need to be made in the PLC Setup DM Area Settings Settings to Control Speed while Jogging DO to D1 and D10 to D15 Setting Address Data Target frequency low speed 1 000 Hz DO 03E8 D1 0000 Acceleration rate 100 Hz 4 ms D10 0064 Target frequency high speed 100 000 Hz D11 86A0 D12 0001 Acceleration deceleration rate 100 Hz 4 ms D13 0064 Not used Target frequency stop 0 Hz D14 0000 D15 0000 12 18 CP1E CPU Unit Softw
512. section describes the types of I O memory areas in a CP1E CPU Unit and the details Be sure you understand the information in the section before attempting to write ladder diagrams Refer to the CP1E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual Cat No W483 for detailed information on programming instructions 5 1 Overview of I O Memory Areas sse nans 5 2 5 1 1 VO Memory Areas ssessssele eR m 5 2 5 1 2 I O Memory Area Address Notation eese eee eee 5 5 5 1 3 l OMemory Areas 0 0 tte 5 6 5 2 VO BIS tle AAA ee it re LE LM toast iM ris 5 7 5 3 Work Area W rreren rareta naaa wees s nte oa acr ov wa Race a ROT RT UR Rn 5 8 5 4 Holding Area H liess nmm mr 5 9 5 5 Data Memory Area D sesseee mmm 5 11 5 6 TimerArea T suene Area ec ERR c aor n x x nac c cR a a in 5 13 5 7 Counter Area C eoru aar da xa Wr awe RR ra Ra a RR IRR n 5 15 5 8 Auxiliary Area A cece eee Hh mmi 5 17 5 9 Condition Flags ssseee enhn hh 5 19 5 10 Clock Pulses 2 rs oh hxc rrai ry raa wf e Rx 5 21 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 1 5 I O Memory 5 1 Overview of I O Memory Areas This section describes the I O memory areas in a CP1E CPU Unit 5 1 1 1 0 Memory Areas 5 2 Data can be read and written to I O memory from the ladder programs I O memory consists of an area for I O with external devices user areas and system areas System Areas Input b
513. ser Program Data The user programs are saved in a project file CXP for the CX Programmer along with other parame ters such as the symbol table PLC Setup data and I O memory data i Programming Languages Programs can be written using only ladder programs CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming 4 1 2 Program Capacity The maximum program capacities of the CP1E CPU Units for all ladder programs including symbol table and comments are given in the following table The total number of steps must not exceed the maximum program capacity Unit type Model numbers Program capacity ELILI S type CPU Unit CP1E ELILILILI LI 2K steps N NALILI S type CPU Unit CP1E N NALILILILI LI 8K steps It is possible to check the program size by selecting Program Memory View in the CX Programmer The size of a ladder instruction depends on the specific instruction and operands that are used Buruwepold T Y 4 1 3 Basics of Programming This section describes the basics of programming for the CP1E i Basic Concepts of Ladder Programming Instructions are executed in the order that they are stored in memory i e in the order of the mnemonic code Be sure you understand the concepts of ladder programming and write the programs in the proper order Basic Points in Creating Ladder Programs Ayoedeg wesboldg z L v Order of Ladder Program Execution When the ladder diagram is executed by t
514. set continuously Auxiliary Area Words and Bits in the CX Programmer s System defined Symbols The following table gives the Auxiliary Area bits and words pre registered in the CX Programmer s global symbol table as system defined symbols Refer to A 2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for details Word Bit Name Name in CX Programmer A200 11 First Cycle Flag P_First_Cycle A200 12 Step Flag P_Step A200 15 First Cycle Task Flag P_First_Cycle_Task A262 Maximum Cycle Time P_Max_Cycle_Time A264 Present Cycle Time P_Cycle_Time_Value A401 08 Cycle Time Too Long Flag P_Cycle_Time_Error A402 04 Battery Error Flag P_Low_Battery A500 15 Output OFF Bit P_Output_Off_Bit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 9 Condition Flags overview These flags include the flags that indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always ON and Always OFF Flags These bits are specified with symbols rather than addresses The CX Programmer treats condition flags as system defined symbols global symbols beginning with P f Notation P ER Details The Condition Flags are read only they cannot be written from instructions or from the CX Program mer The Condition Flags cannot be force set and force reset Condition flag name ER I O memory area designator P_ indicates a system symbol name Types of Condition Flags Refer to 4 6 Ladder Progra
515. sible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Product ii repair the non complying Product or iii repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non complying Product provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi ble for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron s analysis confirms that the Products were prop erly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contamina tion abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment Omron Compa nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ ments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty See http www omron247 com or contact your Omron representative for pub lished information Limitation on Liability Etc OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liabili
516. source destination or number operands Example SBS 2 4n number D destination MOV 80 Me S source 00 Operand type Specifies the address of the data to be read or a constant Source oper and Operand SUI symbol Description S Source oper Source operand other than control and data C C Control data Compound data in a source operand that has different meanings depend ing on bit status Destination Specifies the address D operand where data will be writ results ten Number Specifies a particular N With numbers it is not possible to specify an address number used in the instruction such as a subroutine number for indirect specification except for jump instruction numbers Operands are also called the first operand second operand and so on starting from the top of the instruction MOV 0 f First operand DO Second operand CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 9 suop ongsu 6uiunuei6o0Jg spuejledQ Z y 4 Understanding Programming 4 3 3 Instruction Variations The following variations are available for instructions to differentiate executing conditions and to refresh data when the instruction is executed immediate refreshing Variation Symbol Description No variation used These instructions are executed once every cycle while the execution condition is satisfied Different
517. speed Counter 0 This flag indicates whether a compari Cleared Refreshed Comparison son operation is being executed for when compari In progress Flag high speed counter 0 son operation Cleared when operation starts starts or stops OFF Stopped ON Being executed 09 High speed Counter O This flag indicates when an overflow or Cleared Refreshed Overflow Underflow underflow has occurred in the when an over Flag high speed counter 0 PV Used with flow or under the linear mode counting range only flow occurs Cleared when operation starts Cleared when PV is changed OFF Normal ON Overflow or underflow 10 High speed Counter 0 This flag indicates whether the Cleared Setting used Count Direction A 54 high speed counter 0 is currently being incremented or decremented The counter PV for the current cycle is com pared with the PV in last cycle to deter mine the direction OFF Decrementing ON Incrementing for high speed counter valid during counter operation CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 f after Status at Write Name Function Settings pn flags Words Bits mode startup timing change settings A275 00 High speed Counter 1 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle Condition Met Flag high speed counter 1 is being
518. speed counter 1 is between 25 000 and 25 500 cyclic task execution is interrupted and interrupt task 12 is executed When interrupt task 12 execution is completed execution of the interrupted cyclic task resumes WO0 00 a Fe LEUTE GT 0 03 High speed counter 1 PV in A272 and A273 uomonuisu 1dnujeju 48JUNODD peeds uDiH LL Upper limit 25 500 639C hex Lower limit 25 000 61A8 hex Counting enabled Cyclic task execution Processing interrupted Interrupt task 12 execution Cyclic task Processing Cyclic task execution interrupted execution Interrupt task 12 execution CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 25 11 High speed Counters 11 4 Related Auxiliary Area Bits and Words i Bits and Words Allocated in the Auxiliary Area High High High High High High Contents speed speed speed speed speed speed counter 0 counter 1 counter 2 counter 3 counter 4 counter 5 High speed Leftmost 4 digits A271 A273 A317 A319 A323 A325 counter PV Rightmost 4 digits A270 A272 A316 A318 A322 A324 storage words Range Range 1 Compari A274 00 A275 00 A320 00 A321 00 A326 00 A327 00 Comparison son Condition Met Condition Flag ON for Met Flags match Range 2 Compari A274 01 A275 01 A320 01 A321 01 A326 01 A327 01 son Condition Met Flag ON for match R
519. t MOV Frequency reference 50 00Hz 1388 Hex 8800 D1307 J WO0 15 4 MOV Contact Z 0000 D1306 RUN command 0 Stop MOV i Frequency reference 00 00Hz 0000 D1307 J Start and continue Modbus communications from 1 second after turning ON the power supply P_On TIM 0 0010 TO oo 4 SET A641 00 Modbus RTU Master Execution Bit A641 01 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 14 17 14 Serial Communications Flags for Modbus RTU Easy Master for Serial Option Port or Built in RS 485 Port A641 00 Execution Bit uum EE I _ A641 01 Execution Normal Flag A641 02 Execution Error Flag 1 Turn ON A641 00 Execution Bit to send command data stored starting at D1300 For details refer to DM Area Data on page 14 19 Words Bits Setting Serial Option Port D1300 00 to 07 Command Slave address 00 to F7 hex 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1301 00 to 07 Function code 08 to 15 Reserved Always 00 hex D1302 00 to 15 Number of communications data bytes 0000 to 005E hex D1303 to D1349 00 to 15 Communications data 94 bytes max l Precautions for Correct Use The Execution Bit will automatically turn OFF Do not turn OFF the bit through the ladder 2 When a command has been sent successfully A641 01 Execution Normal Flag will turn ON and the response data will be stored starting from D1350
520. t Properties in the pop up menu 2 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 3 Select Use the following IP address and then set computer s IP address by manual Set computer s IP address to 192 168 250 A The setting range of the post number A is 2 to 254 For example set to 192 168 250 2 3 Connect to the Ethernet Option Board from the Web browser using the Ethernet Option Board s default IP address http 192 168 250 1 E 00 htm EU Eimi net Option Bonne Setting Mictusall Internet Explorer a fet fxs fle dk Yew Favorites iode biel p gt gt s 4 c E 3 amp heao h Ee Please input Login Password Bay Password Lagi amp oo inem CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 15 sbumes T uonouny Bunnies 1eswoJg Q M P E Z1 17 16 17 Ethernet Option Board Input the default password ETHERNET and click the Login Button J one i Lx De Lk ve Faves Io diee Ow O df 8 2 den De C ve fenes Dk dee 5 Select Settings from the menu on the left side of the window to display the Settings Menu J OMRON Ethernet 1 4 Ing Microsoll inerme Exp a deem Hi ftoi tuos tfc hen Q O df 90S Nou CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board 6 Select 1 IP address and Protocols System to display System menu De pi ves fares ip dee z Q O D AAP o OSE MOS sias E eons ozo onm Jo sbumes T 8 After entering the correct v
521. t Software User s Manual W480 A 65 ssauppy Aq suone ojy ery faeixny z v SPJOMA Kuo peaH L 2 V Appendices Address Status Related f after Status at Write Name Function Settings Sos flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A393 O0to Built in RS 232C Port The corresponding bit will be ON when ON Communicating Retained Cleared Refreshed 07 Polled Unit Communi the built in RS 232C port is communi OFF Not communi when there is a cations Flags CP1E cating with NT Link mode or Serial PLC cating normal N NALILI S type CPU Link mode response to Unit only Bits 0 to 7 correspond to Units 0 to 7 the token OOto Built in RS 232C Port Indicates in binary the number of Retained Cleared Refreshed 15 Reception Counter bytes of data received when the built in when data is No protocol Mode RS 232C port is in no protocol mode received CP1E N NALILI S type CPU Unit only A394 00to Serial Option Port The corresponding bit will be ON when ON Communicating Retained Cleared Refreshed 07 Built in RS 485 Port the serial option port or built in RS 485 OFF Not communi when there isa Polled Unit Communi port is communicating with NT link cating normal cations Flags CP1E mode response to N30 40 60 S0 or Bits 0 to 7 correspond to Units 0 to 7 the token NA20 CPU Unit only 00to Serial Option Port
522. t Variable duty fac Normal outputs tor output block label number Pulse Direction Mode Use PWM output CIO 100 00 Normal output 0 Pulse output 0 pulse E _ 01 Normal output 1 Pulse output 1 pulse PWM output 0 02 Normal output 2 Pulse output 0 direction 03 Normal output 3 Pulse output 1 direction 04 Normal output 4 Pulse 0 Error counter reset output 05 Normal output 5 Pulse 1 Error counter reset output 06 Normal output 6 07 Normal output 7 CIO 101 00to 03 Normal output 8 to 11 z zs 04t007 Normal output 12 to 15 E CIO 102 00to 07 Normal output 16 to 23 E10 CPU Units Output terminal block Other than those shown at the right Terminal Terminal block label number Rommelouteni CIO 100 00 Normal output 0 01 Normal output 1 02 Normal output 2 03 Normal output 3 I Prohibiting Repeated Use of Output Terminal Number The output terminals 00 to 07 of CIO 100 are used for pulse outputs PWM outputs and normal outputs Therefore do not use the output terminals repeatedly For example if pulse output O direction is used then output terminal 02 is occupied so it cannot be used for normal output 2 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Quick response Inputs ISI This section describes the quick response inputs that can be used to read signals that are shorter than the cycle time 9 1 Quick response Inputs 00sec
523. t error These bits can be cleared by the CX Programmer 08 Serial Option Port These flags indicate what kind of error Bits 08 and 09 Not Retained Cleared to Bult in RS 485 Port has occurred at the serial option port used 15 Error Flags CP1E or built in RS 485 port Bit 10 ON for parity N30 40 60 SL or They are automatically turned OFF error NA20 CPU Unit only when the serial option port or built in Bit 11 ON for fram RS 485 port is restarted ing error Only bit 5 timeout error is valid in Bit 12 ON for over NT Link mode run error Serial PLC Link Polling Unit S Bit 13 ON for timeout error Rue ON fortime Serial PLC Link Polled Unit OUE ONON Bit 11 ON for framing error Bits 14 and 15 Not Bit 12 ON for overrun error used Bit 13 ON for timeout error These bits can be cleared by the CX Programmer A529 FAL FALS Number for Set a dummy FAL FALS number to 0001 to 01FF hex Retained Cleared System Error Simula use to simulate the system error using FAL FALS numbers tion FAL or FALS 1t0511 Note When FAL or FALS is executed 9000 or 0200 to and the number in A529 is the FFFF hex No same as the one specified in the FAL FALS number operand of the instruction the for system error sim System oror gvon in we ned ulation No error will and of the instruction will be gen be generated erated instead of a user defined g error A531 00 High speed Counter 0 When the reset method is set to Retaine
524. t input phase A or up pulse input input 01 Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 Counter 1 increment input phase B or pulse input down input 02 Normal input 2 Interrupt Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 Counter 0 input 2 response increment input phase A or up direction input 2 input 03 Normal input 3 Interrupt Quick Counter 1 Counter 1 input 3 response phase B or direction input 3 down input 04 Normal input 4 Interrupt Quick Counter 0 Counter 0 Counter 3 input 4 response f phase Z or reset input T increment input input 4 reset input 05 Normal input 5 Interrupt Quick Counter 1 Counter 1 3 Counter 4 input 5 response phase Z or reset input I increment input input 5 reset input 06 Normal input 6 Interrupt Quick Pulse 0 Origin input J Counter 5 input 6 response x A signal A increment input input 6 07 Normal input 7 Interrupt Quick Pulse 1 Origin input input 7 response signal input 7 08 Normal input 8 a 09 Normal input 9 10 Normal input 10 Pulse 0 Origin proximity input signal 11 Normal input 11 Pulse 1 Origin proximity input signal CIO 1 001005 Normal input 12 to 17 B B 06 to 11 Normal input 18 to 23 CIO 2 00to 11 Normal input 24 to 35 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 e E14 S or N14 CPU Units 8 Overview of Built in Functions and Allocations
525. t input input 5 input 06 High speed Normal input 6 Interrupt input 6 Quick Pulse 0 Counter 5 response Origin input signal increment input 6 input 07 Normal input 7 Interrupt input 7 Quick Pulse 1 response Origin input signal input 7 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 E14 S or N14 CPU Units Pulse input method Counting mode Input terminal block 11 High speed Counters Other functions that cannot be used atthe same time Terminal block label CIO 0 E10 CPU Units Input terminal block Pulse input method Counting mode Differential phase Pulse Quick aon i Increment M i Interrupt Origin searches for Terminal 7 x4 or up down direction Normal input h response pulse input input input input input pulse outputs 0 and 1 00 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 0 Counter 0 Counter 0 phase A Counter 0 increment or up input pulse input input 01 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 1 Counter 1 Counter 0 phase B Counter 1 increment or down input pulse input input 02 High speed High speed High speed Normal input 2 Interrupt input 2 Quick Counter 2 Counter 1 phase A Counter 0 response increment or up input direction input 2 input 03 High speed High speed Normal input 3 Interrupt input 3 Quick Pulse 0 Origin Counter 1 phase B Counter 1 response imiy i i o
526. t use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 4 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation Circular mode 4 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 4 2 Reset Software reset Software reset When power is turned ON Software reset comparing 4 3 Input Setting Increment pulse input Increment pulse input When power is turned ON 5 Use high speed counter 4 Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 5 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation Circular mode 5 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 5 2 Reset Software reset Software reset When power is turned ON Software reset comparing 5 8 Input Setting Increment pulse input Increment pulse input When power is turned ON 6 Use high speed counter 5 Do not use Do not use When power is turned ON Use 6 1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation Circular mode 6 1 1 Circular Max Count 0 0 At start of operation 4 294 967 295 6 2 Reset Software reset Software reset When power is turned ON Software reset comparing 6 3 Input Setting Increment pulse input Increment pulse input When power is turned ON i Interrupt Input Settings 1 IN2 C Name O 0 02 Default Normal Possible settings Normal Interrupt Quick When setting is read by CPU Unit When power is turned ON 2 IN3 C 0 0 03 Normal Normal Interrupt Quick When powe
527. tart motor 100 to 240 VAC O 0 02 05 07 09 04 06 08 10 CP1E N20DR A 00 01 02 03 04 COM NC NC Motor running CIO 100 00 Error stop Motor low speed output CIO 100 01 amp position output C3 CIO 100 03 indicator Example Inverter Normal stop position output CIO 100 02 indicator PLC Setup Use the following procedure to enable high speed counter 0 1 Open the PLC Settings Dialog Box 2 Click the Built in Input Tab ELEM E atas File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Builtin Input Puk mwd High Speed Counter 0 High Speed Counter 1 V Use high speed counter 0 T Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode Linear made C Circular mode Counting mode Linear mode Circular moc Circular Max Count O Circular Max Count O Reset Z phase software reset Y Z phase software resel Input Setting Differential phase input Y r High Speed Counter 2 igh speed cour Counting mode Linear mode Circular mode Counting mode Linear mode C Circular mode Circular Max Count 0 Circular Max Count 0 Reset Sof t Reset z Input Setting Increment p Input Setting pe High Speed Counter 4 High Speed Counter 5 Use high speed counter 4 I Use high speed coun
528. tartup timing change settings A270 High speed Counter 0 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed and PV 0 A271 contains the upper 4 digits and each cycle A271 A270 contains the lower 4 digits during the Cleared when operation starts overseeing processes Refreshed when PRV instruction is executed to read the PV A272 High speed Counter 1 Contains the PV of high speed counter Cleared Refreshed and PV 1 A273 contains the upper 4 digits and each cycle A273 A272 contains the lower 4 digits during the Cleared when operation starts overseeing processes Refreshed when PRV instruction is executed to read the PV A274 00 High speed Counter 0 These flags indicate whether the PV is Cleared Refreshed Range 1 Comparison within the specified ranges when each cycle Condition Met Flag high speed counter 0 is being operated during the in range comparison mode overseeing 1 High 0 ight seed Vire Cleared when operation starts PrOpesee uc uc d Cleared when range comparison Refreshed ONAN MEET AY table is registered si ae 02 High speed Counter 0 INSHUCHON IS ghrsp i OFF PV not in range executed to Range 3 Comparison ON PV in range read the Condition Met Flag results of 03 High speed Counter 0 range com Range 4 Comparison parison Condition Met Flag 04 High speed Counter 0 Range 5 Comparison Condition Met Flag 05 High speed Counter 0 Range 6 Comparison Condition Met Flag 08 High
529. ted Instructions Instructions Preceded by Output Instructions The instruction is executed only during the cycle in which the execution condition changes from OFF to ON The instruction is not executed in the following cycle Upwardly differentiated Example 1 02 I ewov instruction Executes the MOV instruction once when CIO 1 02 turns ON Input Instructions Logical Starts and Intermediate Instructions The instruction reads bit status makes comparisons tests bits or performs other types of pro cessing every cycle and will output an ON execution condition power flow when the result changes from OFF to ON The execution condition will turn OFF the next cycle suop ongsu 6uiunuei6o0Jg Upwardly differentiated instruction Example 1 03 ll ON execution condition created for one cycle when CIO 1 03 turns ON suonpuoo uonnoex3 r r e Downwardly Differentiated Instructions Instruction Preceded by Output Instructions The instruction is executed only during the cycle in which the execution condition changes from ON to OFF The instruction is not executed in the following cycle Example Downwardly LI differentiated H SET instruction Executes the SET instruction once when CIO 1 02 turns OFF Input Instructions Logical Starts and Intermediate Instructions The instruction reads bit status makes com
530. ter 5 Counting mode Linear mode C Circular made Counting mode Linear mode C Circular mode Circular Max Count Circular Max Count 0 Reset Z Reset Input Setting 7 Input Setting E p Interrupt Input IN2 Normal z ing Noma v ng Normal 7 ims Noma X ING Normal z mz Normal x ICP1E N40 Offline 11 28 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters Select the Use high speed counter 0 Check Box for high speed counter 0 Select Linear Mode for the counting mode Select Software reset comparing for the reset method ojduiex3 uone iiddy S TT Select Differential phase input for the input setting Close the PLC Settings Dialog Box o oom amp Q Restart the PLC The changes made to the PLC Setup is applied e Programming Example 1 In this example the CTBL COMPARISON TABLE LOAD instruction is used to create an interrupt when the target value is reached Slowing and stopping are executed as interrupt tasks allowing high speed processes to be executed without affecting the cycle time Ladder Program Use the CTBL instruction to execute interrupt tasks when the target positions are reached 0 02 A Motor start Reset with motor stopped The High speed Counter Reset Bit 0 is turned ON and the reset process is performed Specifies high speed counter 0 Specifies comparision with target values and starts comparison First word of comparision table Turns ON mo
531. ter Than or Equals Flag P GE 5 20 H High speed counter interrupts 11 2 11 14 Application example eeeeeee 11 27 Functions allocation 11 4 PLC Setup 11 8 11 16 Related Auxiliary Area 11 26 Specifications o caet etus 11 7 Writing the ladder program 11 6 11 16 High speed counter settings sssseeesssss 7 11 High speed counters Counting ranges sesseeeeeeene 11 10 Frequency measurement 11 13 Pulse input methods seeeeeee 11 8 Reading the present value 11 12 Reset method ne erede entes 11 11 Index 1 Holding Area unen 5 8 5 9 HostLEink iei amen RD 14 4 14 30 Host Link command eeeeeeeeess 14 4 14 30 l VO allocation recte 6 2 CPU Unit noe RS 6 3 Expansion N O Unit 6 4 Expanslor nit oit mtn ee p ees 6 6 VO memory iacente deci cers 3 3 5 2 Backup tim Cis uice m ep eint 3 7 WO memory Areas eesseeeeeee 5 6 Initializing method eeenen 3 8 l O tefreshi accen teneo te eene 3 2 WO refresh timing seeeeeenn 4 15 I O response time eseeeeeeeenneennn A 80 Immediate refresh eese 4 15 Increment pulse input eeeeeee 11 8 Indirect addressing
532. terrupt task number The specified interrupt task will be exe cuted once when the high speed counter PV is in the range Lower limit x PV x Upper limit High speed counter PV Comparison table Upper limit 1 Upper limit 1 Lowerlimit i Lower limit 1 Interrupttask 1 Comparison is executed Upper limit 2 regardless of the order of Lower limit 2 the ranges in the table Interrupttask 2 Upper limit 2 Lower limit 2 Time Interrupt task number to execute No Do pod Nog A total of 6 ranges upper and lower limits are registered in the comparison table The ranges can overlap A different interrupt task can be registered for each range The counter PV is compared with the 6 ranges once each cycle The interrupt task is executed just once when the comparison condition goes from unmet to met H Precautions for Correct Use When more than one comparison condition is met in a cycle the first interrupt task in the table will be executed in that cycle The next interrupt task in the table will be executed in the next cycle EN Additional Information The range comparison table can be used without starting an interrupt task when the comparison condition is met The range comparison function can be useful when you just want to know whether or not the high speed counter PV is within a particular range Use the Range Comparison Condition Met Flags to determine whether the high speed counter PV is
533. the Bit Field to 16 and the CH Field to 10 for this example Click the Paste Button As shown below the addresses are automatically incremented and the rung is pasted as the next rung CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 13 18 Programming Device Operations MOV 021 Addresses are automatically incremented when the rung is pasted Bits Example Incrementing by 16 Bits One Word Example CIO 0 00 is incremented to CIO 1 00 Words Example Incrementing by 10 Words Example D100 is incremented to D110 Automatic Creation of Symbol Names and I O Comments Move Source word Destination Move Source word Destination If there are symbol names or I O comments in the rung that was copied executing the Address Increment Copy Command will automatically create symbol names and I O comments Automatic Symbol Name Creation Example The symbol name LAMP Blue 1 is automatically created from the symbol name LAMP Blue Example The symbol name Sensor02 is automatically created from the symbol name Sensor01 Automatically incremented Example The symbol name ALARM 1 is automatically created from the symbol name ALARM AINA FEARIAEIAIAA SIARA Automatic I O Comment Creation Q 100 00 Acturator 0 MOV 021 Move Any number at the end of When there are no numbers in the VO s temperature sensoro an I
534. the LD instruction or other instructions Create ladder program Cyclic task or interrupt task H Precautions for Correct Use A built in input cannot be used as a quick response input if it is being used as a normal input interrupt input or high speed counter input Refer to 8 3 3 Allocating Built in Input Terminals for details i PLC Setup Click the Built in Input Tab and select Quick in the interrupt input settings x File Options Help Input constant Built in R5232C Pot Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Output 1 aje r High Speed Counter 0 High Speed Counter 1 Use high speed counter 0 Use high speed counter 1 Counting mode Linear mode C 3 Counting mode Linear mode Circul Circular Max Count ooo Circular Max Count p Reset phase sol et E Reset oftwai 7 Input Setting Differe np E Input Setting re zir 7 z High Speed Counter 2 High Speed Counter 3 Use high speed counter 2 Use high speed counter 3 Counting mode Lir es arm Counting mode le Circul Circular Max Count Circular Max Count Reset re r E Reset Input Setting Increment pulse inr r Input Setting E r High Speed Counter 4 High Speed Counter 5 ndu esuodsau j inoi T 6 Use high speed counter 4 Use high speed counter 5 Counting mode Linear c ar mod Counting mode Linear mode Circu Circular Max Count p Circular Max Count nS Reset n Reset d
535. the end code is received after the start code is received A392 12 Serial Option Port Built in ON when a communications error has occurred at the serial option port RS 485 Port or built in RS 485 port The port must be restarted when this flag turns Communications Error Flag ON ON when a timeout error overrun error framing error parity error or BCC error occurs in Modbus RTU Easy Master mode A392 13 Serial Option Port Built in ON when the serial option port or built in RS 485 port is able to send data RS 485 Port Send Ready in no protocol mode Flag No protocol Mode A392 14 Serial Option Port Built in ON when the serial option port or built in RS 485 port has completed the RS 485 Port Reception reception in no protocol mode Completed Flag When the number of bytes was specified ON when the specified No protocol Mode number of bytes is received When the end code was specified ON when the end code is received or 256 bytes are received A392 15 Serial Option Port Built in ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through the serial RS 485 Port option port or built in RS 485 port in no protocol mode Reception Overflow Flag No protocol Mode A393 00 to Built in RS 232C Port Indicates in binary the number of bytes of data received when the A393 15 Reception Counter built in RS 232C port is in no protocol mode No protocol Mode The start code and end code are not included A394 00 to Serial Option Port Built in
536. the same time as functions such as the high speed counter and pulse output without affecting the performance of those functions e Reading the High speed Counter Frequency with a PRV Instruction Execution condition 77 7 C1 Port specifier example for high speed counter input 0 fixed C2 Control data for reading frequency 10 ms sampling S First destination word 15 0 jueujeunsee u Aouanbal4 G z LL D100 Present frequency data lower bytes High speed counter frequency D101 Present frequency that was read data upper bytes l Precautions for Correct Use The frequency measurement function can be used with high speed counter 0 only e Specifications Item Specifications Number of frequency mea 1 input high speed counter 0 only surement inputs Frequency measurement High speed counter 0 range Differential phase inputs 0 to 50 kHz All other input modes 0 to 100 kHz Measurement method Execution of the PRV instruction Stored data Unit Hz Output data Differential phase input 0000 0000 to 0003 0D40 hex range All other input modes 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex f the frequency exceeds the maximum value the maximum value will be stored CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 13 11 High speed Counters 11 3 High speed Counter Interrupts High speed counter interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 11 3 1 Overview This function count
537. the set value SV is 0 to 9 999 s N for TMHH BCD and 0 to 65 535 s for TMHHX Binary The timing charts for TMHH 540 and TMHHX 552 are the same N Timer number as those given above for TIMH 015 S Set value Timer input ON IB T ITwHHxt52 i SV A 1 Completion ON j Flag OFF Timer number Set value uz Timer Input Turned OFF before Completion Flag Turns ON Timer input ON orr MER NEN SV T pe q Timer PV 0 Completion ON Flag OFF suononuasu Jejuno pue wI p L V CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 A 7 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function ACCUMULA TTIM gt m TTIM 087 TTIMX 555 operates an incrementing timer with units TIVE TIMER BCD input of 0 1 s The setting range for the set value SV is 0 to 999 9 s for N TTIM BCD and 0 to 6 553 5 s for TTIMX Binary NM Tm Reset Timer input OFF input j i N Timer number Timer PV SV PF r wre Sy Ps rmn S I i Set value i A Timing TTIMX _ _ resumes Binary Timet buy el ay inpu w maintained v 0 BAILE ber Reset Flag OFF input i N N Timer number Reset input Ore S Set value LONG TIMER TIML TIML 542 TIMLX 553 operates a decrementing timer with units BCD of 0 1 s that can tim
538. times given above DM Area D excluding words backed up to the EEPROM using the DM backup function Holding Area H Counter PVs and Completion Flags C Auxiliary Area related to clock function A dnyoeg Aiowsay O I z EN Additional Information Words in the Auxiliary Area related to clock function are unstable Others are cleared to default values Power interruption time CPU Unit Words Name Less than I O Longer than I O ECIO S type N NALILY S memory backup memory backup CPU Unit type CPU time time Unit A100 to A199 Error Log Area Retained Unstable Supported Supported A300 Error Log Pointer Supported A351 to A354 Clock Area Not supported A510 to A511 Startup Time Not supported A512 to A513 Power Interruption Time Not supported A514 Number of Power Interruptions Supported A515 to A517 Operation Start Time Not supported A518 to A520 Operation End Time Not supported A720 to A749 Power ON Clock Data 1 to 10 Not supported H Precautions for Correct Use Use an N NALILI S type CPU Unit with a Battery mounted if it is necessary to retain the con tents of the DM Area D and Holding Area A the Counter Present Values C the status of Counter Completion Flags C and the status of bits in the Auxiliary Area A related to clock functions when the power supply is turned ON after the power has been OFF for a period of time These conten
539. tion Program Interrupt tasks S1ueuoduuo eeuas uy suone iunuuuo 020 01d ON pT 14 3 3 PLC Setup Click the Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab in the PLC Settings Dialog Box Note The built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab 72 PLC Settings NewPLLI ief File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Pulse 4l Communications Settings Link Fords C Standard UGUU 1 7 2 Mode Y i afsal uone1edo Jo MOJA Z vL Custom Baud Format 5600 defaul 7 2 2 Start Code Disable C Set rr Response Timeout r Unit Number Delay NI PC Link Max PC Link Unit No james bo eu F4 F4 default PIENO Offine Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab Page Parameter Setting Communications Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected device Settings If the connected device is set to 9 600 bps two stop bits and even parity select the Custom Option set the baud rate to 9 600 and format to 7 2 E Mode Select RS 232C End Code To specify the number of bytes of received data select Received bytes and set the number of bytes from 1 to 256 To use CR LF as the end code set CR LF To set the end code to any value between 00 to FF hex set a value between 0x0000 and OxOOFF CP1E CPU Unit Software User s M
540. tion Board s system settings can be set using the Web browser of a personal computer or other devices connected with Ethernet The setting values are saved in the Ethernet Option Board s EEPROM The settings will be read from the allocated words when the power of the CP1E CPU Unit is turned ON again Web browser of Internet Explorer Ethernet Option Board Connect to the Ethernet Option Board from the Web browser using the Ethernet Option N Board s IP address http 192 168 250 1 E00 htm D M Hub E Ethernet gage tet tm CP1E N NA Dt Saag T CPU Unit Use the default settings 192 168 250 1 The setting values are saved in this example in the EEPROM Set the system settings from the Web Browser ES Additional Information If the Ethernet Option Board s IP address cannot be set by the Web browser function it can be set in the IP address display setting area D1455 and D1456 in the allocated words in the DM area CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 11 sbumes T dnjes pseog uordo 1euJeui3 1 6 71 17 Ethernet Option Board 17 3 2 Transferring Data from the CPU Unit The Ethernet Option Board can read data from the allocated words in the DM area and CIO area of the CPU Unit DM area allocation Display the initia
541. tion Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation Inverse 2 1 4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation Mode 1 Mode 2 1 5 Origin Input Signal NC NC At start of operation NO 1 6 Proximity Input Signal NC NC At start of operation NO 1 7 Search High Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 1 8 Search Proximity Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 1 9 Origin Compensation Value 0 pps 2 147 483 648 At start of operation 0 2 147 483 647 1 10 Origin Search Acceleration Ratio 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation Rate 65 535 pulse 4 ms CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 7 13 sbumes dmes 51d Z L I sbumes 0 MAINO asind 7 2 7 7 PLC Setup Name Origin Search Deceleration Ratio Rate Default 0 disabled Possible settings 1 pulse 4 ms 65 535 pulse 4 ms When setting is read by CPU Unit At start of operation Positioning Monitor Time 0 ms 9 999 ms At start of operation 1 Origin Return Settings Name Default Possible settings When setting is read by CPU Unit 1 Speed 0 pps disabled 1 pps At start of operation 100 000 pps 2 Acceleration Ratio rate 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation 65 535 pulse 4 ms 3 Deceleration rate 0 disabled 1 pulse 4 ms At start of operation 7 2 8 Pulse Output 1 Settings
542. tive data are used DO to D99 and D100 to D199 The contents of corresponding words are added starting from the specified starting point WO to the end of the areas and the sums are output to D200 to D299 starting from the specified offset from D200 For example if WO is 30 the corresponding words from D30 to D99 and D130 to D199 are added and the sums are output to D230 to D299 Set the value of WO to the offset word W1 using the MOV instruction Use the operand of the addition instruction to specify and execute DO W1 D100 W1 D200 W1 Repeat this process Increment W1 to increase the offset 100 times S OSHO sseJppy 104 sajdwexy uoyeojddy Z G p Each process is performed with an input comparison instruction lt as the execution condition so that W1 does not exceed amp 100 to make sure that the upper limit of the indirect addressing range is not exceeded Execution condition a fi MOV When execution condition a upwardly differentiated turns ON the value of WO is ii set to W1 W1 FOR Starts FOR loop Execution condition amp 100 a gt 2 x If execution condition a is ON and the value of W1 is less than amp 100 the data Wi DO W1 from the start position until D99 and amp 100 D100 W1 the data until D199 are added and the D200 W1 sum for each is output until D299 m While execution con
543. to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex 6 553 500 ms and then continues to be automat ically incremented by 1 every 100 ms Note The timer will continue to be incremented when the operating mode is switched to RUN mode Example The interval can be counted between processing A and processing B without requiring timer instructions This is achieved by calculating the dif ference between the value in AO for processing A and the value in AO for processing B The interval is counted in 100 ms units Retained Cleared Every 100 ms after power is turned ON A99 A 52 00 UM Read Protection Status Indicates whether all of the ladder pro grams in the PLC are read protected OFF UM not read protected ON UM read protected Retained Retained When protec tion is set or cleared CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related 5 z after Status at Write Name Function Settings Bene flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A100 to Error Log Area When an error has occurred the error Error code Retained Retained Refreshed A500 14 A199 code error contents and error s time Error contents when error A300 and date are stored in the Error Log Address of Aux Area occurs A400 Area Information on the 20 most word with details or recent errors can be stored 0000 hex if there is Each error record occu
544. to 23 A511 08 to A511 15 Day of month 01 to 31 Note 1 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged 2 In an ELILI S type CPU Unit or if the clock data is not set for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday January 1 2001 See Function col umn Retained See Function column Refreshed when power is turned ON CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status a after Status at Write peated Name Function Settings RT flags Words Bits mode startup timing settings change A512 Power Interruption These words contain the time at which See Function col Retained Retained Written at 0 Time the power was interrupted The con umn power A513 tents are updated every time that the interruption CP1E power is interrupted The data is N NA stored in BCD S A512 00 to A512 07 Second 00 to type 59 mi 512 08 to A512 15 Minute 00 to 59 ni only A513 00 to A513 07 Hour 00 to 23 A513 08 to A513 15 Day of month 01 to 31 Note 1 These words are not cleared at startup 2 The data will be unstable if the capacitor becomes discharged 3 In an ELILI S type CPU Unit or if the clock data is not set for an N NALILI S type CPU Unit the data will be for 1 01 01 on Sunday Ja
545. to 6 ranges can be registered with a separate upper limit lower limit and inter comparison rupt task number for each range Counter reset method CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Phase Z Software reset The high speed counter is reset when the phase Z signal goes ON while the Reset Bit A531 00 to A531 05 is ON Phase Z cannot be used for the increment pulse Software reset The high speed counter is reset when the Reset Bit 4531 00 to A531 05 is turned ON Operation can be set to stop or continue the comparison operation when the high speed counter is reset 11 7 MO9I JO O T TT suoneoyioeds L LI 11 High speed Counters 11 2 High speed Counter Inputs 11 2 1 Pulse Input Methods Settings There are four pulse input methods for high speed counters Increment pulse input Differential phase input 4x Up Down pulse input Pulse direction input I Increment Pulse Input The Increment Pulse Input counts signals on a single phase pulse input Only incrementing the count is possible in this mode Conditions for Incrementing the Count e FLL LALA LALA LAL ee ON No change 4 15 16 ON OFF _No change OFF No change Only rising edges are counted 0 1 2 s 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 i Differential Phase Input 4x The Differential Phase Input uses two phase signals phase A and phase B and increments
546. to Initial Position Setting Address Data Acceleration deceleration rate DO 01F4 500 Hz 4 ms Target frequency 10 000 Hz D1 2710 D2 0000 Positioning Control Settings for Wrapping Material Setting Address Data Acceleration rate 500 Hz 4 ms D10 01F4 Deceleration rate 500 Hz 4 ms D11 01F4 Target frequency 10 000 Hz D12 2710 D13 0000 Number of output pulses 5 000 D14 1388 pulses D15 0000 Starting frequency 0 Hz D16 0000 D17 0000 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs i Ladder Program X N Cyclic Task Program Executed at Startup 3 Enabling Input Interrupt 4 IN4 H 5 P_First Cycle m MSKS E First Cycle Flag 104 H 0 Feeding Material with Speed Control 0 00 wo 01 oe 4 WA C Material being fed Material Material feed start positioning WO 00 completed ACC 0000 Material 0100 being fed DO A280 03 wo 01 Material positioning completed Pulse Output Completed Flag Emergency Stop 0 01 INI Emergency stop switch 0000 0003 0 Program for Interrupt Task 4 Interrupt Task for Marker Sensor Input IN4 Starting interrupt feed P ON PLS2 Always ON Flag 0000 0100 D10 D16 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 43 12 Pulse Outputs 12 8 Precautions when Using Pulse Outputs 12 44 i Movement Direction when Specifying Absolut
547. to receive converted data 0 to 3 digit 0 to 3 Number of digits bytes to be converted 0 to 3 1 to 4 digits Bit to encode 0 Leftmost bit highest bit address 1 Rightmost bit lowest bit address Conversion process 0 16 to 4 bits word to digit 256 to 8 bit conversion 15 12 11 87 43 0 C 1 i l on 7 7X 7X 7 L Specifies the first digit byte o receive converted data O or 1 byte O or 1 Number of digits bytes to be converted O or 1 1 or 2bytes Bit to encode 0 Leftmost bit highest bit address 1 Rightmost bit lowest bit address Conversion process 1 256 to 8 bits 16 word range to byte CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Instruction Mnemonic Variations Symbol Operand Function ASCII CON ASC Converts 4 bit hexadecimal digits in the source word into their VERT 8 bit ASCII equivalents Di 0 S Source word s LEE A E Di Digit designator D 1st destination word HEX Number of digits n 1 ASCII l i Left 1 Right 0 D 33 31 32 DI Digit Designator Digit number 3 2 1 0 Specifies the first digit in S to be converted 0 to 3 Number of digits to be converted 0 to 3 0 1 digit 1 2 digits 2 3 digits 3 4 digits First byte of D to be used 0 Rightmost byte 1 Leftmost byte Parity 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd
548. tom Option set the baud rate to 115200 The format can be set to any value Mode Select PC Link Master Link Words Set to 10 default for the Master only 10 words default PC Link Mode Select All or Master NT PC Link Max Set the highest unit number of the connected slaves i Settings at the Polled Unit 73 PLC Settings NewPLC1 ioj xj File Options Help Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Buin Input Pulse Output 0 Pulse Outp 4 gt Communications Settings C Standard 8600 1 7 2 E Custom Baud Format 115200 72E r Start Code End Code e Disable ytes 256 Set de 00000 Link Words PC Link Slave 1 default z r Response Timeout Unit Number r Delay NTPC Link Max f PC Link Unit No P aom Tl D H aom H p default 5000ms CP1E N40 Offline Built in RS232C Port or Serial Option Port Tab Page Note The built in RS 485 port of the NLILIS1 type CPU Unit should be set in the Serial Option Port tab Parameter Communications Settings Setting Set the communications settings to the same values as the connected PLCs If the connected PLCs are set to 115 200 bps select the Custom Option set the baud rate to 115200 The format can be set to any value Mode Select PC Link Slave PC Link Unit No 14 22 Set the unit number 0 to 7
549. tor run output After motor stops the stop position is checked WO 02 100 02 The stop position is normal if the present value of the high speed counter A270 is between 3500 Normal stop ODAC hex and 3550 ODDE hex position Motor stopped 100 03 The stop position is in error if the present value of the high speed counter A270 is Error stop Greater than 3550 ODDE hex position CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 29 11 11 30 High speed Counters When the PV of the high speed counter matches target value 1 3000 interrupt task 4 is executed Interrupt task 4 SET Turns ON the motor 100 01 low speed output When the present vale of the high speed counter matches target value 2 3500 interrupt task 5 is executed Interrupt task 5 P On Turns OFF the motor run output Turns OFF the motor low speed output Turns OFF the motor stopped output DM Area Setup The comparison table for the CTBL COMPARISON TABLE LOAD instruction is set in D600 through D606 Word Value Contents D600 0002 Number of target values 2 D601 OBB8 Target value 1 3000 BB8 hex D602 0000 D603 0004 Target value 1 Interrupt task No 4 D604 ODAC Target value 2 3500 DAC hex D605 0000 D606 0005 Target value 2 Interrupt task No 5 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Pulse Outputs This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control jogging
550. trape Positioning Tm Accelerates and PULS Number of zoidal control with trapezoi Specified number of pulses decelerates atthe pulses Specified with PULS s dal accelera Target less same fixed rate and ACC Relative or tion and frequency deceleration rate stops immediately absolute N m Indepen deceleration when the specified j dent pulse spec Same rate Tins number of pulses fication used for accel Execution of ACC Outputs the specified has been output number of pulses and Port eration and then stops e Pulse deceleration Direction no starting CENO speed Independent The number of j Accelera pulses cannot tion and be changed decelera during posi tion rate tioning Target fre quency Complex Positioning BUE OPERE Accelerates and PLS2 Number of trapezoidal with trapezoi feauency RM ELE decelerates at a pulses control dal accelera um lAcceleration Seas fixed rates The e Relative or tion and n 2 4 pulse output is absolute deceleration eavency Stop frequency stopped when the pulse speci Separate gt Time specified number of fication rales used for EE UNUS me pulses Tus BEEN Port acceleration eR ent Teache output e Pulse and decelera The target position Direction tion starting specified number of Acelera speed pulses can be tonrate The number of changed during pulses can be positioning Decelera changed dur tion rate ing position Target fre ing quency Starti
551. trol Position control Pulse output naga Sooo aanan o000 0000 00000 o0 C O Operation Pattern Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position When the marker sensor input is received fixed distance positioning is performed before stopping BuipeeJ 1dnueiju enaze BuiddejM DuipeeJ z zIL 10 000 Hz 500 Hz 4ms 2710 Hex 01F4 Hex Position control 5 000 1388 hex pulses output before stopping Speed control PLS2 is executed in input interrupt task Marker sensor input 0 04 Operation 1 Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position when the Start Switch CIO 0 00 is activated 2 When the Marker Sensor Input CIO 0 04 is received the PLS2 instruction is executed in inter rupt task 4 3 Fixed distance positioning is executed with the PLS2 instruction before stopping 4 An emergency stop is executed to stop pulse output with the Emergency Stop Switch input CIO 0 01 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 41 12 12 42 Pulse Outputs i Preparations e PLC Setup Setting Enable using built in input IN4 as an interrupt input Note The interrupt input setting is read from the PLC Setup when the power supply is turned ON DM Area Settings Speed Control Settings to Feed Wrapping Material
552. ts and status cannot be retained with an ELILI S type CPU Unit CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 3 7 3 CPU Unit Operation 3 2 4 Initializing I O Memory at Startup For ELILI S type or N INALILI S type without a battery CPU Units the held areas in I O memory i e Holding Area Counter Present Values Counter Completion Flags and DM Area may be unstable when the power supply is turned ON Therefore use one of the following ways to clear these areas Clearing All Held Areas to Zero at Startup Select the Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Check Box in the PLC Settings ETE NewPLC1 joj xl File Options Help Startup CPU Settings Timings Input constant Built in RS232C Port Serial Option Port Built in Input Pu gt Startup Data Read Startup Mode Clear retained memory area HR DM CNT Program The retained memory value becomes irregular C Monitor when running without battery f Run Restore DO from backup memory Execute Process Number of CH of DM for backup al CH Stop CPU on Instruction Error noema Don t register FAL to error log E type Max 1500CH D0 D1499 N type Max 7000CH D0 D6999 Detect Low Battery Note If the Restore DO from backup memory Check Box is selected only the specified words in the DM Area will be restored from the built in EEPROM backup memory when the power supply is turned ON Initializing Specific Held Areas at St
553. tus for More than One Location The Ladder Section Window can be split This enables displaying multiple locations within a ladder pro gram so that you can check them at the same time 40m Trher Timer CD Type UD Tener rarer a Set vite 18 24 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 Programming Device Operations e Window Frames You can drag the frames in the window to display different views of the program in the Ladder Sec tion Window The window can be split into up to four sections i Monitoring Specified Addresses You can specify addresses to check bit status and word contents 7 While online select Window Watch Window from the View Menu o 2 Input an address The bit status or word contents will 8 be displayed For BOOL data 0 indi i cates OFF amp y i EN Additional Information When entering an address place a period between the word address and bit number For example to input the address of bit 04 in CIO 0 input 0 04 An address can be input by dragging it from the Ladder Section Window and dropping it into the Watch Window By dragging and dropping the header of a rung all of the addresses on that rung can be input a 3 z a o E CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 18 25 18 Programming Device Operations eee eee asuuuuu Wee Ades DAT PDUs Wake Vau Comme mm Neiti o Naci w ANN Sod oxo ats o a
554. ty of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Omron is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu Sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Export Controls Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws regulat
555. type For example amp 2 and amp 02 OOOF and F are treated as the same BIN indicates binary data BCD data is binary coded decimal CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 4 Understanding Programming 4 5 Specifying Offsets for Addresses 4 5 1 Overview When an address is specified for an instruction operand it is possible to change the specified address by specifying in brackets an offset for the specified address When the start address is CIO 0 00 and WO is Examples of amp 2 2 is added Specifying Bit resulting in CIO 0 02 Address Offsets When the start address is D100 and W1 is amp 3 3 is added resulting in D103 Examples of Specifying Word Address Offsets SesSseJppy 10 s39syo buii eds s p An offset of 12 is added to the start address of D100 resulting in D112 An offset of 4 is added to the start address of CIO 10 00 resulting in CIO 10 04 e Bit Addresses The bit address is offset by the amount specified by n number of bits from A start bit address A n MOIAJ9AQ L S F Offset Starting bit address Number of bits to offset n Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 65 43 21 0 Word Starting bit address A Start Bit Address It is possible to specify the start bit address with a bit address or with a symbol except the NUMBER data
556. u employ a professional to install your system Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise If noise prone environments are unavoid able be sure to take adequate measures against noise interference such as installing network com ponents in grounded metal cases using optical links in the system etc i Precautions on Laying Twisted pair Cable e Basic Precautions Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub and the Ethernet Option Board After laying the twisted pair cable check the connection with a 10Base T cable tester Environment Precautions The UTP cable is not shielded and the hub is designed for use in OA environments In environ ments subject to noise construct a system with shielded twisted pair STP cable and hubs suit able for an FA environment Do not lay the twisted pair cable together with high voltage lines Do not lay the twisted pair cable near devices that generate noise Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to high temperature or high humidity Do not lay the twisted pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contaminants CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board i Precaution on Hub Installation Environment Precautions Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperature or high humid
557. ual W480 Appendices A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 Instruction FUNCTIONS ssseseere nnnm A 2 A 1 1 Sequence Input Instructions lllllelee eee A 2 A 1 2 Sequence Output Instructions 00 0 6 tee A 3 A 1 3 Sequence Control Instructions A 5 A 1 4 Timer and Counter Instructions lllsseeeee een A 7 A 1 5 Comparison Instructions llsseseeee e A 10 A 1 6 Data Movement Instructions lleee e A 12 A 1 7 Data Shift Instructions 0 0 0 0 eects A 15 A 1 8 Increment Decrement Instructions llle A 17 A 1 9 Symbol Math Instructions llseeeleeeeee ren A 18 A 1 10 Conversion Instructions lsleseeeleee eee A 22 A 1 11 kogie Instructions iu cou Re A a AER RERO MP A 26 A 1 12 Special Math Instructions lille rese A 27 A 1 13 Floating point Math Instructions lel A 27 A 1 14 Table Data Processing Instructions llle A 30 A 1 15 Data Control Instructions liliis A 31 A 1 16 Subroutine Instructions lille eee A 35 A 1 17 Interrupt Control Instructions llle A 36 A 1 18 High speed Counter Pulse Output Instructions 005 A 37 A 1 19 Step Instructions pas nire ener aden aaa aae aa e aaa ATE kor ana T T A 44 A 1 20 Basic I O Unit Instructions s nanana aaan A 45 A 1 21 Serial Communications Instructions llle eee A 49 A 1 22 Clock Instructions srai renni ae aana i eae a a A D a AE ae
558. ubeig anje ez L v Appendices A 2 Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address The following table lists the data provided in the Auxiliary Area in order of the addresses of the data A 2 1 Address Words AO Bits Read only Words Name 10 ms Incrementing Free Running Timer Function This word contains the system timer used after the power is turned ON A value of 0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex 655 350 ms and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms Note The timer will continue to be incremented when the operating mode is switched to RUN mode Example The interval can be counted between processing A and processing B without requiring timer instructions This is achieved by calculating the dif ference between the value in AO for processing A and the value in AO for processing B The interval is counted in 10 ms units Settings Status after mode change Retained Status at startup Cleared Write timing Every 10 ms after power is turned ON Related flags settings A1 100 ms Incrementing Free Running Timer This word contains the system timer used after the power is turned ON A value of 0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms The value returns
559. uency SET W0 03 W0 03 0 05 Ivi ACC High speed High speed 0001 COW Sun CCW Start 0110 D13 in progress RSET W0 03 EN Additional Information The PLS2 instruction can be used to set a starting frequency or separate acceleration and decel eration rates but there are limitations on the operating range because the end point must be specified in the PLS2 instruction CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 19 12 Pulse Outputs 12 4 Defining Origin Position The CP1E CPU Units have two methods that can be used to define the origin position Origin Search The ORG instruction outputs pulses to turn the motor according to the pattern specified in the origin search parameters As the motor turns the origin search function defines the origin from the following three kinds of position input signals Origin input signal Origin proximity input signal CW limit input signal and CCW limit input signal Changing the Pulse Output PV When setting the current position as the origin execute INI to reset the pulse output PV to 0 12 4 1 Origin Searches 12 20 Origin search initial speed When the ORG instruction executes an origin search it outputs pulses to actually move the motor and defines the origin position using the input signals that indicate the origin proximity and origin positions The input signals that indicate the origin position can be received from the servomotor s built in phase Z
560. ulse O tput Start Time tox Lene DERNIER E DARE A 84 A 3 5 Pulse Output Change Response Time sssssssesesssseeeeeeennnee neret A 84 PLC Operation for Power Interruptions eene nennen A 85 ING OX qm Index 1 Revision HISEOEV cua asocia nei ub rra i di gu cod onc dul xL m X as quand Revision 1 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year or other period if specified from date of sale by OMRON OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR ST
561. ulse output 12 26 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs Operating Mode 1 with Error Counter Reset Output without Positioning Completed Input Connect the phase Z signal from the Servo Drive to the Origin Input Signal When the Origin Input Signal is received the pulse output will be stopped and the Error Counter Reset Signal will be output for about 20 to 30 ms 1 Origin Input Signal phase Z signal 0 1 i Pulse output 0 Error Counter Reset Signal 2 Approx 20 to 30 ms uonisod uibuo buluyesg p ZT Though the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received the signal will be ignored and the motor will begin decelerating from the origin search high speed to the origin search proximity speed In this operating mode the motor will stop at the Origin Input Signal after deceleration is completed Operating Mode 1 with Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse Origin Detection Method Setting 0 The Origin Input Signal can be detected immediately after the Origin Proximity Input Signal turns OFF if the deceleration time is short e g when starting from within the Origin Proximity Input Sig nal Set an Origin Proximity Input Signal dog setting that is long enough longer than the decelera tion time suomnejedo uojees uiuo G r zL Verify that the Origin Proximity Input Signal s dog setting TA is long enough longer than the deceleration time Origin Proximity Input Signal
562. umber Communicating link mode the bit corresponding to of the Polled Unit that is communicating via serial with Polled Unit the Unit performing communica option port or built in RS 485 port in NT link mode Flags tions will be ON Bits 00 to 07 corre or Serial PLC Link mode spona to unit numbers UR Bits 00 to 07 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 7 respectively respectively ON Communicating OFF Not communicating Serial Option Port A526 01 Turn ON this bit to restart serial Read write Cleared when power is turned ON Built in RS 485 Port option port or built in RS 485 port Turn ON to restart serial option port or built in RS Restart Flags 485 port Note The bit is automatically turned OFF by the system when restart processing has been completed Serial Option Port A528 08to When an error occurs at serial Read Write Cleared when power is turned ON Built in RS 485 Port A528 15 option port or built in RS 485 port When an error occurs at serial option port or built in Error Flags the corresponding error bit is turned ON Bit 8 Not used Bit 9 Not used Bit 10 Parity error Bit 11 Framing error Bit 12 Overrun error Bit 13 Timeout error Bit 14 Not used Bit 15 Not used RS 485 port the corresponding error bit is turned ON The flag is automatically turned OFF by the system when serial option port or built in RS 485 port is restarted In NT link mode only bit 13 timeout error is enab
563. unction csscsssecessecsesseeessseeessseeseeseeesssseeesseeecssonsassneescoesaseeneecssnsasseeesssnsansenesess 16 8 16 3 1 Backing Up and Restoring DM Area Data ssseeneemeneeem enn 16 8 16 3 2 Procedures ei e Rei a tre teat ee ere 16 10 16 4 Security Functions 1 eerie eren nnne nnn nnn nnn nna annia aa nnno rais asa iaa ENEAN Aaaa 16 12 16 4 1 Ladder Program Read Protection eeeseeesesseseeeeeeeenee enne nter nennen 16 12 Section 17 Ethernet Option Board 12 17 1 Features and Specifications 1 eese eee en nene nn nnn nnn nnn nnne nnn ianua nnn 17 2 17 1 1 Ethernet Option Board Function Guide esssseeneeeeneeneeen nennen 17 2 175132 Eeatures i iot e See ee EAR EST 17 8 17 1 3 SpecifiCcatlioris ihe e erem ed reri pe bie pee ti REDI duse URDU SC De ue a 17 5 17 1 4 Software Configuration rires etin e f eeepc ede de a up E eeepc 17 5 1721 25 FINS Gomimunicatio 1S irre dcdit e ederet eof et ced etras 17 6 17 1 6 Differences in version of the Ethernet Option Board 17 8 17 2 Startup Procedure eese nire nni ia aia ia i a Ro a o e o 4 o 8 17 9 17 2 1 Startup Proced re uiae te rte gee ieee oe thee Pete ode e tere Ed ais 17 9 17 3 Settings nad iiec a nw Ra CER Va RR RETE E IN KE VR daB dea ENS 17 11 17 3 1 Ethernet Option Board Setup sss nennen nennen neret ener nnn 17 11
564. under the protection 1 The IP address of FINS TCP connection No 1 is under the protection 2to4 Reserved Always 0 5 Protect setting 0 The IP address of FINS TCP connection No 2 is not under the protection 1 The IP address of FINS TCP connection No 2 is under the protection 6to15 Reserved Always 0 uogeoo v BAY WO L p 71L e FINS TCP Connection No 1 to 2 Each FINS TCP connection number has 5 bytes The configuration of the 5 bytes of data in each number is as shown in the following diagram Destination IP address Auto allocated FINS node CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 29 17 Ethernet Option Board i HTTP Server Setup Offset 15 8 7 0 D1449 HTTP Password D1452 D1453 HTTP Port number If the password for accessing the Ethernet Option Board s Web page is forgotten find out it in this area It is written in ASCII format i FINS Node Address 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O0 D1454 FINS node address hex The setting range is 0 FE hex I Using IP Address Display Setting Area 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D1455 1 2 3 4 D1456 5 6 7 8 The IP address is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 hex If the local IP address in the system setup is set to a value other than 0 0 0 0 this area will act as an IP address display area and the local IP address in the system setup will be read and stored here when the pow
565. urn ON this bit to restart the built in RS 232C port Note This bit is turned OFF automati cally when the restart processing is completed OFF to ON Restart Retained Cleared 01 Serial Option Port Bult in RS 485 Port Restart Bit CP1E N30 40 60 SL1 or NA20 CPU Unit only Turn ON this bit to restart the serial option port or built in RS 485 port Note This bit is turned OFF automati cally when the restart processing is completed OFF to ON Restart port Retained Cleared A 72 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Appendices Address Status Related a A after Status at Write Name Function Settings Ss flags Words Bits mode startup timing 5 change settings A528 00 Built in RS 232C Port These flags indicate what kind of error Bits 00 and 01 Not Retained Cleared to Bult in RS 485 Port has occurred at the built in RS 232C used 07 E a CP1E port Bit 02 ON for parity CEU Tm oan They are automatically turned OFF error nit on ni y when the built in RS 232C port is Bit 03 ON for fram restarted ing error Only bit 5 timeout error is valid in Bit 04 ON for over NT Link mode run error Serial PLC Link Polling Unit i AE Bit 05 ON for timeout error pe SEQUI Serial PLC Link Polled Unit enon Bit 03 ON for framing error Bits 06 and 07 Not Bit 04 ON for overrun error used Bit 05 ON for timeou
566. us RTU Easy Master Function for how to use the DM Area words and bits e Indirect Addressing of the DM Area Indirect addressing can be used in the DM Area There are two modes that can be used Binary mode Addressing Q9 D If a symbol is input before a DM Area address the contents of that DM Area word is treated as a hexadecimal binary address and the instruction will operate on the DM Area word at that address The entire DM Area can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 1FFF Example epo 0100 gt D256 Address actually used BCD mode Addressing D If a symbol is input before a DM Area address the content of that DM Area word is treated as a BCD address and the instruction will operate on the DM Area word at that address Only part of the DM Area DO to D8192 can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0 to 8192 Example bDo 0100 gt D100 Address actually used 5 12 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 5 I O Memory 5 6 Timer Area T i Overview The Timer Area contains Timer Completion Flags 1 bit each and timer PVs 16 bits each The Com pletion Flag is turned ON when a decrementing timer PV reaches 0 counting out or an increment ing decrementing timer PV reaches the set value or 0 I Notation T 002 Time number 002 I O memory area designator T i Range Timer numbers range from TO to T255
567. utput 3 CIO 100 03 NG output 4 CIO 100 02 10 8 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 Interrupts Programming Example Cyclic Task Li P First Cycle i i g Li Iiterrupt input 2 The MSKS instruction is used i Specifies executing 1 to specify an interrupt when the i interrupt when input input turns ON and then it is 1 turns ON used to unmask the input i interrupt Interrupt input 2 1 Li i Unmasks the input PA Aaaa Eo CT AO 0 ed 100 02 NG output sensor input 1 100 03 NG output sensor input 2 100 04 NG output sensor input 3 0 04 Reset input 5 E i d j Interrupt Task 2 0 00 NG output 2 Sensor input 1 Sensor input 1 0 01 ejdurex3 uoneoiddy z 0l NG output 3 Sensor input 2 Sensor input 2 0 02 NG output 4 Sensor input 3 Sensor input 3 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 10 9 10 Interrupts 10 3 Scheduled Interrupts Scheduled interrupts can be used with any model of CP1E CPU Unit 10 3 1 Overview Scheduled interrupts can be used to execute interrupt tasks at fixed time intervals measured by the CPU Units internal timer Minimum interval 1 ms Specified interval Interrupt task Cyclic tasks ladder programs Interrupt occurs Ladder program
568. vement is completed O W0 04 C000 W0 06 O Lift positioning Stocker full completed W0 06 W0 07 100 01 A Stocker Lower moved positioning 100 01 0 04 W0 07 OO i Stocker moving Stocker movement completed output Positioning Lower to 0 position absolute pulses W0 07 W0 09 W0 08 Lower positioning start Miri Lower positioning in progress i Lower positioning completed O PCB stored Stocker moved Stocker moving output Lower positioning Lower positioning in progress A280 03 PLS2 0000 0101 D10 D16 Wo 09 Pulse Output Completed Flag Emergency stop Pulse output stopped 0 01 Emergency stop switch Repeat limit input settings Limit inputs are allocated to external sensors using the following programming 0 05 O INI 0000 0003 Lower positioning completed A540 08 ui Built in input 0 07 E CW Limit Input Signal Flag A540 09 Built in input 12 40 O COW Limit Input Signal Flag CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 12 Pulse Outputs 12 7 2 Feeding Wrapping Material Interrupt Feeding i Specifications and Operation Feeding Wrapping Material in a Vertical Pillow Wrapper sojduiex 3 uone iiddy ZT Start switch CIO 0 00 Emergency stop switch CIO 0 01 Marker sensor input 0 04 con
569. wer word of new PV 1 NV 1 Upper word of new PV J For Pulse Output or High speed Counter Input 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex For Interrupt Input in Counter Mode 0000 0000 to 0000 FFFF hex A 37 suono ung uononnsul T Y suononasu indino esjng 4ejuno peeds ubiH 91 1 v Appendices Instruction HIGH SPEED COUNTER PV READ A 38 Mnemonic PRV Variations Symbol Operand P Port specifier C Control data D First destination word Function Reads the High speed counter PV and pulse output PV P Port Specifier 0000 hex Pulse output 0 0001 hex Pulse output 1 0010 hex High speed counter 0 0011 hex High speed counter 1 0012 hex High speed counter 2 0013 hex High speed counter 3 0014 hex High speed counter 4 0015 hex High speed counter 5 1000 hex PWM 891 output 0 C Control Data 0000 hex Reads the PV 0001 hex Reads status 0002 hex Reads range comparison results P 0000 or 0001 Reads the output fre quency of pulse output 0 or pulse output 1 C 0003 hex P 0010 Reads the frequency of high speed counter input O 00L I3 hex C 0013 hex 10 ms sampling method C 0023 hex 100 ms sampling method C 0033 hex 1 s sampling method D First Destination Word 15 0 D Lower word of PV D 1 Upper word of PV 2 word PV Pulse output PV high speed counter input
570. when disconnected 8000 hex i Analog Output Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Number of outputs 1 output Allocated 1 word CIO 190 Output signal range 0t05V 1t05V 0to 10 V or 10 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA to 10 V Allowable external output load resistance 1 kQ min 600Q max External input impedance 0 5Qmax Resolution 1 6000 Overall accuracy At 25 C 0 4 full scale 0 to 55 C 0 8 full scale D A conversion data 10 to 10 V F448 to OBB8 hex FS Other ranges 0000 to 1770 hex FS When the analog current output is 0 to 20 mA the accuracy cannot be ensured at 0 2 mA or less I Shared I O Specifications Item Specification Conversion time 2 ms point 6 ms total for 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output Isolation method P hotocoupler isolation between analog I O terminals and internal circuits No isola tion between analog I O signals 15 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 15 Analog I O Function 15 2 Analog Input and Output Signal Ranges Analog I O data is digitally converted according to the analog I O signal range as shown below Note When the input exceeds the specified range the AD converted data will be fixed at either the lower limit or upper limit 15 2 1 Analog Input Signal Ranges 10 to 10 V Input When the resolution is set to 1 6 000 the 10 to 10 V range corresponds to hexadecimal values F448 to OBB8 3 000 to 3 000 The entire data range is F31C to OCE4
571. when the power supply is turned ON DM Backup A751 11 This flag turns ON if the DM backup data could not be restored cor Restore Failed rectly If this flag turns ON data will not be read from the built in Flag EEPROM backup memory to the RAM For example if power was interrupted while data was being backed up the DM Area data would not be backed up properly and the next time power is turned ON the DM backup data will not be restored If this happens this flag will be turned ON If the number of the backed up DM area words is different from the Number of CH of DM for backup in the PLC Setup this flag will be turned ON This flag turns OFF in the following cases geq ealy Wad Puuoiseg pue dn Buyoeg 8 94 Data is successfully restored from the built in EEPROM backup memory to the RAM when the power supply is turned ON All memory is cleared CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 16 9 16 Other Functions 16 3 2 Procedure Perform the following procedure to save the DM data to the built in EEPROM backup memory during operation or while stopped 1 Check the Restore DO from backup memory Check Box in the Startup Data Read Area of the PLC Setup from the CX Programmer Also set the number of words to be backed up starting from DO in the Number of CH of DM for backup Box Transfer the PLC Setup to the CPU Unit and turn ON the power supply 2 PLC Settings NewPLC1 iolx File Options Help Startup CPU Settin
572. with PWM instruction block label number Pulse output method Normal output Pulse direction CIO 100 00 Pulse output 0 pulse Normal output 0 01 PWM output 0 Pulse output 1 pulse Normal output 1 02 Pulse output 0 direction Normal output 2 03 Pulse output 1 direction Normal output 3 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 13 3 13 PWM Outputs 13 1 2 Ladder Program Example i Specifications and Operation When the start input CIO 0 00 turns ON in this example pulses with a duty factor of 40 at a fre quency of 2 000 Hz are output from PWM output 0 When the stop input CIO 0 01 turns ON PWM output 0 is stopped Start input CIO 0 00 i Frequency Duty factor 2 000 Hz 500 us 40 200 us 1 1 D Stop input CIO 0 01 i Applicable Instructions PWM INI Preparations e PLC Setup There are no settings that need to be made in the PLC Setup DM Area Settings PWM Operand Settings DO and D1 Setting Data Frequency 2 000 0 Hz DO 4E20 Duty factor 40 0 D1 0190 Ladder Diagram 13 4 0 00 PWM Start input 1000 lt PWM output 0 Duty factor in increments of 0 1 Frequency in increments of 0 1 Hz DO Frequency setting D1 Duty factor setting 0 01 INI Stop input 1000 PWM output 0 0003 Stops pulse output D10 lt Not used CP1E CPU Unit
573. with a Dynamic Private IP Address Depending on whether or not the connection will be within the same segment either use an IP address conversion method for dynamic IP addresses in the UDP IP version of the FINS communi cations service or use the TCP IP version of the FINS communications service It is possible to connect online to a PLC using the CX Programmer from a computer serving as a temporarily connected node or a permanent DHCP client For CX Programmer FINS TCP can be used to directly connect to the PLC online i Receiving Data from OMRON PLCs using Ethernet The CP1W CIF41 Ethernet Option Board can only support receiving FINS commands from OMRON PLCs using Ethernet Note The SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions cannot be used in the CP1E CPU Unit Connecting within the Same Segment Use the UDP IP version of the FINS communications service i e FINS UDP and construct appli cations using the SEND 090 RECV 098 and CMND 490 instructions in the ladder program FINS UDP is supported by many OMRON products and is compatible with earlier Ethernet Units CS1W ETNO1 ETN11 ETN21 and CJ1W ETN11 ETN21 The protocol processing for FINS UDP is simpler than for FINS TCP giving FINS UDP certain advantages in terms of performance Another feature of FINS UDP is that it can be used for broadcasting On the other hand with FINS UDP it is necessary to provide measures such as retries for handling communications errors
574. within a registered range 11 20 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 11 High speed Counters 11 3 3 High speed Counter Interrupt Instruction Jj COMPARISON TABLE LOAD Instruction CTBL The CTBL instruction compares the PV of a high speed counter 0 to 5 to target values or ranges and executes the corresponding interrupt task 0 to 15 when the specified condition is met J4eguno peaeds ubiH TT sydnueul Execution condition C1 Port specifier EE C2 Control data messe S First comparison table word Operand Settings C1 Port specifier 0000 High speed counter 0 2 i 30005 High speed counter 5 C2 Control data 0000 Registers a target value comparison table and starts the com parison operation 0001 Registers a range comparison table and starts the comparison operation uomonuisu 1dnujeju 48JUNOD peeds uDiH LL 30002 Registers a target value comparison table 0003 Registers a range comparison table S First compari Specifies the first word address of the comparison table which is described son table word below Contents of the Comparison Table Target value Comparison Table Depending on the number of target values in the table the target value comparison table requires a continuous block of 4 to 19 words 15 0 S Number of target values 0001 to 0006 hex 1 to 6 target values S 1 Lower word of target value 1 000000
575. y CPU Unit When power is turned ON f Execute Process Settings When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Stop CPU on Instruction Error Do not stop Do not stop At start of operation Stop 2 Don tregister FAL to error log Register Register When power is turned ON Do not register 3 Do not detect Low Battery Do not detect N NALILI S type CPU Unit only 7 2 2 Timing and Interrupt Settings i Timing and Interrupt Settings Do not detect Detect Every cycle When setting is read by Name Default Possible settings CPU Unit 1 Watch Cycle Time 1s Other than initial setting any At start of operation 1ms 1 000 ms 2 Constant Cycle Time No setting variable Setting At start of operation 1ms 1 000 ms CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 sbumes dmes Jld 2 4 I sDumes HUN ndo pue dnueis Z Z 7 PLC Setup 7 2 3 Input Constant Settings I Input Constants OCH CIO 0 Name Default Possible settings No filter 0 ms 1ms 2ms 4ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms When setting is read by CPU Unit When power is turned ON 1CH O 1 2CH 02 3CH O3 4CH O4 5CH O5 6CH O6 7CH O7 ojoj NI Om a RB wo pr 8CH O8 9CH O O O O O O O O O O9 aja alo 10CH CIO 10
576. y executing pulse control instructions in the ladder program Applicable Instructions E The following instructions are used S Purpose Overview Instruction Reference Performing trapezoidal control Performs trapezoidal pulse output PLS2 PULSE Refer to 12 2 g control with independent accelera OUTPUT tion and deceleration rates The number of pulses can be set Jogging Without acceleration Performs pulse output control without SPED SPEED Refer to 12 3 and deceleration acceleration or deceleration OUTPUT m With acceleration Performs trapezoidal pulse output ACC X and deceleration control with the same acceleration ACCELERATION M and deceleration rates CONTROL 2 Performing origin searches Actually moves the motor with pulse ORG ORIGIN Refer to 12 4 4 9 outputs and defines the machine ori SEARCH 9 gin based on the Origin Proximity E Input and Origin Input signals 9 Performing origin returns Returns to the origin position from ORG ORIGIN Refer to 12 4 6 any position SEARCH Changing or reading the pulse Changes the PV of the pulse output INI MODE Refer to 12 4 7 output PV This operation defines the origin CONTROL location Reads the PV of the pulse output PRV HIGH SPEED Refer to 12 5 COUNTER PV READ Outputting to the Auxiliary Area Using the OUT Instruction The OUT instruction in the ladder program is used to write signals received from the CW limit sensor and C
577. y result in minor or moderate injury or property damage 9 Precautions for Safe Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely fj Precautions for Correct Use Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance Symbols The triangle symbol indicates precautions including warnings The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text This example indicates a precau tion for electric shock The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you must not do The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you must do The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text This example shows a general precau tion for something that you must do The triangle symbol indicates precautions including warnings The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text This example indicates a general precaution The triangle symbol indicates precautions including warnings The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text This example indicates a precau tion for hot surfaces pPpPeorb 18 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 Be sure to sufficiently confirm the safety at the destination when you transfer the program or I O memory or perform procedu
578. ying the number of retries so specify a number other than 0 17 6 CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 17 Ethernet Option Board FINS Communications Service Specifications Item Number of nodes Specification 254 Message length 552 bytes max Date length 540 bytes max FINS header 10 bytes and command code 2 bytes is not included Number of buffer 8K bytes Protocol name FINS UDP methed FINS TCP method Protocol used UDP IP TCP IP The selection of UDP IP or TCP IP is made from the FINS TCP Tab by the Web browser function Server Client Only server Cannot be used as a client Number of connections ue 2 Port number 9600 default 9600 default Can be changed Can be changed Protection No Yes Specification of client IP addresses when unit is used as a server Default local FINS node address Default local IP address 192 168 250 1 Other Items set for each UDP port Items set for each connection Server specification Remote IP address spec Server specify IP addresses of clients permitted to connect Automatic FINS node address allocation Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses Broadcast Address conversion method Internal table CP1E CPU Unit Software User s Manual W480 This is a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses remote IP addresses TCP UDP and remote port numbers

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung RL34HGIH Užívateľská príručka  Solar-Powered Refrigerator & Freezer DC50 User`s  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file